Sport | Horgászat » Rules for Classification and Construction, Ship Technology

Source: http://www.doksinet I Rules for Classification and Construction Ship Technology 1 Seagoing Ships 8 Fishing Vessels Edition 2007 Source: http://www.doksinet The following Rules come into force on October 1st , 2007 Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft Head Office Vorsetzen 35, 20459 Hamburg Phone: +49 40 36149-0 Fax: +49 40 36149-200 headoffice@gl-group.com www.gl-groupcom "General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable (see Rules for Classification and Construction, I - Ship Technology, Part 0 - Classification and Surveys). Reproduction by printing or photostatic means is only permissible with the consent of Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft. Published by: Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft, Hamburg Printed by: Gebrüder Braasch GmbH, Hamburg Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents I - Part 1 GL 2007 Chapter 8 Page 3 Table of Contents Section 1 General A. Application . 1- 1 B. Class Notations .

1- 1 C. Ambient Conditions . 1- 2 D. Definitions . 1- 2 E. Documents for Approval . 1- 4 Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability A. General . 2- 1 B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and Superstructures . 2- 2 C. Draught Marking . 2- 7 D. Intact Buoyancy . 2- 7 E. Intact Stability . 2- 7 F. Subdivision and Damage Stability . 2- 13 G. Inclining Test . 2- 15 H. Stability Information . 2- 15 Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures A. General . 3- 1 B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure . 3- 1 C. Fish Holds . 3- 6 D. Fish Tanks . 3- 8 E. Fish Processing Holds . 3- 8 F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines . 3- 8 G. Side Doors . 3- 9 Section 4 Hull Outfit A. Sheathings and Ceilings . 4- 1 B. Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes . 4- 1 C. Ventilators . 4- 2 D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish Holds . 4- 2 E. Protective Measures . 4- 3 F. Signal and Radar Masts . 4- 4 G. Life-Saving

Appliances . 4- 5 Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents Chapter 8 Page 4 Section 5 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment A. General . 5- 1 B. Equipment Numeral . 5- 1 C. Anchors . 5- 2 D. Chain Cables . 5- 3 E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables . 5- 4 F. Chain Locker . 5- 5 G. Windlasses . 5- 5 H. Mooring Equipment . 5- 6 Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances A. General . 6- 1 B. Plan Approval . 6- 2 C. Dimensioning . 6- 3 D. Construction . 6- 4 E. Accident Prevention . 6- 6 F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and Class Notation . 6- 6 Section 7 Structural Fire Protection A. General . 7- 1 B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 45 m . 7- 1 C. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with L ≥ 45 m . 7- 2 Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting A. General . 8- 1 B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces . 8- 2 C. Fire Detection . 8- 3

D. Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire and Deckwash System) . 8- 3 E. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodations and Service Spaces . 8- 4 F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Machinery Spaces . 8- 5 G. Fire Extinguishers . 8- 5 H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces other than Machinery Spaces . 8- 6 Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations A. General . 9a- 1 B. Documents for Approval . 9a- 1 C. Ambient Conditions . 9a- 1 D. Design and Construction of the Machinery Installations . 9a- 1 E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment . 9a- 3 F. Safety Equipment and Protective Measures . 9a- 4 G. Communication and Signalling Equipment . 9a- 5 H. Essential Equipment . 9a- 5 Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Section 9c A. B. C. D. E. F. Section 9d A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. Section 9e A. B. C. Chapter 8 Page 5 Internal

Combustion Engines and Air Compressors General . Documents for Approval . Crankshaft Calculation . Materials . Tests and Trials . Safety Devices . Auxiliary Systems . Starting Equipment . Control Equipment . Alarms . Engine Alignment/Seating . Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply . Air Compressors . 9b- 1 9b- 2 9b- 4 9b- 4 9b- 6 9b- 11 9b- 14 9b- 16 9b- 18 9b- 19 9b- 19 9b- 19 9b- 19 Propulsion System Main Shafting . Gears, Couplings . Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices . Steering Gear . Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes . Torsional Vibrations . 9c- 1 9c- 6 9c- 9 9c- 15 9c- 18 9c- 18 Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps General . Materials and Testing . Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines . Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps . Oil Fuel Systems . Lubricating Oil System . Seawater Cooling Systems . Fresh Water Cooling Systems . Compressed Air Lines . Exhaust Gas Lines . Bilge Systems . Equipment for the

Treatment and Storage of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues . Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes . Drinking Water System 5 . Sewage Systems . Hose Assemblies and Compensators . Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues . 9d- 1 9d- 1 9d- 6 9d- 8 9d- 13 9d- 15 9d- 17 9d- 18 9d- 19 9d- 20 9d- 20 9d- 22 9d- 23 9d- 25 9d- 26 9d- 27 9d- 27 Boilers and Pressure Vessels Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters . Pressure Vessels . Oil Firing Equipment . 9e- 1 9e- 2 9e- 2 Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents Chapter 8 Page 6 Section 10 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. Section 11a A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. Section 11b A. B. C. D. E. F. Section 11c A. B. C. D. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Refrigeration Installations General . Installation, Design and Rating . Refrigerants . Refrigerating Machinery Spaces . Refrigerant Compressors . Pressure Vessels and Apparatus . Pipes, Valves and Fittings . Fans and Pumps . Cooling Water

Supply . Safety and Monitoring Equipment . Pressure and Tightness Tests . Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, Pipes, Valves and Fittings . Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces . Temperature Monitoring Equipment for Refrigerated Spaces . Quick Freezing Installations . Spare Parts and Protective Equipment . Shipboard Testing . 10- 1 10- 2 10- 4 10- 5 10- 6 10- 7 10- 8 10- 9 10- 9 10- 9 10- 10 10- 10 10- 11 10- 12 10- 13 10- 13 10- 13 General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations General . Definitions . Documents for Approval . Fishing Vessels Documentation . Ambient Conditions . Operating Conditions . Power Supply Systems . Voltages and Frequencies . Materials and Insulation . Protection and Protective Measures . Explosion Protection . Spare Parts . 11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a11a- 1 1 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 6 8 8 11b11b11b11b11b11b- 1 1 1 3 4 4 11c11c11c11c- 1 1 2 3 Installation of Electrical Equipment General . Generators, Electrical Sources

. Storage Batteries . Power Transformers . Electronics . Switchboard . Power Supply Installations Electrical Power Demand . Main Electrical Power Supply . Emergency Electrical Power Supply . Operation of Emergency Generator in Port . Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11d A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Section 11e A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Section 11f A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Section 11g A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Section 11h A. B. C. D. Chapter 8 Page 7 Installation Protection and Power Distribution General . Emergency Three-Phase Generators . Direct Current Generators . Transformers . Storage Batteries . Power Electronics . Shore Connection . Consumer Protective Equipment . Power Distribution . 11d11d11d11d11d11d11d11d11d- 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 11e11e11e11e11e11e11e- 1 1 2 2 3 4 5 11f11f11f11f11f11f11f- 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 11g11g11g11g11g11g11g11g- 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 11h11h11h11h- 1 1 2 3 Switchgear Assemblies General . Construction . Selection of

Switchgear . Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment . Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring . Measuring Instruments Characteristics . Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear . Power Electronics General . Construction . Rating and Design . Cooling . Control and Monitoring . Protection Equipment . Tests . Power Equipment Steering Gear . Lateral Thrust Propellers . Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main Propulsion System . Auxiliary Machinery and Systems . Deck Machinery, Winches . Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters . Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers . Refrigeration Installations for Preservation of the Catch . Control, Monitoring and Vessels Safety Systems General . Machinery Control and Monitoring Installation . Vessel Control Systems . Vessels Safety Systems . Source: http://www.doksinet Table of Contents Chapter 8 Page 8 Section 11i I - Part 1 GL 2007 Lighting and Socket-Outlets A. Construction and Extent . 11i- 1 B. Lighting Installations . 11i-

1 C. Socket-Outlets . 11i- 1 Section 11j Cable Network A. Choice of Cables and Wires . 11j- 1 B. Determination of Conductor Cross-Sections . 11j- 1 C. Protection and Installation of Circuits . 11j- 2 D. Installation . 11j- 3 Section 11k Electrical Equipment A. Electrical Machinery . 11k- 1 B. Transformers and Reactance Coils . 11k- 5 C. Storage Batteries and Chargers . 11k- 6 D. Switchgear and Protection Device . 11k- 6 E. Cables and Insulated Wires . 11k- 7 F. Installation Material . 11k- 8 G. Lighting Fittings . 11k- 8 H. Electrical Heating Equipment . 11k- 9 Section 11l Tests A. General . 11l- 1 B. Examinations of Technical Documentation . 11l- 1 C. Tests in the Manufacturers Works . 11l- 1 D. Tests on Board . 11l- 2 E. Type Approvals . 11l- 3 Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation A. General . 12- 1 B. Documents for Approval . 12- 1 C. Extent, Design and Construction of the Equipment . 12- 1 D. Monitoring Equipment .

12- 2 E. Remote Control from the Navigating Bridge . 12- 3 F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing . 12- 4 G. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding . 12- 4 H. Miscellaneous . 12- 4 I. Alarm and Recording Points . 12- 4 Section 13 Spare Parts A. General . 13- 1 B. Volume of Spare Parts . 13- 1 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Index Chapter 8 Page 9 Index A Accessibility . 9a-4, 9b-1 Accessories . 6-1 Accident prevention . 6-6 Air coolers . 10-7 Air pipes . 2-5, 4-1 Air, overflow and sounding pipes . 9d-23 Alarm systems . 8-1, 8-3, 10-3, 12-2 Alarms . 9b-19, 11g-2, 11h-3 Allowable working pressures . 10-4 Aluminium . 9d-3 Ambient conditions . 1-2, 9a-1 Ammonia . 10-4 Anchor equipment . 5-1 Anchors . 5-2 Anti-heeling devices . 2-1 Automation . 12-1 Availability . 9a-2, 11c-2 B Balancing . 9c-8 Bathing . 11i-2 Batteries . 11b-1, 11c-2 Bearings . 11k-1 Bilge lines . 9d-20 Bilge suctions . 9d-20 Bilge wells . 4-3 Blade geometry . 9c-13 Blade

thickness . 9c-11 Boilers . 8-2, 9e-1, 12-4 Bollards . 5-7 Bottom ceiling . 4-1 Bow height . 2-11 Bridge . 9b-19, 9c-17, 11h-2, 12-3 Brine tanks . 10-7 Brines . 3-8 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10 Index I - Part 1 GL 2007 Bulkheads . 2-13, 7-3 Bulwarks . 4-3 Bus bars . 11e-3 C Cables . 11j-1, 11k-7, 11l-2 Call systems . 12-3 Calorifiers . 11k-9 Carbon dioxide . 10-4 Cargo fish tween decks . 4-2 Cargo spaces . 7-9, 8-6 Catch handling gear . 6-3 Ceiling at tank bulkheads . 4-1 Certification . 6-1 Chain cables . 5-3 Chain locker . 5-5 Chargers . 11k-6 Chlorodifluormethane . 10-4 Circuit breakers . 11e-2 Circuits . 11j-2 Clamp-type couplings . 9c-9 Class Notations . 1-1, 10-1, 11h-2, 12-1 Classification . 1-2 Cleats . 5-7 Closure conditions . 2-1 Closures . 2-2 Collision bulkhead . 2-13 Combustible materials . 7-1, 7-7 Communication . 9a-5, 11h-2 Compass zone . 11j-4 Compensators . 9d-27 Compressed air lines . 9d-19 Compressors . 9b-19 Computers . 11h-1 Conductors .

11e-3, 11j-1 Control . 11f-2, 11g-1, 11h-1, 11h-2, 11l-3 Control station . 9b-2, 9b-18 Coolers . 9d-18 Cooling . 11f-2, 11k-1 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Index Chapter 8 Page 11 Cooling water . 9b-15, 10-9 Corrosion protection . 9a-2 Couplings . 9c-3 Crankcase . 9b-13 Crankshafts . 9b-4 Cross-sections . 11j-1 Currents . 11j-3 D Damage control plan . 2-16 Damage stability . 2-13 Dead ship condition . 11a-3, 11c-1 Deck machinery . 11g-3 Deck openings . 4-3 Deck sheathing . 4-1 Deep-fat cooking equipment . 8-6 Definition of fishing vessels . 1-1 Definitions . 10-1, 11a-1 Defrosting . 10-11 Diesel engines . 9b-1 Dock trials . 11l-2 Documents . 1-4, 2-1, 6-2, 7-1, 8-1, 9a-1, 9b-2, 9c-1, 9d-1, 9e-1, 10-1, 11a-3, 11l-1, 12-1 Door sills . 2-2 Double bottom . 2-13 Draught marking . 2-7 Drinking water systems . 9d-26 E Earthing . 9b-11, 11a-5, 11j-4 Electrical equipment . 11b-1, 11f-1, 11k-1 Electrical installations . 11a-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . 11a-8

Electronic equipment . 11b-4, 11d-2, 11f-2, 11l-3 Emergency fire-extinguisher set . 9b-18 Emergency generating set . 9b-17, 11c-3 Emergency shut down . 11d-4 Emergency switchboards . 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-2 Engine alignment/seating . 9b-19 Environmental conditions . 1-2, 11a-4 Equipment numeral . 5-1 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 12 Index I - Part 1 GL 2007 Equivalence . 1-1, 7-1 Escape . 7-2, 7-8 Essential equipment . 9a-5, 11a-1 European regulations . 1-1 Exhaust gas pipes . 9d-20 Exhaust gas turbochargers . 9b-16 Explosion protection . 11a-8 F Fairleads . 6-5 Fans 10-9 Fasting of cables and wires . 11j-3 Filters . 9b-15, 9c-18, 9d-15 Fire detection systems . 7-8, 8-3, 11h-3, 12-2 Fire extinguishers . 8-4, 8-5 Fire extinguishing . 12-4 Fire fighting . 8-1 Fire hydrants . 8-4 Fire integrity . 7-3 Fire piping . 8-4 Fire protection . 8-1, 12-4 Fire pumps . 8-3 Fire resisting divisions . 7-5 Fish flaps . 3-6 Fish holds . 3-6, 4-2 Fish pounds . 4-3 Fish processing areas

. 3-8, 4-3 Fish tanks . 3-8, 4-3 Fishing gear . 6-1, 6-6 Fixed fire extinguishing systems . 8-5 Fixed local application fire fighting system (FWBLAFFS) . 8-5 Flammable liquid lockers . 8-6 Flange connections . 9d-8 Flange type couplings . 9c-4 Flange types . 9d-12 Flexible couplings . 9c-9 Free liquid surfaces . 2-8 Freeing ports . 2-6 Frequencies . 11a-6 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Index Chapter 8 Page 13 Fresh water cooling system . 9d-18 Fuel oil system . 9b-14 Fuel tanks . 9d-27 Fuel transfer . 9d-15 Fuels . 9a-3 Fuses . 11e-2 G Galley . 8-6 Gas bottles . 9d-29 Gears . 9c-6 Generators . 11b-1, 11c-2, 11d-1, 11e-1, 11l-2 Governors . 9b-12 Guard rails . 4-3 Guidelines . 1-1 H Hawses . 5-7 Heating . 11g-3, 11k-9 Heavy fuel oils . 9d-15 High holding power anchors . 5-2 Hose assemblies . 9d-27 Hull structures . 3-1 Hydraulic oil tanks . 9d-28 Hydraulic systems . 12-1 I Ice accretion . 2-13 Ice class . 9c-18 Inclinations . 1-2 Inlets . 2-5 Installation

protection . 11d-1 Insulation . 8-2, 10-10 Insulation resistance . 11e-3, 11f-3, 11k-3 Intact buoyancy . 2-7 Intact stability . 2-7 Internal combustion engines . 9b-1 J Jumper stays . 6-5 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 14 Index I - Part 1 GL 2007 L Lateral thrust units . 9c-15, 11g-2 Life-saving appliances . 4-5 Lifting appliances . 6-1, 6-4 Lighting . 11d-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 Loads . 6-1 Lubricating oil systems . 9b-15, 9d-15 Lubricating oil tanks . 9d-24 M Main shafting . 9c-1 Mains quality . 11a-5 Manual operation . 9a-2, 12-1 Masts . 4-4 Materials . 5-1, 7-2, 9b-4, 9c-1, 9c-6, 9c-10, 9d-1, 11a-6 Measuring instruments . 11e-2 Mechanical joints . 9d-9 Membrane type tanks for brines . 3-8 Mobility . 11j-1 Monitoring . 11e-3, 11f-2, 11h-1, 11k-7 Mooring at sea . 3-1 Mooring equipment . 5-6 Mooring winches . 5-7 Motor protection . 11e-3 Motors . 11g-1 Mounting . 9c-14, 11i-1 Movements . 1-2 N Navigation in ice . 9c-18 Noise . 9a-4 O Oil burners . 9e-2 Oil firing

equipment . 9e-2 Oil fuel systems . 9d-13 Oil residues . 9d-22, 9d-27 Oily water separating equipment . 9d-22 Openings . 2-2 Operating and maintenance instructions . 9a-3 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Index Chapter 8 Page 15 Overflow pipes . 4-1 Overflow systems . 9d-23 P Paint store . 8-6 Pelagic trawl . 6-3 Penetrations . 11j-4 Permeability . 2-1, 2-14 Pipe classes . 9d-1 Pipe connections . 9d-8 Piping systems . 9d-1 Plan approval . 6-2 Plastic pipes . 9d-2 Plug . 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 Portable fish hold divisions . 3-6 Power demand . 11c-1 Power distribution . 11d-3 Power supply systems . 11a-5, 11c-1, 11g-1 Pressure testing . 9d-5 Pressure vessels . 9e-2, 10-7 Propellers . 9c-9, 11g-2, 11h-2 Propulsion system . 9c-1 Protection against direct contact . 11a-6 Protection against foreign bodies and water . 11a-6 Protection against indirect contact . 11a-6 Protective devices . 11e-1, 11f-2, 11k-6 Protective measures . 4-3 Pumps . 9d-13, 10-9, 11g-2 Purifiers .

9d-15 Q Quick freezing installations . 10-13 R Radar masts . 4-4 Recording points . 12-4 Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) . 10-7 Refrigerating machinery spaces . 10-5 Refrigerating units . 10-2 Refrigeration installations . 10-1 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 16 Index I - Part 1 GL 2007 Register book . 6-7 Regulations . 1-1 Remote control . 12-3 Rollers . 6-5 Room flooding . 12-4 Ropes . 5-4, 6-7 Routing of cables . 11j-3 Rudder angle indication . 9c-17, 11h-2 Rudder angle limitation . 9c-17 Rules . 1-1 S Safety equipment . 9a-4, 10-9 Safety systems . 9b-10, 11d-4, 11h-1, 11h-3, 11l-3, 12-2 Saunas . 7-9 Scavenge trunks . 8-6 Sea chests . 9d-17 Sea trials . 11l-3 Sealing . 9c-2 Seawater cooling systems . 9d-17 Sewage systems . 9d-26 Shaft alignment . 9c-6 Shaft bearings . 9c-4 Shaft diameter . 9c-1 Shaft liners . 9c-3 Shielding . 9b-14 Shore connection . 11d-2 Short-circuit . 11e-2, 11g-1 Shower . 11i-2 Side doors . 3-9 Side gallows . 6-5 Side trawlers . 3-1

Sidescuttles . 2-6 Signal masts . 4-4 Skylights . 2-6 Sliding doors . 2-2 Small vessels . 1-1 Smoke spread . 7-7 Socket . 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Index Chapter 8 Page 17 Sounding devices . 2-5 Sounding pipes . 4-1, 9d-23 Spare parts . 10-13, 11a-8, 13-1 Stability . 2-1 Stability information . 2-15 Starting equipment . 9b-16 Steam boilers . 9e-1 Steering gear . 9c-15, 11g-1 Stern . 3-4 Stern gantries . 6-4 Stern ramp . 3-5 Storage batteries . 11b-1, 11d-2, 11k-6, 11l-2 Storage of liquids . 9d-27 Strengthening at the side shell . 3-1 Structural fire protection . 7-1 Subdivision . 2-13 Supply cables . 11d-3 Supply circuits . 11d-3 Switchboards . 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-1, 11l-1 Switchgear . 11d-1, 11e-2, 11g-1, 11k-6, 11l-2 T Temperature monitoring . 10-12 Tests . 6-7, 9a-2, 9b-4, 9c-6, 9c-15, 9d-5, 9e-2, 10-2, 10-9, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11g-2, 11k-1, 11l-1, 12-4 Tetrafluorethane . 10-4 Thermal oil heaters . 9e-1 Thermal oil plants . 12-4 Thermometers

. 10-10 Tooth couplings . 9c-9 Torremolinos Convention . 1-1, 11a-1 Torsional vibrations . 9c-18 Transformers . 11b-3, 11d-2, 11k-5, 11l-1 Trawl booms . 6-5 Trawling gear . 6-3 Type tests . 9b-6, 9b-7, 11l-3 V Valves . 9d-8, 10-8 Ventilation . 7-2, 7-6, 9a-4, 11b-2, 11k-1 Ventilation ducts . 11b-2 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 18 Index I - Part 1 GL 2007 Ventilators . 2-5 Vibrations . 9a-1, 11a-4 Voltages . 11a-6, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11j-2, 11k-4 W Wall thickness . 9d-6 Wall thickness groups . 9d-6, 9d-25 Warm water generators . 9e-1 Water on deck . 2-11 Watertight doors . 2-2 Weather deck . 3-6 Weathertight doors . 2-2 Winches . 6-5 Windings . 11k-1 Windlasses . 5-5, 11g-3 Windows . 2-6 Wires . 11j-1, 11k-7 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 1 B General Chapter 8 Page 1–1 Section 1 General A. Application 1. Definition of fishing vessels Fishing vessels under the terms of these Rules are seagoing ships used for commercially catching

fish, whales, seals, walrus or other living resources of the sea with a length L of 12,0 m and above. 2. – Code on Intact Stability for All Types of Ships Covered by IMO Instruments, Resolution A.749(18), as amended – Code for Safety of Fishermen and Fishing Vessels, IMO 2005 – Voluntary Guidelines for the Design, Construction and Equipment of Small Fishing Vessels, FAO/ILO/IMO 2005 Approach These Rules are based on the GL Rules defined in 3.1, summarizing in the following Sections additional aspects of fishing vessels for hull structures, machinery and electrical installations as well as automation. International requirements are included as far as they are relevant for Classification by GL. 3. Rules, guidelines and regulations 3.1 Basic GL Rules and guidelines The following GL Rules are relevant for fishing vessels: – Part 0 – Classification and Surveys – Part 1 – Seagoing Ships, Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations,

Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Chapter 4 – Automation – II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 to 3 4. Equivalence Vessels deviating from the GL Rules in their types, equipment or some of their parts may be classed, provided that their structures or equipment are found to be equivalent to the GL requirements for the respective Class. B. Class Notations 1. Type of Vessel Fishing vessels will get the descriptive Class Notation FISHING VESSEL, possibly with supplementary Notations for specification of type, if they fulfil the requirements of these Rules. Supplementary Notations for different types of fishing vessels may be: – SIDE TRAWLER Legal national regulations of the flag state have to be considered in addition by the designer and operator of fishing vessels, e.g – STERN TRAWLER – TUNA SEINER, etc. – 2. Special equipment 3.2 3.3 National regulations for vessels under German flag, e.g "Unfallverhütungsvorschriften für Unternehmen der

Seefahrt (UVV See)", as amended for fishing vessels with L < 24 m International regulations The following international regulations may apply: – – Torremolinos International Convention for the Safety of Fishing Vessels, 1977 amended by Protocol of 1993 as applied by the relevant Flag State Administration for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m (did not enter into force on an international basis) European Communities, Commission Directive 1997/70/EC of 11 December 1997 as amended by Commission Directive 2002/35/EC of 25 April 2002 for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m Special Class Notations for fishing vessels, such as – RC (Remote control of the main propulsion plant from the bridge) – RIC (Cargo refrigeration installation) – CFG (Certified fishing gear) may be assigned. The detailed requirements for these Notations are defined in the relevant Sections of these Rules. 3. Range of service In general the requirements in these Rules are valid for

unrestricted service of the fishing vessels. If only a restricted service is planned the Notations M (Restricted International Service), K (Coastal Service) or Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 1–2 Section 1 D General I - Part 1 GL 2007 W (Sheltered Water Service) will be fixed to the Character of Classification and the special requirements for these ranges of service will be applied. 4. Further details 1. The design environmental conditions for fishing vessels are contained in Table 1.2 Design environmental conditions Environmental area General operating conditions Variable requirements for unusual types and/or tasks of fishing vessels can be discussed case by case, but shall not be less than the standard design condition. Inclinations and movements of the vessel The standard design conditions for static and dynamic inclinations of fishing vessels are defined in Table 1.1 Table 1.1 Type of movement Static condition Dynamic Movement Design conditions for

vessel inclinations and movements Type of inclination Inclination athwartships: 1 Main and auxiliary machinery Other installations 2 No uncontrolled switches or functional changes Inclinations fore and aft: 1 Main and auxiliary machinery Other installations 2 Rolling: Main and auxiliary machinery Other installations 2 Pitching: Main and auxiliary machinery Other installations 2 Standard requirements for design conditions Parameters Standard requirements for design conditions Outside the vessel/air Temperature –25 °C to +45 °C 1 at atmospheric pressure 1000 mbar at relative humidity of 60 % Outside the vessel/seawater Temperature Ambient Conditions The selection, layout and arrangement of the vessels structure and all shipboard machinery shall be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation under defined standard requirements for ambient conditions. 2. Environmental conditions Table 1.2 The Character of Classification and further Notations are defined in the GL

Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2. C. 3. Density acc. to salt content Icing on ships surfaces up to 20 m above waterline up to +32 °C 2 1,025 t/m3 Outside the See Section 2, vessel/icing of E.37 surface Outside the Ice class E, E1, E2, E3, see Section 3, vessel/navigation E4 see Section 9c, E. in ice 0 °C to +45 °C 1 Inside the vessel/ Air temperature all spaces at atmospheric pressure 1000 mbar at relative humidity of up to 100% (+45 °C) Inside the vessel/ specially protected control rooms Inside the vessel/ in electrical devices with higher degree of heat dissipation Structural members/ unrestricted service Air temperature Max. relative humidity Air temperature up to +45 °C 80% 0 °C to +55 °C Maximum relative humidity 100% Air temperature +5 °C Seawater temperature 0 °C 1 Higher temperatures due to radiation and absorption heat have to be considered. GL may approve lower air temperatures for vessels designed only for service in particular

geographical areas 2 GL may approve lower limit water temperatures for vessels operating only in special geographic areas. 15° 22,5° 45° 5° 10° D. Definitions 1. Administration Administration is the responsible authority of the flag state of the fishing vessel. 30° 30° 7,5° 10° 1 Athwartships and fore and aft inclinations may occur simultaneously. 2 vessels safety equipment, e.g emergency power installations, emergency fire pumps, etc. and switch gear and electric/electronic equipment 2. Co-ordinate system For the use of these Rules the fixed, right-handed coordinate system 0, x, y, z as defined in Fig. 11 is introduced The origin of the system is situated at the aft end of the length L, at centreline and on the moulded baseline at the vessels keel. The x-axis points in longitudinal direction of the vessel positive forward, the y-axis positive to port and the z- axis positive upwards. Angular motions are considered positive in a clockwise direction about the

three axes Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 1 General D Chapter 8 Page 1–3 B z FP L/2 Q y j Y T x H L/2 Angles of motion: j = roll angle Q = pitch angle Y = yaw angle 0 Fig. 11 3. Principal dimensions 3.1 Length L Co-ordinate system and angles of motion The length L [m] on the summer load waterline from the fore side of the stem to the after side of the rudder post, or the centre of the rudder stock, if there is no rudder post. L is not to be less than 96 % and need not be greater than 97 % of the extreme length of the summer load waterline. In vessels with unusual stern and bow arrangement, the length L will be specially considered. 3.2 Forward perpendicular FP deck of a vessel with a metal shell and to the top edge of the deck for vessels with a shell of other materials. In way of effective superstructures the depth is to be measured up to the superstructure deck for determination of the vessel’s scantlings. 3.5 Draught T The

draught T [m] is the vertical distance, at the middle of the length L, from base line to a waterline which results from stability calculations according to Section 2. 4. Frame spacing a The forward perpendicular coincides with the moulded side of the plate stem on the waterline on which the length L is measured. The frame spacing a [m] will be measured from moulding edge to moulding edge of frame. 3.3 5. Breadth B The breadth B [m] is the maximum breadth of the vessel, measured to the moulded line of the frame in a vessel with a metal shell and to the outer surface of the hull in a vessel with a shell of fibre reinforced plastic or wood. 3.4 Depth H The moulded depth H [m] is the vertical distance, at the middle of the length L, from the base line to top of the deck beam at side on the uppermost continuous Displacement Δ The displacement Δ represents the mass of the vessel in metric tons at the draught T. 6. Block coefficient CB Moulded block coefficient at design

draught T, based on the length L. CB = moulded volume of displacement [ m3 ] at T L⋅B⋅T Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 1–4 Section 1 7. Vessel speeds 7.1 Speed v0 E General Expected maximum ahead speed of the vessel in calm water [kn], at the summer load waterline, when the total available continuous propulsion power is acting exclusively on the propeller. 7.2 Speed vTow Expected continuous ahead speed of the vessel [kn] at fishing operations with nets. 8. Definition of decks 8.1 Bulkhead deck Bulkhead deck is the deck up to which the watertight bulkheads are carried. 8.2 Freeboard deck Freeboard deck is the deck upon which the freeboard calculation is based. 8.3 Strength deck Strength deck is the deck or the parts of a deck which form the upper flange of the longitudinal structure. 8.4 Weather deck All free decks and parts of decks exposed to the sea are defined as weather deck. 8.5 Lower decks Starting from the first deck below the

uppermost continuous deck, the decks are defined as 2nd, 3rd, deck, etc. 8.6 Superstructure decks The superstructure decks situated immediately above the uppermost continuous deck are termed forecastle deck, bridge deck and poop deck. Superstructure decks above the bridge deck are termed 2nd, 3rd superstructure deck, etc. E. I - Part 1 GL 2007 are to be explained in a key list. All documents must show the number of the project and the name of the owner and/or shipyard. The drawings and documents have to give sufficient evidence to ensure conformity with the Rules. 3. The supporting calculations shall contain all necessary information concerning reference documents (parts of the specification, drawings, superior computations, computations for elements or neighbouring elements, following calculations). Literature used for the calculations has to be cited, important but not commonly known sources shall be added as copy. The choice of computer programs according to the "State of

the Art" is free. The programs may be checked by GL through comparative calculations with predefined test examples. A generally valid approval for a computer program is, however, not given by GL. Direct calculations may be used in the following fields: – global strength – longitudinal strength – beams and grillages – detailed strength For such calculations the computer model, the boundary condition and load cases are to be agreed upon with GL. The calculation documents are to be submitted including input and output. During the examination it may prove necessary that GL perform independent comparative calculations. 4. The detailed requirements for the documentation are defined in the different Sections. Reference is also made to the GL software for documents to be submitted (SCOL). 5. GL reserve the right to demand additional documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an assessment of the ship or essential parts thereof. This may especially be the case for

plants and equipment related to new developments and/or which are not tested on board to a sufficient extent. Documents for Approval 1. The documents to obtain Class defined in the following have to be submitted to GL in German or English language. 2. The survey of the vessels construction will be carried out on the basis of approved documents. The drawings must contain all data necessary for assessment and approval. Where deemed necessary, calculations and descriptions of the vessels elements are to be submitted. Any non-standard symbols used 6. The drawings are to be submitted in triplicate, all calculations and supporting documentation in one copy for examination at a sufficiently early date to ensure that they are approved and available to the Surveyor at the beginning of the manufacture or installation of the ship or of important components. 7. Once the documents submitted have been approved by GL they are binding on the execution of the work. Subsequent modifications and

extensions require the approval of GL before becoming effective. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 A Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 Page 2–1 Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability A. General 6. Definitions 1. Classification 6.1 Watertight Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 12 m will be assigned Class only after it has been demonstrated that the closure conditions, buoyancy, subdivision and their stability are adequate for the service intended. 2. Basic regulations The regulations to be applied besides the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, as amended (ICLL) are summarized in Section 1, A.3 The requirements and measures contained in these regulations are integrated in this Section. 3. Closure conditions A closure plan report in accordance with GL Form F 434 or F 430 for fishing vessels, showing all openings, cut-outs, passages, etc. in deck and shell “as built“, will be established by the GL

Surveyor and sent for approval to the GL Head Office. 4. Stability 4.1 Adequate intact stability means compliance with standards laid down by the relevant Administration. GL reserve the right to deviate therefrom, if required for special reasons, taking into account the fishing vessels size and type. 4.2 Evidence of approval by the competent Administration of the flag state concerned may be accepted for the purpose of Classification. 4.3 Fishing vessels with proven damage stability will be assigned the symbol , see GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2, C.24 4.4 The compliance with the requirements of this Section is to be checked by calculation and tests according to G. with the prototype, if any, or with the actual fishing vessel itself in the fully loaded, ready for use condition. Trials are to be carried out under the supervision of a GL Surveyor. Details regarding the execution of the trials are laid down by GL Head Office, see also G. 5. Documents to be

submitted for approval For the condition of drawings and documents which are necessary for approval see Section 1, E. Watertight in relation to a structural element means capable of preventing the passage of water through the structure in any direction under the head of water for which the surrounding structure is designed. 6.2 Weathertight Weathertight means that in any sea condition water will not penetrate into the fishing vessel. 6.3 Angle of heel ϕ = angle of heel relative to the y-axis [°], see also Section 1, Fig. 11 6.4 Angle of flooding Angle of flooding Θf means the angle of heel at which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses, which cannot be closed watertight, immerse. 6.5 Permeability The permeability μ of a space is the proportion of the immersed volume of that space which can be occupied by water. 6.6 Further definitions are given in Section 1, D. 7. Anti-heeling devices 7.1 If tanks are used as heeling devices, effects of maximum possible

tank moments on intact stability are to be checked. A respective proof has to be carried out for several draughts and taking maximum allowable centres of gravity resulting from the stability limit curve as a basis. 7.2 If a fishing vessel is equipped with antiheeling arrangements which may produce heeling angles of more than 10°, the GL Rules Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 11, P.14 have to be observed. 7.3 All devices have to comply with GL Rules Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 7, G. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–2 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and Superstructures 1. General 1.1 Coaming heights for openings leading below the working deck, to enclosed superstructures or to spaces considered buoyant in the stability calculation are in general to be in accordance with the requirements of this Section as far as reasonable and practicable. 1.2 Where applicable, sill

or coaming heights should comply with National Administration requirements. 1.3 Doors, hatches and ventilation ducts including their covers, lock tumblers and securing arrangements must be adequately dimensioned. Details are to be submitted for approval. 1.4 All doors and escape hatches must be operable from both sides. 1.5 For ships other than fishing vessels, e.g vessels processing their catch, with L ≥ 24 m the requirements of the International Convention on Load Lines (ICLL) have to be observed. 2. Doors 2.1 Watertight doors 2.11 The number of openings in watertight bulkheads, as required by F.1, shall be reduced to the minimum compatible with the general requirements and operational needs of the fishing vessel. The openings shall be fitted with watertight closing appliances to the satisfaction of the Administration, see Table 2.1 Watertight doors shall be of equivalent strength to the adjacent unpierced structure. 2.12 Fishing vessels with L < 45 m Doors may be of the

hinged type, which shall be capable of being operated locally from each side of the door and shall normally be kept close at sea. A notice shall be attached to the door on each side to state that the door shall be kept closed at sea. 2.13 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m Doors shall be of the sliding type in: 2.14 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Sliding doors 2.141 Sliding doors shall be capable of being operated when the fishing vessel is listed up to 15° either way. 2.142 Sliding doors, whether manually operated or otherwise, shall be capable of being operated locally from each side of the door. In fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m these doors shall also be capable of being operated by remote control from an accessible position above the working deck, except when the doors are fitted in crew accommodation spaces. 2.143 Means shall be provided at remote operating positions to indicate when a sliding door is open or closed. 2.2 Weathertight doors 2.21 All access openings in bulkheads of

enclosed superstructures and other outer structures through which water could enter and endanger the fishing vessel, shall be fitted with doors permanently attached to the bulkhead, framed and stiffened so that the whole structure is of equivalent strength to the unpierced structure, and weathertight when closed, see Table 2.1 2.22 The means of securing the doors weathertight shall consist of gaskets and clamping devices or other equivalent means and shall be permanently attached to the bulkhead or to the doors themselves, and shall be so arranged that they can be operated from each side of the bulkhead. The Administration may, without prejudice to the safety of the crew, permit the doors to be opened from one side only for freezer rooms, provided that a suitable alarm device is fitted to prevent persons being trapped in those rooms. 2.23 Height of door sills 2.231 The height above deck of sills in those doorways, in companionways, erections and machinery casings which give direct

access to parts of the deck exposed to the weather and sea shall be at least according to Table 2.2, first column The heights of sills on superstructure decks shall be at least according to Table 2.2, second column – spaces where it is intended to open them at sea and if located with their sills below the deepest operating waterline, unless GL considers it to be impracticable or unnecessary taking into account the type and operation of the fishing vessel 2.232 Where operating experience has shown justification and on approval of the Administration, the heights on the working deck, except in the doorways giving direct access to machinery spaces, may be reduced according to Table 2.2, third column – the lower part of a machinery space where there is access from it to a shaft tunnel Where operating experience has shown justification and on approval of the Administration, the height of sills on superstructure decks may be reduced to values not less than defined in Table 2.2,

forth column Otherwise the doors shall be of the hinged type. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Table 2.1 Requirements for openings and closures B Chapter 8 Page 2–3 Closure requirements Closure components Working deck Superstructure deck Doors in watertight bulkheads Working deck for special conditions Superstructure deck for special conditions watertight Doors in enclosed superstructures weathertight Hatchways weathertight Openings for fishing operations weathertight watertight 1 Ventilator coamings weathertight open 1 Air pipes weathertight weathertight Sidescuttles to spaces below working deck, to spaces within closed structures watertight Windows watertight 1 for coaming heights see Table 2.2 Table 2.2 Minimum coaming heights Height requirements [mm] Closure components Working deck Superstructure deck Working deck for special conditions Superstructure deck for special

conditions Door sills L = 12 m L ≥ 24 m 12 m < L < 24 m 150 300 300 150 150 1 600 300 380 1 linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation Hatchways L = 12 m L ≥ 24 m 12 m < L < 24 m 300 reduced 2 300 reduced 2 2 600 reduced reduced 2 300 linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation Openings for fish operations acc. to hatchways flush possible 3 Ventilator coamings 12 m ≤ L < 24 m 24 m ≤ L < 45 m L ≥ 45 m 760 760 900 450 450 760 2500 4 3400 4 4500 4 1000 4 1700 4 2300 4 Air pipes 760 450 reduced 5 reduced 5 Sidescuttles, windows 500 above deepest waterline < 1000 fixed type sidescuttles 1 for doorways not giving access to machinery spaces, if operation experience justifies and with approval by the Administration 2 for covers other than wood, if operation experience has shown justification and with approval by the Administration 3 where essential for

fishing operations, manhole cover, etc. may be fitted 4 closing appliances need not be fitted 5 reduction may be accepted by the Administration to avoid interference with fishing operations Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–4 3. Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Openings for fishing operations 3.1 Deck openings which may be open during fishing operations shall normally be arranged near the vessel’s centreline. However, the Administration may approve different arrangements if satisfied that the safety of the vessel will not be impaired. 3.2 Fish flaps on stern trawlers shall be power operated and capable of being controlled from any position which provides an unobstructed view of the operation of the flaps. 3.3 Where it is essential for fishing operations, flush deck scuttles of the screw, bayonet or equivalent type and manholes may be fitted, provided these are capable of being closed watertight and such devices shall be permanently

attached to the adjacent structure. Having regard to the size and disposition of the openings and the design of the closing devices, metal-to-metal closures may be fitted if the Administration is satisfied that they are effectively watertight. 3.4 Openings other than hatchways, like manholes and flush scuttles in the working or superstructure deck shall be protected by enclosed structures fitted with weathertight doors or their equivalent. Companionways shall be situated as close as practicable to the centreline of the vessel. 4. Hatchway openings and hatch covers 4.1 General 4.11 All hatchways shall be provided with covers. For vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m hatchways which may be opened during fishing operation shall normally be arranged near the vessels centreline. 4.12 The height above deck of the hatchway coamings shall be as defined in 2.231 4.2 Wooden hatchway covers 4.21 The use of wooden hatchway covers is generally not recommended in view of the difficulty of rapidly

securing their weathertightness. However, where fitted they shall be capable of being secured weathertight. 4.22 The finished thickness of wood hatchway covers shall include an allowance for abrasion due to rough handling. In any case, the finished thickness of these covers shall be at least 4 mm for each 100 mm of unsupported span subject to a minimum of 40 mm and the width of their bearing surface shall be at least 65 mm. 4.23 Arrangements for securing wood hatchway covers weathertight shall be provided to the satisfaction of the Administration. 4.3 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Hatchway covers other than wood 4.31 Where operating experience has shown justification, and on the approval by the Administration, the height of coamings according to 2.231 may be reduced, or the coamings omitted entirely, provided that the safety of vessels is not thereby impaired. In this case, the hatchway openings shall be kept as small as practicable and covers be permanently attached by hinges or equivalent

means and be capable of being rapidly closed and battened down, or by equally effective arrangements to the satisfaction of the Administration. 4.32 For the purpose of strength calculations, it shall be assumed that hatchway covers are subjected to the weight of cargo intended to be carried on them or to the following static loads, whichever is the greater: – 10,0 kN/m2 for vessels with L < 24 m – 17,0 kN/m2 for vessels with L ≥ 100 m – linear interpolation for values of L in between The Administration may reduce the loads to not less than 75 % of the above values for covers to hatchways situated on the superstructure deck in a position abaft a point located 0,25 L from the forward perpendicular. 4.33 Where the covers are made of normal hull structural steel, the maximum stress calculated according to 4.32 multiplied by 4,25 shall not exceed the minimum ultimate strength of the material. Under these loads the deflections shall not be more than 0,0028 times the span.

4.34 Covers made of materials other than normal hull structural steel shall be at least of equivalent strength to those of normal hull structural steel and their construction shall be of sufficient stiffness ensuring weathertightness under the loads specified in 4.32 4.35 Hatch covers shall be fitted with clamping devices and gaskets sufficient to ensure weathertightness or other equivalent arrangements to the satisfaction of the Administration. 5. Machinery space openings 5.1 Machinery space openings shall be framed and enclosed by casings of a strength equivalent to the adjacent superstructure. External access openings therein shall be fitted with doors complying with the requirements of Table 2.2 or with hatch covers other than wood complying with the provisions of 4.3 5.2 Openings other than access openings shall be fitted with covers of equivalent strength to the unpierced structure, permanently attached thereto and capable of being closed weathertight. Source:

http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 6. Ventilators 6.1 General B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Ventilators shall have coamings of equivalent strength to the adjacent structure and shall be capable of being closed weathertight by closing appliances permanently attached to the ventilators or adjacent structure. Where the coaming of any ventilator exceeds 900 mm in height it shall be specially supported. 6.2 Fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m 6.21 Ventilators shall be arranged as close to the vessels centreline as possible and, where practicable, shall extend through the top of a deck erection or companion way. 6.22 On the working deck the height above deck of coamings of ventilators other than machinery space ventilators shall not be less than 760 mm and on superstructure decks not less than 450 mm. When the height of such ventilators may interfere with the working of the vessel their coaming heights may be reduced to the satisfaction of the

competent Authority, see Table 2.2 6.23 The height above deck of machinery space ventilator openings shall be to the satisfaction of the competent Authority. 6.24 Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend more than 2,5 m above the working deck or more than 1,0 m above a deckhouse top or superstructure deck. 6.3 Fishing vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m 6.31 The height above deck of ventilator coamings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings, shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450 mm on superstructure decks, see Table 2.2 6.32 Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend to more than 3,4 m above the working deck or more than 1,7 m above the superstructure deck. 6.4 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m 6.41 The height above deck of ventilator coamings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings, shall be at least 900 mm on the working deck and at least 760 mm on the

superstructure deck, see Table 2.2 6.42 Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend to more than 4,5 m above the working deck or more than 2,3 m above the superstructure deck. 6.5 Chapter 8 Page 2–5 Machinery space ventilators If the Administration is satisfied that it is unlikely that water will enter the vessel through machinery space ventilators, closing appliances to such ventilators may be omitted. 7. Air pipes 7.1 The height of air pipes above deck to the point where the water may have access below shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450 mm on the superstructure deck. The Administration may accept reduction of the height of an air pipe to avoid interference with the fishing operations, see Table 2.2 7.2 Where air pipes to tanks and void spaces below deck extend above the working or the superstructure decks, the exposed parts of the pipes shall be of strength equivalent to the adjacent structures and fitted with

appropriate protection. Openings of air pipes shall be provided with means of closing, permanently attached to the pipe or the adjacent structure. 8. Sounding devices for fishing vessels with L ≥ 24 m 8.1 Sounding devices shall be fitted for: – all tanks and cofferdams – bilges of those compartments which are not readily accessible at all times during the voyage 8.2 Where sounding pipes are fitted, their upper ends shall be extended to a readily accessible position and, where practicable, above the working deck. Their openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing. Sounding pipes which are not extended above the working deck shall be fitted with automatic self-closing devices. 9. Inlets and discharges 9.1 Discharges led through the shell either from spaces below the working deck or from enclosed superstructures or deckhouses on the working deck fitted with doors complying with the requirements of 2.2 shall be fitted with efficient and accessible

means for preventing water from passing inboard. Normally each separate discharge shall have an automatic non-return valve with a positive means of closing from a readily accessible position. Such a valve is not required if the Administration considers that the entry of water into the vessel through the opening is not likely to lead to dangerous flooding and that the thickness of the piping is sufficient. The means for operating the positive action valve shall be provided with an indicator showing whether the valve is open or closed. For fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m the open inboard end of any discharge system shall be above the deepest operating waterline at an angle of heel satisfactory to the Administration. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–6 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability 9.2 In (manned) machinery spaces main and auxiliary sea inlets and discharges essential for the operation of machinery may be controlled locally. The

controls shall be accessible and shall be provided with indicators showing whether the valves are open or closed. For fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m suitable warning devices shall be incorporated to indicate leakage of water into the space. 9.3 Fittings attached to the shell and the valves required by these Rules shall be of steel, bronze or other approved ductile material. All pipes between the shell and the valves shall be of steel, except that in vessels constructed of material other than steel, other suitable materials may be approved by the Administration. 11. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Freeing ports 11.1 Where bulwarks on weather parts of the working deck form wells, the minimum freeing port area A on each side of the vessel for each well on the working deck shall be determined in relation to the length and the bulwark height in the well as follows: A = K⋅l l [m2] = length of well [m] = not to be taken as greater than 70 % of L K = 0,035 for vessels with L = 12 m =

0,07 for vessels with L ≥ 24 m = to be defined by linear interpolation for lengths in between 9.4 Scuppers sufficient in number and size to provide effective drainage of water are to be fitted in the weather deck and in the working deck within weathertight closed superstructures and deckhouses. Decks within closed superstructures are to be drained to the bilge. Scuppers from superstructures and deckhouses which are not closed weathertight are to be led outside. Where the bulwark is more than 1,2 m in average height, the required area A shall be increased by 0,004 m2 per metre length of the well and for each 100 mm difference in height. 10. 11.2 The freeing port area calculated according to 11.1 shall be increased where the Administration considers that the vessels sheer is not sufficient to ensure that the deck is rapidly and effectively freed of water. Sidescuttles, windows, skylights 10.1 In general all windows have to be built in accordance with ISO standards 1751 (side

scuttles) and/or 3903 (rectangular windows) respectively and are to be tested accordingly in the presence of a GL Surveyor. 10.2 For all fishing vessels sidescuttles to spaces below the working deck and to spaces within the enclosed structure on that deck shall be fitted with hinged deadlights capable of being closed watertight. 10.21 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m deadlights or a suitable number of storm shutters shall be provided where there is no method of preventing water from entering the hull through a broken window or sidescuttle. 10.3 No sidescuttles shall be fitted in such a position that its sill is less than 500 mm above the deepest operating waterline. 10.4 For fishing vessels with L ≥ 24 m sidescuttles fitted less than 1000 mm above the deepest operating waterline shall be of the fixed type. 10.5 Sidescuttles, together with their glasses and deadlights shall be of an approved construction (to the satisfaction of the Administration for fishing vessels with L < 24

m). Those prone to be damaged by fishing gear shall be suitably protected. 10.6 Toughened safety glass or its equivalent shall be used for the wheelhouse windows. Where the bulwark is less than 0,9 m in average height, the required area A shall be decreased by 0,004 m2 per metre length of the well and for each 100 mm difference in height. 11.3 Subject to the approval of the Administration the minimum freeing port area for each well on the superstructure deck shall not be less than one half the area A given in 11.1 On vessels with L < 24 m, where the superstructure deck forms a working deck for fishing operations the minimum area on each side shall not be less than 75 per cent of the area A. 11.4 Freeing ports shall be so arranged along the length of bulwarks as to ensure that the deck is freed from water most rapidly and effectively. Lower edges of freeing ports shall be as near the deck as practicable. 11.5 Poundboards and means for stowage of the fishing gear shall be arranged

so that the effectiveness of freeing ports will not be impaired. Poundboards shall be constructed that they can be locked in position when in use and shall not hamper the discharge of shipped water. 11.6 Freeing ports over 300 mm in depth shall be fitted with bars spaced not more than 230 mm and not less than 150 mm apart or provided with other suitable protective arrangements. Freeing port covers, if fitted, shall be of approved construction. If devices are considered necessary for locking freeing port covers during fishing operations they shall be to the satisfaction Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability of the Administration and easily operable from a readily accessible position. 11.7 In vessels intended to operate in areas subject to icing, covers and protective arrangements for freeing ports shall be capable of being easily removed to restrict ice accretion. The size of openings and means provided for removal

of these protective arrangements shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. 11.8 On vessels with L < 24 m where wells or cockpits are fitted in the working deck or superstructure deck with their bottom above the deepest operating waterline, effective non-return means of drainage overboard shall be provided. Where bottoms of such wells or cockpits are below the deepest operating waterline, drainage to the bilge will have to be provided. C. 3. Where entry of water into structures above the boundary as defined in 1., third item, would significantly influence the stability and buoyancy of the vessel, such structure shall be: – of adequate strength to maintain the weathertight integrity and be fitted with weathertight closing appliances; or – provided with adequate drainage arrangements; or – an equivalent combination of both above measures 4. The means for closing openings in the boundaries of weathertight structures shall be such as to maintain weathertight

integrity in all operational conditions. E. Intact Stability 1. General Draught Marking 1. A maximum permissible operating draught shall be approved by GL and shall be such that, in the associated operating condition, the stability criteria according to E. and F are satisfied 2. Datum draught marks shall be provided at the bow and stern, port and starboard and be adequate in number for assessing the condition and trim of the vessel. The marks shall be permanent and easily to be read. The draught to which marks relate shall be indicated above the mark on the hull. D. Chapter 8 Page 2–7 Intact Buoyancy 1. All fishing vessels shall have a sufficient reserve of buoyancy at the design waterline to meet the intact stability requirements of this Section. This reserve of buoyancy shall be calculated by including only those compartments which are: – watertight – accepted as having scantlings and arrangements adequate to maintain their watertight integrity – situated in

locations below a boundary, which may be a watertight deck or an equivalent structure of a non-watertight deck covered by a weathertight structure as defined in 3. 2. Arrangements shall be provided for checking the watertight integrity of those compartments taken into account in 1. Adequate stability of the fishing vessel shall be proven. Insofar as fishing gear, vessel type and propulsion plant installation do not demonstrate any unusual characteristics, the criteria listed below are used for determining stability for the operating conditions defined in 3.1 Note Compliance with the stability criteria does not ensure immunity against capsizing. Good seamanship is therefore an essential prerequisite for a stability-safe fishing vessel. 2. Stability Criteria 2.1 Minimum stability criteria The following minimum stability criteria have to be fulfilled unless GL is satisfied that operating experience justifies alterations therefrom: – the area under the righting lever curve (GZ

curve) shall not be less than 0,055 metre-radian up to ϕ = 30° – the area under the righting lever curve shall not be less than 0,09 metre-radian up to ϕ = 40° or the angle of flooding Θf (angle of heel at which non-weathertight openings immerse; small openings through which progressive flooding cannot take place need not to be considered as open ) – the area under the righting lever curve (GZ curve) between the angles of heel 30° and 40° or between 30° and the angle of flooding Θf, if this angle is less than 40°, shall not be less than 0,03 metre-radians Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–8 – – Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability the righting lever GZ shall be at least 0,20 m at an angle of heel ϕ ≥ 30° the maximum righting arm shall occur at an angle of heel preferably exceeding 30°, but not less than 25° – the initial metacentric height GM0 shall be not less than 0,35 m for single deck vessels – the initial

metacentric height GM0 may be reduced for vessels with complete superstructures and with L ≥ 70 m, but shall in no case be less than 0,15 m 2.2 If any of these criteria are not complied with, the corresponding condition may be accepted by GL if proof of equivalent safety is provided. 2.3 3. 2 ⎧⎪ ⎛ f ⎞ f GM min = 0,53 + 2 ⋅ Bwl ⋅ ⎨0, 075 − 0,37 ⋅ + 0,82 ⋅ ⎜ ⎟ Bwl ⎝ Bwl ⎠ ⎪⎩ − 0, 014 ⋅ Bwl l ⎫ − 0, 032 ⋅ s ⎬ H L wl ⎭ Bwl = extreme breadth of the vessel in the waterline in maximum load condition [m] Lwl = length of the vessel in the waterline in maximum load condition [m] ls = actual length of the enclosed superstructure extending from side to side of the vessel [m] f = smallest freeboard measured vertically from the top of freeboard deck at side to the actual waterline 2.32 The above formula is applicable for vessels with the following parameters: Conditions for stability The proof of adequate stability shall be provided for

at least the following conditions. 3.1 Operating conditions 3.11 The number and type of operating conditions to be considered shall be to the satisfaction of GL and shall include the following as appropriate: – departure for the fishing grounds with full fuel, stores, ice, fishing gear, etc. – departure from the fishing grounds with full catch – arrival at home port with full catch and 10 % stores, fuel, etc. – arrival at home port with 10 % stores, fuel, etc. and a minimum catch of 20 % of full catch Simplified stability criterion for L < 30 m 2.31 For decked fishing vessels with a length L < 30 m, the following approximate formula for the minimum metacentric height GMmin can be used as a criterion for all operating conditions, but it is not a replacement of the criteria according to 2.1: Under all other operating conditions, including those which produce the lowest values of the stability parameters, the minimum stability criteria according to 2. have to be

met 3.12 For the operating conditions defined in 3.11 the calculations shall include the following: – allowance for the weight of the wet fishing nets and tackle, etc. on deck – allowance for the ice accretion according to 3.7 – homogeneous distribution of the catch, unless this is inconsistent with practice – catch on deck, if anticipated, in operating conditions for departure of the fishing grounds with full catch and arrival at home port with 10 % stores, etc. – water ballast if carried in tanks which are especially provided for this purpose or in other tanks also equipped for carrying water ballast – allowance for free surface effect of liquids 3.2 GL reserve the right to deviate from the a.m regulations when particular circumstances warrant this. This will especially be the case for a change in the vessel’s mode or area of operation which effect the stability considerations of this Section. – 0,02 < f /Bwl < 0,20 – ls/Lwl < 0,60 3.3

Free liquid surfaces – 1,75 < Bwl / H < 2,15 3.31 Tanks – sheer fore and aft ≥ standard sheer according to ICLL, Reg. 38(8) – superstructures with a height ≥ 1,8 m are to be included For vessels with parameters outside of the above limits the formula should be applied with special care. I - Part 1 GL 2007 The contribution of free liquid surfaces to the heeling moment has to be considered. Note If no other information is available, the following densities of liquids may be used: – freshwater 1,000 t/m3 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 – Section 2 bilge water Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability E 1,005 t/m3 3.5 Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m 3 – waste water 1,050 t/m – fuel 0,830 t/m3 3.51 – lubricants 0,900 t/m3 3.511 Scope – fire extinguishing foams 1,150 t/m3 3.32 Flooding of fish holds The angle of heel at which progressive flooding of fish holds

could occur through hatches which remain open during fishing operations and which cannot be rapidly closed shall be at least 20° unless the stability criteria of 2. can be satisfied with the respective fish holds partially or completely flooded. The catch shall be properly secured against shifting by portable fish-hold divisions or other adequate means to avoid dangerous trim or heel of the vessel. 3.4 Particular fishing methods Fishing vessels engaged in particular fishing methods where additional external forces are imposed on the vessel during fishing operations, shall meet the stability criteria of 2. also under such conditions Lever Particular care should be taken when the pull from the fishing gear results in dangerous heel angles. This may occur when fishing gear fastens onto an underwater obstacle or when handling fish gear, particularly on purse seiners, or when one of the trawl wires tears off. The heel angles caused by the fishing gear in these situations shall be

eliminated by employing devices which can relieve or remove excessive forces applied through the fishing gear. Such devices shall not impose a danger to the vessel through operating in circumstances other than those for which they were intended Chapter 8 Page 2–9 Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satisfaction of GL, the effect of severe wind and rolling in associated sea conditions taking account of the seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the vessel will operate, type of vessel and its mode of operation. The criterion supplements the stability criteria given in 2. The more stringent criteria of 2 and the weather criterion shall govern the minimum requirements for fishing vessels of L ≥ 45 m having large windage area. 3.512 Weather criterion 3.5121 The ability of the vessel to withstand the combined effects of beam wind and rolling shall be demonstrated for each standard condition of loading with reference to Fig. 21 as follows: – the vessel is

subjected to a steady wind pressure acting perpendicular to the vessel’s centreline which results in a steady wind heeling lever lw1 – from the resultant angle of equilibrium Θ0 , the vessel is assumed to roll owing to wave action to an angle of roll Θ1 to windward. Attention shall be paid to the effect of steady wind so that excessive resultant angles of heel are avoided Note The angle of heel under action of steady wind Θ0 should be limited to a certain angle to the satisfaction of GL. As a guide 16 ° or 80 % of the angle of deck edge immersion, whichever is less, is suggested. GZ b lw2 lw1 Q2 a Angle of heel Q0 Q1 Fig. 21 Severe wind and rolling Qc Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–10 – Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability the vessel is then subjected to a gust of wind pressure which results in a gust wind heeling lever lw2 – under the circumstances area b shall be equal to or greater than area a – free surface

effects, see 3.3 shall be accounted for in the standard conditions of loading as defined in 3.1 k I - Part 1 GL 2007 = factor as follows: = 1,0 for a round-bilged vessel having no bilge or bar keels = 0,7 for a vessel having sharp bilges = as shown in Table 2.5 for a vessel having bilge keels, a bar keel or both X1 = factor as shown in Table 2.3 The angles in Fig. 21 are defined as follows: X2 = factor as shown in Table 2.4 Θ0 = angle of heel under action of steady wind r = 0, 73 ± Θ1 = angle of roll to windward due to wave action Θ2 = angle of down flooding Θf or 50° or Θc, whichever is less, where Θf Θc = angle of heel at which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses which cannot be closed weathertight, immerse. In applying this criterion, small openings through which progressive flooding cannot take place need not be considered as open = angle of second intercept between wind heeling lever and GZ curve 3.5122 The wind heeling levers lw1 and

lw2 referred to in 3.5121 are constant values at all angles of inclination and shall be calculated as follows: l w1 = p w ⋅ A ⋅ Z 1000 ⋅ g ⋅ Δ OG = distance between the centre of gravity and the waterline [m] the sign + is to be used for the centre of gravity above the waterline the sign – is to be used for the centre of gravity below the waterline Td = mean moulded draught of the vessel [m] s = factor as shown in Table 2.6 Intermediate values in the Tables 2.3 to 26 shall be obtained by linear interpolation. Table 2.3 [m] lw2 = 1,5 ⋅ lw1 [m] pw = wind pressure [N/m2] = 504 N/m2 = the value may be reduced for vessels in restricted service, subject to approval by GL A Z = projected lateral area of the portion of the vessel and deck cargo, if applicable, above the waterline [m2] = vertical distance from the centre of A to the centre of the underwater lateral area or approximately to a point at one half of the draught [m] g = 9,81 m/s2 Δ = displacement

according to Section 1, D. Θ1 = 109 ⋅ k ⋅ X1 ⋅ X 2 ⋅ r ⋅ s Table 2.4 Values for factor X1 B/Td X1 ≤ 2,4 1,00 2,5 0,98 2,6 0,96 2,7 0,95 2,8 0,93 2,9 0,91 3,0 0,90 3,1 0,88 3,2 0,86 3,3 0,84 3,4 0,82 ≥ 3,5 0,80 Values for factor X2 CB 3.5123 The angle of roll Θ1 referred to in 35121 shall be calculated as follows. For vessels with antirolling devices the angle of roll shall be determined without taking into account the effect of such systems. [°] OG Td X2 ≤ 0,45 0,75 0,50 0,82 0,55 0,89 0,60 0,95 0,65 0,97 ≥ 0,70 1,00 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 Table 2.5 Values for factor k E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Fishing vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m 3.52 For fishing vessels with a length 24 m ≤ L < 45 m the value of the wind pressure pw can be taken from Table 2.7 (Ak ⋅ 100) / (L ⋅ B) k 0 1,00 1,0 0,98 1,5 0,95 Table 2.7 2,0 0,88 h [m] 1 2,5 0,79

pw [N/m2] 316 386 429 460 485 3,0 0,74 1 h is the vertical distance from the centre of the projected 3,5 0,72 ≥ 4,0 0,70 Table 2.6 Values for factor s 2 3 4 5 6 and over 504 Water on deck T s ≤6 0,100 7 0,098 8 0,093 3.62 12 0,065 14 0,053 3.621 The bow height HB is defined as the minimum vertical distance from the deepest waterline to the top of the highest exposed deck measured at FP. 16 0,044 18 0,038 ≥ 20 0,035 = rolling period [s] Bow height 3.622 The bow height shall be sufficient, to the satisfaction of GL, to prevent excessive shipping of water and shall be determined taking account of the seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the vessel will operate, the type of the vessel and its mode of operation. 3.623 Guidance for calculating bow height 2⋅C⋅B The determination of the required bow height HB may be based upon the following formula: GM 0, 043 ⋅ L wl 0, 023 ⋅ B − Tm 100 C = 0,373 + Lwl = waterline

length [m] Tm = mean moulded draught of the vessel [m] Ak = total overall area of the bilge keels or area of the lateral projection of the bar keel, or sum of these areas [m2] ⎛ L⎞ H B = k1 ⋅ L ⎜1 + ⎟ k 2 ⎠ ⎝ GM = metacentric height corrected for free surface effect [m] Table 2.8 1 3.61 Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satisfaction of GL, the effect of water on deck. The seasonal weather conditions and the sea states in which the vessel will operate, the type of vessel and the mode of operation have to be taken into account. The parameters in the Tables are defined as follows: = Wind pressure vertical area of the vessel to the waterline 3.6 T Chapter 8 Page 2–11 [m] k1, k2 = coefficients depending upon areas of operation according to Table 2.8 3.624 Where the bow height required is obtained by sheer, this shall extend from the stem for a length of at least 0,15 L abaft FP. Where it is obtained by a forecastle, such forecastle shall

extend from the stem at least 0,07 L abaft FP. Definition of coefficients k1 and k2 Area of operation L k1 k2 Extreme conditions with significant wave height ≤ 8 m 24 m ≤ L < 110 m 0,09 - 270 L ≥ 110 m 4,959 / L 600 Extreme conditions with significant wave height > 8 m 24 m ≤ L < 110 m 0,117 - 220 L ≥ 110 m 5,990 / L 1484 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–12 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 GL 2007 If the length of the forecastle exceeds 0,15 L due consideration should be given to the fitting of a bulkhead with adequate closing appliances. If no such bulkhead is fitted adequate arrangements should be provided for removing water from the open forecastle. 3.632 For the calculation of the static heeling moment due to water on deck Mw the following assumptions should be made: – at the beginning the vessel is in the upright position 3.625 Where a bulwark is fitted this may be taken into account

for a height of 1 m, provided that the bulwark extends from the stem to a point at least 0,15 L abaft FP. – during heeling, trim and displacement are constant and equal to the values for the vessel without water on deck – the effect of freeing ports should be ignored 3.626 When a vessel is always trimmed by the stern in service conditions, the minimum trim may be allowed in the calculation of bow height. – the deck well is filled to the top of the bulwark at its lowest point and the vessel heeled up to an angle at which this point is immersed 3.633 For the determination of the dynamic heeling moment the following formula should be used: Note 3.63 Guidance for the calculation of the effect of water on deck Mwod = K ⋅ Mw K 3.631 The ability of the vessel to withstand the heeling effect due to the presence of water on deck should be demonstrated by a quasi-static method. According to Fig. 22 the following condition shall be satisfied with the vessel in the worst

operating condition: = 1,0 for static approach > 1,0 for angle of deck immersion ΘD < 10° - Cwod = Aa / Ab ≥ 1 Ab 15°, or for angle of bulwark top immersion ΘB < 20° - 25° = area between heeling lever curve due to water on deck and righting lever GZ curve, see Fig. 22 < 1,0 for ΘD > 20° , or for ΘB > 30° = area below righting lever GZ curve and between heeling lever curve due to water on deck and an angle of inclination ϕ = 40° or the angle of flooding Θf ,whichever is less Lever Aa = coefficient for dynamic effects taking in account for rolling period, dynamic effects of water flow, disposition and configuration of deck wells and deckhouses, area of operation, etc. GZwod = 3.634 Other methods for the calculation of the effect of water on deck using the dynamic approach have to be approved by GL. Mwod D Aa GZ = M D Ab QB Fig. 22 Qf or 40° Angle of inclination Heeling and righting levers for water on deck Source:

http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.7 Section 2 F Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Ice accretion 3.71 Fishing vessels intended for operation in areas where ice accretion is known to occur shall be: – designed to minimize the accretion of ice – equipped with such means of removing ice as GL may require 3.72 Standard assumptions For fishing vessels operating in areas defined in 3.73 the following ice loads shall be assumed: Chapter 8 Page 2–13 F. Subdivision and Damage Stability 1. Bulkheads 1.1 At least the following watertight bulkheads are to be fitted in all fishing vessels: – one collision bulkhead – one afterpeak bulkhead – one bulkhead at each end of the machinery space 1.2 Collision bulkhead – 0,30 kN/m2 on exposed weatherdecks and gangways 1.21 The collision bulkhead is a watertight bulkhead up to the working deck in the forepart of the vessel located at the following distance x [m] aft from FP: – 0,075 kN/m2 for the

projected lateral area of each side of the vessel above the waterline – for vessels with L ≥ 45 m: 0,05 ⋅ L ≤ x ≤ 0,08 ⋅L – for vessels with L < 45 m: 0,05 ⋅ L ≤ x ≤ 0,05 ⋅ L + 1,35 m – in any case: The projected lateral area of discontinuous surfaces of rail, spars (except masts) and rigging of vessels having no sails and the projected lateral area of other small objects shall be computed by increasing the total projected area of continuous surfaces by 5 % and the static moments of this area by 10 %. 3.73 Special icing areas 2,0 m ≤ x Where any part of the underwater body extends forward of FP, e.g a bulbous bow, the distance x defined above shall be measured from a point at mid-length of the extension forward of FP or from a point 0,015 ⋅ L forward of FP, whichever is less. 3.731 Loads in excess of twice the standard loads defined in 3.72 may be expected in following area: 1.22 The bulkhead may have steps or recesses provided they are within

the limits defined in 1.21 – 1.23 Where a long forward superstructure is fitted, the collision bulkhead shall be extended weathertight to the deck next above the working deck. The extension need not be fitted directly above the bulkhead below provided it is located at a distance x defined in 1.21 and the part of the deck which forms the step is made effectively weathertight. the area north of latitude 43° N bounded in the west by the North American coast and east by the rhumb line running from latitude 43° N longitude 48° W to latitude 63° N longitude 28° W and then along longitude 28° W 3.732 One half to twice the standard loads defined in 3.72 may be expected in the following areas: – the area north of latitude 65°30 N, between longitude 28° W and the west coast of Iceland; north of the north coast of Iceland; north of the rhumb line running from latitude 66° N, longitude 15° W to latitude 73°30 N, longitude 15° E, north of latitude 73°30 N between longitude

15° E and 35° E, and east of longitude 35° E – north of latitude 56° N in the Baltic Sea – all sea areas north of the North American continent, west of the areas defined above and in 3.731 – the Bering and Okhotsk Seas and the Tartary Street during the icing season – south of latitude 60° S 1.24 Pipes piercing the collision bulkhead shall be fitted with suitable valves operable from above the working deck and the valve chest shall be secured at the collision bulkhead inside the forepiek. No door, manhole, ventilation duct or any other opening shall be fitted in the collision bulkhead below the working deck. The number of openings in the collision bulkhead above the working deck shall be reduced to the minimum compatible with the design and normal operation of the vessel. Such openings shall be capable of being closed weathertight. 2. Double Bottom 2.1 At least for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 75 m a double bottom shall be fitted extending from the

collision bulkhead to the afterpeak bulkhead. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–14 Section 2 F Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability 2.2 The double bottom has to protect the vessels bottom up to the turn of the bilge. For this purpose, the intersecting line of the outer edge of the margin plate with the shell plating is not to be lower at any part than a horizontal plane, passing through the point of intersection with the frame line amidships of a transverse diagonal line inclined 25 degrees to the base line and cutting the base line at B/2 from the centreline of the vessel, see Fig. 23 2.3 The double bottom need not be fitted in way of deep tanks, provided that the efficiency of the watertight subdivision is not impaired by such an arrangement. 2.4 The bottoms of drain sumps are to be situated at a distance of at least 460 mm from the base line. Only above the horizontal plane determined from 2.2, the bottoms of drain wells may be led to the shell plating.

Exemptions for the depth of drain wells may also be granted in shaft tunnels and pipe tunnels. CL – the vertical extent of damage in all cases is assumed to be from the base line upwards without limits – the transverse extent of damage is equal to Bwl/5 measured inboard from the side of the vessel in y-direction at the level of the deepest operating waterline – if a damage of a lesser extent than in the two first conditions results in a more severe condition, such lesser extent shall be assumed – if there are steps or recesses in a transverse bulkhead of no more than 3,05 m in length within the transverse extent of assumed damage, such transverse bulkhead shall be considered intact and the adjacent compartments may be flooded singly – if the steps or recesses in a transverse bulkhead exceed 3,05 m, the two compartments adjacent to this bulkhead shall be considered as flooded – the step form at the junction of the afterpeak bulkhead and the afterpeak tank top

shall not be regarded as a step in the bulkhead – where a main transverse bulkhead is situated within the transverse extent of assumed damage and is stepped in way of a double bottom or side tank by more than 3,05 m, the double bottom or side tanks adjacent to the stepped portion of the main transverse bulkhead shall be considered as flooded simultaneously – where bulkheads are spaced at a distance less than ⅓ ⋅ L2/3, one or more of these bulkheads shall be assumed as non-existent in order to achieve the minimum spacing between bulkheads – if pipes, ducts or tunnels are situated within the assumed transverse extent of damage, arrangements are to be made so that progressive flooding cannot thereby extend to compartments other than those assumed to be floodable in the calculation for each case of damage – where operating experience has shown that other values are more appropriate, those values may be agreed with GL B/2 well inner bottom S baseline 25° minimum

height of inner bottom (measured from baseline) 460 mm (measured from baseline) Fig. 23 Double bottom with drain sumps location 3. Damage stability 3.1 General For fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 100 m where the total number of persons carried on board is 100 or more, a damage stability investigation with flooding of any one compartment between adjacent transverse bulkheads is required. The vessel shall be capable of remaining afloat with positive stability. 3.2 Assumptions 3.21 Damage extensions The assumed extent of damage shall be as follows: I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.22 Permeability For damage stability calculations, the permeability for each space or part of a space shall be used as set out in Table 2.9 Direct calculation of permeability shall be used where a more onerous condition results, and may be used where a less onerous condition results compared with Table 2.9 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 2 Table 2.9 Values of permeability H

Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability G. Definition of spaces Permeability µ [%] Control stations, accommodation rooms, kitchens, pantries, workshops 95 Machinery and ventilation rooms 85 Storage rooms, refrigerating rooms 60 Tanks, bunkers, cells 0 or 95 1 Void spaces Conditions of equilibrium The final waterline after damage to anyone compartment shall be either: – the line of openings at which progressive flooding to spaces below would occur or according to requirements defined by GL – the line to the after end of the top of the poop superstructure deck at the centreline, subject to the first four conditions of 3.4 Unsymmetrical flooding shall be kept to a minimum consistent with effective arrangements. Where it is necessary to correct large angles of heel, the means adopted shall, where practicable, be self-acting. 3.4 1. Every vessel shall undergo an inclining test upon its completion and the actual displacement and position of the centre of gravity

shall be determined for the light ship condition. 2. Where alterations are made to the vessel affecting its light ship condition and the position of the centre of gravity, the vessel shall, if GL considers this necessary, be re-inclined and the stability information revised. 3. GL may allow the inclining test of an individual vessel to be dispensed with provided basic stability data are available from the inclining test of a sister vessel and it is shown to the satisfaction of GL that reliable stability information of the exempted vessel can be obtained from such basic data. 4. A report of each inclination test carried out in accordance with this Section or of each calculation of the lightship condition particulars shall be submitted to GL for approval. The approved report shall be placed on board of the vessel in the custody of the skipper and should incorporate such additions and amendments as GL may require in any particular case. H. Stability Information 1. General Stability

criteria The fishing vessel is considered to survive the conditions of damage specified in 3.21 provided the vessel remains afloat in a condition of stable equilibrium according to 3.3 and satisfies the following criteria for residual stability: – the positive residual righting lever curve shall have a minimum range of 20° beyond the angle of equilibrium – a residual righting lever is to be obtained within the range of the positive stability of at least 0,1 m – the area under the righting lever curve shall be at least 0,0175 metre-radians, measured from the angle of equilibrium to the angle at which progressive flooding occurs – the angle of heel in the final condition of flooding shall not exceed 20° – Inclining Test 95 1 whichever results in more severe requirements 3.3 Chapter 8 Page 2–15 the initial metacentric height of the damaged vessel in the final condition of flooding for the upright position shall be positive and not less than 50 mm Relaxation

from these damage stability requirements will be permitted by GL only if the proportions, arrangements and other characteristics of the vessel are more favourable to stability after damage. 1.1 Suitable stability information shall be supplied to enable the skipper to assess with ease and certainty the stability of the vessel under various operating conditions. Such information shall include specific instructions to the skipper warning him of those operating conditions which could adversely affect either the stability or the trim of the vessel. A copy of the stability information shall be submitted to GL for approval. 1.2 The approved stability information shall be kept on board, readily accessible at all times and inspected at the periodical surveys of the vessel to ensure that it has been approved for the actual operating conditions. 1.3 Where alterations are made to a vessel affecting its stability, revised stability calculations shall be prepared and submitted to GL for approval.

If GL decides that the stability information has to be revised, the new information shall be supplied to the skipper and the superseded information removed. 2. Scope for intact stability The following information has to be provided. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 2–16 2.1 Section 2 H Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Basic information – information on the proper use and control of any anti-rolling devices information on the weight and arrangement of permanent ballast – stability calculations including GZ curves of the operating conditions defined in E.31 – – instructions warning of conditions critical from stability standpoint, e.g instructions to keep the ballast tanks full when necessary for adequate stability 3. – maximum permissible operating draught associated with each operating condition – when appropriate, minimum required operating draught 2.2 Information having regard to the type of vessel, service, etc. 2.21 If GZ

calculations are intended: – information for determination of weights, positions of centres of gravity, free surface effects of tanks, fish holds and pounds – information relating to form stability and hydrostatic parameters – displacement and disposition of centres of gravity of light ship condition with regard to permanent ballast 2.22 information for the determination of metacentric height GM0 by means of a rolling test – information giving required minimum metacentric height GM0 for the practical range of draughts Scope for damage stability For vessels which require investigation of damage stability according to F.31 the following additional information has to be provided. 3.1 General – information on the use of ballast and other liquid systems to correct heel and trim – forms for recording daily tank statements – instructions for loading in order to maintain the vessel afloat after flooding 3.2 Damage control plan 3.21 There shall be permanently

exhibited or readily available on the navigating bridge, for the guidance of the skipper and the officers in charge of the fishing vessel, a plan showing clearly: – for each deck and compartment the boundaries of the watertight compartments, the openings therein with the means of closure and position of any controls thereof – for doors, a description of degree of tightness, operating mode, normal position, operating circumstances (opened while at sea, not normally used while at sea, not used while at sea) – arrangements for the correction of any list due to flooding When rolling tests are used: – I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.23 In form of simplified information supplementary or alternative information which permits safe operation without recourse to calculations or rolling tests. 3.22 General precautions shall consist of a listing of equipment, conditions and operational procedures, considered to be necessary to maintain watertight integrity under normal vessel operations.

2.3 3.23 Specific precautions shall consist of a listing of elements (i.e closures, securing of equipment/ loads, sounding of alarm, etc.) considered to be vital to the survival of the vessel and its crew. – Operational requirements instructions for filling and emptying tanks with free liquid surfaces Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 Page 3–1 Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures A. General 1. Application The provisions of this Section shall apply to all types of fishing vessels. 2. Basic Rules 2.1 For metal hulls of decked fishing vessels the design and construction shall be based on the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures. But these Rules shall only be valid, where they are not superseded by the special requirements defined in this Section. 2.2 For glass fibre reinforced plastic hulls the design and construction shall be based on the GL Rules Part 3 – Special Craft,

Chapter 2 – Yachts ≥ 24 m and Chapter 3 – Yachts and Boats up to 24 m. The factors defined there for fishing vessels/workboats have to be considered and the adequate increase of the scantlings to be agreed with GL. These Rules have to be completed by the reinforcements defined in this Section. 2.3 For hulls made of solid wood the design shall be based on the GL Rules Chapter 13 – Vorschriften für Klassifikation und Bau von hölzernen Seeschiffen 1. An adequate increase of the scantlings has to be agreed with GL. For cold moulded wood see 22 2.4 The design and construction of other types of hull structures shall be agreed case by case with GL. 3. Definitions The definition of the main parameters of the hull structure is given in Section 1, D. B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure 1. Strengthening at the shell side for side trawlers The following additional strengthening is required for side trawlers: 1.1 The thickness of the sheerstrake is to be increased by at

least 3 mm in way of the trawl gallows. It is recommended to also increase the thickness of the sheerstrake between the forward and aft gallows throughout by 2 mm. 1.2 In way of the path of the bobbins at the aft gallows during hauling operations, the side plating above the middle of the bilge turn is to be 50 per cent greater in thickness than required. 1.3 At the forward gallows, the side plating above the upper turn of the bilge is to be strengthened correspondingly. 1.4 The seams at the lower edge of the sheerstrake and the upper turn of the bilge are to be protected by half round bars running from the fore to the aft gallows, and by further half round bars arranged between them or diagonally in such a way that the welds cannot be worn by the trawl wire ropes. 1.5 In way of the strengthened shell plating under the aft gallows, intermediate frames are to be arranged, which are to be connected to the deck and the plate floors, or to be supported by a stringer at the lower edge of the

strengthened plates. The section modulus of intermediate frames is not to be less than 75 per cent of that of the frames they are fitted between. 1.6 The bulwarks at the operating side are to be 2 mm thicker, and under the gallows 3 mm thicker than required by the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 6, K. In way of the slip hook, the thickness of bulwarks is not to be less than 10 mm. 2. Strengthening at the shell side for vessels mooring at sea 2.1 Basic assumptions The requirements for vessels of a fishing fleet mooring together at sea provide for a damping protection of the hull for which purpose pneumatic fenders or other equivalent damping arrangements may be used. These requirements are based on assumptions that the vessels will be moored at a sea state not above 6 2. 2.2 Regions for side strengthening The following regions have to be distinguished, compare Fig. 31 –––––––––––––– –––––––––––––– 1 2

"Rules for Classification and Construction of Wooden Seagoing Ships" (not available in English) Sea states relating to wind and sea conditions according to international agreement ranging from sea state 0 (best) to 9 (worst). Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 3–2 Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures B > 0,36 L weather deck > 0,36 L C B h C Ballast waterline 0,5 B Regions for strengthening at the shell side for vessels mooring at sea Depth dimension region A locating between the line drawn lower than the ballast waterline by the value of h and the line drawn higher than the summer loadline by the value of h h = 0,8 m for sea state ≤ 4 = 1,2 m for sea state 5 = 2,0 m for sea state 6 – region B located between the upper boundary of region A and the weather/strength deck. – region C located between the strength deck and the first tier superstructure deck including forecastle and poop. 2.22 Summer loadline 0,1 B h 0,1 B

– C A Fig. 31 2.21 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Length dimension height or are fitted inboard at not less than the same distance no additional strengthening is required. Where the inclination or the distance between the vessel side and the superstructure is less than this value, the strengthening of their frames and side plating shall be determined by linear interpolation proceeding from the requirements in 2.4 2.3 Design pressure The design pressure on the sides and superstructure sides of vessels moored at sea is to be obtained from the following formulae: For region A: p A = α1 ⋅ α 2 ⋅ ⎡190 + 51⋅ Δ ⋅ z ⋅ 10−3 − 0, 464 ⎤ [kN / m 2 ] ⎣⎢ ⎦⎥ – regions A, B and C are situated between sections of the vessel where the breadth of the vessel is equal to 0,8 ⋅ B For regions B and C: – for special purpose ships, like transport ships or ships with centralized fish processing plants, the regions are to extend at least 0,36 ⋅ L forward and aft from the

midship section α1 = factor for ship displacement and sea conditions according to Table 3.1 α2 = factor for region of strengthening according to Table 3.2 Δ = design ship displacement [t] 2.23 Additional fender areas For big special purpose ships, one or more fender areas are to be additionally established. The boundaries shall be formed by sections lying within 0,05 ⋅ L forward and aft of the edges of the fender. Extreme positions of fenders and all specific variations of planned mooring have to be considered. 2.24 Exceptions Where superstructure sides are inclined to the centre line of the vessel at not less than 0,1 of superstructure p BC = α1 ⋅ α 2 ⋅ ⎡129 + 59 ⋅ Δ ⋅ z ⋅ 10−3 − 0, 464 ⎤ [kN / m 2 ] ⎢⎣ ⎥⎦ = for fishing vessels: to the summer load line = for special purpose ship: of the largest ship mooring alongside 464 t ≤ Δ ≤ 7500 t n = number of moorings, alongside the ship whose displacement has been adopted as the design value

in formulae for p Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 z Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures = distance [m] from the mid-span of member calculated to the summer loadline = where a special purpose ship has the freeboard depth hS greater than the freeboard depth hF for the largest fishing vessel, the value of z is to be reduced by the difference (hS – hF) = in region A z = 1,0 2.42 Factor α1 for ship displacement and sea conditions Ship displacement Δ [t] Sea state no. ≤4 5 6 ≤ 2000 1,00 1,15 1,60 > 2000 0,82 1,00 1,16 Framing 2.421 The section modulus W of the frames is not to be less than: W = 4,1 ⋅ p ⋅ a ⋅ A 2 ⋅ k [cm3 ] m p = pA for region A or pBC for regions B and C according to 2.3 A = span of frame [m] measured along the chord between upper edge of inner bottom plating and lower edge of deck at side, see Fig. 32 k = material factor = in any case z ≥ 0 Table 3.1 Chapter 8 Page 3–3 = 1,0 for normal

strength hull structural steel = 235 / ReH for steels with yield properties less than 235 N/mm2 = 295 / (ReH + 60) for other steels Table 3.2 Factor α2 for region of strengthening Region of strengthening Fishing vessel Region A 1,00 Region A within fender area – Region B 1 1 0, 22 ⋅ z + 0, 6 Region C 1 1 0,12 ⋅ z + 1, 28 ReH = minimum [N/mm2] m nominal = 6,8 ⋅ k1 ⋅ k 2 ⋅ k 3 ⋅ upper yield stress A2 A − 0, 75 k1, k2, k3 = see Table 3.3 1 Note: In the regions B and C, α2 is assumed between 1,1 and 1,4 2.4 Scantlings 2.41 Plating h 90 ° In strengthened areas the thickness of side plating and sheer strake is not to be less than: t S = 21, 7 ⋅ a p p − 0, 242 + t K [mm] 1,1⋅ R eH hf = pA or pBC for regions A or for regions B and C according to 2.3 Fig. 32 Parameters for determination of framing ReH = minimum nominal upper yield strength [N/mm2] 2.422 If a longitudinal framing system is applied for tween deck spaces, the section

modulus of the side longitudinals is not to be less than: tK = 4,0 mm for region A in case trawling is effected from the side of the fishing vessel W = 0,11 ⋅ p ⋅ a ⋅ A2 ⋅ k [cm3] = 1,2 for regions B and C = 3,0 mm elsewhere A = spacing of web frames [m] Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 3–4 Table 3.3 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1 GL 2007 Definition of factors k1 to k3 Number of load distributing side stringers Factor 0 1 2 and more hv = 0,75: k1 1,0 hv = 0,75: 1,0 + 0,017 ⋅ A a 1,1 + 0,017 ⋅ A a hv = 1,0: hv = 1,0: 1,0 + 0,034 ⋅ A 1,1 + 0,034 ⋅ A a k2 k3 1,0 1, 0 + 6,8 ⋅ hf A a 1,12 h ⎛h ⎞ ⋅ ⎜ f + 0, 28 ⎟ − 12,5 ⋅ f A ⎝ A ⎠ 1,15 1, 0 + 7, 0 ⋅ hf h − 8, 0 ⋅ A A hv = ratio of height of load distributing side stringer to height of frame hf = distance [m] between a section at the lower support of frame and a tangent to the frame contour in way of the section at

the upper support, as measured normal to the tangent, see Fig. 32 h maximum deflection of frame according to Fig. 32 [m] 2.5 = Arrangement of strengthening 2.51 In strengthened regions transverse framing is to be adopted to the vessels sides. In single deck ships, the deck and bottom in these regions are also to be framed transversely. In multi-deck ships, transverse framing is to be adopted for the deck located on the fender level. Longitudinal framing of sides is permissible in the upper tween deck space only In this case, the spacing of web frames is not to exceed three frame spacings or 2,4 m, whichever is less. 2.52 In the region A, intermediate frames are recommended through the region length in fishing vessels and within fender areas in special purpose ships. 2.53 In any case, it is recommended that symmetrical sections be used and the minimum possible web depth be ensured for the particular section modulus. 2.54 Between the ship’s side and vertical stiffener nearest to

it, transverse bulkheads are to have horizontal stiffeners with a section height not less than 75 % of the vertical stiffener height. In ships with L ≤ 80 m, horizontal stiffeners are to be spaced not more than 600 mm apart and with L ≥ 150 m, not more than 800 mm apart. For ships with intermediate lengths, linear interpolation may be used to determine this distance. The ends of horizontal stiffeners are to be welded to vertical stiffeners and sniped at the ships sides. 2.55 Bilge keels of ships with L ≤ 80 m are to be, as far as practicable, so arranged that a tangent drawn to the frame and passing through the outer free edge of the bilge keel would form an angle of not less than 15° with the vertical axis. For ships with L ≥ 150 m, this angle may be zero For ships of intermediate lengths, the above angle is to be obtained by linear interpolation. 2.56 In tween decks the frame lower ends are to be welded to the deck plating. The upper ends of frames are to be carried to the

deck plating and welded thereto. Beams are to be carried to the inner edges of frames with a minimal gap. Beam knees are to have a face plate or flange. The ends of intermediate frames are to be attached to longitudinal intercostals, decks or platforms. 2.57 Side longitudinals are to be attached to transverse bulkheads with knees. Height and width of the knees are to comply with the basic Rules. 2.58 The bulwark is to be inclined towards the centre line of the ship - or be fitted inboard of the ships side - at not less than 0,1 of its height. Bulwark stays welded to sheerstrake are to be so constructed as to prevent deck plating damage in case of bumping. 3. Provisions at the stern 3.1 In stern trawlers the thickness of the bottom plating in way of the "overhanging" part of the stern shall not be less than: t = 2, 6 ⋅ a ⋅ L ⋅ k ⋅ f 2 + Δt [mm] k = material factor according to 2.421 f2 = 1,1 − 1 ⎛a⎞ ⎜ ⎟ 2 ⎝b⎠ 2 f2max = 1,0 a = smaller

breadth of plate panel b = larger breadth of plate panel Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Δt Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures = thickness increase for vessel speed v0 greater than 1,2 ⋅ L [kn] or 10 kn = 0,5 mm for each knot exceeding the above values Δtmin = 0,5 mm Where the catch is dragged onto the weather deck, it is recommended that the stern ramp be longitudinally framed with transverses fitted at intervals not exceeding four frame spacings. The stern ramp longitudinals are to be spaced not more than 600 mm apart. 4.2 The plate thickness of the aft ramp of stern trawlers is not to be less than: Δtmax = 2,0 mm The stern ramp is to be so constructed as to avoid flat of bottom in way of stern counter. 3.2 In stern trawlers the shell strake in way of the construction waterline from stern to the aft perpendicular is recommended to have a thickness as required for the stern ramp in 4. for protection against local damage. Where the

longitudinal framing system is adopted, the side girders are to be fitted not more than two longitudinal frame spacings apart. 4. Chapter 8 Page 3–5 Provisions at the stern ramp 4.1 The ramp should be preferably stiffened in its longitudinal direction. The transition radius between deck and ramp should be as large as possible, but should not be less than 300 mm. The connection of stern ramp sides to transom plating and of ramp deck to bottom plating are to have a radius of rounding not less than 200 mm. This connection may be made by using a bar not less than 70 mm in diameter. Stern ramp sides are, in general, to be carried downwards to the shell plating and forward to the after peak bulkhead and are to be smoothly tapered into deck girders and transverses. inner planning of ramp t = (8 + 0,1⋅ L) k tmin = 12 ⋅ k [mm] [mm] 4.3 The thickness of inner plating of the ramp forming the ramp sides is not to be less than. tmin = (5,5 + 0, 02 ⋅ L) k + 2 [mm] In the lower part

adjacent to the ramp, a strengthened strake is to be provided having a thickness of not less than the thickness required under 5.2 See Fig33 4.4 Protection from excessive wear, especially by wire ropes when dragging the catch, should be provided by the following measures: – protection of transom plating with half-round bars of at least 70 mm in diameter, which are to be fitted inclined and secured by welding – protection of junction line of rounding and flat side with half-round steel bars welded along the line, but not farther than 200 mm from the transom ramp Section A - A A ~ 1000 A bobbin of trawl greater as diameter of bobbin of trawl, but not less than 700 mm strengthened strake abt. half bobbin diameter Fig. 33 Strengthening arrangement at the stern ramp Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 3–6 – – 5. Section 3 C Special Requirements for Hull Structures for vessels engaged in pelagic fishing, protection and stiffening of the stern ramp

sides with longitudinal half-round steel bars of at least 70 mm in diameter, welded to the sides and spaced not more than 200 mm apart; the edge of the upper bar is not to be less than 650 mm above the ramp deck plating alternatively protection by doubling plates at the top and bottom roundings over the full breadth of the ramp and doubling strips at least 400 mm wide at the sides over the ramp length Strengthening of the weather deck Under trawl winches, trawl gallows, windlasses and centre fairleads, beams and substructures of adequate strength are to be fitted. The thickness of the deck plating is to be suitably increased, even if wood sheathing will be fitted. C. Fish Holds 1. General 1.1 Basic requirements The following basic requirements shall be met during operation of the fish holds: – during loading of fish holds with a longitudinal bulkhead, the level of cargo shall be at any time approximately the same on both sides of the bulkhead – cargo not carried in

tanks, is drained before loading – fish holds fully loaded with fish treated with preserving agent have to be checked concerning uncontrolled swelling 2. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Fish flaps Fish flaps of stern trawlers shall be power operated and capable of being controlled from any position which provides an unobstructed view of the operation of the flaps. 3. Portable fish hold divisions 3.1 General 3.11 Task of the portable fish hold divisions is to properly secure the catch against shifting which could cause dangerous trim or heel of the vessel. 3.12 Every portable fish hold division is to extend from the bottom of the hold to the deck. 3.13 One longitudinal division is to be fitted where the greatest internal cargo hold breadth is 6 m. If the breadth exceeds 6 m, at least 2 longitudinal divisions are to be fitted so that the distance between longitudinal divisions or between these and the vessel‘s side does not extend 3 m. Longitudinal divisions are to be positioned

symmetrically to the vessel’s centre line. 3.14 It is assumed that in vessels having one longitudinal division, the level of cargo is at any time during loading approximately the same on both sides of the division. 3.15 The requirements of 3.12 to 314 are based on the assumption that the portable fish hold divisions consist of vertical uprights with horizontal wooden boards, see Fig. 34 3.16 The longitudinal distance l between uprights or between permanent transverse bulkheads and uprights should normally not exceed 2,0 m. 3.17 Arrangements and details of the fish hold divisions are to be submitted for approval. 1.2 No sharp corners or projections shall be allowed in fish holds or fish tanks, compare D., to facilitate cleaning and reduce inherent dangers to workers in these holds or tanks. 1.3 Pipes and chains or conduits passing through the fish hold shall, if practicable, be installed flush with ceilings or boxed in and adequately insulated in a manner facilitating access for

inspection and maintenance. 1.4 In fish holds, and also fish processing spaces, in which non-packed salted catch or salt is stored or which are exposed to the detrimental effect of catch wastes and seawater, the plating thickness is to be increased by 1 mm as compared to that required by the relevant Sections of the basic Rules. Where the structure is so influenced from both sides, relevant thickness is to be increased by 2 mm h h b b Fig. 34 Arrangement of uprights and horizontal boards Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.2 Section 3 C Special Requirements for Hull Structures Uprights The section modulus of steel or aluminium 3.21 uprights is not to be less than: W = c ⋅ h3 (b + A) k [cm3] The minimum section modulus is 40 ⋅ k [cm3] c = 1,6 where one longitudinal division is fitted = 2,0 where two or more longitudinal divisions are fitted h = free span of upright [m] b = distance between the uprights in the vessels transverse direction [m] A =

distance between uprights in the vessels longitudinal direction [m] k = material factor see B.2421 3.22 The uprights are to be secured at top and bottom as to allow transmission of reaction forces in adjacent structures. 3.23 If openings are cut in the uprights for fitting of the upper boards, the boards in the opening are to be locked in position to prevent their slipping out of the guide. 3.3 Portable boards The section modulus of the portable shifting 3.31 boards is to be determined by the following formula: W = k ⋅ 0,8 ⋅ e ⋅ p ⋅ A2 [cm3] Chapter 8 Page 3–7 y = distance of load centre from the vertical longitudinal central plane of tank [m] aV = acceleration factor according to GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 4, C.11 3.32 In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to be fitted at connections or contact surfaces between steel and aluminium. Corrugated boards are to be made of seawater resistant aluminium. The minimum thickness of wooden

boards should be 65 mm. 4. Removable bulkheads of steel or aluminium 4.1 Removable steel or aluminium bulkheads which are used in connection with hatches are to be double plated with the stiffeners placed horizontally. Internal surfaces of steel bulkheads are to be covered by a corrosion-resistant coating. 4.2 The plate thickness is to be at least: t = c ⋅ s ⋅ h + 0,5 [mm] tmin = 6 mm c = 3,4 for steel = 4,7 for aluminium s = stiffener spacing [m] h = height [m] from upper edge of bulkhead to lower edge of plating 4.3 The section modulus of horizontal stiffeners is not to be less than: W = c ⋅ A2 ⋅ s ⋅ h [cm3] e = vertical width of board [m] A = span of board [m] according to Fig. 34 = b in vessels transverse direction = l in vessels longitudinal direction The design pressure p at the lowest board is the greater of the following values: p1 = 10 ⋅ h1 ⋅ (1 + aV) [kN/m2] or ⎡ ⎤ ⎛ b ⎞ p2 = 10 ⋅ ⎢ h1 ⋅ cos 20° + ⎜ + y ⎟ ⋅ sin 20°⎥

[kN/m2] ⎝2 ⎠ ⎣ ⎦ h1 = h + 0,5 m [m] h = height from bottom of fish hold to top of hold [m], compare Fig. 34 b = upper breadth of hold [m] c = 7,0 for steel = 13,5 for aluminium A = stiffener span [m] s = stiffener spacing [m] h = height [m] from midpoint of stiffener span to top of bulkhead For aluminium materials with a guaranteed 0,1% tensile proof stress Rp0,1 which exceeds 125 N/mm2, the value of W can be reduced in direct proportion. If however, the materials guaranteed Rp0,2 value is greater than 70 % of the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength Rm, the lower value is to be used as a basis for scantlings. 4.4 The moment of inertia of stiffeners is not to be less than: I = c ⋅ 3 W 4 [cm4] Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 3–8 c Section 3 F Special Requirements for Hull Structures = 2,2 for steel = 5,75 for aluminium 4.5 Guides for removable bulkheads are to have brackets at 1 m spacing. The depth of the support at the sides of

removable bulkheads is to be at least equal to the bulkhead thickness and not less to 65 mm. The minimum thickness of sections or plates, which form the guides is 10 mm. If necessary, removable bulkheads are to be equipped with a securing arrangement to prevent the bulkhead from floating. 4.6 Removable aluminium bulkheads are to be constructed of a seawater-resistant alloy. In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to be fitted at connections or contact surfaces between steel and aluminium. D. Fish Tanks Tanks for the transport of fish in refrigerated seawater (RSW) have to meet the following requirements. 1. Scantlings In general RSW tanks are open at the top and as the tank is filled with fish, the equivalent volume of water flows over on the weather deck. Therefore the tank can be dimensioned according to the GL Rules defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12 using a pressure p1 as defined in C.331 but with h = distance from load centre to top of

overflow W I - Part 1 GL 2007 = as given in 4.3 for steel The thickness of the partial bulkhead plating is to be not less than that of the top strake of the corresponding watertight bulkhead below the deck where the considered processing hold is located. Partial bulkheads are to be strengthened with horizontal stiffeners according to the basic Rules. Strengthening with vertical stiffeners is permitted with fitting the horizontal stiffeners between the side shell and the nearest vertical stiffener in compliance with B.254 Partial bulkheads are to be interconnected with deck transverses supported by pillars in a required number. Alternative structural arrangements may be used if approved as equivalent by GL. Where multi-tier deckhouses are arranged above the processing holds, rigid supporting members (bulkheads, partial bulkheads) are to be fitted within the processing holds. 3. Foundations The assembly drawings of the main components of the processing plant with the information

of weight, centre of gravity and possibility of bolting them to the deck of the processing hold have to be submitted to GL. In addition the dynamic behaviour of the machinery has to be documented It is recommended to summarize this data in a load plan The calculation of the individual foundations for the main components has to be submitted to GL for approval. 4. Discharge of refuse and water For filling, drainage, sounding, etc. compare Section 4. It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse and water accumulating in the course of processing the catch may be discharged or carried outboards without endangering the vessel. For details see Section 4, D E. Fish Processing Holds F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines 1. General 1. General 2. Filling and drainage Design and testing of fish processing machinery is not subject to Classification by GL. However, approval of foundations of the machinery taking into account the forces and their integration into the hull structure as

well as safety aspects for the vessel resulting from the processing procedure are part of Classification. 1.1 Membrane type tanks for brines are tanks consisting of a liquid tight barrier (membrane) which is supported through insulation by a load bearing tank structure. The load bearing tank is normally formed by the hull structure (bulkheads, decks, shell, inner bottom). 2. 1.2 The load bearing tank structure is to comply with the relevant requirements for decks, shell, inner bottom, etc., but must at least have scantlings complying with the requirements stipulated in B Bulkheads Where in processing holds located above the bulkhead deck the distance between the bulkheads forming the boundaries of that space exceeds 30 m, partial bulkheads extending inboard for not less than 0,5 of the tween deck height are to be fitted on the bulkhead deck at each side of the vessel in line with watertight bulkheads. 1.3 Prefabricated membrane tanks are to be dimensioned such that they are

capable of being transported without undue overstressing the membrane walls. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 3 G Special Requirements for Hull Structures 1.4 Details of the membrane and the insulation material (preferably, polyurethane foam) are to be submitted for approval. 2. Testing for tightness of the membrane The tanks are to be suitably tested for tight2.1 ness by applying a test pressure (air pressure) of not less than 0,15 bar gauge. 2.2 Hollow spaces between the membrane and the hull are to be tested for tightness as stipulated under 2.1 2.3 Prior to installation of the membrane, shell, decks, bulkheads, etc. are to be hose tested for tightness 3. Foam material, foam application The foam material shall have sufficient com3.1 pressive strength to transmit the liquid pressures from the membrane to the hull. 3.2 The foam application is to be carried out according to manufacturers instructions. 3.3 It is to be assured that all hollow spaces

between hull and membrane are completely filled with foam. G. Side Doors 1. General In general, doors shall not extend below the 1.1 load waterline. 1.2 At the corners of the doors strengthened plates are to be provided which are to extend over a length of at least 1,5 frame spacings each beyond the doors. 1.3 Doors shall be designed to preferably open outwards. 1.4 Door openings in the shell are to have well rounded corners and adequate compensation is to be Chapter 8 Page 3–9 arranged with web frames at sides and stringers or equivalent above and below. 2. Scantlings In general the strength of side doors is to be 2.1 equivalent to the strength of the surrounding structure. 2.2 Doors are to be adequately stiffened. Where necessary, stiffeners are to be supported by girders. Means are to be provided to prevent movement of the doors when closed. Adequate strength is to be provided in the connections of the lifting/manoeuvring arms and hinges to the door structure and to

the ship structure. 2.3 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, the design of the hinges should take into account the vessel’s angle of trim which may result in uneven loading on the hinges. 2.4 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, plate thickness and stiffeners will be specially considered. 2.5 Thickness of the door plating, section modulus and shear area of stiffeners and girders are to be determined according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 6. 2.6 The girder system is to have sufficient stiffness to ensure integrity of the boundary support of the door. Edge stiffeners/girders should be adequately stiffened against rotation. For edge girders supporting main door girders between securing devices, the moment of inertia is to be increased in relation to the additional force. 3. Closing and securing devices of doors The design force for closing and securing 3.1 devices are to determined according to the GL Rules defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures,

Section 6, J. 3.2 The closing and/or supporting devices are to be fitted not more than 2,5 m apart and as close to corner as possible. However, a large number of small devices should be avoided. The total vertical and horizontal force may normally be considered as equally distributed between the devices. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 4 B Hull Outfit Chapter 8 Page 4–1 Section 4 Hull Outfit A. Sheathings and Ceilings 1. Deck sheathings 1.1 Generally the different deck sheathings of a fishing vessel on the weatherdeck, on superstructures and deckhouses have to meet the following requirements: space for drainage of water or leakage oil. The ceiling may be laid directly on the inner bottom plating, if embedded in preservation and sealing compound. 2.4 It is recommended to fit double ceilings under deck openings used for loading/unloading. 2.5 The manholes are to be protected by a steel coaming welded around each manhole

and shall be fitted with a cover of wood or steel, or by other suitable means. – protection of the hull structure against corrosion in a standard climate to be defined by the owner – good connection to the deck area – fire-resistant or at least of low flammability 3. – special requirements of the owner Where tanks are intended to carry liquids at temperatures exceeding 40 °C, their boundaries facing holds for transport or storage shall be fitted with a ceiling. At vertical walls, sparred ceilings may be sufficient. The ceiling may be dispensed only with consent of the Flag State Administration. 1.2 The surface of all decks shall be so designed or treated as to minimize the slip hazard for personnel. In particular, decks of working areas, such as machinery spaces, in galleys, at winches and where fish is handled as well as at the foot and head of ladders and in front of doors, shall be provided with anti-skid surfaces. 1.3 Before applying the deck sheathing the

surface preparation of the relevant deck area has to be prepared according to the specification of the sheathing supplier. 1.4 The compliance with the requirements defined in 1.1 and 12 has to be shown by the supplier by tests with a reasonable number of specimens according to recognized standards and approved by GL. The samples have to be brought up on the relevant structural deck material utilized for the fishing vessel (steel, aluminium, GRP, etc.) 2. Bottom ceiling 2.1 If a vessel contains holds for the transport of materials or fish products a tight bottom ceiling is to be fitted on the bottom of such a hold. It is recommended, that the thickness of a wooden ceiling is not less than 60 mm. If no ceiling is provided, GL will decide whether the thickness of the load bearing bottom areas has to be increased case by case. If operation of fork lift trucks is planned, only steel decks without wooden ceiling have to be provided. 2.2 On single bottoms, ceilings are to be removable for

inspection of bottom plating at any time. 2.3 Ceilings on double bottoms are to be laid on battens not less than 12,5 mm thick providing a clear B. Ceiling at tank bulkheads Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes 1. Each tank is to be fitted with air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes. The air pipes are in general to be led to above the exposed deck. For the arrangement and scantlings of pipes see Section 9d. For the height from the deck to the point where the water may have access see Section 2, Table 2.2 2. Suitable closing appliances are to be provided for air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes. Where fishing gear or materials, etc. are carried on deck, the closing appliances are to be readily accessible at all times. In vessels for which flooding calculations are to be made, the ends of the air pipes are to be above the damage waterline in the flooded condition. Where they immerse at intermediate stages of flooding, these conditions are to be examined separately.

3. Closely under the inner bottom or the tank top, holes are to be cut into floor plates and side girders as well as into beams, girders, etc., to give the air free access to the air pipes. Besides, all floor plates and side girders are to be provided with limbers to permit the water or oil to reach the pump suctions. 4. Sounding pipes are to be extended to directly above the tank bottom. The shell plating is to be strengthened by thicker plates or doubling plates under the sounding pipes. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 4–2 C. Section 4 D Hull Outfit Ventilators I - Part 1 GL 2007 Table 4.1 1. The height of ventilator coamings and the relevant closing appliances on the exposed deck, quarter deck and on exposed superstructure decks are defined in Section 2, B.6 For the case of fire, draughttight fire dampers are to be fitted 2. Ventilators of holds are not to have any connection with other spaces. 3. The thickness of the coaming plates is to be 1,0 mm larger

than the thickness of the surrounding deck. 4. The thickness of ventilator posts should be at least equal to the thickness of coamings as per 3. The wall thickness of ventilator posts of a clear sectional area exceeding 1600 cm2 is to be increased according to the expected loads. 5. Generally, the coamings and posts shall pass through the deck and shall be welded to the deck plating from above and below. Where coamings or posts are welded on the deck plating, fillet welds of a = 0,5 × t (t = thickness of the thinner plate) should be adopted for welding inside and outside, where applicable. 6. Coamings and posts particularly exposed to wash of the sea are to be efficiently connected with the vessels structure. Coamings of a height exceeding 900 mm are to be specially strengthened. 7. Where beams are pierced by ventilator coamings, carlings of adequate scantlings are to be fitted between the beams in order to maintain the strength of the deck. D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish

Holds 1. Cargo fish holds 1.1 There is to be a good drainage of water, oil or brine from the cargo. Trunks and gutters are to be located such that they will provide at all times good drainage from all layers of cargo, throughout the hold. 1.2 In each bin there is to be drainage to a bilge well through vertical drainage trunks of perforated plates, grating, etc. The minimum acceptable perforated circumference per trunk is 0,3 m The number of trunks and the total length of perforated circumference are defined in Table 4.1 The perforations are to consist of holes with a diameter of 4 to 8 mm or equivalent Drainage arrangement in cargo fish holds Area A of bin below deck [m2] Minimum number of drainage trunks per bin Total length of perforated trunk circumference per bin [m] A < 10 2 0,8 10 ≤ A < 15 3 1,0 15 ≤ A < 20 3 1,2 20 ≤ A < 25 4 1,4 25 ≤ A < 30 4 1,6 30 ≤ A < 35 5 1,8 1.3 Each cargo hold shall have a bilge well at its after end.

If the length of the watertight compartment exceeds 9 m, there shall also be a bilge well at the forward end. 1.4 Bilge wells of not less than 0,2 m3 capacity are to be arranged in fish holds. They are to be equipped with an arrangement for rinsing the bilge sections, which is to be secured against unintentional operation. 1.5 From each bilge well, a separate branch suction line shall be led to the machinery space. The internal diameter of this line is to be as required for main bilge lines. Minimum diameter is 50 mm 1.6 The bilge distribution chest valves are to be of screw-down non-return type. The valve chest collecting branch suction lines from the cargo fish holds are to have no connections from dry compartments. The valve chest is to be directly connected to the largest bilge pump. In addition, a connection is to be provided to another bilge pump All valves are to be fitted in readily accessible positions. 1.7 Means for back-flushing bilge suctions shall be provided. The

connecting of water supply may be done by portable means, e.g hoses 2. Cargo fish tween deck 2.1 If fish shall be carried loose in tween deck satisfactory arrangement of drainage has to be provided. The drainage may be led to the bilge well in the hold below or arranged as described in 1. 2.2 For tween deck compartments having no openings where sea may penetrate and where the fish processing requires no supply of water, drainage to bilge well in the machinery space may be accepted. The drainage pipes shall have a self-closing valve at the machinery space side. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3. Section 4 E Hull Outfit Fish processing areas 3.1 It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse and water accumulating in the course of processing of the catch may be discharged or carried outboards without endangering the vessel. The bilge pumps are to have sufficient power. 3.2 Where the fish processing holds are located below the weather deck, the refuse and water

accumulating in the course of processing are to be discharged outboards through suitable pumps or conveyor worms. The respective outlets at the shell shall be located as near as possible to the weather deck and are to be closable by means of sluice valves. Where the discharge line is raised up above the weather deck, a swing check valve may be fitted instead of a sluice valve. Where the pumps are sucking from outboard, a blocking device is required to prevent water from being pumped into the tween deck space. 3.3 Stone shoots in fish processing decks are to be fitted as high as practicable. The lowest point of the inner openings shall not come to water at inclinations of less than 15°, vessel fully loaded. In addition to the watertight covers of the stone shoots swell shutters are to be fitted at the shell. 3.4 Bilge wells For bilge wells see 1.4 and 15 4. Fish tanks The requirements for fish tanks are included in Section 3, D. 5. Fish pounds Fixed and removable parts of the

fish pounds for holding the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such a way that water can drain out of them without hindrance. E. Protective Measures 1. General measures 1.1 A lifeline system shall be designed to be effective for all needs, and the necessary wires, ropes, shackles, eye bolts and cleats shall be provided. 1.2 Deck openings provided with coamings or sills of less than 600 mm in height shall be provided with guards, such as hinged or portable railings or nettings. The Administration may exempt small openings such as fish scuttles from compliance with these requirements. Chapter 8 Page 4–3 1.3 Skylights or other similar openings shall be fitted with protective bars not more than 350 mm apart, compare Section 2, B.116 The Administration may exempt small openings from compliance with this requirement. 2. Deck openings 2.1 Hinged covers of hatchways, manholes and other openings shall be protected against

accidental closing. In particular, heavy covers on escape hatches shall be equipped with counterweights and so constructed as to be capable of being opened from each side of the cover. 2.2 Dimension of access hatches shall be not less than 600 mm by 600 mm or 600 mm diameter. 2.3 Where practicable, hand-holds shall be provided above the level of the deck over escape openings. 2.4 Hatch covers are to be dimensioned and arranged according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 17, B. 3. Bulwarks, rails and guards 3.1 Efficient bulwarks or guard rails shall be fitted on all exposed parts of the working deck and on superstructure decks if they are working platforms. The height of bulwarks or guard rails above deck shall be at least 1m. Where this height would interfere with the normal operation of the vessel, a lesser height may be approved by the Flag State Administration. 3.2 The minimum vertical distance from the deepest operation waterline to the lowest point of the

top of the bulwark, or to the edge of working deck if guard rails are fitted, shall ensure adequate protection of the crew from water shipped on deck, taking into account the sea states and the weather conditions in which the vessel may operate, the areas of operation, type of vessel and its method of fishing and shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. 3.3 Guard-rails are to be constructed in accordance with DIN 81702 or equivalent standards. Equivalent constructions of sufficient strength and safety can be accepted. Clearance below the lowest course of guard rails to the foot bar shall not exceed 230 mm, other courses shall not be more than 380 mm apart. Rails shall be free from sharp points, edges and corners and shall be of adequate strength. In a vessel with rounded gunwales guard rail supports shall be placed on the flat part of the deck. Guard rail stanchions are not to be welded to the shell plating and the distance between stanchions shall not be more than 1,5 m.

Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 4–4 Section 4 F Hull Outfit 3.4 Means such as guard rails, lifelines, gangways or under deck passages to protect the crew in moving between accommodation, machinery and other working spaces shall be provided to the satisfaction of GL. Storm rails shall be fitted as necessary to the outside of all deckhouses and casings to secure safety of passage or work for the crew. 3.5 Stern trawlers shall be provided with suitable protection such as doors, gates or nets at the top of the stern ramp at the same height as the adjacent bulwark or guard rails. When such protection is not in position a chain or other means of protection shall be provided across the ramp. 4. Stairways and ladders For the safety of the crew, stairways and ladders of adequate size and strength with handrails and non-slip treads shall be provided to the satisfaction of GL. See also F.49 I - Part 1 GL 2007 fixing point of shrouds. The length of the mast top above the

fixing point of shrouds is not to exceed 1/3 h. 2.13 Masts according to 2.12 may be gradually tapered towards the fixing point of shrouds to 75 per cent of the diameter at the uppermost support. The plate thickness is not to be less than 1/70 of the diameter or at least 4 mm (see 4.1) 2.14 Wire ropes for shrouds are to be thickly galvanized. It is recommended to use wire ropes composed of a minimum number of thick wires, as for instance a rope construction 6 × 7 with a tensile breaking strength of 1570 N/mm2 on which Table 4.2 is based. Other rope constructions shall be of equivalent stiffness. 2.15 Where masts are stayed forward and backwards by two shrouds on each side of the vessel, steel wire ropes are to be used according to Table 4.2 Table 4.2 F. Signal and Radar Masts 1. General 1.1 Drawings of masts, mast substructures and hull connections are to be submitted for approval. 1.2 Loose and accessory parts are to comply with the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and

Guidelines, Part 2 – Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Construction and Survey of Lifting Appliances. All parts which shall be supervised and certified by GL are to be individually tested. Definition of ropes for stays h [m] 6 8 10 12 14 16 Rope diameter [mm] 14 16 18 20 22 24 Nominal size of shackle, rigging screw, rope socket 1,6 2,0 2,5 3,0 4,0 4,0 h = height of shroud fixing point above shroud foot point 2.16 Where steel wire ropes according to Table 4.2 are used, the following conditions apply: b ≥ 0,3 ⋅ h 0,15 ⋅ h ≤ a ≤ b 1.3 Other masts than covered by 2. and 3 as well as special construction forms, shall as regards dimensions and design, in each case be individually agreed with GL. a = the longitudinal distance from a shrouds foot point to its fixing point b = the transverse distance from a shrouds foot point to its fixing point 2. Alternative arrangements of stayings are to be of

equivalent stiffness. Signal masts The following requirements apply to single tubular or equivalent rectangular sections made of steel with an ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm², which are typically designed to carry only signals (navigation lanterns, flag and day signals). 2.1 Stayed masts 2.11 Stayed masts may be constructed as simply supported masts (rocker masts) or may be supported by one or more decks (constraint masts). 2.12 The diameter of stayed steel masts at the uppermost support is to be at least 20 mm for each 1 m height of mast h from the uppermost support to the 2.2 Unstayed masts 2.21 Unstayed masts may be completely constrained in the uppermost deck or be supported by two or more decks. In general, the fastenings of masts to the hull of a vessel should extend over at least one deck height. 2.22 The scantlings for unstayed steel masts are given in the Table 4.3 2.23 The diameter of masts may be gradually tapered to D/2 at the height of 0,75 lm. Source:

http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 4 Table 4.3 Scantlings of unstayed steel masts Length of mast lm [m] 6 D×t [mm] 160 × 4 8 G 10 Hull Outfit 12 Chapter 8 Page 4–5 14 220 × 4 290 × 4,5 360 × 5,5 430 × 6,5 lm = length of mast from uppermost support to the top D = diameter of mast at uppermost support t = plate thickness of mast 3. Radar masts These masts are typically of 3-leg, box girder or frame work design. 3.1 For dimensioning the dead loads, acceleration forces and wind loads are to be considered. 3.2 Where necessary additional loads, e.g loads caused by the sea, fastening of crane booms or tension wires are also to be considered. 3.3 The design loads for 3.1 and 32 as well as the allowable stresses can be taken from the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Construction and Survey of Lifting Appliances. 3.4 In case of 3-leg masts the

individual leg forces shall be calculated with the before mentioned forces acting in the direction of a considered leg and rectangular to the two other legs. 3.5 Single tubular or rectangular masts mounted on the top of box girder or frame work masts may be dimensioned according to 2. 3.6 In case of thin walled box girder masts a stiffening and/or additional buckling stiffeners may be necessary. 4. 4.4 In case of tubular constructions all welded fastenings and connections have to be of full penetration weld type. Structural details 4.1 Steel masts closed all-round shall have a wall thickness of at least 4 mm. For masts not closed all-round the minimum wall thickness is 6 mm. For masts used as funnels a corrosion addition of at least 1 mm is required. 4.2 The foundations of the mast integrated in the deck structure are to be dimensioned in accordance with the acting forces. 4.3 Doubling plates at mast feet are permissible only for the transmission of compressive forces. 4.5 If

necessary, slim tubular structures are to be additionally stayed or supported in order to avoid vibrations. 4.6 The dimensioning normally does not require a calculation of vibrations. However, in case of undue vibrations occurring during the vessel’s trial a respective calculation will be required. 4.7 For determining scantlings of masts made from aluminium or austenitic steel see Section 3. 4.8 At masts solid steel ladders have to be fixed at least up to 1,50 m below top, if they have to be climbed for operational or maintenance purposes. Above the ladders, suitable handgrips are necessary. 4.9 If possible from the construction point of view, ladders have to be at least 0,30 m wide. The distance between the rungs shall be 0,30 m. The horizontal distance of the rung centre from fixed structural components shall not be less than 0,15 m. The rungs shall be aligned and be made of square steel bars 20/20 set up on edge. 4.10 Platforms on masts which have to be used for operational

reasons, shall have a rail of at least 0,90 m in height with one intermediate bar. Safe access from the mast ladders to the platform is to be provided. 4.11 If necessary on masts a safety installation consisting of foot, back, and hand rings enabling safe work in places of operating and maintenance has to be provided. G. Life-Saving Appliances 1. It is assumed that for the arrangement and operation of lifeboats and other life-saving appliances the regulations defined by the Administration are complied with. For regulations and guidelines see Section 1, A.3 2. The designing and testing of life saving appliances are not part of Classification. However, approval of the hull structure in way of the launching appliances, taking into account the reaction forces from the relevant appliances, is part of Classification. Note In all cases where GL is requested to approve the lifesaving appliances, the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life Saving Appliances, Lifting

Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Life-Saving Launching Appliances apply. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment B Chapter 8 Page 5–1 Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment A. General 1. Scope Anchor equipment designed for quick and safe operation shall be provided which consists of anchoring equipment, anchor chains and wire ropes, stoppers and a windlass or other arrangements for dropping and hoisting the anchor and for holding the vessel at anchor in all foreseeable service conditions. = moulded displacement [t] in seawater having a density of 1,025 t/m3 to the summer load waterline h = effective height from the summer load waterline to the top of the uppermost house = a + Σhi Vessels shall be provided with adequate mooring equipment for safe mooring in all operating conditions. 2. Δ a = distance [m] from the summer load waterline, amidships, to the upper deck

at side Σhi = sum of height [m] on centreline of each tier of superstructures and deckhouses having a breadth greater than B/4. Deck sheer, if any, is to be ignored. Materials Vessels built under survey of GL and which are to have the mark  stated in their Certificate and in the Register Book have to be equipped with anchors and chain cables complying with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding and having been tested on approved machines in the presence of a GL Surveyor. For vessels having the Class Notation K affixed to their Character of Classification proof is sufficient that the anchors and chain cables have been properly tested B. Equipment Numeral 1. Equipment numeral ZF For the lowest tier "h" is to be measured at centre line from the upper deck or from an assumed deck line where there is local discontinuity in the upper deck A = area [m2], in profile view of the hull, superstructures and houses, having a breadth greater than B/4, above the summer load

waterline within the length L and up to the height h Where a deckhouse having a breadth greater than B/4 is located above a deckhouse having a breadth of B/4 or less, the wide house is to be included and the narrow house ignored. The equipment numeral ZF is to be calculated as follows: A 3 ZF = Δ 2 + 2 ⋅ h ⋅ B + 10 1,5 m 1,5 m Screens of bulwarks 1,5 m or more in height above deck at side are to be regarded as parts of houses when determining h and A, e.g the area specially marked in Fig. 51 is to be included in A Bulwark L/2 Fig. 51 a DWL L/2 Bulwark relevant for equipment numeral Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 5–2 2. Section 5 C Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Equipment numeral ZK The equipment numeral ZK is to be calculated as follows: ZK 1 = L (B + H ) + ∑A⋅h 2 A = length of individual superstructures and deckhouses [m] within length L h = height of individual superstructures and deckhouses at centreline of the vessel [m]

Deckhouses having a breadth of less than B/4 may be ignored. 3. Application Anchors, chain cables and the recommended mooring ropes are to be determined in accordance with the equipment numbers ZF according to 1. and ZK according to 2 respectively 3.1 Vessels with ZF > 720 Where ZF exceeds 720 the requirements of the GL Rules defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 18 apply. 3.2 Vessels with L ≥ 45 m and ZF ≤ 720 For vessels with ZF less or equal to 720 and no Class Notation K, Table 5.1 applies The index "F" will be affixed to their equipment register number in the Certificate and in the Register Book. 3.3 Vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m and Notation K For vessels with a length 24 m ≤ L < 45 m and which will have the Class Notation K attached to their Character of Classification the equipment numeral ZK and Table 5.2 apply The index "FC" will be affixed to their equipment register number in the Certificate and in the Register Book.

Without Class Notation K Table 5.1 applies 3.4 Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m The equipment is to be determined for the length L in Table 5.2 The index "FC" will be affixed to their equipment register number in the Certificate and in the Register Book. C. Anchors 1. Arrangement The rule bower anchors are to be connected to their chain cables and positioned on board ready for use. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Normally each anchor should be stowed in the hawse and hawse pipe in such a way, that it remains firmly secured in seagoing conditions. Other equivalent arrangements may be possible and have to be in accordance with relevant maritime Administration rules. If an anchor arrangement is located at the aft part of the vessel, it has to be guaranteed, that the propeller will be protected against damage by chain cable or steel wire. Anchor manoeuvring has to be carried out with the propulsion engine in the standby condition. 2. Anchor design 2.1 Anchors have to be of

approved design. The mass of the heads of patent (ordinary stockless) anchors, including pins and fittings, is not to be less than 60 per cent of the total mass of the anchor. 2.2 For stock anchors, the total mass of the anchor, including stock, shall comply with the values in Tables 5.1 or 52 The mass of the stock shall be 20 percent of this total mass. 2.3 The mass of each individual bower anchor may vary by up to 7 per cent above or below the required individual mass provided that the total mass of all bower anchors is not less than the sum of the required individual masses. 3. High holding power anchors 3.1 Where special anchors are approved by GL as "High Holding Power Anchors" (HHP), the anchor mass may be 75 per cent of anchor mass as per Table 5.1 or 52 "High Holding Power Anchors" are anchors which are suitable for the vessels use at any time and which do not require prior adjustment or special placement on sea bed. 3.2 For approval as a "High

Holding Power Anchor", satisfactory tests are to be made on various types of bottom and the anchor is to have a holding power at least twice that of a patent anchor ("Admiralty Standard Stockless") of the same mass. These tests have to be approved by GL. 3.3 Dimensioning of chain cable and of windlass is to be based on the undiminished anchor mass according to Table 5.1 or 52 4. Holding equipment for vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m Scallop rakes and comparable items may be used in lieu of anchors if they are of equivalent holding power. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 5 Table 5.1 Anchor, chain cables and ropes No. for register Equipment numeral ZF – – 1 2 101 F –30 D Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8 Page 5–3 2 bower Stud link chain cables 1 for bower anchors Recommended mooring ropes anchors Weight Diameter Total Breaking per Number Length length load d1 d2 d3 anchor [kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [mm] – [m] [kN] 3 70

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 137,5 11 11 11 2 40 25 102 F 30 - 40 80 165 11 11 11 2 50 30 103 F 40 - 50 100 192,5 11 11 11 2 60 30 104 F 50 - 60 120 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 60 30 105 F 60 - 70 140 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 80 30 106 F 70 - 80 160 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35 107 F 80 - 90 180 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35 108 F 90 -100 210 220 16 14 14 2 110 35 109 F 100 -110 240 220 16 14 14 2 110 40 110 F 110 -120 270 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 40 111 F 120 -130 300 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 45 112 F 130 -140 340 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 45 113 F 140 -150 390 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 50 114 F 150 -175 480 275 22 19 19 2 120 55 115 F 175 -205 570 302,5 24 20,5 20,5 2 120 60 116 F 205 -240 660 302,5 26 22 20,5 2 120 65 117 F 240 -280 780 330 28 24 22 3 120 70 118 F 280 -320 900 357,5 30 26 24 3 140 80 119 F 320 -360 1020 357,5 32 28

24 3 140 85 120 F 360 -400 1140 385 34 30 26 3 140 95 121 F 400 -450 1290 385 36 32 28 3 140 100 122 F 450 -500 1440 412,5 38 34 30 3 140 110 123 F 500 -550 1590 412,5 40 34 30 4 160 120 124 F 550 -600 1740 440 42 36 32 4 160 130 125 F 600 -660 1920 440 44 38 34 4 160 145 126 F 660 -720 2100 440 46 40 36 4 160 160 Remarks: 1 studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables up to 16 mm diameter d1 = chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality) d2 = chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality) d3 = chain diameter Grade K 3 (extra special quality) D. Chain Cables 1. Chain cable diameters given in Tables 5.1 and 5.2 apply to chain cables made of chain cable materials specified in the requirements of the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 4 – Equipment for following grades: – Grade K 1 (ordinary

quality) – Grade K 2 (special quality) – Grade K 3 (extra special quality) Grade K 1 material used for chain cables in conjunction with "High Holding Power Anchors" shall have a tensile strength Rm of not less than 400 N/mm2. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 5–4 Table 5.2 No. for register – Section 5 E Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1 GL 2007 Anchors, chain cables and ropes of fishing vessels in coastal operation Equipment Length numeral L [m] Bower anchors ZK Number – – Weight per anchor [kg] Stud link chain cables 1 for bower anchor Diameter Total length d1 [m] [mm] Recommended mooring ropes Diameter d2 Total length d4 d5 [mm] [m] [mm] [mm] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 105 FC 12 - 14 – 2 60 95,0 11,0 11,0 80 – 20 106 FC 14 - 17 – 2 80 110,0 11,0 11,0 100 10 20 107 FC 17 - 20 – 2 95 110,0 12,5 12,5 120 10 20 108 FC –270 2 110 137,5 12,5 12,5 150 10 22

109 FC 270-300 2 140 165,0 14,0 12,5 180 10 22 110 FC 300-330 2 180 165,0 14,0 12,5 200 10 22 111 FC 330-360 2 210 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24 112 FC 360-400 2 250 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24 113 FC 400-450 2 300 247,5 17,5 16,0 225 10 24 114 FC 450-500 2 370 247,5 19,0 17,0 250 12 26 115 FC >500 2 440 275,0 22,0 19,0 250 12 26 20 - 45 Remarks: 1 studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 (or equivalent) of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables d1 = chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality) d2 = chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality) d4 = diameter of wire rope 6 × 24, nominal breaking strength: 1570 N/mm2 d5 = diameter of polyamid ropes of normal construction and manila ropes (Grade 1) The breaking load of polyester and polypropylen ropes is to be the same as of polyamid ropes. Grade K 2 and K 3 chain cables have to be purchased and quenched and tempered after

production from recognized manufacturers only. 2. The total length of chain given in Table 5.1 and Table 5.2 is to be divided in approximately equal parts between the two bower anchors. 3. Short link chain cables in accordance with DIN 766, or equivalent, of same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables of up to 16 mm diameter. 4. For connection of the anchor with the chain cable approved Kenter-type anchor shackles may be chosen in lieu of the common Dee-shackles. A forerunner with swivel is to be fitted between anchor and chain cable. In lieu of a forerunner with swivel an approved swivel shackle may be used. However, swivel shackles are not to be connected to the anchor shank unless specially approved. A sufficient number of suitable spare shackles are to be kept on board to facilitate fitting of the spare anchor at any time. On Owners request the swivel shackle may be dispensed with. 5. The attachment of inboard ends of chain cables to the vessels structure is to

be provided with a mean suitable to permit, in case of emergency, an easy slipping of chain cables to sea, operable from an accessible position outside the chain locker. The inboard ends of chain cables are to be secured to the structures by a fastening able to withstand a force not less than 15 % nor more than 30 % of the rated breaking load of the chain cable. E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables 1. Vessels with 30 m ≤ L < 45 m 1.1 The chain cable of one or two anchors may be replaced by a steel wire rope. 1.2 Where steel wire ropes are fitted in lieu of chain cables, the following is to be observed: Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 5 G Anchoring and Mooring Equipment 1.21 The length of the rope is to be equal to 1,5 times the corresponding tabular chain cable length. The breaking load of the rope is not to be less than the breaking load of the tabular chain cable of Grade K 1. 1.22 A short length of chain cable is to be fitted between anchor and

wire rope having a length of 12,5 m or equal to the distance between anchor in stowed position and winch, whichever is less. F. 2. Vessels with L < 30 m The chain cables of both anchors may be replaced by steel wire ropes. The requirements of 12 have to be considered. 3. Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m For vessels with L < 24 m, a manila or synthetic fibre rope of not less than 20 mm diameter may be fitted instead of the steel wire rope for the second anchor (see 1.) The breaking load of a manila rope is not to be less than the breaking load of the chain cable. Suitable means for holding the vessel at anchor (rope winch, bollard) and for lifting the anchor (rope drum or warping head of a rope winch or a trawl winch) are to be provided. The requirements of Section 6 are to be observed. 4. Anchors of 60 kg or less Where anchors of 60 kg or less are fitted, the following applies: 4.1 Manila or synthetic fibre ropes may be fitted for both anchors. The length of the rope is

not to be less than 1,5 times the required chain length. The rope diameter is not to be less than 20 mm. 4.2 Between anchor and anchor rope a short length of chain according to 1.22 is to be fitted 4.3 In lieu of the rope winch required according with 1.23 other suitable means for holding the vessel at anchor and lifting the anchor may be fitted, e.g bollard, warping head of trawl or rope winch. The requirements of Section 6 are to be observed. In special cases and upon application of the owner, the winch may be dispensed with if it is proved by trials that the anchor can be dropped and lifted by hand without exposing the crew to any danger. Chain Locker 1. The chain locker is to be of capacity and depth adequate to provide an easy direct lead of the cables through the chain pipes and self-stowing of the cables. The minimum required stowage capacity without mud box for the two bow anchor chains is as follows: 1.23 Wire rope winches are to be fitted which comply with the requirements

defined in Section 6. 1.24 Wire ropes of trawl winches may be used as anchor chain cables. Lead blocks and guide rollers shall be suitably fitted and arranged to prevent the ropes from chafing at deckhouses, superstructures, deck plating and equipment on deck. Where the rope diameter is 18 mm and greater the guide rollers are to be permanently fitted. The trawl winch is to comply with the requirements of Section 6. Chapter 8 Page 5–5 S = 1,1 ⋅ d 2 ⋅ A 100 000 [m3 ] d = chain diameter [mm] according to Table 5.1 or Table 5.2 A = total length of stud link chain cable according to Table 5.1 or Table 52 The total stowage capacity is to be distributed on two chain lockers of equal size for port and starboard chain cables. The shape of the base areas shall as far as possible be quadratic with a maximum length of 33 d. As an alternative, circular base areas may be selected, the diameter of which shall not exceed 30 – 35 d. Above stowage of each chain locker in addition a free

depth of h = 1500 [mm] is to be provided, if the local arrangement enables this. 2. The chain locker boundaries and their access openings are to be watertight to prevent flooding of adjacent spaces, where essential installations or equipment are arranged in order to not affect the proper operation of the vessel after accidental flooding of the chain locker. 3. Adequate drainage facilities of the chain locker are to be provided. 4. Where chain locker boundaries are also tank boundaries their scantlings of stiffeners and plating are to be determined as for tanks in accordance with Section 3. Where this is not the case, plate thickness is to be determined as for t2 and the section modulus as for W2 in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12, B.2 and B3 respectively The distance from the load centre to the top of chain locker pipe is to be taken for calculating the load. A corrosion allowance of 1,5 mm has to be applied. The minimum thickness of plating is 5,0 mm. G.

Windlasses 1. Basic Rules The design and construction of windlasses for fishing vessels shall be based on the Chapter 2 – Machinery Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 5–6 Section 5 H Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1 GL 2007 Installations, Section 14, D. unless they are superseded by the special requirements defined in this Section 2.4 If the trawl winch is fitted with messenger wheels, etc. and meets the requirements set out in 21 to 2.3 such a winch may be used as a windlass 2. 2.5 Fishing vessels which have been authorized to use trawl warp as anchor wire may use their trawl winch as a windlass provided the trawl warp can be wound on a drum with a braking device that is independent of the actual trawl warps in use for fishing. Lead blocks and guide rollers shall be suitably fitted and arranged to prevent the warps from chafing at the deckhouses, superstructures, deck plating and equipment on deck. Design principles 2.1 Fishing vessels provided

with anchors of or above 150 kg shall be fitted with a windlass. The windlass shall be fitted with a messenger wheel and/or drum for each anchor and means for release of each messenger wheel or drum. If for anchors with a weight of less than 150 kg no windlass is provided, other arrangements for dropping and hoisting the anchor are to be considered. 2.2 It shall not be possible to carry the chains forward to the hawsepipe, skid or similar arrangement without the chain passing the messenger wheels. When anchor wire is used it shall pass a roller adjacent to the hawsepipe to avoid chafing. 2.3 The windlass, its support and its brakes shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 45 % of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire without the occurrence of any permanent deformations and without the brake losing its hold. Furthermore, a chain stopper or wire nipper should be fitted between the windlass and the hawsepipe or similar for each anchor chain or anchor

wire capable of holding the vessel while at anchor. If chain stoppers or wire nippers are not fitted, the windlass, its support and its brake shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire. The chain stopper or wire nipper and their supports shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor chain/wire without the occurrence of any permanent deformations and without the chain stopper or wire nipper losing its hold. Table 5.3 H. Mooring Equipment Note For estimating approximate mooring forces, a GL computer program system is available. 1. Ropes 1.1 The mooring ropes specified in Tables 5.1 and 5.2 and the content of 12 and 13 are recommendations only, a compliance with which is not a condition of Class 1.2 Breaking load For mooring lines steel wire ropes as well as fibre ropes made of natural or synthetic fibres or wire ropes consisting of steel wire

and fibre cores may be used. Nominal breaking loads specified in Table 5.1 are valid for wire ropes only. Where ropes of synthetic fibre are used, the breaking load is to be increased above the table values. The extent of increase depends on material quality. The required diameters of synthetic fibre ropes used in lieu of steel wire ropes may be taken from Table 5.3 Equivalent diameters of synthetic wire and fibre ropes related to steel wire ropes Steel wire ropes 1 Diameter [mm] 13 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 Synthetic wire ropes Polyamide 2 Diameter [mm] 32 36 40 44 48 48 52 56 Fibre Ropes Polyamide Diameter [mm] 32 36 40 44 48 48 52 60 1 according to DIN 3068 or equivalent 2 Regular laid ropes of refined polyamide monofilaments and filament fibres Polyester Diameter [mm] 32 36 40 44 48 48 52 60 Polypropylene Diameter [mm] 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 64 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 5 H Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Regardless of the breaking load,

recommended in Table 5.1, the diameter of fibre ropes should not be less than 20 mm. 1.3 Type of wire ropes Wire ropes shall be of the following type: – 6 × 24 wires with 7 fibre cores for breaking loads of up to 500 kN type: standard – 6 × 36 wires with 1 fibre core for breaking loads of more than 500 kN type: standard Where wire ropes are stored on mooring winch drums, steel cored wire ropes may be used e.g: – 6 × 19 wires with 1 steel core type: seal – 6 × 36 wires with 1 steel core type: Warrington-seal 1.4 Length The length of the individual mooring ropes may be up to 7 per cent less than that given in Table 5.1 and Table 5.2 provided that the total length of all the wires Chapter 8 Page 5–7 and ropes is not less than the sum of the individual lengths. 2. Mooring winches, bollards, hawses 2.1 Mooring winches are to be designed according to the basic Rules defined in G.1 taking into account the actual mooring lines and 80 % of their nominal breaking

loads. Substructures are to be dimensioned according to Section 3 2.2 Hawses, bollards and cleats shall be so designed as to protect the ropes against excessive wear. They are to be of proved construction and shall comply with relevant standards. Note Attention is drawn to relevant National Standards. 2.3 Hawses, bollards, cleates and their substructures are to be strengthened, if they are intended to be belayed by multiple lines. In this case 80 % of the nominal breaking load of the individual lines has to be used as pulling forces. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances A Chapter 8 Page 6–1 Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances A. General 1. Scope of application 1.1 Equipment which is used for fishing, catch handling, loading and/or discharging is subject to these Rules. 1.2 Equipment according to 1.1 is not part of a fishing vessels Classification even in case the Class Notation

CFG (Certified Fishing Gear) has been assigned to the vessel. 1.3 In a fishing vessels Classification all foundations and their substructures for cranes, masts, gantries, gallows, winches, fairleads, etc. are included 2.32 Chains, rings, hooks, shackles, swivels, blocks, etc. are defined as accessories 2.33 Ropes and accessories are usually part of a fishing gear or lifting appliance. They may, however, be fixed or used individually on the deck of a fishing vessel as well. 2.4 Loads 2.41 Design load DLn The design load DLn is the static load a fishing gear is dimensioned for and will be distinguished as follows: – DL1 is the design load for catch handling at sea 1.4 If the Class Notation CFG shall be assigned to a vessel, the requirements according to F.2 and F3 are to be met. – DL2 is the nominal winch pull when there is only one rope layer on the drum. – DL3 is the minimum breaking load of a trawl warp 1.5 In these Rules the requirements for fishing gear and lifting

appliances as well as ropes and accessories will be defined. For dimensioning, DL1 and DL2 are to be multiplied by the operating factor fo , see C.212 2. Definitions 2.1 Fishing gear 2.11 Masts, gantries, gallows, outriggers, jumper stays/tackles and other gear used for fishing and/or catch handling at sea are defined as fishing gear. 2.12 Deck equipment like winches, fairleads, rollers, pad eyes, etc. used for fishing is also part of the fishing gear. 2.2 Lifting appliances 2.21 All cranes, derricks, hoists, tackles and other gear used for loading and/or discharging of, e.g processed catch, fish meal, supplies, equipment, etc in a harbour (for exceptions see C.32), are defined as lifting appliances. 2.22 Some gear/appliance or parts of it may be regarded as fishing gear and lifting appliance alike. 2.3 Ropes and accessories 2.31 Running and standing wire ropes used for fishing, catch handling, loading and/or discharging are defined as ropes. 2.42 Operation load – L1 is

the operation load for catch handling gear – L2 is the operation load for pelagic trawling gear 2.5 Safe working load SWL The safe working load SWL is the maximum static load a lifting appliance is allowed to handle with its hook or any other load attaching device. For dimensioning the SWL is to be multiplied by a dynamic factor ψ as described in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines, see 3.31 2.6 Certification Following plan approval as well as initial tests and examination fishing gear and lifting appliances will get the GL documentation as described in F.41 This combined approval system is called "Certification". 2.7 Class Notation On the basis of "Certification" and in case GL is entrusted to conduct annual/5-yearly surveys and the supervision of load testing every five years the vessel will get the "Class Notation" CFG (Certified Fishing Gear). For documentation see F42 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 6–2 3. Section 6 B

Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Applicable regulations, rules and standards 2. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Documents for approval For international regulations see Section 1, A.33 The approval documents shall contain all dimensions, details of materials and welding as well as accident prevention measures. If necessary parts lists are to be added. 3.2 2.1 3.1 International regulations Flag state regulations Flag State regulations for the stability of the vessel, accident prevention, dimensioning, etc., if existing, are generally to be observed. 3.3 3.32 Chapters 1 – 4 and GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, for hull structures, machinery and electrical installations must be applied accordingly. 3.4 For plan approval the following documents shall be submitted in triplicate: – General arrangement drawings showing the fishing gear, lifting appliances and deck equipment together with their rope reeving/leading systems. – Drawings showing all foundations with their

substructures for fishing gear, lifting appliances and deck equipment. – Information about the forces which may act on the foundations and their substructures, at least the following: GL Rules and Guidelines 3.31 GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Construction and Survey of Lifting Appliances, in short "Lifting Appliance Guidelines". These Guidelines are dealing in detail with design and dimensioning requirements, plan approval, supervision during construction, Certification of components, examination and testing, accident prevention and with the Certification system for lifting appliances, ropes and accessories. Standards In general international and national standards for ropes and accessories are accepted. Other standards may be accepted after verification. – for fishing gear the respective DLn values and, if necessary, height and angles of rope

attack, see also C.2 – for lifting appliances the SWL value and associated load radii, see also C.3 – 2.2 Plan Approval 1. General Depending on the contractual and legal situation the following applies: 1.1 Classification For the Classification of the vessel it is conditional that the documents, as listed in 2.1, undergo approval and/or verification. 1.2 1.3 Class Notation For assigning a Class Notation to a vessel no additional plan approval and/or verification in excess of those addressed in 1.1 and 12 is required Documents for Certification Documents for fishing gear For plan approval the following documents are to be submitted in triplicate except strength calculations and/or force diagrams which are required in duplicate only: – strength calculations and/or force diagrams – detailed rope reeving / leading plans of fishing gear – drawings of masts and booms, gantries, gallows, outriggers, etc. together with their fittings – information about the

machinery such as hoisting, slewing and luffing mechanisms plus general drawings of the winches including their design data, and detail drawings of base plate and drums – hydraulic circuit diagrams of all machinery Certification For the Certification of fishing gear and lifting appliances the documents as described in 2.2 shall undergo approval and/or verification. Stability sheets covering the fishing gear and/or lifting appliances as may be necessary. These documents are only required in case of national regulations asking for plan approval/Certification and if this is agreed with the shipyard and/or owners. 2.21 B. Documents for Classification 2.22 Documents for lifting appliances For plan approval the documents prescribed by the Lifting Appliance Guidelines are to be submitted in triplicate, except strength calculations and/or force diagrams which are required in duplicate only. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.23 Section 6 C Fishing Gear and

Lifting Appliances Documents for ropes and accessories 2.231 Information about all ropes as defined in A.231 are to be provided, eg rope standard, construction, diameter and strength of material (The minimum breaking load is specified in the applicable standard). 2.232 Information about location and nominal sizes of all accessories which are used for fishing gear and lifting appliances are to be provided. In addition drawings of all accessories are required which are not manufactured according to standards, e.g rollers, blocks, esp. trawl warp blocks, swivels, etc – 15° angle of rope attack in all directions in case of freely suspended loads, e.g jumper stay tackles – allowable stresses according to load condition B in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines 2.22 For dimensioning of jumper stays it has to be assumed that the minimum breaking load of the jumper stays is not to be less than the product of the maximum rope tension (due to SWL and pretensioning) and a factor of

utilization K equal to 4. The slag span f of the unloaded rope shall be limited by: l/f C. Dimensioning 1. General 1.1 While fishing gear is to be dimensioned for a defined design load DLn, lifting appliances must be assessed for a defined safe working load SWL. These loads shall be specified in the drawings and calculations submitted. Allowance is to be made for possible oblique loading and simultaneous loading of a supporting structure by more than one fishing gear and/or lifting appliance. 1.2 Shipyard, design office, manufacturers and/or owners, as the case may be, have to decide on the operating conditions and to specify the angles of trawl warp attack and there possible combinations, the design loads DLn of fishing gear and the SWL of lifting appliances to provide the basis for dimensioning and approval. 2. Fishing gear 2.1 General Chapter 8 Page 6–3 = length between suspension/slag span < 50 values between 10 and 30 are recommended 2.23 In case there are several

tackles suspended from a jumper stay it will be assumed that only one at a time is in operation if not otherwise described in the approval documentation. 2.3 Trawling gear The dimensioning of trawling gear is to be based on the nominal winch pull (pelagic trawl) or, in case the net may be caught, on the minimum breaking load of a trawl warp (ground trawl). 2.31 Pelagic trawl The dimensioning of pelagic trawling gear is to be based on the following: – L2 = DL2 × fo – trawl warp angles of egression from the vessels hull as specified but within the following limits: - –15° up to –45° in the vertical plane against horizontal level - 0° up to ± 45° in the horizontal plane against vertical level – allowable stresses according to load condition B in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines 2.11 For dimensioning it has to be considered that the forces acting on fishing gear cannot be determined exactly. This is especially valid for loads acting on e.g net tails, jumper stay

tackles or trawling gear 2.32 2.12 Consequently the operating factor fo = 1,5 as applied in the following makes up for these uncertain loads. – DL3 – 2.13 Fish pumps and power blocks for hauling of nets will be dealt with individually, if necessary. trawl warp angle of egression as described in 2.31 – allowable normal or von Mises stress equal to ReH in case of normal strength materials 2.2 – a safety factor of 1,1 against ReH or Rp0,2 if being decisive – In case of breakage of a trawl warp, gantries, masts, derricks, gallows, etc., shall not fail and remain in place Catch handling gear 2.21 The dimensioning of catch handling gear is to be based on the following: – L1 = DL1 × fo Ground trawl The dimensioning of ground trawling gear is to be based on the following: Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 6–4 Section 6 D Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances 2.33 The angles of trawl warp of egression as specified consider dynamic vessel

inclinations as prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. 2.34 If higher strength materials are used their ReH or Rp0,2 shall be reduced in accordance with the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. ReH respectively Rp0,2 is to be taken from the applicable material standards. 2.35 In the North and Baltic Sea, or in other shallow waters with similar conditions, it is recommended that trawl booms and their forward stays should be dimensioned with an additional safety margin of 10 %. 3. Lifting appliances 3.1 The dimensioning of lifting appliances is to be based on SWL, load radius, dynamic influences, etc. for a Type A lifting appliance as described in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines for load handling in sheltered waters, i.e in harbours This system is based on allowed stresses, proof against ReH or Rp0,2 and fatigue, as may be necessary. For dimensioning a minimum static vessel inclination is prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. Depending on the actual stability of a given

vessel a bigger inclination may have to be taken into consideration. 3.2 A dimensioning of lifting appliances for load handling at sea may be considered individually on the basis of the Lifting Appliance Guidelines, if this may be necessary. In such cases a larger vessel inclination and additional dynamic influences are to be taken into consideration. 4. Ropes and accessories 4.1 Ropes Construction and diameter of the various wire ropes used on a fishing vessel are to be chosen by shipyard, design office, manufacturers and/or owners as the case may be, however, the following is to be observed: 4.11 The minimum breaking load of ropes for catch handling gear and lifting appliances is to be calculated by multiplying their static rope forces with the utility factor as given in the Lifting Appliances Guidelines. Static rope forces are to be calculated without dynamic influences but by taking into consideration the friction and bending resistance in the rope sheaves. 4.12 The minimum

breaking load of trawl warps shall be at least 2,5 times the design load DL2, see A.24 4.2 Accessories 4.21 In case of accessories for catch handling gear and lifting appliances their nominal sizes shall be equal to the static forces acting on them, e.g DL1 or I - Part 1 GL 2007 SWL. This system is described in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines 4.22 In case of accessories for trawling gear their nominal sizes shall be equal to the design load DL2. 4.23 Accessories which have to take the trawl warp pull and go over board for fishing, shall have nominal sizes at least equal to half the design load DL2. 4.24 Accessories which have to take the pull of jumper stays shall have nominal sizes at least equal to half the minimum breaking load of the jumper stays. 4.25 The nominal sizes of accessories are to be finally determined by interpolation between the nominal sizes as shown e.g in the relevant Tables in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. If a design value is 25 % higher than the

difference towards the following nominal size, this higher nominal size shall be chosen. D. Construction 1. General Constructional requirements for lifting appliances are defined in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. For fishing gear the following applies additionally: 1.1 Fishing in arctic waters requires a special design to prevent undue accumulation of ice as far as possible, e.g mast stays should be avoided 1.2 Materials and welding procedures as well as the construction measures of hydraulic components shall be in line with the relevant principles of the GL Rules, see A.332 2. Fishing gear 2.1 Stern gantries 2.11 Stern gantries shall be dimensioned for angles of rope attack in accordance with C.231 as need may be. All locations where rope blocks are fixed shall be sufficiently strengthened, e.g by inside frames and outside brackets. 2.12 End operating/rest positions of hinged gantries shall be able to be sufficiently locked or secured by mechanical or hydraulic means. 2.13

The movement of hinged gantries shall be controlled from a local control stand inaccessible to unauthorized persons or from a central control stand, e.g at the rear of the bridge As soon as the controls, such as push-buttons, levers and similar are released, movement of the gantry shall stop immediately. If central control is realized, emergency stop buttons have to be provided in the rear working deck area. The gantry has to be fully visible from the control station. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 6 D Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances 2.14 Fixed stern gantries shall have safe access to their top and to platforms, if any. Top and platforms shall have sufficient handrails and foot bars, compare Section 4, E.3 2.2 Side gallows 2.21 Side gallows (fish davits) typically arranged on starboard side need to have sufficient additional strength because they may get heavy blows when the trawl boards are hauled in at bad seaway conditions. 2.22 Means are to be

provided in front of side gallows for a secure stowage of trawl boards and trawl doors, if any. 2.3 Jumper stays 2.31 Sheaves rolling onto the jumper stay shall have at least a minimum diameter of 14 times the rope diameter. 2.32 To reduce the effect of corrosion, jumper stay ropes shall be galvanized and shall have wire cores. 2.33 Wire rope clips and other detachable clamps are not permitted for rope end attachments. For shackle connections only type C shackles as shown in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines shall be employed. 2.4 Trawl booms If trawl booms are also employed for loading and discharging, they have to be designed as fishing gear and lifting appliances alike. 3. Deck equipment 3.1 Winches 3.11 Winches shall be designed in accordance with the Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations and be of reversible type. Also the rope paying out shall be motor controlled. 3.12 Winches for ground trawling shall be dimensioned to withstand the design load DL3, i.e the breaking of a

trawl warp. Winches for pelagic trawling shall be designed to withstand the nominal winch pull DL2 multiplied by the operating factor fo. (see A24 and C.212) 3.13 Satisfactory spooling of ropes onto the drums shall be ensured. Winch drums of trawl warps shall have a diameter ratio (d : D) between ropes and drums of 1:14. The direction in which the rope reels onto the drum shall be clearly indicated on the winch. 3.14 The way in which the first layer of rope is wound onto the drum shall be chosen depending on the lay of the rope so that the rope does not unlay. Chapter 8 Page 6–5 3.15 Trawl winches and their leading rollers shall be arranged such that the rope fleet angles to either side of the drum centre are symmetrical. 3.16 The number of safety turns of rope left on a drum shall be such that the maximum rope tension, which is in case of winches for ground trawling the minimum rope breaking load, can be taken jointly by the remaining turns and the end fastenings. 3.17 Rope end

fastenings shall be designed such that they – do not pull the rope over sharp edges – cannot be released unintentionally – are easy to inspect 3.2 Fairleads and rollers 3.21 Centre fairleads on side trawlers shall be provided with a protective guard extending at the sides at least 0,30 m beyond the outer periphery of the fairleads. 3.22 The groove of rollers passed over by shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. shall be specially designed to prevent undue stressing of these parts 3.23 Rope sheaves are to be fitted with a protective device which prevents the ropes from jumping out of the sheave. 3.24 The sheave for the trawl warp messenger rope shall be fixed in the bulwark. Fixing on top of the bulwark is not allowed. 3.25 The fleet angle of wire ropes running over metallic rope sheaves shall not exceed 4°. 3.26 Rope sheaves made of plastic may only be employed with the consent of GL and owners. 3.27 The groove diameter of rope sheaves shall be at least 14 times the rope

diameter in case of running ropes under load. 4. Ropes and accessories 4.1 Ropes, especially trawl warps, which are spooled in several layers, shall have a steel wire core. 4.2 Portable guide rollers shall not be used unless fitted with an efficient and adequately designed rope restraining device. 4.3 Shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. which are to pass over rollers shall be specially designed in order to prevent overstressing. 4.4 Bows and pad eyes for attaching of moveable blocks shall be aligned in such a way that they may not be undue stressed rectangular to their main load plane. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 6–6 Section 6 F Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances 4.5 The material properties and dimensions of pad eyes for high tensile shackles, e.g green pin shackles, may be obtained from GL Head Office upon request. 3. 4.6 Chains used for fishing or load handling shall meet the requirements in the relevant GL Rules, see A.332 4. E. Accident Prevention

1. Deck areas 1.1 After the net has been hauled in or out, the stern ramp shall be properly secured by suitable equipment. 1.2 Provision shall be made for the stowage of bulky netting to allow drainage and to prevent shifting. The stowage area shall be of adequate dimensions to hold down the centre of gravity of the stowed net as far as possible and to allow for the crew to work not endangered when handling the nets. 1.3 In the range of fishing winches and net drums, a passageway at least 0,60 m wide shall be maintained. 1.4 Fixed and removable fish pounds for holding the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such a way that water can drain without hindrance. 1.5 4, E. For further protective measures see Section 2. Fishing gear 2.1 Fishing gear shall be designed to avoid working accidents and damage to the gear if the operating instructions to be provided are consequently followed. Possible danger scenarios during

operations have to be clearly addressed in these instructions. 2.2 Where practicable, provision shall be made to stop trawl boards from swinging inboard, such as the fitting of a portable prevention bar at the gallows aperture, or other equally effective means. 2.3 If no fishing activities are under way, the complete fishing gear has to be stowed in a safe way. Adequate devices for lashing have to be provided. 2.4 Where manually operated gear is installed it should be capable of being disengaged when the warps are paying out. The operating wheels shall be without spokes or protrusions which could cause injury to the operator. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Lifting appliances The relevant requirements in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines apply. Winches and controls 4.1 The controls and monitoring instruments of winches shall be clearly arranged on the control platform. They shall be placed to give the winch driver ample room for unimpeded operation and an unobstructed view of the working area.

4.2 Controls and monitoring instruments have to be permanently, clearly and intelligible marked with the direction or the function of the movement they control. The arrangement and direction of movement of controls and monitoring instruments must match the direction of the movement which they control. In the case of pushbutton controls there shall be a separate button for each direction of movement. 4.3 Where a fishing winch is controlled from the bridge, the arrangements shall be such that the operator has a clear view of the winch and the adjacent area. In addition to an emergency button at the winch, an emergency button on the bridge shall be provided. 4.4 Where necessary, emergency buttons for winches shall be provided remote from the winch to protect fishermen working in places which are dangerous for operating trawl warps and boards. F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and Class Notation 1. General 1.1 The following statements outline the test, survey and Certification

system applied by GL in case this is required by Flag State Regulations or agreed upon with owners. The Class Notation system will be applied in case the vessel shall get the Class Notation CFG. 1.2 Lifting appliances with a SWL below one tonne will be treated in the same way as those with one tonne and more, except national regulations stipulate otherwise. 2. Certification Certification of fishing gear and lifting appliances is mainly intended to confirm adequate strength of load bearing structural members and requires individual Certificates for ropes and accessories. For Certification plan approval as well as initial tests and examination of fishing gear and lifting appliances shall be conducted before putting the gear/appliances into operation, but no periodical surveys are required. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.1 Section 6 F Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Supervision of construction 3.1 Chapter 8 Page 6–7 Periodical tests and examinations

2.11 Supervision of construction at the premises of subcontractors is not prescribed. Subcontractors shall deliver fishing gear and lifting appliances with their works Certificates for being presented to a GL Surveyor by the shipyard. 3.11 Once a year in conjunction with Annual Class Surveys fishing gear and lifting appliances will be surveyed by the acting GL Surveyor. Following this, the GL Surveyor will confirm the surveys conducted by him in the Register Book (Form LA1). 2.12 In case of components being constructed at the shipyard, i.e hinged stern gantries, etc, a GL Surveyor shall conduct supervision and certify the construction. Fixed stern gantries are subject to Classification of the vessel and generally undergo supervision of construction 3.12 Every five years, in conjunction with the Class Renewal Survey of the vessel, a new function/load testing of fishing gear/lifting appliances, as far as possible, supervised by a GL Surveyor is required. 2.2 Certificates for ropes

and accessories 2.21 Works Certificates for wire ropes and accessories will be accepted, if tensile testing to destruction in case of ropes, respectively static load testing in case of accessories as prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines is confirmed in the Certificates. 2.22 The Certificates for wire ropes and accessories are to be ordered by the manufacturers of fishing gear and lifting appliances at subcontractors and shall be delivered to the shipyard together with the fabricated gear/appliances for being handed over to a GL Surveyor by the shipyard. 2.3 Initial tests and examination 2.31 Before being taken into operation, fishing gear shall be presented to a GL Surveyor and function tested in his presence as far as possible by the shipyard. Following this the GL Surveyor will examine the gear. 2.32 Before being taken into operation lifting appliances shall be load and function tested on the vessel, usually by the shipyard, supervised by a GL Surveyor who will examine

the appliances after the test. 2.33 Following supervision of load and/or function testing and after examination, the acting GL Surveyor will issue a GL load test Certificate, Form LA2, for the lifting appliances, confirm the examinations conducted by him for both fishing gear and lifting appliances into a GL Register Book, Form LA1, and release the complete documentation as described under 4. 3. Class Notation 3.13 Following function/load testing in according with 3.12 the acting GL Surveyor will examine all gear/appliances, issue a new load test Certificate for the lifting appliances, confirm all examinations conducted by him in the Register Book and add the load test Certificate to it. 3.14 All time windows for tests and surveys are the same as for the Class Surveys of the vessel. 3.2 Tests and examinations after repair 3.21 After repair of load bearing parts of fishing gear an examination is required. 3.22 After repair of load bearing parts of lifting appliances a new load

testing/examination and a new load test Certificate is required. 3.23 Replacement of axles, shafts, rope sheaves, ropes, accessories, etc. due to wear and tear does not necessitate load testing and subsequent examination. 3.24 Newly issued Certificates have to be included into the Register Book and the examinations have to be confirmed in this book. 4. Documentation 4.1 Certification 4.11 Following successful tests and examinations as described in the foregoing, the acting GL Surveyor will issue a GL Register Book for all fishing gear and lifting appliances on the vessel which shall remain on board for at least 5 years after the last 5 yearly survey/ load testing. 4.12 In the Register Book all Certificates for load testing of lifting appliances as well as for testing of ropes and attachments will be collected as evidence towards all parties concerned. In addition the GL Surveyor will add rope reeving plans for lifting appliances and fishing gear to the Register Book, as far as

available. For the Class Notation CFG, in addition to Certification, annual and 5-yearly examinations of fishing gear and lifting appliances are to be conducted by a GL Surveyor who will also supervise the 5 yearly load testing of lifting appliances. 4.2 The Class Notation will automatically become invalid and will be withdrawn by GL Head Office if fishing gear and lifting appliances are no more presented for surveys and/or load testing within the time windows according to 3.14 The following tests and examinations are to be performed: The Class Notation CFG is subject to a contractual agreement. No special Certificate will be issued to this regard. The Class Notation will be stated in the Class Certificate of the vessel by GL Head Office after successful initial tests and examinations as well as Certification. Class Notation Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 7 B Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 Page 7–1 Section 7

Structural Fire Protection A. General ance or apparatus or type thereof, or provision, is at least as effective as that required by this Section. 1. Application Where compliance with any of the requirements of this Section would be impracticable for the particular design of the vessel, GL may substitute those with alternative requirements, provided that equivalent safety is achieved. The requirements in this Section are generally valid for unrestricted service of fishing vessels as defined in Section 1, B.3 Exceptions may be granted by GL for restricted service ranges according to the Class Notations M, K and W. 2. Documents to be submitted The following drawings and documents are to be submitted, at least in triplicate for approval. GL reserve the right to ask for supplementary copies, if deemed necessary. – fire division plan – insulation plan (may be part of the fire division plan) – ventilation and air condition scheme – deck covering plan – door plan

– fire control plan – list of approved materials and equipment 3. GL approval 3.1 The term "approved" relates to a material or construction, for which GL has issued an Approval Certificate. A type approval can be issued on the basis of a successful standard fire test, which has been carried out by neutral and recognized fire test institutes. 3.2 The type "A", "B" and "C" class partitions, fire dampers, duct penetrations as well as the insulation materials, linings, ceilings, surface materials and not readily ignitable deck coverings shall be of approved type. 4. Equivalence Where this Section requires that a particular fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, shall be fitted or carried in a fishing vessel, or that any particular provision shall be made, GL may allow any other fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, to be fitted or carried, or any other provision to be made in the vessel, if it is

satisfied by trial thereof or otherwise that such fitting, material, appli- 5. References For the rules for fire protection and fire fighting see Section 8, for electrical installations for fire detection see Section 11h, D.4 B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 45 m 1. Material 1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, superstructures and deckhouses are to be of steel except where in special cases the use of other suitable material may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire. 1.2 Bulkheads and decks enclosing machinery spaces, cargo spaces, emergency generator rooms, galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, store rooms containing flammable liquids and workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces are to be of steel or equivalent material. 1.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construction or equivalent material. 2. Exemptions For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept deviations from material

requirements of 1.1 and 12 3. Restricted use of combustible materials 3.1 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire hazard and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke. 3.2 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in accommodation and service spaces and control stations, which are located above machinery spaces, shall be of an approved material which will not readily ignite. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 7–2 4. Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Ventilation systems 4.1 The main inlet and outlets of all ventilation systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the respective spaces in the event of a fire. 4.2 Where they pass through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be appropriately isolated. 5. Means of escape 5.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as to provide, from all accommodation

spaces and from spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts. 5.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be provided at least two widely separated means of escape from each restricted space or group of spaces. 5.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who normally might be quartered or employed there. 5.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is only one escape route. 5.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as widely separated as possible leading to doors in the upper part of the space similarly separated and from which access is provided to the open deck. 5.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than

1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of escape due regard being paid to the dimension and disposition of the upper part of the space. C. 1. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with L ≥ 45 m Materials 1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, superstructures and deckhouses are to be of steel except where in special cases the use of other suitable material may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire. 1.2 Components made from aluminium alloys require special treatment, with regard to the mechanical properties of the material in case of temperature increase. In principle, the following is to be observed: 1.21 The insulation of "A" or "B" class divisions shall be such that the temperature of the structural core I - Part 1 GL 2007 does not rise more than 200 °C above the ambient temperature at any time during the applicable fire exposure to the standard fire test. 1.22 Special attention shall be given to the insulation of

aluminium alloy components of columns, stanchions and other structural members required to support lifeboat and liferaft stowage, launching and embarkation areas, and "A" and "B" class divisions to ensure: – that for such members supporting lifeboat and liferaft areas and "A" class divisions, the temperature rise limitation specified in 1.21 shall apply at the end of one hour; and – that for such members required to support "B" class divisions, the temperature rise limitation specified in 1.21 shall apply at the end of half an hour. 1.23 Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of category A shall be of steel construction and be insulated as required by Table 7.1 as appropriate Openings therein, if any, shall be suitably arranged and protected to prevent the spread of fire. 2. Accommodation and service spaces 2.1 One of the following methods of protection shall be adopted in accommodation and service areas: 2.11 Method IC The

construction of all internal divisional bulkheading of non-combustible "B" or "C" class divisions generally without the installation of an automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system in the accommodation and service spaces, except as required by 10.1; or 2.12 Method IIC The fitting of an automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system, as required by 10.2 for the detection and extinction of fire in all spaces in which fire might be expected to originate, generally with no restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkheading; or 2.13 Method IIIC The fitting of a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system, as required by 10.3, in all spaces in which a fire might be expected to originate, generally with no restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkheading, except that in no case must the area of any accommodation space or spaces bounded by an "A" or "B" class division exceed 50 m2. Consideration may be

given to increasing this area for public spaces. 2.2 The requirements for the use of non-combustible materials in construction and insulation of the boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces, control stations, service spaces, etc., and the protection of stairway enclosures and corridors will be common to all three methods. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 7 Table 7.1 Fire integrity of bulkheads separating adjacent spaces Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] A-05 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-15 A-60 A-15 A-60 A-60 7 C B-0 B-0 A-03 B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 C1, 2 B-0 A-03 B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 B-0 A-03 B-0 A-03 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 C A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 7 A-0 A-0 A-60 7 A-04 A-0 A-0 7 7 A-0 7 A-04 7 C Structural Fire Protection Control stations [1] Corridors [2] Accommodation spaces [3] Stairways [4] Service spaces (low risk) [5] Chapter 8 Page 7–3 Machinery spaces of category A [6] Other

machinery spaces [7] Cargo spaces [8] Service spaces (high risk) [9] Open decks [10] – Notes 1 No special requirements are imposed upon bulkheads in methods IIC and IIIC fire protection. 2 In case of method IIC "B" class bulkheads of "B-0" rating shall be provided between spaces or groups of spaces of 50 m2 and over in area. 3 For clarification as to which applies, see 3. and 5 4 Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript 4 appears, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown in the Tables is only required when the adjacent spaces are for a different purpose, e.g in category 9 A galley next to a galley does not require a bulkhead but a galley next to a paint room requires an "A-0" bulkhead. 5 Bulkheads separating the wheelhouse, chartroom and radio room from each other may be "B-0" rating. 6 Fire insulation need not be fitted if the machinery space in category 7, has little or no fire risk. 7 Where a 7

appears in the Tables, the division is required to be of steel or other equivalent material but is not required to be of "A" class standard. 3. Bulkheads within the accommodation and service spaces 3.1 All bulkheads required to be "B" class divisions shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell or other boundaries, unless continuous "B" class ceilings or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead in which case the bulkhead may terminate at the continuous ceiling or lining. 3.2 Method IC All bulkheads not required by this or other requirements of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions, shall be of at least "C" class construction. 3.3 Method IIC There shall be no restriction on the construction of bulkheads not required by this or other requirements of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions except in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are required in accordance

with Table 7.1 3.4 Method IIIC There shall be no restriction on the construction of bulkheads not required by this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions except that the area of any accommodation space or spaces bounded by a continuous "A" or "B" class division must in no case exceed 50 m2 except in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are required in accordance with Table 7.1 Consideration may be given to increasing this area for public spaces. 4. Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks 4.1 In addition to complying with the specific provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and decks mentioned elsewhere in this Section, the minimum fire integrity of bulkheads and decks shall be as prescribed in Tables 7.1 and 72 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 7–4 Table 7.2 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1 GL 2007 Fire integrity of decks separating adjacent spaces Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

[7] [8] [9] [10] Control stations [1] A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 Corridors [2] A-0 7 7 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 Accommodation spaces [3] A-60 A-0 7 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 Stairways [4] A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 A-60 A-8 A-8 A-8 7 Service spaces (low risk) [5] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 Machinery spaces of category A [6] A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 7 A-606 A-30 A-60 7 Other machinery spaces [7] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 A-0 7 Cargo spaces [8] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 7 Service spaces (high risk) [9] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-04 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 – Open decks [10] See notes under Table 7.1 4.2 Continuous "B" class ceilings or linings, in association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may be accepted as contributing, wholly or in part, to the required insulation and integrity of a division. 4.3 External

boundaries which are required in 1.1 to be of steel or other equivalent material may be pierced for the fitting of windows and sidescuttles provided that there is no requirement for such boundaries to have "A" class integrity elsewhere in these requirements. Similarly, in such boundaries which are not required to have "A" class integrity, doors may be of materials to meet the requirements of their application. 4.4 The following requirements shall govern application of the Tables: bulkheads of such smaller rooms shall be as prescribed in Tables 7.1 and 72 The title of each category is intended to be typical rather than restrictive. The number in parentheses preceding each category refers to the applicable column or row number in the Tables. [1] Spaces containing emergency sources of power and lighting. Wheelhouse and chartroom Spaces containing the vessels radio equipment. Fire control stations. Control room for propulsion machinery when located outside the

machinery space Spaces containing centralized fire alarm equipment. [2] Tables 7.1 and 72 shall apply respectively to the bulkheads and decks separating adjacent spaces. Corridors Corridors and lobbies. [3] 4.5 For determining the appropriate fire integrity standards to be applied to divisions between adjacent spaces, such spaces are classified according to their fire risk as shown in the following categories 1 to 10. Where the contents and use of a space are such that there is a doubt as to its classification for the purpose of this regulation, or where it is possible to assign two or more classifications to a space, it shall be treated as a space within the relevant category having the most stringent boundary requirements. Smaller, enclosed rooms within a space that have less than 30 % communicating openings to that space are to be considered as separate spaces. The fire integrity of the boundary Control stations Accommodation spaces Spaces used for public spaces, lavatories,

cabins, offices, hospitals, hobby rooms, pantries containing no cooking appliances and similar spaces. [4] Stairways Interior stairways, totally enclosed emergency escape trunks and enclosures thereto. In this connection, a stairway which is enclosed only at one level shall be regarded as part of the space from which it is not separated by a fire door. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 [5] Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Service spaces (low risk) Lockers and store-rooms not having provisions for the storage of flammable liquids and having areas less than 4 m2 and drying rooms and laundries. [6] Machinery spaces of category A Spaces and trunks to such spaces which contain: Internal combustion machinery used for main propulsion; or internal combustion machinery used for purposes other than main propulsion where such machinery has in the aggregate a total power output of not less than 375 kW; or any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel unit. [7] Other machinery

spaces Spaces, other than machinery spaces of category A, containing propulsion machinery, boilers, fuel oil units, steam and internal combustion engines, generators and major electrical machinery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, ventilation and air conditioning machinery, and similar spaces, and trunks to such spaces. Electrical equipment rooms (auto-telephone exchange, air-conditioning duct spaces) [8] Cargo spaces All spaces used for cargo and trunkways and hatchways to such spaces. [9] Service spaces (high risk) Galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, saunas, paint and lamp rooms, lockers and storerooms having areas of 4 m2 or more, spaces for the storage of flammable liquids, and workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces. [10] Open decks Open deck spaces having no fire risk. Air spaces (the space outside superstructures and deckhouses). 5. Protection of stairways in accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations

5.1 Stairways which penetrate only a single deck shall be protected at least at one level by at least "B-0" class divisions and self-closing doors. Stairways which penetrate more than a single deck shall be surrounded by at least "A-0" class divisions and be protected by self-closing doors at all levels. 5.2 On vessels having accommodation for 12 persons or less, where stairways penetrate more than a single deck and where there are at least two escape routes direct to the open deck at every accommodation Chapter 8 Page 7–5 level, consideration may be given reducing the "A-0" requirements of 5.1 to "B-0" 5.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construction or of other equivalent material. 6. Openings in fire resisting divisions 6.1 Where "A" or "B" class divisions are penetrated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, ducts, etc. or for girders, beams or other structural members, arrangements shall be made to

ensure that the fire resistance is not impaired. 6.2 Except for hatches between cargo, special category, store, and baggage spaces, and between such spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as the divisions in which they are fitted. 1 6.3 The fire resistance of doors shall be equivalent to that of the division in which they are fitted. Doors and door frames in "A" class divisions shall be constructed of steel. Doors in "B" class divisions shall be non-combustible. Doors fitted in boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces of category A shall be reasonably gastight and self-closing. In vessels constructed according to method IC the use of combustible materials in doors separating cabins from individual interior sanitary accommodation such as showers may be permitted. 6.4 Doors required to be self-closing shall not be fitted with hold-back hooks.

However, hold-back arrangements fitted with remote release devices of the fail-safe type may be utilized. 6.5 In corridor bulkheads ventilation openings may be permitted only in and under class B-doors of cabins and public spaces. Ventilation openings are also permitted in B-doors leading to lavatories, offices, pantries, lockers and store rooms. Except as permitted below, the openings shall be provided only in the lower half of a door. Where such opening is in or under a door the total net area of any such opening or openings shall not exceed 0,05 m2. Alternatively, a non-combustible air balance duct routed between the cabin and the corridor, and located below the sanitary unit is permitted where the cross-sectional area of the duct does not exceed 0,05 m2. Ventilation openings, except those under the door, shall be fitted with a grille made of non-combustible material. 6.6 Watertight doors need not be insulated. –––––––––––––– 1 Reference is made to the

Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67) Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 7–6 7. Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Ventilation systems I - Part 1 GL 2007 7.231 fire dampers, including relevant means of operation; 7.1 Ventilation ducts shall be of non-combustible material. Short ducts, however, not generally exceeding 2 m in length and with a cross-section not exceeding 0,02 m2 need not be non-combustible, subject to the following conditions: 7.232 duct penetrations through "A" class divisions Where steel sleeves are directly joined to ventilation ducts by means of riveted or screwed flanges or by welding, the test is not required. 7.11 these ducts shall be of a material having low flame spread characteristics which is type approved; 2 7.3 The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the respective spaces in the event of a fire. 7.12 they may only

be used at the end of the ventilation device; 7.13 they shall not be situated less than 600 mm, measured along the duct, from an opening in an "A" or "B" class division including continuous "B" class ceilings. 7.2 Where a thin plated duct with a free crosssectional area equal to, or less than, 0,02 m2 passes through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve having a thickness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 200 mm, divided preferably into 100 mm on each side of the bulkhead or, in the case of the deck, wholly laid on the lower side of the decks pierced. Where ventilation ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,02 m2 pass through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve. However, where such ducts are of steel construction and pass through a deck or bulkhead, the ducts and sleeves shall comply with the following: 7.21 The sleeves shall

have a thickness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 900 mm. When passing through bulkheads, this length shall be divided preferably into 450 mm on each side of the bulkhead. These ducts, or sleeves lining such ducts, shall be provided with fire insulation. The insulation shall have at least the same fire integrity as the bulkhead or deck through which the duct passes. 7.22 Ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,075 m2 shall be fitted with fire dampers in addition to the requirements of 7.21 The fire damper shall also be capable of being closed manually from both sides of the bulkhead or deck. The damper shall be provided with an indicator which shows whether the damper is open or closed. Fire dampers are not required, however, where ducts pass through spaces surrounded by "A" class divisions, without serving those spaces, provided those ducts have the same fire integrity as the divisions which they pierce. 7.23 The following arrangement shall be of an

approved type. 3 –––––––––––––– 2 3 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67) Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67) 7.4 Where they pass through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be constructed of insulated "A" class divisions. Each exhaust duct shall be fitted with: 7.41 a grease trap readily removable for cleaning; 7.42 duct; a fire damper located in the lower end of the 7.43 arrangements, operable from within the galley, for shutting off the exhaust fan; and 7.44 fixed means for extinguishing a fire within the duct, see Section 8, H.1 7.5 Such measures as are practicable shall be taken in respect of control stations outside machinery spaces in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and freedom from smoke are maintained, so that

in the event of fire the machinery and equipment contained therein may be supervised and continue to function effectively. Alternative and separate means of air supply shall be provided; air inlets of the two sources of supply shall be so disposed that the risk of both inlets drawing in smoke simultaneously is minimized. Such requirements need not apply to control stations situated on, and opening on to, an open deck. 7.6 The ventilation system for machinery spaces of category A, galleys, special category spaces and cargo spaces shall, in general, be separated from each other and from the ventilation systems serving other spaces. Except that, galley ventilation on vessels of less than 4 000 gross tonnage need not be completely separated, but may be served by separate ducts from a ventilation unit serving other spaces. In any case, an automatic fire damper shall be fitted in the galley ventilation ducts near the ventilation unit. 7.7 Ducts provided for the ventilation of machinery

spaces of category A, galleys or special category spaces shall not pass through accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations unless the ducts are either: 7.71 constructed of steel having a thickness of at least 3 mm and 5 mm for ducts the widths or diameters of which are up to and including 300 mm and 760 mm and over respectively and, in the case of such Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 Page 7–7 ducts, the widths or diameters of which are between 300 mm and 760 mm having a thickness to be obtained by interpolation; 7.11 Control of smoke spread 7.111 Purpose suitably supported and stiffened; The purpose of this requirement is to control the spread of smoke in order to minimize the hazards from smoke. For this purpose, means for controlling smoke in atriums, control stations, machinery spaces and concealed spaces shall be provided. fitted with automatic fire dampers close to the boundaries

penetrated; and insulated to "A-60" standard from the machinery spaces, galleys or special category spaces to a point at least 5 m beyond each fire damper; or 7.72 constructed of steel suitable supported and stiffened and insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations. 7.8 Ducts provided for the ventilation to accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations shall not pass through machinery spaces of category A, galleys or special category spaces unless either: 7.81 the ducts where they pass through a machinery space of category A, galley or special category space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and stiffened and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the boundaries penetrated; and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the boundaries penetrated and the integrity of the machinery space, galley or special category space boundaries is maintained at the penetrations; or 7.82 the ducts

where they pass through a machinery space of category A, galley or special category space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and stiffened, and are insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control stations. 7.9 Ventilation ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,02 m2 passing through "B" class bulkheads shall be lined with steel sheet sleeves of 900 mm in length divided preferably into 450 mm on each side of the bulkheads unless the duct is of steel for this length. 7.10 Power ventilation of accommodation spaces, service spaces, cargo spaces, control stations and machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible position outside the space being served. This position should not be readily cut off in the event of a fire in the spaces served. The means provided for stopping the power ventilation of the machinery spaces shall be entirely separate from the means provided for

stopping ventilation of other spaces. 7.112 Prevention of spread of smoke over several decks Ventilation ducts serving more than one deck level shall be provided with readily accessible means of closure at each deck level. 7.113 Release of smoke from machinery spaces 7.1131 The provisions of 71132 to 71134 shall apply to machinery spaces of category A, and where considered desirable to other machinery spaces. 7.1132 Suitable arrangements shall be made to permit the release of smoke in the event of fire, from the space to be protected. The normal ventilation systems may be acceptable for this purpose, subject to the provisions in GL Rules according to Chapter 21 – Ventilation, Section 1, E.59 7.1133 Means of control shall be provided for permitting the release of smoke and such controls shall be located outside the space concerned so that they will not be cut off in the event of fire in the space they serve. 7.1134 The controls shall be easily accessible as well as prominently

and permanently marked and shall indicate whether the shutoff is open or closed. 8. Restricted use of combustible materials 8.1 All exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway enclosures and surfaces including grounds in concealed or inaccessible spaces in accommodation and service spaces and control stations shall have low flame-spread characteristics. Exposed surfaces of ceilings in accommodation and service spaces (except saunas) and control stations shall have low flamespread characteristics. 4 8.2 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire hazard and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke. 5 8.3 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in accommodation and service spaces and control stations shall be of an approved material which will not readily –––––––––––––– 4 5 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67)

Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 2, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67) Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 7–8 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection ignite, or give rise to toxic or explosive hazardous at elevated temperatures. 6 8.4 Waste receptacles shall be constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in the sides or bottom. Containers in galleys, pantries, garbage handling or storage spaces and incinerator rooms which are intended purely for the carriage of wet waste, glass bottles and metal cans may be constructed of combustible materials. 9. Details of construction 9.1 Method IC In accommodation and service spaces and control stations all linings, draught stops, ceilings and their associated grounds shall be of non-combustible materials. 9.2 Methods IIC and IIIC In corridors and stairway enclosures serving accommodation and service spaces and control stations, ceilings, linings, draught stops and their

associated grounds shall be of non-combustible materials. 9.3 Methods IC, IIC and IIIC 9.31 Except in cargo spaces or refrigerated compartments of service spaces, insulating materials shall be non-combustible. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with insulation, as well as the insulation of pipe fittings, for cold service systems, need not be of non-combustible materials, but they shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and their exposed surfaces shall have low flame spread characteristics. 9.32 Where non-combustible bulkheads, linings and ceilings are fitted in accommodation and service spaces they may have a combustible veneer with a calorific value 7 not exceeding 45 MJ/m2 of the area for the thickness used. 9.33 The total volume of combustible facings, mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommodation and service space bounded by non-combustible bulkheads, ceilings and linings shall not exceed a volume equivalent to a 2,5 mm veneer on the combined

area of the walls and ceilings. 9.34 Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panellings, or linings, shall be divided by close-fitting draught stops spaced not more than 14 m apart. In the vertical direction, such air spaces, including those behind linings of stairways, trunks, etc., shall be closed at each deck. –––––––––––––– 6 7 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 6, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67) The gross calorific value measured in accordance with ISO standard 1716 - "Building Materials - Determination of Calorific Potential", should be quoted. I - Part 1 GL 2007 10. Fixed fire detection and fire alarm systems, automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system 10.1 In vessels in which method IC is adopted, a smoke detection system shall be so installed and arranged as to protect all corridors, stairways and escape routes within accommodation spaces. 10.2 In vessels in which method IIC is

adopted, an automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so installed and arranged as to protect accommodation spaces, galleys and other service spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within accommodation spaces. 10.3 In vessels in which method IIIC is adopted, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so installed and arranged as to detect the presence of fire in all accommodation spaces and service spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within accommodation spaces. 11. Means of escape 11.1

Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts. 11.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be provided at least two widely separated means of escape from each restricted space or group of spaces. 11.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who normally might be quartered or employed there. 11.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is only one escape route. 11.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as widely separated as possible leading to doors in the upper part of the space similarly separated and from

which access is provided to the open deck. 11.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than 1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of escape due regard being paid to the dimension and disposition of the upper part of the space. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 12. Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Miscellaneous items 12.1 The cargo holds and machinery spaces have to be capable of being effectively sealed such as to prevent the inlet of air. Doors fitted in boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces of category A shall be reasonably gastight and self-closing. 12.2 Construction and arrangement of saunas 12.21 The perimeter of the sauna shall be of "A" class boundaries and may include changing rooms, showers and toilets. The sauna shall be insulated to "A-60" standard against other spaces except those inside the perimeter and spaces of category (5), (9) and (10). 12.22 Bathrooms with direct access to saunas may be considered as part

of them. In such cases, the door between sauna and the bathroom need not comply with fire safety requirements. Chapter 8 Page 7–9 12.23 The traditional wooden lining on the bulkheads and on the ceiling are permitted in the sauna The ceiling above the oven shall be lined with a noncombustible plate with an air-gap of at least 30 mm. The distance from the hot surfaces to combustible materials shall be at least 500 mm or the combustible materials shall be suitably protected. 12.24 The traditional wooden benches are permitted to be used in the sauna. 12.25 ing. The sauna door shall open outwards by push- 12.26 Electrically heated ovens shall be provided with a timer. 13. Protection of cargo spaces Fire-extinguishing arrangements according to Section 8, H.4 are to be provided for cargo spaces Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 8 A Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8 Page 8–1 Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire

Fighting – arrangement of pipes, valves and hydrants including material, pipe diameters and wall thicknesses The Rules in this Section apply to fire protection in machinery spaces and to systems and equipment to be provided for fire fighting purposes in machinery spaces and throughout the fishing vessel. – sizes and numbers of fire hoses and nozzles 2. Application 3.3 2.1 General A. General 1. Scope In general the GL Rules defined in the following are valid for all types of fishing vessels. Some of the detailed requirements are to be applied in dependence of the length of the vessel, using the characteristic values L = 24 m and L = 45 m. 2.2 International Torremolinos Convention Fishing vessels of flag states which have already ratified the Torremolinos International Convention for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, see Section 1, A.3, have to follow directly the requirements defined therein. 2.3 – Fire extinguishers types, sizes and position Fixed gas

fire extinguishing system – arrangement of pipes, nozzles, gas cylinders, controls and alarms – schematic diagram and details of the release system, alarm system and the means of monitoring as applicable – GL-form F 88 for CO2-system – calculation of the required quantity of extinguishing medium – hydraulic calculation 3.4 High-expansion foam system – arrangement drawing – details on foam generator, pumps, power supply and supply of foam concentrate European Community Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m flying the flag of a state of the European Community or vessels fishing in the waters of the European Community have to follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Convention according to 2.2 overruled by the Commission Directives defined in Section 1, A.33 A copy of the consolidated text can be delivered by GL. 2.4 3.2 3.5 Pressure water-spraying system (sprinkler and deluge system) – arrangement drawing – details on materials, nozzle

characteristics, pumps and power supply – calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic calculation National regulations Where national regulations are existing, these regulations have to be met in addition. It will be decided case by case if GL will supervise also the compliance with such regulations. 3.6 – arrangement drawing 3. – details on piping, nozzle characteristics, supply pump and water supply – details of the release and alarm system All necessary details of the systems to be installed shall be given and in particular as follows: – calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic calculation 3.1 3.7 Documents for approval Diagrammatic plans, drawings and documents are to be submitted in triplicate for approval. – Water fire extinguishing system (Fire and deckwash system) position, type and capacity of pumps and position of associated power sources Fixed water-based local application firefighting system (FWBLAFFS) in category A machinery spaces, if

applicable Fire extinguishing system for galley range exhaust ducts, if applicable – arrangement drawing – details of the release station Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 8–2 3.8 Section 8 B Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Fire extinguishing system for deep-fat cooking equipment – arrangement drawing – details on piping and nozzle characteristics – details of the release station 3.9 Fire extinguishing systems for cargo spaces and paint stores I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.2 Oiltight coamings are to be provided between boiler and engine rooms not separated by watertight bulkheads. 2.3 Where boilers are located in machinery spaces on tween-decks and the boiler rooms are not separated from the machinery spaces by watertight bulkheads, the tween-decks are to be provided with oiltight coamings at least 200 mm high. Drains from this area may be led to the bilges. In case of thermal oil boilers, however, the drains are to be led to a leakage oil tank.

– arrangement drawing – details on piping and nozzle characteristics 3. – details of the release station 3.1 All parts with surface temperatures above 220°, e.g steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines, exhaust gas boilers and silencers, turbochargers etc., are to be effectively insulated with non-combustible materials. The insulation shall be such that oil or fuel cannot penetrate into the insulating material. Metal cladding or approved hard jacketing of the insulation is considered to afford effective protection against such penetration. B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces 1. Machinery space arrangement 1.1 The arrangement of machinery spaces shall be so that safe storage and handling of flammable liquids is ensured. 1.2 All spaces in which internal combustion engines, oil burners or fuel settling or service tanks are located shall be easily accessible and sufficiently ventilated. 1.3 Where leakages of flammable liquids may occur during operation or routine

maintenance work, special precautions are to be taken to prevent these liquids from coming into contact with sources of ignition. 1.4 Materials used in machinery spaces shall normally not have properties increasing the fire potential of these rooms. 1.5 Materials used as flooring, bulkhead lining, ceiling or deck in control rooms, machinery spaces or rooms with oil tanks shall be non-combustible. This requirement, however, does not apply to vessels the hull of which is constructed of combustible materials. 1.6 Where there is a danger that oil may penetrate insulating materials, these shall be protected against the penetration of oil or oil vapours. 2. Installation of boilers 2.1 Boilers are to be located at a sufficient distance from fuel and lubricating oil tanks and from cargo space bulkheads in order to prevent undue heating of the tank contents or the cargo. Alternatively, the tank sides or bulkheads are to be insulated. Insulation of lines and appliances 3.2 Boilers are to be

provided with non-combustible insulation which is to be clad with steel sheet or equivalent. 3.3 Insulation shall be such that it will not crack or deteriorate when subject to vibration. 4. Fuel and lubricating oil tanks The Rules in Section 9d, Q. are to be observed 5. Protection against fuel and oil leakage 5.1 Suitable means of collection are to be fitted below potential leakage points. Where oil leakage is liable to be frequent, e.g with oil burners, separators, drains and valves of service tanks, the collectors are to be drained to an oil drain tank. Leakage oil drains may not be part of an overflow system. 5.2 The arrangement of piping systems and their components intended for combustible liquids, shall be such that leakage of these liquids cannot come into contact with heated surfaces or other sources of ignition. Where this cannot be precluded by structural design, suitable precautionary measures are to be taken. 5.3 Tanks, pipelines, filters, preheaters, etc. containing

combustible liquids may not be placed directly above heat sources such as boilers, steam lines, exhaust gas manifolds and silencers or items of equipment which have to be insulated in accordance with 3.1 and may also not be placed above electrical switchgear. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 8 D Fire Protection and Fire Fighting 5.4 Where tanks with flammable liquids are replenished automatically or remote controlled, means are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage. 5.5 In periodically unattended machinery spaces fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel engines are to be shielded or installed in such a way, that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected in a suitable drain tank with high level alarm. 6. Bulkhead penetrations Pipe penetrations through class A or B divisions shall be able to withstand the temperature for which the divisions were designed. Where steam, exhaust gas and thermal oil lines pass through bulkheads,

the bulkhead shall be suitably insulated to protect it against excessive heating. 7. Means for emergency closing of openings, stopping of machinery and fuel shutoffs 7.1 Any opening in machinery spaces and boiler rooms shall be capable of being effectively sealed from outside the space. 7.2 Means are to be provided for stopping ventilating fans serving machinery spaces or boiler rooms from outside such spaces. 7.3 Any forced - or induced - draft fans, oil fuel unit pump, oil fuel transfer pump shall be capable of being stopped from outside the space concerned. 7.4 Except for small independent tanks every oil fuel suction pipe from storage, settling or service tanks situated above the double bottom is to be fitted with a cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the space concerned. This regulation applies also to lubricating oil tanks 7.5 The controls required by 7.2, 73 and 74 should be arranged in as few locations as possible, be readily accessible, not likely to be

cut-off in the event of a fire in the space concerned and bear clear denominations. C. Fire Detection 1. Periodically unattended machinery spaces are to be equipped with an approved fire detection and alarm system. 2. The design and arrangement are to comply with Section 11h and Section 12, D. D. Chapter 8 Page 8–3 Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire and Deckwash System) Every fishing vessel shall be provided with a water fire extinguishing system according to the requirements defined in the following. 1. Fire pumps 1.1 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 24 m shall be fitted with at least two (2) fire pumps one of which is to be independent from the main engine. 1.2 Fishing vessels with L < 24 m shall be fitted with at least one fire pump which may be coupled to the main engine provided that the propeller shaft can be readily declutched or that a variable pitch propeller is fitted. 1.3 The fire pumps shall be capable of supplying a total quantity of water for fire fighting of

not less than two-thirds of the total capacity of the required bilge pumps. 1.4 The minimum capacity of any fire pump shall not be less than 25 m3/h for fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m and 15 m3/h for fishing vessels with L < 45 m. 1.5 With the fire pumps supplying water for the number of jets specified in 4.1, through nozzles specified in 49, a pressure of at least 0,25 N/mm2 is to be maintained at any hydrant. 1.6 Where two pumps are required one of them may be reduced to 40 % of the capacity specified in 1.3, but not less than the capacity specified in 14, provided that the prescribed total capacity is maintained by increasing the capacity of the second pump accordingly. 1.7 Bilge, ballast or other seawater pumps of sufficient capacity and head may be used as fire pumps provided that at least one pump is immediately available for fire fighting purposes. 1.8 Where more than one pump is connected to the fire main a screw-down non-return valve or a combination of shut-off and check

valve is to be fitted at the outlet of each pump. 1.9 Provisions are to be made as to safeguard the supply of water for fire fighting under all conditions of list, trim, roll and pitch likely to be encountered by the vessel. 1.10 For vessels with unattended machinery spaces according to Section 12 remote start for at least one fire pump is to be provided. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 8–4 2. Section 8 E Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Emergency fire pump 2.1 For vessels of 1000 GT and above an emergency fire pump shall be provided, if a fire in one compartment can put all the main fire pumps out of service. The emergency fire pump shall be capable of delivering at least 40 % of the capacity specified in 1.3, but in any case not less than the capacity specified in 1.4 2.2 Emergency fire pumps shall meet the requirements specified in 1.5, 18 and 19 and including their source of power and fuel supply be independent from the space containing the main fire pumps

and be capable of supplying water to the fire main for at least 18 hours. 2.3 A shut-off valve shall be provided such as to be capable of isolating the fire main within the space where the main fire pumps are installed from the rest of the fire main. The shut-off valve shall be arranged in a suitable location outside of such space. 2.4 Any diesel driven power source for the pump shall be capable of being readily started in cold condition down to a temperature of 0 °C. If lower temperatures are likely to be encountered proper means are to be provided to the satisfaction of GL so that ready starting will be safeguarded. 3. Fire piping 3.1 The piping system for the distribution of water for fire fighting shall be designed for the total capacity of the fire pumps required. 3.2 Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat shall not be used unless adequately protected. Ordinary cast iron shall not be used I - Part 1 GL 2007 4.3 One hydrant is to be arranged near the entrance to any

space containing internal combustion machinery or oil fired boilers. 4.4 The hydrants are to be so located as to be readily accessible at any time. 4.5 Fire hoses shall be of appropriate materials. Their length should be chosen in view of easy handling considering the vessels dimensions, however, the length shall not exceed 20 m on deck and 15 m in machinery spaces. 4.6 The number of fire hoses provided shall be – at least two in vessels with L < 24 m – at least three in vessels with L ≥ 24 m – in vessels of 1000 GT and above one hose for each 30 m of vessels length but at least five. Hoses for machinery spaces and boiler rooms shall be provided in addition to this figure. 4.7 Fire hoses with nozzles attached are to be located near the fire hydrants, the position to be marked conspicuously. 4.8 Only appropriate quick-acting couplings shall be used for the connection of hoses to hydrants and nozzles. 4.9 Nozzle size shall be 12 mm in vessels with L ≥ 24 m and 10 mm

in vessels with L < 24 m. 4.10 Nozzles for use in machinery spaces and boiler rooms shall be of dual purpose type (full jet/spray with shut-off). However, it is recommended to use this type of nozzle throughout the vessel. 3.3 The pipes and their accessories are to be adequately protected against corrosion, shock and freezing. Drain cocks are to be provided in suitable locations in order to drain all parts of the system which may be subjected to freezing. E. 4. 1. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in accommodation and service spaces. Fire hydrants, hoses and nozzles 4.1 The number and position of hydrants shall be such that any part of the vessel normally accessible while at sea can be reached with: – one jet of water from a single length of hose in a vessel with L < 24 m – two jets of water not emanating from the same hydrant in a vessel with L ≥ 24 m, one of the jets shall be from a single length of hose. 4.2 Fire hydrants shall be fitted with a

shut-off such that any fire hose can be disconnected while the system is pressurized. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodations and Service Spaces The number of extinguishers provided shall not be less than: – five in vessels with L ≥ 45 m – three in vessels with L < 45 m 2. Portable extinguishers should be of a type suitable for all types of fires to be expected in accommodation and service spaces. 3. Fire extinguishers shall meet the requirements specified in G. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 8 G Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8 Page 8–5 F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Machinery Spaces which contain internal combustion machinery or oil fired boilers. 1. Oil-fired boilers or internal combustion engines 5. Spaces containing oil-fired boilers or internal combustion machinery shall be provided with: Types of fixed fire extinguishing systems The fixed fire extinguishing system required by 4. shall be any one of

the following: 5.1 A gas system complying with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, G. or I (a) one wheeled fire extinguisher of 45 ltrs. foam or 50 kg dry powder (b) one portable fire extinguisher for each 750 kW or part thereof of the total power output of internal combustion machinery. The total number is not to be less than 2 and need not exceed 6. 5.2 A high expansion foam system complying with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, K.3 a receptacle containing sand or other appropriate dry material and a scoop. One additional portable extinguisher may be substituted as an alternative 5.3 A pressure water-spraying system complying with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, L.21 (c) In vessels with L < 24 m the extinguisher specified in (a) may be replaced by one additional portable extinguisher. 2. Internal combustion engines only In spaces containing only internal

combustion machinery, other than for propulsion, of a total power output of less than 110 kW, one portable extinguisher will be accepted in lieu of the equipment specified in 1. 3. Fixed water based local application fire fighting system (FWBLAFFS) In fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above, fire hazard areas in category A machinery spaces above 500 m3 in gross volume shall be protected with a fixed local application fire fighting system. The design of the system and the protected areas shall be in compliance with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, L.3 Internal combustion engines and domestic boilers In spaces containing only domestic boilers with a capacity of less than 175 kW one portable extinguisher will be accepted in lieu of the extinguisher specified in 1. (a) This may also be applied where internal combustion machinery is installed in the same space if 175 kW are not exceeded when adding up the output of internal combustion machinery

and the capacity of the boiler. 4. 6. Installation of fixed fire extinguishing systems A fixed fire extinguishing system as specified in 5. shall be provided for: 4.1 All vessels in machinery spaces containing internal combustion machinery of total power output of 375 kW or above. 4.2 Vessels of 500 GT and above in machinery spaces containing internal combustion machinery used for the main propulsion and for spaces containing oilfired boilers or oil-fuel units. For fishing vessels with Class Notation AUT the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12 apply. 4.3 Vessels constructed mainly of wood or GRP in machinery spaces decked with such material and G. Fire Extinguishers 1. Type of fire Portable and wheeled fire extinguishers provided in accordance with these Rules shall be of a type suitable for the fire to be extinguished. 2. Approval All extinguishers shall normally be approved by the competent National Authority. Extinguishers approved by

other authorities may be accepted if they are consistent with applicable National Regulations. 3. Minimum charge The charge in portable dry powder and gas extinguishers should be at least 5 kg and the content of foam and water extinguishers should be not less than 9 liters. 4. Toxic gases Fire extinguishers containing an extinguishing medium which either by itself or under expected conditions gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to endanger persons shall not be permitted. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 8–6 5. Section 8 H Fire Protection and Fire Fighting CO2 extinguishers CO2 extinguishers may not be located in accommodation spaces and water-filled extinguishers may not be provided for the extinguishers required in machinery spaces or boiler rooms. 6. Location The extinguishers are to be installed in readily accessible positions. If stowed in a cabinet, conspicuous marking is to be provided. One of the extinguishers intended for use in any space is

to be located near the entrance to that space. 7. Instruction plates Instruction plates shall be fitted either near the extinguishers or on the extinguishers themselves, stating that a discharged extinguisher may not be put back into place. 8. Spare charges 8.1 For fire extinguishers, capable of being recharged on board, spare charges are to be provided: – 100 % for the first 10 extinguishers of each type – 50 % for the remaining extinguishers of each type, but not more than 60 (fractions to be rounded off) 8.2 For fire extinguishers which cannot be recharged on board, additional portable fire extinguishers of same type and capacity shall be provided. The number is to be determined as per 8.1 I - Part 1 GL 2007 H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces other than Machinery Spaces 1. Galley range exhaust duct Where the galley range exhaust duct passes through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, a fixed fire extinguishing system shall be

provided complying with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.2 2. Deep-fat cooking equipment Deep-fat cooking equipment is to be fitted with arrangements as specified in the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.3 3. Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers are to be protected with a fixed fire extinguishing system complying with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.1 4. Cargo spaces Cargo spaces on fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above are to be provided with a fixed CO2 system complying with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, G. 5. Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal combustion engines Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal combustion engines, if applied, are to be provided with a fixed CO2 system or another extinguishing system approved by the engine manufacturer which is

independent of the engine room fire extinguishing system. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9a D General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8 Page 9a–1 Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations A. General 1. The Rules for Machinery Installations apply to the propulsion installations of ships classed by Germanischer Lloyd (GL), including all the auxiliary machinery and equipment necessary for the operation and safety of the fishing vessel. They also apply to machinery which GL is to confirm as being equivalent to classed machinery. 2. Apart from the machinery and equipment detailed in the following, the Rules are also individually applicable to other machinery and equipment where this is necessary to the safety of the vessel or its cargo. 3. Designs which deviate from the Rules for the Construction of Machinery Installations may be approved provided that such designs have been examined by GL for suitability and have been recognized as

equivalent. 4. Machinery installations which have been developed on novel principles and/or which have not yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service require GLs special approval. Such machinery may be marked by the Class Notation EXP affixed to the Character of Classification and be subjected to intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable proof cannot be provided of its suitability and equivalence in accordance with 3. 5. In the instances mentioned in 3. and 4 GL is entitled to require additional documentation to be submitted and special trials to be carried out. is defined in the different Sections where the requirements for the different elements of the fishing vessel are given. C. Ambient Conditions 1. Operating conditions, general 1.1 The general ambient conditions for the operations of the machinery installations are defined in Section 1, C. 1.2 Account is to be taken of the effects on the machinery installation of distortions of the vessels hull. 2. Vibrations

2.1 Machinery, equipment and hull structures are normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, construction and installation must in every case take account of these stresses The faultless long-term service of individual components shall not be endangered by vibration stresses. 2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibrations shall follow the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations. D. Design and Construction of the Machinery Installations 1. Dimensions of components 6. In addition to the Rules, GL reserve the right to impose further requirements in respect of all types of machinery where this is unavoidable due to new findings or operational experience, or GL may permit deviations from the Rules where these are specially warranted. 1.1 All parts must be capable of withstanding the stresses and loads peculiar to shipboard service, e.g those due to movements of the vessel, vibrations, intensified corrosive attack, temperature changes and wave impact, and

has to be dimensioned in accordance with the requirements set out in the following Sections. 7. National rules or regulations outside GLs Rules remain unaffected. In the absence of Rules governing the dimensions of parts, the recognized rules of engineering practice are to be applied. B. Documents for Approval The general conditions for these documents are defined in Section 1, E. The scope of the documentation 1.2 Where connections exist between systems or plant items which are designed for different forces, pressures and temperatures (stresses), safety devices are to be fitted which prevent the over-stressing of the system or plant item designed for the lower design Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9a–2 Section 9a D General Rules for Machinery Installations parameters. To preclude damage, such systems are to be fitted with devices affording protection against excessive pressures and temperatures and/or against overflow. 2. Materials All components must

comply with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding. 3. Welding The fabrication of welded components, the approval of companies and the testing of welders are subject to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding, Chapters 1 - 3. 4. Tests 4.1 Machinery and its component parts are subject to constructional and material tests, pressure and leakage tests, and trials. All the tests prescribed in the following Sections are to be conducted under the supervision of GL. In the case of parts produced in series, other methods of testing may be agreed with GL instead of the tests prescribed, provided that the former are recognized as equivalent by GL. 4.2 GL reserve the right, where necessary, to increase the scope of the tests and also to subject to testing those parts which are not expressly required to be tested according to the Rules. 4.3 Components subject to mandatory testing must be replaced with tested parts. 4.4 After installation on board of the main and

auxiliary machinery, the operational functioning of the machinery including the associated ancillary equipment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to be tested, unless adequate testing has already been performed at the manufacturers works in the presence of GLs Representative. In addition, the entire machinery installation is to be tested during sea trials, as far as possible under the intended service conditions. 5. Corrosion protection Parts which are exposed to corrosion are to be safeguarded by being manufactured of corrosion-resistant materials or provided with effective corrosion protection. 6. Availability of machinery 6.1 Vessels machinery is to be so arranged and equipped that it can be brought into operation from the "dead ship" condition with the means available on board. I - Part 1 GL 2007 The "dead ship" condition means that the complete machinery installation including the main electrical power supply is out of operation and auxiliary

sources of energy such as starting air, battery-supplied starting current, etc. are not available for restoring the vessels main electrical system, restarting auxiliary operation and bringing the propulsion installation back into operation. To overcome the "dead ship" condition use may be made of an emergency generator set provided that it is ensured that the electrical power for emergency services is available at all times. It is assumed that means are available to start the emergency generator at all times. 6.2 In case of "dead-ship" condition it must be ensured that it will be possible for the propulsion system and all necessary auxiliary machinery to be restarted within a period of 30 minutes, see Section 11c, C. 7. Control and regulating 7.1 Machinery must be so equipped that it can be controlled in accordance with operating requirements in such a way that the service conditions prescribed by the manufacturer can be met. 7.11 For the control equipment of main

engine and systems essential for operation see Section 11h. 7.2 In the event of failure or fluctuations of the supply of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power to regulating and control systems, or in case of a break in a regulating or control circuit, steps have to be taken to ensure that: – the appliances remain at their present operational setting or, if necessary, are changed to a setting which will have the minimum adverse effect on operation (fail-safe conditions) – the power output or engine speed of the machinery being controlled or governed is not increased and – no unintentional start-up sequences are initiated. 7.3 Manual operation Every functionally important, automatically or remote controlled system shall also be capable of manual operation. 8. Propulsion plant 8.1 Manoeuvring equipment Every engine control platform is to be equipped in such a way that – the propulsion plant can be adjusted to any setting Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL

2007 Section 9a E General Rules for Machinery Installations – the direction of propulsion can be reversed and – the propulsion unit or the propeller shaft can be stopped. 8.2 Remote controls The remote control of the propulsion plant from the bridge is subject to the Rules in Section 12. 8.3 Multiple-shaft and multi-engine systems Steps are to be taken to ensure that in the event of the failure of a propulsion engine, operation can be maintained with the other engines, where appropriate by a simple change-over system. For multiple-shaft systems, each shaft is to be provided with a locking device by means of which dragging of the shaft can be prevented. 9. Turning appliances 9.1 Machinery is to be equipped with the necessary turning appliances. 9.2 The turning appliances are to be of the selflocking type. Electric motors are to be fitted with suitable retaining brakes. 9.3 An automatic interlocking device is to be provided to ensure that the propulsion and auxiliary

prime movers cannot start up while the turning gear is engaged. In case of manual turning installations warning devices may be provided alternatively 10. Operating and maintenance instructions Manufacturers of machinery, boilers and auxiliary equipment have to supply a sufficient number of operating and maintenance notices and manuals together with the equipment. In addition, an easily legible board is to be mounted on boiler operating platforms giving the most important operating instructions for boilers and oil-firing equipment. 11. Markings, identification of machinery parts In order to avoid unnecessary operating and switching errors, all parts of the machinery whose function is not immediately apparent are to be adequately marked and labelled. 12. Fuels and consumables for operation 12.1 All fuels and consumables used for operations of the machinery installations have to be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturers. Chapter 8 Page 9a–3 12.2 The flash point

1 of liquid fuels for the operation of boilers and diesel engines may not be lower than 60 °C. For emergency generating sets, however, use may be made of fuels with a flash point of ≥ 43 °C. The fuel shall enable a starting of the emergency generating set at ambient temperatures of –15 °C and above. 12.3 In exceptional cases, for vessels intended for operation in limited geographical areas or where special precautions subject to GLs approval are taken, fuels with flash points between 43 °C and 60 °C may also be used. This is conditional upon the requirement that the temperatures of the spaces in which fuels are stored or used shall invariably be 10 °C below the flash point. 13. Refrigerating installations The requirements for refrigeration installations are defined in Section 10. E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment 1. Operating and monitoring equipment 1.1 Instruments, warning and indicating systems and operating appliances are to be clearly displayed and conveniently

sited. Absence of dazzle, particularly on the bridge, is to be ensured. Operating and monitoring equipment is to be grouped in such a way as to facilitate easy supervision and control of all important parts of the installation. The following requirements are to be observed when installing systems and equipment: – protection against humidity and the effects of dirt – avoidance of excessive temperature variations – adequate ventilation In consoles and cabinets containing electrical or hydraulic equipment or lines carrying steam or water the electrical gear is to be protected from damage due to leakage. Redundant ventilation systems are to be provided for air-conditioned machinery and control rooms. 1.2 Pressure gauges The scales of pressure gauges are to be dimensioned up to the specified test pressure. The maximum permitted operating pressures are to be marked on the pressure gauges for boilers, pressure vessels and in systems protected by safety valves. Pressure gauges

–––––––––––––– 1 Based, up to 60 °C, on determination of the flash point in a closed crucible (cup test). Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9a–4 Section 9a F General Rules for Machinery Installations shall be installed in such a way that they can be isolated. Lines leading to pressure gauges shall be installed in such a way that the readings cannot be affected by liquid heads and hydraulic hammer 2. Accessibility of machinery and boilers 2.1 Machinery- and boiler installations and apparatus have to be accessible for operation and maintenance. 2.2 In the layout of machinery spaces (design of foundation structures, laying of pipelines and cable conduits, etc.) and the design of machinery and equipment (mountings for filters, coolers, etc), 21 is to be complied with. 3. Engine control rooms Engine control rooms are to be provided with at least two exits, one of which can also be used as an escape route. 4. Lighting All operating spaces

shall be adequately lit to ensure that control and monitoring instruments can be easily read. In this connection see Section 11i 5. Bilge wells/bilges 5.1 Bilge wells and bilges shall be readily accessible, easy to clean and either easily visible or adequately lit. 5.2 Bilges beneath electrical machines shall be so designed as to prevent bilge water from penetrating into the machinery at all angles of inclination and movements of the vessel in service. 5.3 For the following spaces bilge level monitoring is to be provided and limit values being exceeded are to be indicated at a permanently manned alarm point: – Unmanned machinery rooms of category "A" and other machinery rooms (Class Notation AUT) are to be equipped with at least 2 indicators for bilge level monitoring. (For division of machinery rooms into category "A" and other "machinery rooms", see Section 7.) – Other unmanned machinery rooms, such as bow thruster and steering gear compartments

arranged below the load waterline are irrespective of Class Notation AUT to be equipped at least with one indicator for bilge level monitoring. 6. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Ventilation The machinery ventilation is to be designed under consideration of ambient conditions as defined in C.1 7. Noise abatement In compliance with the relevant national regulations, care is to be taken to ensure that operation of the vessel is not unacceptably impaired by engine noise. F. Safety Equipment and Protective Measures Machinery is to be installed and safeguarded in such a way that the risk of accidents is largely ruled out. Besides national regulations particular attention is to be paid to the following: 1. Moving parts, flywheels, chain and belt drives, linkages and other components which could constitute an accident hazard for the operating personnel are to be fitted with guards to prevent contact. The same applies to hot machine parts, pipes and walls for which no thermal insulation is

provided, e.g pressure lines to air compressors. 2. When using hand cranks for starting internal combustion engines, steps are to be taken to ensure that the crank disengages automatically when the engines start. Dead-Mans circuits are to be provided for rotating equipment. 3. Blowdown and drainage facilities are to be designed in such a way that the discharged medium can be safely drained off. 4. In operating spaces, anti-skid floor plates and floor-coverings have to be used. 5. Service gangways, operating platforms, stairways and other areas open to access during operation are to be safeguarded by guard rails. The outside edges of platforms and floor areas are to be fitted with coamings unless some other means is adopted to prevent persons and objects from sliding off. 6. Devices for blowing through water level gauges shall be capable of safe operation and observation. 7. Safety valves and shutoffs shall be capable of safe operation. Fixed steps, stairs or platforms are to be fitted

where necessary. 8. Safety valves are to be installed to prevent the occurrence of excessive operating pressures. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9a H General Rules for Machinery Installations 9. Steam and feedwater lines, exhaust gas ducts, boilers and other equipment and pipelines carrying steam or hot water are to be effectively insulated. Insulating materials have to be incombustible. Points at which combustible liquids or moisture can penetrate into the insulation are to be suitably protected, e.g by means of shielding. G. Communication and Signalling Equipment 1. Voice communication Means of voice communication are to be provided between the vessels manoeuvring station, the engine room and the steering gear compartment, and these means shall allow fully satisfactory intercommunication independent of the shipboard power supply under all operating conditions, see also Section 11h, C. 2. Engineer alarm From the engine room or the engine control

room it shall be possible to activate an alarm in the engineers living quarters, see also Section 11h, D. 3. Engine telegraph Machinery operated from the engine room are to be equipped with a telegraph. H. Essential Equipment 1. Principal requirements Chapter 8 Page 9a–5 Essential (operationally important) equipment is required to ensure continuity of the following functions: – propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and safety of the vessel – safety of the crew – functioning of all equipment, machinery and appliances needed to an unrestricted extent for the primary duty of the fishing vessel These requirements apply for the mechanical part of the equipment and complete equipment units supplied by subcontractors. Essential equipment is subdivided into: – primary essential equipment according to 2. – secondary essential equipment according to 3. 2. Primary essential equipment Primary essential equipment is that required to be operative at all times to

maintain the manoeuvrability of the vessel as regards propulsion and steering and that required directly for the primary duty of the fishing vessel. In the case of multiple-shaft installations, a telegraph shall be provided for each unit. It comprises e.g: – steering gear Local control stations are to be equipped with an emergency telegraph. – controllable pitch propeller installation – fuel oil supply pumps, fuel booster pumps, fuel valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps, cooling water pumps for main and auxiliary engines and turbines necessary for propulsion – forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and condensate pumps for auxiliary boilers of vessels where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential equipment – burner equipment for auxiliary steam boilers of vessels where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential equipment Reversing, command transmission and operating controls, etc. are to be

grouped together at a convenient point on the control platform. – azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for propulsion/steering including lubricating oil pumps, cooling water pumps The current status, "Ahead" or "Astern", of the reversing control is to be clearly indicated on the propulsion plant control platform. – main propulsion plant with internal combustion engines and gas turbines, gears, main shafting, propellers Signalling devices shall be clearly perceptible from all parts of the engine room when the machinery is in full operation. – electric generator units and associated power sources supplying primary essential equipment – hydraulic pumps for primary essential equipment – drives for fishing gear 4. Shaft revolution indicator The speed and direction of rotation of the propeller shafts are to be indicated on the bridge and in the engine room. In the case of small propulsion units, the indicator may be dispensed with. Barred

speed ranges are to be marked on the shaft revolution indicators, see Section 9c, F. 5. Design of communication and signalling equipment For details of the design of electrically operated command transmission, signalling and alarm systems, see Section 11h and Section 12. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9a–6 Section 9a H General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 – fire pumps and other fire fighting installations Secondary essential equipment is that required for the safety of vessel and crew, and is such equipment which can briefly be taken out of service without the propulsion, steering and equipment needed for the primary duty of the fishing vessel, being unacceptably impaired. – ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms – equipment considered necessary to maintain endangered spaces in a safe condition – equipment for watertight closing appliances It comprises e.g: – auxiliary and main engine starting installations –

windlasses – – azimuth thrusters, if they are auxiliary equipment generator units supplying secondary essential equipment, if this equipment is not supplied by generators as described in 2. – fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment – hydraulic pumps for secondary essential equipment – lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment – compressors, pumps and fans for the refrigerating installations – starting air and control air compressors – turning device for main engines – bilge, ballast and heel-compensating installations 3. Secondary essential equipment 4. Non-essential equipment Non-essential equipment is that which temporary disconnection does not impair the principal requirements defined in 1. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b A Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 Page 9b–1 Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors A. General

1. Scope The Rules contained in this Section are valid for internal combustion engines as main and auxiliary drives as well as air compressors. Internal combustion engines in the sense of these Rules are non-reversible, four-stroke diesel engines with trunk piston. For the purpose of these requirements, internal combustion engines are diesel engines. For other types of internal combustion engines the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2 are to be applied. 2. Ambient conditions For all engines, which are used on fishing vessels, the definition of the performance has to be based on the ambient conditions according to Section 1, C. 3. Rated power 3.1 Diesel engines are to be designed such that their rated power when running at rated speed according to the definitions of the engine manufacturer at ambient conditions as defined in Section 1, C. can be delivered as continuous power. Diesel engines are to be capable of continuous operation within power

range 1 in Fig. 9b1 and of short period operation in power range 2. The extent of the power ranges is to be stated by the engine manufacturer. 3.6 Subject to the approval of GL, diesel engines for special applications may be designed for a continuous power (fuel stop power) which cannot be exceeded. 3.7 For main engines, a power diagram (Fig. 9b.1) is to be prepared showing the power ranges within which the engine is able to operate continuously and for short periods under service conditions. 4. Fuels 4.1 The use of liquid fuels is subject to the Rules contained in Section 9a, D.12 4.2 For fuel treatment and supply, see Section 9d. 5. Accessibility of engines Engines are to be so arranged in the engine room that all the assembly holes and inspection ports provided by the engine manufacturer for inspections and maintenance are accessible. A change of components, as far as practicable on board, shall be possible. Requirements related to space and construction have to be considered

for the installation of the engines. Overload power Nominal propeller curve 3.2 Continuous power is to be understood as the standard service power which an engine is capable of delivering continuously, provided that the maintenance prescribed by the engine manufacturer is carried out, between the maintenance intervals stated by the engine manufacturer. Power [%] 3.3 The rated power is to be specified in a way that an overload power corresponding to 110 % of the rated power can be demonstrated at corresponding speed for an uninterrupted period of 1 hour. Deviations from the overload power value require the agreement of GL. Rated (continuous) power Intermittent operation 2 1 Continuous operation 3.4 After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that overload power cannot be given in service. The limitation of the fuel delivery system has to be secured permanently. 3.5 Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel engines

driving electric generators are to be capable of overload operation even after installation on board. Engine speed [%] Fig. 9b1 Example of a power diagram Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–2 6. Section 9b B Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Electronic components and systems 6.1 For electronic components and systems which are necessary for the control of internal combustion engines the following items have to be observed: 6.2 Electronic components and systems have to be type approved according to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 – Test Requirements for Electrical / Electronic Equipment and Systems. 6.3 For computer systems the Rules according to Section 11h, A.2 have to be observed 6.4 For main propulsion engines one failure of an electronic control system shall not result in any sudden loss or change of the propulsion power. In individual cases, GL may

approve other failure conditions, whereby it is ensured that no increase in vessels speed occurs. 6.5 The non-critical behaviour in case of a failure of an electronic control system has to be proven by a structured analysis (e.g FMEA), which has to be provided by the systems manufacturer This shall include the effects on persons, environment and technical condition. I - Part 1 GL 2007 ever applicable, be submitted by the engine manufacturer to GL for approval (A) or information (R). Where considered necessary, GL may request further documents to be submitted. This also applies to the documentation of design changes according to 4. 2. Engines manufactured under licence For each engine type manufactured under licence, the licensee shall submit to GL, as a minimum requirement, the following documents: – comparison of all the drawings and documents as per Table 9b.1 - where applicable – indicating the relevant drawings used by the licensee and the licensor – all drawings of

modified components, if available, as per Table 9b.1 together with the licensors declaration of consent to the modifications – a complete set of drawings at the disposal of the local inspection office of Germanischer Lloyd as a basis for the tests and inspections 3. Definition of a diesel engine type The type specification of an internal combustion engine is defined by the following data: – manufacturers type designation – cylinder bore 6.6 Where the electronic control system incorporates a speed control, F.13, Section 11h, C and Section 12 have to be observed – stroke – method of injection – fuels which can be used 7. – working cycle (4-stroke) – method of gas exchange (naturally aspirated or supercharged) – rated power per cylinder at rated speed and maximum continuous brake mean effective pressure – method of pressure charging (pulsating pressure system or constant-pressure system) – charge air cooling system – cylinder arrangement

(in-line, vee) Local control station 7.1 For the local control station, I. has to be observed 7.2 The indicators named in I. shall be realised in such a way that one failure can only affect a single indicator. Where these indicators are an integral part of an electronic control system, means shall be taken to maintain these indications in case of failure of such a system. 7.3 Where these indicators are realised electrically, the power supply of the instruments and of the electronic system has to be realised in such way to ensure the behaviour stated in 7.2 B. Documents for Approval 1. General The general conditions for these documents are defined in Section 1, E. For each engine type the drawings and documents listed in Table 9b1 shall, wher- 4. Design modifications Following initial approval of an engine type by GL, only those documents listed in Table 9b.1 require to be resubmitted for examination which embody important design modifications. 5. Additional engine components

The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers, heat exchangers, engine-driven pumps, etc. the corresponding applications are to be submitted to GL by the respective manufacturer. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b Table 9b.1 Documents for approval Serial no. A/R 1 R 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R R R R R R R R 10 A 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 A A R R R R R 18 A 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 R A A A A A A R A A R 30 A 31 32 A A B Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Description Details required on GL Forms F 144 and F 144/1 when applying for approval of an internal combustion engine Engine transverse cross-section Engine longitudinal section Cast bedplate and crankcase Thrust bearing assembly Cast thrust bearing bedplate Tie rod Cylinder cover/head, assembly Cylinder liner Crankshaft, details for each number of cylinders, with data sheets for calculation of crankshafts Crankshaft, assembly for each number of cylinders Shaft coupling bolts

Counterweights(if not integral with crankshaft), including fastening Connecting rod, details Connecting rod, assembly Piston assembly Camshaft drive, assembly Material specification of main parts with information on non-destructive tests and pressure tests Arrangement of foundation (for main engines only) Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of starting air system Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of fuel oil system Schematic layout or other documents of lubricating oil system Schematic layout or other documents of cooling water system Schematic diagram of engine control and safety system Schematic diagram of electronic components and systems Shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly Shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly Arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valves Operation and service manuals Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of hydraulic system (for valve lift) on the engine Type test program and type test report High

pressure parts for fuel oil injection system Chapter 8 Page 9b–3 Quantity Remarks 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 3 1 6 4 4 4 4 4 2 3 5 3 1 3 7 A R 1 2 for approval for reference if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate all engines 3 4 only for engines with a bore > 200 mm or a crankcase volume ≥ 0,6 m3 and the system so far as supplied by the engine manufacturer. If engines incorporate electronic control systems a failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) is to be submitted to demonstrate that failure of an electronic control system will not result in the loss of essential services for the operation of the engine and that operation of the engine will not be lost or degraded beyond an acceptable performance criteria of the engine operation and service manuals are to contain maintenance requirements (servicing and repair) including details of any special tools and gauges that are to be used with their fittings/settings together

with any test requirements on completion of maintenance for comparison with GL requirements for material, NDT and pressure testing as applicable the documentation has to contain specification of pressures, pipe dimensions and materials 5 6 7 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–4 Section 9b D C. Crankshaft Calculation 1. Design methods Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors 1.1 Crankshafts are to be designed to withstand the stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated power and the documentation has to be submitted for approval. Calculations are to be based on the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Calculation of Crankshafts for I.C Engines Other methods of calculation may be used provided that they do not result in crankshaft dimensions smaller than those obtained by applying the aforementioned regulations. 1.2 Outside the end bearings, crankshafts designed according to the

requirements specified in 1.1 may be adapted to the diameter of the adjoining shaft d by a generous fillet (r ≥ 0,06 ⋅ d) or a taper. 1.3 Design methods for application to crankshafts of special construction and to the crankshafts of engines of special type are to be agreed with GL. 2. Screw joints 2.1 Split crank shafts 1.2 Materials with properties deviating from those specified may be used only with GLs special approval. GL requires proof of the suitability of such materials. 2. Power-end flange couplings The bolts used to connect power-end flange couplings are normally to be designed as fitted bolts in accordance with Section 9c, A.4 If the use of fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of an equivalent frictional resistance transmission. In these cases the corresponding calculations are to be submitted for approval. 3. Torsional vibration, critical speeds Section 9c, F. applies D. Materials 1. Approved materials 1.1 The mechanical characteristics of

materials used for the components of diesel engines have to conform to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials. The materials approved for the various components are shown in Table 9b.3 together with their minimum required characteristics and material Certificates. Testing of materials 2.1 In the case of individually produced engines, the following parts are to be subjected to material tests in the presence of the GL representative. 1. Crankshaft 2. Crankshaft coupling flange (non-integral) for main power transmission 3. Crankshaft coupling bolts 4. Pistons or piston crowns made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron 5. Connecting rods including the associated bearing covers 6. Cylinder liners made of steel or cast steel 7. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel 8. Tie rods 9. Bolts and studs for: – cylinder covers Only fitted bolts may be used for assembling split crankshafts. 2.2 I -

Part 1 GL 2007 – main bearings – connecting rod bearings 10. Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels made of steel or cast steel. 2.11 Materials tests are to be performed in accordance with Table 9b.2 Table 9b.2 Material tests Cylinder bore Parts to be tested (numbered according to the list under D.21) ≤ 300 mm 1–5–8 > 300 ≤ 400 mm 1–5–6–7–8–9 > 400 mm all parts 2.12 In addition, material tests are to be carried out on pipes and parts of the starting air system and other pressure systems forming part of the engine, see Section 9d. 2.13 Material for charge air coolers are to be supplied with manufacturer test reports. 2.2 In the case of individually manufactured engines, non-destructive material tests are to be performed on the parts listed below in accordance with Tables 9b.4 and 9b5 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b Table 9b.3 Approved materials and type of test Certificate D Approved materials Internal

Combustion Engines and Air Compressors GL Rules * Components Crankshafts Forged steel: Rm ≥ 360 N/mm2 Connection rods Section 3, C. Piston and piston crowns Cylinder covers/heads Camshaft drive wheels Rolled and forged steel rounds: Rm ≥ 360 N/mm2 Cast steel Section 3, C. Section 4, C. Tie rods Bolts and studs Bearing transverse girders (weldable) Pistons and piston crowns Lammelar cast iron: Rm ≥ 200 N/mm2 Section 5, C. A B – C – – – ×4 – – – ×4 – – – ×2 – × – – ×3 ×1 ×3 – × × × × × × × × ×3 × ×3 × ×1 Cylinder covers/heads – Flywheels – Valve bodies – Engine blocks – – Bedplates – – Cylinder blocks – – Cylinder liners – – Cylinder covers/heads – – Flywheels – – Camshaft drive wheels Section 5, B. Test Certificate * ×4 ×2 ×4 ×1 ×1 ×1 ×4 ×1 ×1 ×1 Cylinder covers/heads Nodular cast iron, preferably ferritic grades: Rm ≥ 370 N/mm2

Chapter 8 Page 9b–5 Engine blocks – Bedplates – Cylinder blocks – Piston and piston crowns ×3 – – – – – – – – – * * all details refer to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and Test Procedures – Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations: A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report 1 only for cylinder bores > 300 mm 2 for cylinder bores ≤ 300 mm 3 only for cylinder bores > 400 mm 4 for cylinder bores ≤ 400 mm 1. Steel castings for bedplates, e.g bearing transverse girders, including their welded joints 2. Solid forged crankshafts – main bearing bolts 3. Cast, rolled or forged parts of fully built crankshafts – connecting rod bolts 4.

Connecting rods – cylinder cover bolts 5. Piston crowns of steel or cast steel 8. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel 6. Tie rods (at each thread over a distance corresponding to twice the threaded length) 9. Camshaft drive gear wheels made of steel or cast steel 7. Bolts which are subjected to alternating loads, e.g: Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–6 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors 2.21 Magnetic particle or dye penetrant tests are to be performed in accordance with Table 9b.4 at those points, to be agreed between the GL Surveyor and the manufacturer, where experience shows that defects are liable to occur. 2. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Pressure tests The individual components of internal combustion engines are to be subject to pressure tests at the pressures specified in Table 9b.6 GL Certificates are to be issued for the results of the pressure tests. 2.22 Ultrasonic tests are to be carried out by the manufacturer

in accordance with Table 9b.5, and the corresponding signed manufacturers Certificates are to be submitted. 3. Type approval testing (TAT) 3.1 General 2.23 Welded seams of important engine components may be required to be subjected to approved methods of testing. Engines for installation on board of the vessel have to be type tested by GL. For this purpose a type approval test in accordance with 3.12 is to be performed 2.24 Where there is reason to doubt the soundness of any engine component, non-destructive testing by approved methods may be required in addition to the tests mentioned above. 3.11 Table 9b.4 Cylinder bore ≤ 400 mm 1–2–3–4 > 400 mm all parts Table 9b.5 Preconditions for type approval testing are that: – the engine to be tested conforms to the specific requirements for the series and has been suitably optimized – the inspections and measurements necessary for reliable continuous operation have been performed during works tests carried out

by the engine manufacturer and GL has been informed of the results of the major inspections – GL has issued the necessary approval of drawings on the basis of the documents to be submitted in accordance with B. Magnetic particle tests Parts to be tested (numbered according to the list under D.22) Ultrasonic tests Cylinder bore Parts to be tested (numbered according to the list under D.22) ≤ 400 mm 1–2–3–4–5–8 > 400 mm 1–2–3–4–5–8–9 2.3 Crankshafts welded together from forged or cast parts are subject to GL special approval. Both the manufacturers and the welding process shall have been accepted. The materials and the welds are to be tested. 3.12 1. Scope of type approval testing The type approval test is subdivided into three stages, namely: – Stage A - Internal tests Functional tests and collection of operating values including test hours during the internal tests, which are to be presented to GL during the type test. – Stage B - Type

test This test is to be performed in the presence of the GL representative. – E. Preconditions for type approval testing Stage C – Component inspection After conclusion of the tests, major components are to be presented for inspection. Tests and Trials The operating hours of the engine components which are presented for inspection after type testing in accordance with 3.4, are to be stated Manufacturing inspections 1.1 The manufacture of all engines with GL Classification is subject to supervision by GL. 3.2 1.2 Where engine manufacturers have been approved by GL as "Suppliers of Mass Produced Engines", these engines are to be tested in accordance with GL Guidelines VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Mass Produced Engines, Section 1, C. Functional tests and the collection of operating data are to be performed during the internal tests. The engine is to be operated at the load points important for the

engine manufacturer and the pertaining operating values are to be recorded. The load points are to be selected according to the range of application of the engine. Stage A - Internal tests Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b Table 9b.6 Pressure tests E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors 1 Test pressure, pp [bar] 2 Component Cylinder cover, cooling water space 3 7 Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling water space 5 7 Cylinder jacket, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Exhaust valve, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Piston, cooling water space (after assembly with piston rod, if applicable) 7 Fuel injection system Hydraulic system Chapter 8 Page 9b–7 Pump body, pressure side 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less) Valves 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less) Pipes 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less) High pressure piping for hydraulic drive of exhaust

gas valves 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Exhaust gas turbocharger, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Exhaust gas line, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Coolers, both sides 4 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Engine-driven pumps (oil, water, fuel and bilge pumps) 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Starting and control air system 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul before installation 1 In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the Table. Where design or testing features may require modification of these test requirements, special consideration will be given. 2 pe, zul [bar] = maximum allowable working pressure in the part concerned. 3 For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted, e.g suitable non-destructive examination and dimensional control exactly recorded. 4 Charge air coolers need only be tested on the water side. 5 For centrifugally cast cylinder liners, the pressure test can be replaced by a crack test.

3.21 Normal case The normal case includes the load points 25 %, 50 %, 75 %, 100 % and 110 % of the maximum rated power: a) b) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller curve and/or at constant speed for propulsion engines at rated speed with constant governor setting for generator drive The limit points of the permissible operating range as defined by the engine manufacturer are to be tested. 3.22 Emergency operation situations For turbocharged engines the achievable output in case of turbocharger damage is to be determined as follows: Note The engine manufacturer has to state whether the achievable output is continuous. If there is a time limit, the permissible operating time is to be indicated. 3.3 Stage B - Type test During the type test all the tests listed under 3.31 to 3.33 are to be carried out in the presence of the GL representative. The results achieved are to be recorded and signed by GL representative. Deviations from this program, if any, require the agreement of

GL. 3.31 Load points Load points at which the engine is to be operated are to conform to the power/speed diagram in Fig. 9b2 – engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is blocked or removed The data to be measured and recorded when testing the engine at various load points has to include all the parameters necessary for an assessment. – engines with two or more turbochargers, when the damaged turbocharger is shut off The operating time per load point depends on the engine size and on the time for collection of the operating Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–8 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 GL 2007 Overload power 110 105,8 3 110 100 3a Rated power (continuous power) 100 3 2 90 4 90 80 5 9 cur v e 2 70 70 6 pro pel ler 60 7 50 No mi nal 60 50 Torque [%] 80 Power [%] 1 1 10 40 40 30 30 8 Speed [%] 1 = Range of continuous operation 2 = Range of intermittent operation 3 =

Range of short-time overload operation in special applications Fig. 9b2 103,2 100 11 Power/speed diagram values. The measurements shall in every case only be performed after achievement of steady-state condition. Normally, an operating time of 0,5 hour can be assumed per load point. At 100 % output (rated power) in accordance with 3.311 an operating time of 2 hours is required At least two sets of readings are to be taken at an interval of 1 hour in each case. If an engine can continue to operate without its operational safety being affected in the event of a failure of its independent cylinder lubrication, proof of this shall be included in the type test. 3.311 Rated power (continuous power) The rated power is defined as 100 % output at 100 % torque and 100 % speed (rated speed) corresponding to load point 1. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 Page 9b–9 3.312 100 % power Note The

operation point 100 % output at maximum allowable speed corresponding to load point 2 has to be performed. If deemed necessary by the GL representative, further dismantling of the engine may be required. 3.313 Maximum permissible torque 3.5 The maximum permissible torque normally results at 110 % output at 100 % speed corresponding to load point 3 or at maximum permissible power (normally 110 %) at a speed according to the nominal propeller curve corresponding to load point 3a. The results of the type approval test are to be compiled in a report which is to be submitted to GL. 3.6 Test approval test report Test approval Certificate 3.314 Minimum permissible speed for intermittent operation After successful conclusion of the test and appraisal of the required documents GL issues a Type Approval Certificate. The minimum permissible speed for intermittent operation has to be adjusted: 3.7 – at 100 % torque corresponding to load point 4 – at 90 % torque corresponding to

load point 5 3.315 Part-load operation For part-load operation the operation points 75 %, 50 %, 25 % of the rated power at speeds according to the nominal propeller curve at load points 6, 7 and 8 and proceeding from the nominal speed at constant governor setting has to be adjusted corresponding to load points 9, 10 and 11. 3.32 Emergency operation The maximum achievable power when operating in accordance with 3.22 has to be performed: – at speed conforming to nominal propeller curve – with constant governor setting for rated speed 3.33 Functional tests Functional tests to be carried out as follows: – ascertainment of lowest engine speed according to the nominal propeller curve – starting tests – governor test – test of the safety system particularly for overspeed and failure of the lubricating oil pressure – test of electronic components and systems according to the test program approved by GL 3.4 Stage C – Component inspection Immediately after

the test run the components of one cylinder for in-line engines and two cylinders for Vengines are to be presented for inspection as follows: – piston, removed and dismantled – crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled – cylinder liner in the installed condition – cylinder head, valves disassembled – camshaft, camshaft drive and crankcase with opened covers Type testing of mass produced engines 3.71 For engines with cylinder bores ≤ 300 mm which are to be manufactured in series the type test shall be carried out in accordance with GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Mass Produced Engines. 3.72 For the performance of the type test, the engine is to be fitted with all the prescribed items of equipment. If the engine, when on the test bed, cannot be fully equipped in accordance with the requirements, the equipment may be demonstrated on another engine of the same series. 3.8 Renewal of type test

If the rated power (continuous power) of a type tested and operationally proven engine is increased by more than 10 %, a new type test is required. Approval of the power increase includes examination of the relevant drawings. 4. Works trials 4.1 General In general, engines are to be subjected to trials on the test bed at the manufacturers works and under GL supervision. The scope of these trials shall be as specified below Exceptions to this require the agreement of GL. 4.2 Scope of works trials During the trials the operating values corresponding to each load point are to be measured and recorded by the engine manufacturer. All the results are to be compiled in an acceptance protocol to be issued by the engine manufacturer. In each case all measurements conducted at the various load points shall be carried out under steady operating conditions. The readings for 100 % power (rated power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an interval of at least 30 minutes. Source:

http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–10 4.21 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Main engines for direct propeller drive The operation points have to be adjusted according to a) – e), functional tests have to be performed according to d) – f). a) b) 100 % power (rated power): at 100 % engine speed (rated engine speed) for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steadystate conditions 110 % power: at 103 % engine speed for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state conditions Note After the test bed trials the output shall normally be limited to the rated power (100 % power) so that the engine cannot be overloaded in service (see A.34) I - Part 1 GL 2007 4.3 Depending on the type of plant concerned, GL reserve the right to call for a special test schedule. 4.4 In the case of engines driving electrical generators the rated electrical power as specified by the manufacurer is to be verified as minimum power. 4.5 Component inspection After the

test run randomly selected components shall be presented for inspection. The crankshaft web deflection is to be checked 5. Shipboard trials (dock and sea trials) After the conclusion of the running-in programme prescribed by the engine manufacturer engines are to undergo the trials specified below. 5.1 Scope of sea trials Main propulsion engines driving fixed propellers c) 90 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power in accordance with the nominal propeller curve 5.11 d) starting and reversing manoeuvres, see H.24 The tests have to be carried out as follows: e) test of governor and independent overspeed protection device a) f) test of engine shutdown devices at rated engine speed: for at least 4 hours and at engine speed corresponding to normal cruise power: for at least 2 hours b) at 103 % engine speed: for 30 minutes where the engine adjustment permits, see A.34 c) determination of the minimum on-load speed. d) starting and reversing manoeuvres see H.24 e) in reverse

direction of propeller rotation during the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 % engine speed: for 10 minutes f) testing of the monitoring and safety systems 4.22 Main engines for electrical propeller drive The test is to be performed at rated speed with a constant governor setting under conditions of: a) b) 100 % power (rated power): for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steadystate condition 110 % power: for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state condition Note After the test bed trials the output of engines driving generators is to be so adjusted that overload (110 %) power can be supplied in service after installation on board in such a way that the governing characteristics and the requirements of the generator protection devices can be fulfilled at all times (see A.35) 5.12 Main propulsion engines driving controllable pitch propellers or reversing gears 5.11 applies as appropriate Controllable pitch propellers are to be tested with various propeller pitches.

Where provision is made for operating in a combinator mode, the combinator diagram is to be plotted and verified by measurements. c) 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power and idle run d) start-up tests, see H.24 e) test of governor and independent overspeed protection device 5.13 f) test of engine shutdown devices The tests are to be performed at rated speed with a constant governor setting under conditions of 4.23 Auxiliary driving engines and engines driving electric generators The tests have to be performed according to 4.22 For testing of diesel generator sets, see also Section 11 l. a) Main engines driving generators for propulsion 100 % power (rated power): for at least 4 hours and at normal continuous cruise power: for at least 2 hours Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b F Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors b) 110 % power: for 30 minutes c) in reverse direction of propeller rotation during the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 %

of the nominal propeller speed: for 10 minutes d) starting manoeuvres, see H.24 e) testing of the monitoring and safety systems Note Tests are to be based on the rated powers of the driven generators. 5.14 Engines driving auxiliaries and electrical generators These engines are to be subjected to an operational test for at least four hours. During the test the set concerned is required to operate at its rated power for an extended period. It is to be demonstrated that the engine is capable of supplying 110 % of its rated power, and in the case of shipboard generating sets account shall be taken of the times needed to actuate the generators overload protection system. Chapter 8 Page 9b–11 can be declutched in service or which drives a variable-pitch propeller must be fitted with an independent overspeed protection device so adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 20 %. Equivalent equipment may be approved by GL. 1.2 Engines driving electric

generators 1.21 Each diesel engine used to drive an electric main or emergency generator has to be fitted with a governor which will prevent transient frequency variations in the electrical network in excess of ± 10 % of the rated frequency with a recovery time to steady state conditions not exceeding 5 seconds when the maximum electrical step load is switched on or off. In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated output of the generator is switched off, a transient speed variation in excess of 10 % of the rated speed may be acceptable, provided this does not cause the intervention of the overspeed device as required by 1.11 5.2 The suitability of main and auxiliary engines to burn special fuels is to be demonstrated if the machinery installation is designed to burn such fuels. 1.22 In addition to the normal governor, each diesel engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over shall be equipped with an overspeed protection device independent of the normal governor which

prevents the engine speed from exceeding the rated speed by more than 15 %. 5.3 The scope of the shipboard trials may be extended in consideration of special operating conditions such as low-load operation, towing, trawling, etc. 1.23 The diesel engine shall be suitable and designed for the special requirements of the vessels electrical system. 5.4 Where two stage load application is required, the following procedure is to be applied: Sudden loading from no-load to 50 %, followed by the remaining 50 % of the rated generator power, duly observing the requirements of 1.21 and 124 Earthing It is necessary to ensure that the limits specified for main engines by the engine manufacturers for the difference in electrical potential (Voltage) between the crankshaft/shafting and the hull are not exceeded in service. Appropriate earthing devices including limit value monitoring of the permitted voltage potential are to be provided. F. Safety Devices 1. Speed control and engine

protection against overspeed 1.1 Main and auxiliary engines 1.11 Each diesel engine not used to drive an electric generator has to be equipped with a speed governor or regulator so adjusted that the engine speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 15 %. 1.12 In addition to the normal governor, each main engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over which Application of the load in more than two steps, see Fig. 9b3, is acceptable on condition that: – the vessels electrical system is designed for the use of such generator sets – load application in more than two steps is considered in the design of the vessels electrical system and is approved when the drawings are reviewed – during shipboard trials the functional tests are carried out without objections. Here the loading of the vessel’s electrical net while sequentially connecting essential equipment after breakdown and during recovery of the net is to be taken into account. – the safety of the vessels

electrical system in the event of parallel generator operation and failure of a generator is to be demonstrated Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9b Chapter 8 Page 9b–12 Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors F I - Part 1 GL 2007 100 Load increase referred to rated power [%] 90 80 limiting curve for 3rd load step 70 60 limiting curve for 2nd load step 50 40 limiting curve for 1st load step 30 20 10 0 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Mean eff. working pressure pe,e [bar] at rated power of diesel engine 24 Fig. 9b3 Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from no load to rated power as function of the brake mean effective pressure 1.24 Speed shall be stabilized and in steady-state condition within five seconds, inside the permissible range for the permanent speed variation δT. The steady-state condition is considered to have been reached when the residual speed variation does not exceed ± 1 % of the speed associated with the set

power. range. The permanent deviation from the theoretical linearity of the speed characteristic may, in the case of generating sets intended for parallel operation, in no range exceed 1 % of the rated speed. Notes relating to 1.1 and 12: a) 1.25 The characteristic curves of the governors of diesel engines of generator sets operating in parallel must not exhibit deviations larger than those specified in Sections 11a – 11 l. The rated power and the corresponding rated speed relate to the conditions under which the engines are operated in the system concerned. b) 1.26 Generator sets which are installed to serve stand-by circuits are to satisfy the corresponding requirements when the engine is cold. The start-up and loading sequence is to be concluded in about 30 seconds. An independent overspeed protection device means a system all of whose component parts, including the drive, work independently of the normal governor. 1.3 1.27 Emergency generator sets have to satisfy the

above governor conditions also unlimited with the start-up and loading sequence having to be concluded in about 45 seconds. 1.28 The governors of the engines mentioned in 1.21 have to enable the rated speed to be adjusted over the entire power range with a maximum deviation of 5 %. 1.29 The rate of speed variation of the adjusting mechanisms has to permit satisfactory synchronization in a sufficiently short time. The speed characteristic should be as linear as possible over the whole power Use of electrical/electronic governors 1.31 The governor and the associated actuator shall, for controlling the respective engine, be suitable for the operating conditions laid down in the Construction Rules and for the requirements specified by the engine manufacturer. For single propulsion drives it has to be ensured that in case of a failure of the governor or actuator the control of the engine can be taken over by another control device. The regulating conditions required for each individual

application as described in 1.1 and 12 are to be satisfied by the governor system Electronic governors and the associated actuators are subject to type testing. For the power supply, see Sections 11a – 11 l. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.32 Section 9b F Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Requirements applying to main engines For propulsion installations, to ensure continuous speed control or immediate resumption of control after a fault, at least one of the following requirements is to be satisfied: Chapter 8 Page 9b–13 3.22 Where provision has been made for the forced extracting the lubricating oil vapours, e.g for monitoring the oil vapour concentration, the negative pressure in the crankcase may not exceed 2,5 mbar. a) The governor system has an independent backup system or 3.23 The vent pipes of two or more engines shall not be combined. Exemptions may be approved if an interaction of the combined systems is inhibited by suitable

means. b) there is a redundant governor assembly for manual change-over with a separately protected power supply or 4. the engine has a manually operated fuel admission control system suitable for manoeuvring 4.1 Crankcase safety devices have to be type approved. In the event of a fault in the governor system, the operating condition of the engine shall not become dangerous, that is, the engine speed and power shall not increase. 4.2 Safety valves to safeguard against overpressure in the crankcase are to be fitted to all engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm and/or a crankcase volume of ≥ 0,6 m3. Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to be fitted. All separated spaces within the crankcase, e.g gear or chain casings for camshafts or similar drives, are to be equipped with additional safety devices if the volume of these spaces exceeds 0,6 m3. c) 1.33 Requirements applying to auxiliary engines for driving electrical generators Each auxiliary engine has

to be equipped with its own governor system. In the event of a fault in the governor system, the fuel admission in the injection pumps shall be set to "0". Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to be fitted. 1.34 The special conditions necessary to start operation from the dead ship condition are to be observed, see Sections 11a – 11 l. 2. Cylinder overpressure warning device 2.1 All the cylinders of engines with a cylinder bore of > 230 mm are to be fitted with cylinder overpressure warning devices. The response threshold of these warning devices shall be set at not more than 40 % above the combustion pressure at the rated power. 2.2 A warning device may be dispensed with if it is ensured by an appropriate engine design or by control functions that the cylinder pressure cannot increase in an unacceptable range. 3. Crankcase airing and venting 3.1 Crankcase airing 4.3 Engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm and ≤ 250 mm shall be equipped with

at least one safety valve at each end of the crankcase. If the crankshaft has more than 8 throws, an additional safety valve is to be fitted near the middle of the crankcase. Engines with a cylinder bore of > 250 mm and ≤ 300 mm shall have at least one safety valve close to every second crank throw, subject to a minimum number of two. Engines with a cylinder bore of > 300 mm shall have at least one safety valve close to each crank throw. 4.4 Each safety valve shall have a free relief area of at least 45 cm2. The total relief area of all safety valves fitted to an engine to safeguard against overpressure in the crankcase may not be less than 115 cm2/m3 of crankcase volume. Notes relating to 4.2 and 44 a) In estimating the gross volume of the crankcase, the volume of the fixed parts which it contains may be deducted. b) A space communicating with the crankcase via a total free cross-sectional area of > 115 cm2/m3 of volume need not be considered as a separate space. In

calculating the total free crosssectional area, individual sections of < 45 cm2 are to be disregarded. c) Each safety valve required may be replaced by not more than two safety valves of smaller cross-sectional area provided that the crosssectional area of each safety valve is not less than 45 cm2. The airing of crankcases is not allowed. 3.2 Crankcase venting 3.21 Where crankcase venting systems are provided their clear opening is to be dimensioned as small as possible. Crankcase safety devices Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–14 Section 9b G Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 GL 2007 4.5 The safety devices are to be of quick acting and self closing type. In service they shall be oiltight when closed and have to prevent air from flowing into the crankcase. The gas flow caused by the response of the safety device shall be deflected, e. g by means of a baffle plate, in such a way as not to endanger persons standing nearby. down

the engine in the event of failure of the lubricating oil supply. This is not valid for engines serving solely for the drive of emergency generator sets and emergency fire pumps. For these engines an alarm has to be provided. Safety devices shall respond quickly and be fully opened at a differential pressure not greater than 0,2 bar. The scavenge air manifolds in open connection to the cylinders are to be fitted with explosion relief valves as in 4. 4.6 Crankcase doors and their fittings are to be so dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation due to the overpressure occurring during the response of the safety equipment. G. Auxiliary Systems 1. General 4.7 Crankcase doors and hinged inspection ports are to be equipped with appropriate latches to effectively prevent unintended closing. 4.8 A warning sign specifying that the crankcase doors and/or sight holes may not be opened immediately after stopping the engine, but only after a sufficient cooling period has elapsed, is

to be mounted on the local engine control platform or, if appropriate, on both sides of the engine. 4.9 Engines with a cylinder diameter > 300 mm or a rated power of 2250 kW and above are to be fitted with crankcase oil mist detections systems. 7. Safety devices in scavenge manifolds For piping systems and accessory filter arrangements Section 9d is to be applied, additionally. 2. Fuel oil system 2.1 General 2.11 Only pipe connections with metal sealing surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved design may be used for fuel injection lines. 4.10 The oil mist monitoring and alarm information is to be capable of being read from a safe location away from the engine. 2.12 Feed and return lines are to be designed in such a way that no unacceptable pressure surges occur in the fuel supply system. Where necessary, the engines are to be fitted with surge dampers approved by GL. 4.11 For multiple engine installations each engine is to be provided with a separate oil mist

detection system and a dedicated alarm. 2.13 All components of the fuel system are to be designed to withstand the maximum peak pressures which will be expected in the system. 4.12 A copy of the documention supplied with the oil mist detection system such as maintainance and test manuals are to be provided on board vessel. 2.14 If fuel oil reservoirs or dampers with a limited life cycle are fitted in the fuel oil system the life cycle together with overhaul instructions is to be specified by the engine manufacturer in the corresponding manuals. 5. Safety devices in the starting air system The following equipment is to be fitted to safeguard the starting air system against explosions due to failure of starting valves: 5.1 An isolation non-return valve is to be fitted to the starting air line serving each engine. 5.2 Engines with cylinder bores of > 230 mm are to be equipped with flame arrestors immediately in front of the intake of the main starting air line to each engine. 5.3

Equivalent safety devices may be approved by GL. 6. Safety devices in the lubricating oil system Each engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over is to be fitted with devices which automatically shut 2.15 Oil fuel lines are not to be located immediately above or near units of high temperature, steam pipelines, exhaust manifolds, silencers or other equipment required to be insulated by 7.1 As far as practicable, oil fuel lines are to be arranged far apart from hot surfaces, electrical installations or other potential sources of ignition and are to be screened or otherwise suitably protected to avoid oil spray or oil leakage onto the sources of ignition. The number of joints in such piping systems is to be kept to a minimum. 2.2 Shielding 2.21 Regardless of the intended use and location of internal combustion engines, all external fuel injection lines (high pressure lines between injection pumps and injection valves) are to be shielded by jacket pipes in such a way that any leaking

fuel is: Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b G Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors – safely collected – drained away unpressurized and – efficiently monitored and alarmed 2.22 If pressure variations of > 20 bar occur in fuel feed and return lines, these lines are also to be shielded. 2.23 The high pressure fuel pipe and the outer jacket pipe have to be of permanent assembly. 2.24 Where pipe sheaths in the form of hoses are provided as shielding, the hoses have to be demonstrably suitable for this purpose and approved by GL. 2.3 Fuel leak drainage Appropriate design measures are to be introduced to ensure generally that leaking fuel is drained efficiently and cannot enter into the engine lube oil system. 2.4 Heat tracing, thermal insulation, recirculation Fuel lines, including fuel injection lines, to engines which are operated with preheated fuel are to be insulated against heat losses and, as far as necessary, provided with

heat tracing. Means of fuel circulation are also to be provided. 2.5 Fuel oil emulsions For engines operated on emulsions of fuel oil and other liquids it has to be ensured that engine operation can be resumed after failures to the fuel oil treatment system. 3. Filter arrangements for fuel oil and lubricating oil systems 3.1 Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be mounted directly on the engine are not to be located above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of hot components. 3.2 Where the arrangement stated in 3.1 is not feasible, the rotating parts and the hot components are to be sufficiently shielded. 3.3 Filters have to be so arranged that fluid residues can be collected by adequate means. The same applies to lubricating oil filters if oil can escape when the filter is opened. 3.4 Change-over filters with two or more chambers are to be equipped with means enabling a safe pressure release before opening and a proper venting before re-starting of any chamber.

Normally, shut-off devices are to be used. It shall be clearly visible, which chamber is in and which is out of operation. Chapter 8 Page 9b–15 3.5 Oil filters fitted parallel for the purpose of enabling cleaning without disturbing oil supply to engines (e.g duplex filters) are to be provided with arrangements that will minimize the possibility of a filter under pressure being opened by mistake. Filters/ filter chambers shall be provided with suitable means for: – venting when put into operation – depressurizing before being opened Valves or cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location shall be used for this purpose. 4. Lubricating oil system 4.1 General requirements relating to lubricating oil systems and to the cleaning, cooling, etc. of the lubricating oil are contained in Section 9d, F. For piping arrangement 2.13 is to be applied 4.11 Engines which sumps serve as oil reservoirs shall be so equipped that the oil level can be established and, if necessary, topped up

during operation. Means are to be provided for completely draining the oil sump. 4.12 The combination of the oil drainage lines from the crankcases of two or more engines is not allowed. 4.13 Drain lines from the engine sump to the drain tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends. 4.2 The equipment of engines fitted with lubricating oil pumps is subject to Section 9d, F. 4.21 Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of lubricating oil over the entire operating range. 4.22 Main engines which drive main lubricating oil pumps are to be equipped with independently driven stand-by pumps. 4.23 In multi-engine installations having separate lubricating oil systems approval may be given for the carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for mounting provided that the arrangement of the main lubricating oil pumps enables the change to be made with the means available on board. 4.24 Lubricating oil systems for cylinder lubrication which are

necessary for the operation of the engine and which are equipped with electronic dosing units have to be approved by GL. 5. Cooling system 5.1 For the equipment of engines with cooling water pumps and for the design of cooling water systems, see Section 9d. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–16 Section 9b H Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors 5.11 Main cooling water pumps driven by the engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of cooling water over the entire operating range. 5.12 Main engines which drive main cooling water pumps are to be equipped with independently driven stand-by pumps or with means for connecting the cooling water system to independently driven stand-by pumps. 5.13 In multi-engine installations having separate fresh cooling water systems approval may be given for the carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for mounting provided that the arrangement of the main fresh cooling water pumps enables the change to be made with the

means available on board. Shutoff valves shall be provided enabling the main pumps to be isolated from the fresh cooling water system. 6.2 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Charge air cooling 6.21 The construction and testing of charge air coolers are subject to Section 9e, B. 6.22 Means are to be provided for regulating the temperature of the charge air within the temperature range specified by the engine manufacturer. 6.23 The charge air lines of engines with charge air coolers are to be provided with sufficient means of drainage. 7. Exhaust gas lines 7.1 Exhaust gas lines are to be insulated and/or cooled in such a way that the surface temperature cannot exceed 220 °C at any point. Insulating material must be non-combustible. 5.2 If cooling air is drawn from the engine room, the design of the cooling system is to be based on a room temperature of at least 45 °C. 7.2 General rules relating to exhaust gas lines are defined in Section 9d. The exhaust air of air-cooled engines may not cause

any unacceptable heating of the spaces in which the plant is installed. The exhaust air is normally to be led to the open air through special ducts. H. Starting Equipment 1. General 5.3 Where engines are installed in spaces in which oil-firing equipment is operated, Section 9e is also to be complied with. Engine starting equipment shall enable engines to be started up from the shutdown condition using only the means available on board. 6. Charge air system 2. 6.1 Exhaust gas turbochargers 2.1 Starting air systems for main engines are to be equipped with at least two starting air compressors. At least one of the air compressors shall be driven independently of the main engine and has to supply at least 50 % of the total capacity required. 6.11 The construction and testing of exhaust gas turbochargers are subject to the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 3b. 6.12 Exhaust gas turbochargers may exhibit no critical speed ranges over the entire

operating range of the engine. 6.13 The lubricating oil supply shall also be ensured during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas turbochargers. 6.14 Even at low engine speeds, main engines are to be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure reliable operating. 6.15 If, in the lower speed range or when used for manoeuvring, an engine can be operated only with a charge air blower driven independently of the engine, a stand-by charge air blower is to be installed or an equivalent device of approved design. 6.16 With main engines emergency operation has to be possible in the event of a turbocharger failure. Starting with compressed air 2.2 The total capacity of the starting air compressors is to be such that the starting air receivers designed in accordance with 2.4 or 25, as applicable, can be charged from atmospheric pressure to their final pressure within one hour. Normally, compressors of equal capacity are to be installed. This does not apply to an emergency air compressor

which may be provided to meet the requirement stated in 1. 2.3 If the main engine is started with compressed air, the available starting air is to be divided between at least two starting air receivers of approximately equal size which can be used independently of each other. 2.4 The total capacity of air receivers is to be sufficient to provide, without their being replenished, not less than six starts. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9b H Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 Page 9b–17 2.5 With multi-engine installations the number of start-up operations per engine may, with GLs agreement, be reduced according to the concept of the propulsion plant. 3.5 For ventilation requirements see also Section 11b, C.3 2.6 If starting air systems for auxiliaries or for supplying pneumatically operated regulating and manoeuvring equipment or tyfon units are to be fed from the main starting air receivers, due attention is to be paid to the

air consumption of this equipment when calculating the capacity of the main starting air receivers. 4.1 Emergency generating sets are to be so designed that they can be started up readily even at a temperature of 0 °C. 2.7 Other consumers with a high air consumption apart from those mentioned in 2.6 may not be connected to the main starting air system Separate air supplies are to be provided for these units. Deviations to this require the agreement of GL. 2.8 If auxiliary engines are started by compressed air sufficient air capacity for three consecutive starts of each auxiliary engine is to be provided. 2.9 If starting air systems of different engines are fed by one receiver it is to be ensured that the receiver air pressure cannot fall below the highest of the different systems minimum starting air pressure. 2.10 For the approximate calculation of the starting air capacity, use may be made of the formula given in the Rules defined in L. 3. Electrical starting equipment 4.

Start-up of emergency generating sets If the set can be started only at higher temperatures, or where there is a possibility that lower ambient temperatures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted to ensure ready reliable starting. The operational readiness of the set shall be guaranteed under all weather and seaway conditions. Fire flaps required in air inlet and outlet openings shall only be closed in case of fire and are to be kept open at all other times. Warning signs to this effect are to be installed. In the case of automatic fire flap actuation dependent on the operation of the set warning signs are not required. Air inlet and outlet openings shall not be fitted with weatherproof covers. 4.2 Each emergency generating set required to be capable of automatic starting is to be equipped with an automatic starting system approved by GL, the capacity of which is sufficient for at least three consecutive starts, compare Section 11c, C. Additionally a second source of energy is

to be provided capable of three further starting operations within 30 minutes. This requirement is not applicable if the set can be started manually. 3.1 Where main engines are started electrically, two mutually independent starter batteries are to be installed. The batteries are to be so arranged that they cannot be connected in parallel with each other. Each battery shall enable the main engine to be started from cold. 4.3 In order to guarantee the availability of the starting equipment, steps are to be taken to ensure that a) electrical and hydraulic starting systems are supplied with energy from the emergency switchboard The total capacity of the starter batteries shall be sufficient for the execution within 30 minutes, without recharging the batteries, of the same number of startup operations as is prescribed in 2.4 or 25 for starting with compressed air. b) compressed air starting systems are supplied via a non-return valve from the main and auxiliary compressed air

receivers or by an emergency air compressor, the energy for which is provided via the emergency switchboard and c) the starting, charging and energy storage equipment is located in the emergency generator room. 3.2 If two or more auxiliary engines are started electrically, at least two mutually independent batteries are to be provided. Where starter batteries for the main engine are fitted, the use of these batteries is acceptable. The capacity of the batteries has to be sufficient for at least three start-up operations per engine. If only one of the auxiliary engines is started electrically, one battery is sufficient. 3.3 The starter batteries may only be used for starting (and preheating where applicable) and for monitoring equipment belonging to the engine. 3.4 Steps are to be taken to ensure that the batteries are kept charged and the charge level is monitored. 4.4 Where automatic starting is not specified, reliable manual starting systems may be used, e.g by means of hand

cranks, spring-loaded starters, handoperated hydraulic starters or starters using ignition cartridges. 4.5 Where direct manual starting is not possible, starting systems in accordance with 4.2 and 43 are to be provided, in which case the starting operation may be initiated manually. 4.6 The starters of emergency generator sets may be used only for the purpose of starting the emergency generator sets. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9b–18 5. Section 9b I Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Start-up of emergency fire-extinguisher sets 5.1 Diesel engines driving emergency fire pumps are to be so designed that they can still be reliably started by hand at a temperature of 0 °C. If the engine can be started only at higher temperatures, or where there is a possibility that lower temperatures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted to ensure reliable starting. 5.2 If manual start-up using a hand crank is not possible, the emergency fire-extinguisher set

is to be fitted with a starting device approved by GL which enables at least 6 starts to be performed within 30 minutes, two of these being carried out within the first 10 minutes. I - Part 1 GL 2007 2. Main engines 2.1 Local control station To provide emergency operation of the propulsion plant a local control station is to be installed from which the plant can be operated and monitored. 2.11 Indicators according to Table 9b.7 are to be clearly sited on the local main engine control station. 2.12 Temperature indicators are to be provided on the local control station or directly on the engine. 2.13 In the case of gear and controllable pitch propeller systems, the local control indicators and control equipment required for emergency operation are to be installed at the main engines local control station. 2.14 Critical speed ranges are to be marked in red on the tachometers. I. Control Equipment 1. General For unmanned machinery installations Section 12 is to be observed in

addition to the following requirements. Table 9b.7 2.2 If the fishery vessel has a control station for the propulsion system with remote operation or control, the indicators listed in Table 9b.7 are to be installed in the machinery control room, see also Section 12. Alarms and indicators Description Speed / direction Engine overspeed 4 Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine inlet Cylinder cooling water temperature at engine outlet Charge air pressure at cylinder inlet Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet Starting air pressure Control air pressure Exhaust gas temperature 1 Oil mist concentration in crankcase or alternative monitoring system 6, 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Machinery control room/control centre where ever the dimensions permit, at each cylinder

outlet and at the turbo charger inlet and outlet at turbo charger outlet only cooling water pressure or flow only for an engine output > 220 kW for engines having an output > 2250 kW or a cylinder bore > 300 mm alternative methods of monitoring may be approved by GL an engine shutdown may be provided where necessary Propulsion engines I A, S Auxiliary engines Emergency engines A, S A, S I, L, S I, H I A I, L I, H I I I, H I, L I, L I, H 2 I, L, S I 4, H 4 I A I 3, L 3 I, H I, L I H4 I, H 5 I, H 5 I, H 5 I: A: H: L: S: Indicator Alarm Alarm for upper limit Alarm for lower limit Shutdown 4, A I L3 I, H 3, Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.3 Section 9b M Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Bridge/navigation centre 2.31 The essential operating parameters for the propulsion system are to be provided in the control station area. 2.32 The following stand-alone control equipment is to be installed showing: – speed of main engine

– speed/direction of rotation of shafting – propeller pitch (controllable pitch propeller) – starting air pressure (if applicable) – control air pressure (if applicable) 2.33 In the case of engine installations up to a total output of 600 kW, simplifications can be agreed with GL. 2.4 Auxiliary engines For auxiliary engines and emergency application engines as a minimum requirement the controls given in Table 9b.7, third and forth column are to be provided J. Alarms 1. General 1.1 The following requirements apply to machinery installations which have been designed for conventional operation without any degree of automation. 1.2 Within the context of these requirements, the word alarm is to be understood as the visual and audible warning of abnormal operating parameters. 2. Scope of alarms Alarms have to be provided for main, auxiliary and emergency engines according to Table 9b.7 K. Chapter 8 Page 9b–19 Engine Alignment/Seating 1. Engines are to be

mounted and secured to their foundations in conformity with the GL Guidelines VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery. 2. The crankshaft alignment is to be checked every time an engine has been aligned on its foundation by measurement of the crank web deflection and/or other suitable means. For the purpose of subsequent alignments note is to be taken of: – the draught/load condition of the vessel – the condition of the engine - cold/preheated/hot 3. Where the engine manufacturer has not specified values for the permissible crank web deflection, assessment is to be based on GLs reference values according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2, K.4 L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply This calculation shall follow the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2, L. M. Air Compressors The requirements for

design and construction of air compressors are defined in the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2, M. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9c A Propulsion System Chapter 8 Page 9c–1 Section 9c Propulsion System A. Main Shafting 1. General 1.1 Scope The following requirements apply to standard and established types of shafting for main and auxiliary propulsion. Deviating designs require GLs special approval. In the case of fishing vessels with ice classes, the strengthening factors given in E. are to be complied with. GL reserve the right to call for propeller shaft dimensions in excess of those specified in this Section if the propeller arrangement results in increased bending stresses. 1.2 Documents for approval General drawings of the entire shafting, from the main engine coupling flange to the propeller, and detail drawings of the shafts, couplings and other component parts

transmitting the propelling engine torque, in addition detail drawings and the arrangement of the stern tube seals and the cast resin mount for the stern tubes and shaft bearings are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. For the arrangement of the shaft bearings an alignment calculation, including alignment instructions, has to be submitted for approval. With consent of GL for shaftings with intermediate shafts d < 200 mm the alignment calculation may be waived The submitted documentation must contain all the data necessary to enable the stresses to be evaluated. 2. Materials 2.1 Approved materials Propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts together with flange and clamp couplings are to be made of forged steel; where appropriate, couplings shall be made of cast steel. Rolled round steel may be used for plain, flangeless shafts. In general, the tensile strength of steels used for shafting (shafts, flange couplings, bolts/fitted bolts) shall be between 400 N/mm2 and

800 N/mm2. However, the value of Rm used for the calculation of the material factor Cw in accordance with formula (2) for propeller shafts shall not be greater than 600 N/mm2. Where in special cases wrought copper alloys resistant to seawater are to be used for the shafting, the consent of GL shall be obtained. 2.2 Testing of materials All component parts of the shafting which assist in transmitting the torque from the vessels propulsion plant are subject to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding and are to be tested. This requirement also covers metal propeller shaft liners. Where propeller shafts running in seawater are protected against seawater penetration not by a metal liner but by plastic coatings, the coating technique used is to be approved by GL. For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certificates 3.1B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be accepted 3. Shaft dimensions 3.1 General All parts of the shafting are to be dimensioned in accordance with the following

formulae and in compliance with the requirements relating to torsional vibrations set out in F. The dimensions of the shafting shall be based on the total rated installed power. Where the geometry of a part is such that it cannot be dimensioned in accordance with these formulae, special evidence of the mechanical strength of the part or parts concerned is to be furnished to GL. 3.2 Minimum shaft diameter 3.21 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m and fishing along the coast line at a distance not exceeding 20 nautical miles from main land or off-shore islands the minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by the following formula: da ≥ d ≥ k ⋅ C 3 PW n [mm] (1a) da = actual outer shaft diameter [mm] d = required outside diameter of shaft [mm] PW = rated power of propulsion motor [kW] n = shaft speed [min-1] k = 90 for shafts of corrosion-resistant steel, wrought copper alloys, nickel alloys or non-corrosion resistant steel if the shaft is protected against contact

with seawater = 75 for shafts of high tensile wrought nickel alloys 1 –––––––––––––– 1 e.g "Monal alloy K-500", tensile strength > 800 N/mm2 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–2 C Section 9c A Propulsion System I - Part 1 GL 2007 = 1,06 for vessels with one propulsion line = 1,0 = 1,20 for intermediate shafts with longitudinal slots where the length and width of the slot do not exceed 1,17 ⋅ d and 0,25 ⋅ d respectively. = 1,22 for propeller shafts in the area of the aft stern tube or shaft bracket bearing to the forward face of the propeller boss subject to a minimum of 2,5 ⋅ d, if the propeller is shrink-fitted, without key, on to the tapered end of the propeller shaft using a method approved by GL, or if the propeller is bolted to a flange forged on the propeller shaft. = 1,26 for propeller shafts in the area specified for k = 1,22, if the propeller is keyed to the tapered propeller shaft = 1,40 for propeller

shafts in the area specified for k = 1,22, if the shaft inside the stern tube is lubricated with grease. = 1,15 for propeller shafts forward portion of shafts to where they emerge from the stern tube. The portion of the propeller shaft located forward of the stern tube seal can be gradually reduced to the size of the intermediate shaft. for vessels with two propulsion lines 3.22 For all other fishing vessels the minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by applying formula (1b): PW da ≥ d ≥ F ⋅ k ⋅ 3 di ⎡ ⎛ d ⎞4 ⎤ n ⋅ ⎢1 − ⎜ i ⎟ ⎥ ⎢ ⎝ da ⎠ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ ⋅ CW (1) = diameter of shaft bore, where present [mm] If the bore in the shaft is = 0,4 ⋅ d, 1,0 may be applied for the expression: = 1 – (di / da)4 F = factor for the type of propulsion installation [–] a) Intermediate and thrust shafts = 95 for engine installations with slip couplings and electric propulsion installations = 100 for all other propulsion installations b) Propeller

shafts = 100 for all types of installations CW = material factor [–] = 560 / (Rm + 160) (2) Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material (see also 2.1) [N/mm2] k = factor for the type of shaft [–] = 1,0 for intermediate shafts with integral forged coupling flanges or with shrinkfitted keyless coupling flanges = 1,10 for intermediate shafts where the coupling flanges are mounted on the ends of the shaft with the aid of keys. At a distance of at least 0,2 ⋅ d from the end of the keyway, such shafts can be reduced to a diameter corresponding to k = 1,0 = 1,10 for intermediate shafts with radial holes which diameter is not greater than 0,3 ⋅ d = 1,10 for thrust shafts near the plain bearings on both sides of the thrust collar, or near the axial bearings where a roller bearing design is used = 1,15 for intermediate shafts designed as multi-splined shafts where d is the outside diameter of the splined shaft. Outside the splined section, the shafts can be reduced to a diameter

corresponding to k = 1,0 4. Design 4.1 General Changes in diameter are to be effected by tapering or ample radiusing. For intermediate shafts, the radius at forged flanges is to be at least 0,08 ⋅ d, that at the aft propeller shaft flange at least 0,125 ⋅ d. 4.2 Shaft tapers and nut threads Keyways in the shaft taper for the propeller shall be so designed that the forward end of the groove makes a gradual transition to the full shaft section. In addition, the forward end of the keyway shall be spoon-shaped. The edges of the keyway at the surface of the shaft taper for the propeller are not to be sharp. The forward end of the rounded keyway has to lie well within the seating of the propeller boss. Threaded holes to accommodate the securing screws for propeller keys shall be located only in the aft half of the keyway, see Fig. 9c.1 In general, tapers for securing flange couplings which are jointed with keys shall have a conicity of between 1 : 12 and 1 : 20. See C for details

of propeller shaft tapers on the propeller side. The outside diameter of the threaded end for the propeller retaining nut shall not be less than 60 % of the calculated big taper diameter. 4.3 Propeller shaft protection 4.31 Sealing Propeller shafts with oil or grease lubrication are to be fitted with seals of proven efficiency and approved by Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9c A Propulsion System Chapter 8 Page 9c–3 X d r6 ~ 0,5 b Section E - E A d r5 up to 150 up to 250 up to 450 from 450 3 4 5 6 E E b r1 < r2 < r3 < r4 Standard values of r5 B C D r1 r5 r2 r3 r5 r5 Sections: A - A B-B r4 r5 C-C A D-D B C D a (a~b) Detail X Fig. 9c1 Design of keyway in propeller shaft GL at the stern tube ends, see also the requirements applicable to the external sealing of the stern tube in the context with the propeller shaft survey prescribed in the GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 3. approved by GL to

guarantee water-tightness. Such joints will be subject to special tests to prove their effectiveness. The securing at stern tube, shaft line or propeller (e.g chrome steel liner) shall guarantee a permanent tightness. GL reserve the right to demand corresponding verifications. The minimum wall thickness s [mm] of metal shaft liners in accordance with 4.321 is to be determined using the following formula: For protection of the sealing a rope guard shall be provided. 4.323 Minimum wall thickness of shaft liners s = 0,03 ⋅ d + 7,5 d (3) = shaft diameter under the liner [mm] The propeller boss seating is to be effectively protected against the ingress of seawater. This seal can be dispensed with if the propeller shaft is made of corrosion-resistant material. In the case of continuous liners, the wall thickness between the bearings may be reduced to 0,75 ⋅ s. In the case of Class Notation IW, the seal shall be fitted with a device by means of which the bearing clearance can be

measured when the vessel is afloat. The thickness of coupling flanges on the 4.41 intermediate and thrust shafts and on the forward end of the propeller shaft shall be equal to at least 20 % of the calculated minimum diameter of a solid shaft at the relevant location. 4.32 Shaft liners 4.4 Coupling connection 4.321 Propeller shafts which are not made of corrosion- resistant material and which run in seawater are to be protected against ingress of seawater by seawater-resistant metal liners or other liners approved by GL and by proven seals at the propeller. Where propellers are attached to a forged flange on the propeller shaft, the flange has to have a thickness equal to at least 25 % of the calculated minimum diameter of a solid shaft at the relevant location. 4.322 Metal liners in accordance with 4321, which run in seawater, shall be made in a single piece. Only with the expressed consent of GL and in exceptional cases the liner may consist of two or more parts, provided

that the abutting edges of the parts are additionally sealed and protected after fitting by a method In the formulae (4), (5), (6) and (7), the following symbols are used: These flanges shall not be thinner than the Rule diameter of the fitted bolts if these are based on the same tensile strength as that of the shaft material. A = effective area of shrink-fit seating [mm2] Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–4 cA Section 9c Propulsion System A = coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [–], depending on the kind of driving unit = 1,0 for geared diesel engine and turbine drives I - Part 1 GL 2007 4.44 The minimum thread root diameter dk of the connecting bolts used for clamp-type couplings is to be determined using the formula: = 1,2 for direct coupled diesel engine drives C = conicity of shaft ends [–] = difference in tapers diameters/length of tapers d = shaft diameter in area of clamp-type coupling [mm] ds = diameters of fitted bolts [mm] dk = inner

throat diameter for necked-down bolts [mm] D = diameter of pitch circle of bolts [mm] f = coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [–] Q = peripheral force at the mean joint diameter of a shrink fit [N] n = shaft speed [min-1] p = contact pressure of shrink fits [N/mm2] PW = rated power of the driving motors [kW] Rm = tensile strength of fitted or necked-down bolt material [N/mm2] sfl = flange thickness in area of bolt pitch circle [mm] S = safety factor against slipping of shrink fits in the shafting [–] = 2,5 for all other applications T = propeller thrust [N] z = number of fitted or necked-down bolts [–] μ0 = coefficient of static friction [–] 4.46 Shrink fitted couplings For the calculation of the safety margin of the connection against slippage, the maximum clearance will be applied, derived as the difference between the lowest respectively highest still acceptable limit of the applied nominal tolerance field for the bore and the shaft. The contact

pressure p in the shrunk-on joint to achieve the required safety margin may be determined by applying formulae (6) and (7). ( ) 2 2 2 2 2 Θ ⋅ T + f ⋅ cA ⋅ Q + T ± Θ ⋅ T A⋅f [N/mm2] (6) "+" sign following the root applies to conical shrunk joints without an axial stop to absorb astern thrust "–" sign following the root if the conical shrunk joint has an axial stop to absorb astern thrust = 0,15 for hydraulic shrink fits = half conicity of shaft ends [–] = C /2 2 4.42 The bolts used to connect flange couplings are normally to be designed as fitted bolts. The minimum diameter ds of fitted bolts at the coupling flange faces is to be determined by applying the formula: ds = 16 ⋅ (5) Where shafts are connected by keyless shrink fitted couplings (flange or sleeve type), the dimensioning of these shrink fits shall be chosen in a way that the maximum von Mises equivalent stress in all parts will not exceed 80 % of the yield strength of the

specific materials during operation and 95 % during mounting and dismounting. p= = 0,18 for dry shrink fits [mm] 4.45 The shaft of necked-down bolts shall not be less than 0,9 times the thread root diameter. If, besides the torque, the bolted connection has to transmit considerable additional forces, the bolts shall be increased accordingly. = 3,0 between motor and gear Θ 106 ⋅ Pw n ⋅ d ⋅ z ⋅ Rm d k = 12 ⋅ 106 ⋅ Pw n ⋅ D ⋅ z ⋅ Rm [mm] (4) 4.43 Where, in special circumstances, the use of fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of an equivalent frictional transmission. ⎛μ ⎞ f = ⎜ o ⎟ − Θ2 ⎝ S ⎠ [–] 4.5 Shafting bearings 4.51 Arrangement of shaft bearings (7) Shaft bearings both inside and outside the stern tube are to be so arranged that, when the plant is hot and irrespective of the condition of loading of the vessel, each bearing is subjected to positive reaction forces. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL

2007 Section 9c A Propulsion System By appropriate spacing of the bearings and by the alignment of the shafting in relation to the coupling flange at the engine or gearing, care is to be taken to ensure that no undue shear forces or bending moments are exerted on the crankshaft or gear shafts when the plant is at operating state temperature. By spacing the bearings sufficiently far apart, steps are also to be taken to ensure that the reaction forces of line or gear shaft bearings are not significantly affected should the alignment of one or more bearings be altered by hull deflections or by displacement or wear of the bearings themselves. Guide values for the maximum permissible distance between bearings Amax [mm] can be determined using formula (8): A max = K1 ⋅ d (8) d = diameter of shaft between bearings [mm] K1 = 450 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings = 280 for grey cast iron, grease-lubricated stern tube bearings = 280 – 350 for water-lubricated rubber bearings

in stern tubes and shaft brackets (upper values for special designs only) Where the shaft speed exceeds 350 min-1 it is recommended that the maximum bearing spacing is determined in accordance with formula (9) in order to avoid excessive loads due to bending vibrations. In limiting cases a bending vibration analysis should be made for the shafting system. A max d = K2 ⋅ n (9) n = shaft speed [min-1] K2 = 8500 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings = 7500 for water lubricated rubber bearings = 5200 for grease-lubricated, grey cast iron bearings 4.52 Stern tube bearings 4.521 Inside the stern tube the propeller shaft shall normally be supported by two bearing points. In short stern tubes the forward bearing may be dispensed with, in which case at least one free-standing journal shaft bearing should be provided. 4.522 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern tube runs in oil-lubricated white metal bearings or in synthetic rubber or reinforced resin or plastic materials

approved for use in oil-lubricated stern tube bearings, the lengths of the after and forward stern tube bearings shall be approximately 2 ⋅ da and 0,8 ⋅ da respectively. The length of the after stern tube bearing may be reduced to 1,5 ⋅ da where the contact load, which is calculated from the static load and allowing for the weight of the propeller is less than 0,8 MPa in the case Chapter 8 Page 9c–5 of shafts supported on white metal bearings and less than 0,6 MPa in the case of bearings made of synthetic materials. 4.523 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern tube runs in bearings made of lignum vitae, rubber or plastic approved for use in water-lubricated stern tube bearings, the length of the after stern tube bearing shall be approximately 4 ⋅ da and that of the forward stern tube bearing approximately 1,5 ⋅ da. A reduction of the bearing length may be approved if the bearing is shown by means of bench tests to have sufficient load-bearing capacity. 4.524 Where

the propeller shaft runs in greaselubricated, grey cast iron bushes the lengths of the after and forward stern tube bearings should be approximately 2,5 ⋅ da and 1,0 ⋅ da respectively. The peripheral speed of propeller shafts in greaselubricated grey cast iron bearings shall not exceed 2,5 up to a maximum of 3 m/s and that of propeller shafts in rubber and water-lubricated lignum vitae bearings shall not exceed 6 m/s and 3 up to a maximum of 4 m/s respectively. 4.525 Where propeller shafts are to run in roller bearings inside the stern tube, these should wherever possible take the form of cylindrical roller bearings with cambered rollers or races and with increased bearing clearance. The camber must be large enough to accommodate a 0,1 % inclination of the shaft relative to the bearing axis without adverse effects. For application of roller bearings care must be taken that the minimum load requirements as specified by the manufacturer are fulfilled (axial adjustment recommended).

4.53 Bearing lubrication 4.531 Lubrication and matching of materials of the plain and roller bearings for the shafting have to meet the operational demands of seagoing vessels. 4.532 Lubricating oil or grease shall be introduced into the stern tube in such a way as to ensure a reliable supply of oil or grease to the forward and after stern tube bearing. With grease lubrication, the forward and after bearings are each to be provided with a grease connection. Wherever possible, a grease pump driven by the shaft is to be used to secure a continuous supply of grease. Where the shaft runs in oil within the stern tube, a header tank is to be fitted at a sufficient height above the vessels load line. Facilities are to be provided for checking the level of oil in the tank at any time. The temperature of the after stern tube bearing is to be indicated. Alternatively, with propeller shafts less than 400 mm in diameter the stern tube oil temperature may be indicated. In this case the

temperature sensor is to be located in the vicinity of the after stern tube bearing. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–6 Section 9c B Propulsion System 4.533 In the case of vessels with automated machinery, Section 12 has to be complied with 4.54 Stern tube water-lubricated connections Oil-lubricated stern tubes are to be fitted with filling, testing and drainage connections as well as with a vent pipe. I - Part 1 GL 2007 For stern tubes fabricated from welded steel plates, it is sufficient to test for tightness during the pressure tests applied to the hull spaces passed by the stern tube. B. Gears, Couplings Where the propeller shaft runs in seawater, a flushing line is to be fitted in front of the forward stern tube bearing in place of the filling connection. 1. General 1.1 Scope 4.55 1.11 These requirements apply to spur, planetary and bevel gears and to all types of couplings for incorporation in the main propulsion plant or essential equipment as

specified in Section 9a, H. The design requirements laid down here may also be applied to the gears and couplings of equipment other than that mentioned in Section 9a, H., if equivalent evidence of mechanical strength is not available. Cast resin mounting The mounting of stern tubes and stern tube bearings made of cast resin and also the seating of intermediate shaft bearings on cast resin parts is to be carried out by GL-approved companies in the presence of a GL Surveyor. Only GL-approved cast resins may be used for seatings. Note is to be taken of the installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the cast resin For further details see the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery and Part 9 – Materials and Welding, Chapter 5 – Guidelines for the Approval of Reaction Plastics and Composite Materials for the Seating and Repair of Components. 4.56

Shaft alignment It has to be verified by alignment calculation that the requirements for shaft-, gearbox- and engine bearings are fulfilled in all relevant working conditions. Therefore all essential static, dynamic and thermal effects have to be taken into account. The submitted calculation reports shall include the complete scope of used input data and has to disclose the resulting shaft deflection, bending stress and bearing loads and the compliance with the specific maker requirements. An instruction for the alignment procedure has to be issued describing the execution on board and listing the permissible gap and sag values for open flange connections or jack-up loads for bearings. The final alignment on board has to be checked by suitable measurement methods in afloat condition in presence of the GL Surveyor. 5. Pressure Tests 5.1 Shaft liners Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, shaft liners are to be subjected to a hydraulic tightness test at 2 bar pressure.

5.2 Stern tubes Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, cast stern tubes and cast stern tube parts are to be subjected to a hydraulic tightness test at 2 bar pressure. A further tightness test is to be carried out after fitting. 1.12 Application of these requirements to the auxiliary machinery couplings mentioned in 1.11 may generally be limited to a basic design approval by GL of the particular coupling type. Regarding the design of elastic couplings for use in generator sets, reference is made to 7.26 1.13 For the dimensional design of gears and couplings for vessels with ice class, see E. 1.2 Documents for approval Assembly and sectional drawings together with the necessary detail drawings and parts lists are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. They shall contain all the data necessary to enable the load calculations to be checked. 2. Materials 2.1 Approved materials Shafts, pinions, wheels and wheel rims of 2.11 gears in the main propulsion plant

shall preferably be made of forged steel. Rolled steel bar may also be used for plain, flangeless shafts. Gear wheel bodies may be made of grey cast iron 2 or nodular cast iron or may be fabricated from welded steel plate with steel or cast steel hubs. 2.12 Couplings in the main propulsion plant shall be made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix. Grey cast iron or suitable cast aluminium alloys may also be permitted for lightly stressed external components of couplings and the rotors and casings of hydraulic slip couplings. 2.13 The gears of essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. are subject to the same requirements as –––––––––––––– 2 The peripheral speed of cast iron gear wheels shall generally not exceed 60 m/s, that of cast iron coupling clamps or bowls, 40 m/s. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9c B Propulsion System those specified in 2.11 as regards the materials used For gears

intended for equipment other than that mentioned in Section 9a, H. other materials may also be permitted. 2.14 Flexible coupling bodies for essential auxiliary machinery according to Section 9a, H. may generally be made of grey cast iron, and for the outer coupling bodies a suitable aluminium alloy may also be used. However, for generator sets use shall only be made of coupling bodies preferably made of nodular cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix, of steel or of cast steel, to ensure that the couplings are well able to withstand the shock torques occasioned by short circuits. GL reserve the right to impose similar requirements on the couplings of particular auxiliary drive units. 2.2 Testing of materials All gear and coupling components which are involved in the transmission of torque and which are intended for the main propulsion plant have to be tested in accordance with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. The same applies to the materials

used for gear components with major torque transmission function and couplings in generator drives. Chapter 8 Page 9c–7 3 for 3. SH = 1,3 SF = 1,8 di ≤ 0, 4 da the exp ression may be set to 1, 0. = required outside diameter of shaft [mm] di = diameter of shaft bore, if applicable [mm] da = actual shaft diameter [mm] P = driving power of shaft [kW] n = shaft speed [min-1] F = factor for the type of drive [–] = 95 for turbine plants, electrical drives and internal combustion engines with slip couplings = 100 for all other types of drive. GL reserve the right to specify higher F values if this appears necessary in view of the loading of the plant. CW = material factor [–] = Rm 560 R m + 160 = tensile strength of the shaft material [N/mm2] However, for wheel shafts the value applied for Rm in the formula shall not be higher than 800 N/mm2. For pinion shafts the actual tensile strength value may be applied k = 1,10 for gear shafts [–] = 1,15 for gear

shafts in the area of the pinion or wheel body if this is keyed to the shaft and for multiple-spline shafts. Higher values of k may be specified by GL where increased bending stresses in the shaft are liable to occur because of the bearing arrangement, the casing design, the tooth pressure, etc. for vessels with one propulsion line SH = 1,2 SF = 1,55 for vessels with two propulsion lines 4. Gear shafts 5. Equipment 4.1 Minimum diameter 5.1 Oil level indicator The dimensions of shafts of reversing and reduction gears are to be calculated by applying the following formula: ⋅ Cw d Calculation of the load-bearing capacity of cylindrical and bevel gearing For gears in main propulsion plants and for dynamically and statically loaded gears of essential equipment sufficient load bearing capacity of the toothing has to be proven according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 5, C. But for fishing vessels with L < 24 m, the following minimum safety margins for

flank and root bending stress may be used: ⎡ ⎛ d ⎞4 ⎤ n ⋅ ⎢1 − ⎜ i ⎟ ⎥ ⎢ ⎝ da ⎠ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ ⎡ ⎛ d ⎞4 ⎤ ⎢1 − ⎜ i ⎟ ⎥ ⎢ ⎝ da ⎠ ⎥ ⎣ ⎦ For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be accepted Suitable documentation is to be submitted for the materials used for the major components of the couplings and gears of all other functionally essential equipment in accordance with Section 9a, H. This documentation may be a GL Material Test Certificate or an acceptance test Certificate of the steelmaker. P da ≥ d ≥ F ⋅ k ⋅ For monitoring the lubricating oil level in main and auxiliary gears, equipment shall be fitted to enable the oil level to be determined. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–8 Section 9c B Propulsion System I - Part 1 GL 2007 Pressure and temperature control n = operating speed of body to be balanced [min-1] Temperature and pressure

gauges are to be fitted to monitor the lubricating oil pressure and the lubricating oil temperature at the oil-cooler outlet before the oil enters the gears. z = number of balancing planes [–] Q = degree of balance [–] 5.2 = 6,3 for gear shafts, pinions and coupling members for engine gears Plain journal bearings are also to be fitted with temperature indicators. = 2,5 for torsion shafts and gear couplings, pinions and gear wheels within turbine driven plants Where gears are fitted with anti-friction bearings, a temperature indicator is to be mounted at a suitable point. For gears rated up to 2000 kW, special arrangements may be agreed with GL Where vessels are equipped with automated machinery, the requirements of Section 12 are to be complied with. 5.3 Lubricating oil pumps Lubricating oil pumps driven by the gearing must be mounted in such a way that they are accessible and can be replaced. For the pumps to be fitted, see Section 9d. 5.4 Gear casings The casings of

gears belonging to the main propulsion plant and to essential auxiliaries shall be fitted with removable inspection covers to enable the toothing to be inspected, the thrust bearing clearance to be measured and oil sump to be cleaned. 5.5 Seating of gears The seating of gears on steel or cast resin chocks is to conform to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery. In the case of cast resin seatings, the thrust must be absorbed by means of stoppers. The same applies to cast resin seatings of separate thrust bearings. 6. Balancing and testing 6.1 Balancing Gear wheels, pinions, shafts, gear couplings 6.11 and, where applicable, high-speed flexible couplings shall be assembled in a properly balanced condition. 6.12 The generally permissible residual imbalance U per balancing plane of gears for which static or dynamic balancing is rendered necessary by the

method of manufacture and by the operating and loading conditions can be determined by applying the formula U = G 9,6 ⋅ Q ⋅ G [kgmm] z⋅n = mass of body to be balanced [kg] 6.2 Testing of gears 6.21 Testing in the manufacturers works When the testing of materials and component tests have been carried out, gearing systems for the main propulsion plant and for essential auxiliaries in accordance with Section 9a, H. are to be presented to GL for final inspection and operational testing in the manufacturers works. For the inspection of welded gear casing, see GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding, Chapter 3 – Welding in the Various Fields of Application. The final inspection is to be combined with a trial run lasting several hours under part or full-load conditions, on which occasion the tooth clearance and contact pattern are to be checked. In the case of a trial at full-load, any necessary running-in of the gears shall have been completed beforehand.

Where no test facilities are available for the operational and on-load testing of large gear trains, these tests may also be performed on board vessel on the occasion of the dock trials. Tightness tests are to be performed on those components to which such testing is appropriate. Reductions in the scope of the tests require the consent of GL. 6.22 Tests during sea trials 6.221 Prior to the start of sea trials, the teeth of the gears belonging to the main propulsion plant are to be coloured with suitable dye to enable the contact pattern to be checked. During the sea trials, the gears are to be checked at all forward and reverse speeds for their operational efficiency and smooth running as well as the bearing temperatures and the pureness of the lubricating oil. At the latest on conclusion of the sea trials, the gearing is to be examined via the inspection openings and the contact pattern checked. If possible the contact pattern has to be checked after conclusion of every load step

Assessment of the contact pattern is to be based on the guide values for the proportional area of contact in the axial and radial directions of the teeth given in Table 9c.1 and shall take account of the running time and loading of the gears during the sea trial. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9c Table 9c.1 Percentage area of contact C Propulsion System Material / Manufacturing of toothing Working tooth depth (without tip relief) heat-treated, milling shaping 33 % average values 70 % surface-hardened, grinding, scarping 40 % average values 80 % Width of tooth (without end relief) 6.222 In the case of multistage gear trains and planetary gears manufactured to a proven high degree of accuracy, checking of the contact pattern after sea trials may, with the consent of GL, be reduced. 7. Design and construction of couplings 7.1 Tooth couplings 7.11 Adequate loading capacity of the tooth flanks has to be proven according the generally accepted

methods defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 5, G. For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be accepted. 7.12 The coupling teeth are to be effectively lubricated. For this purpose a constant oil level maintained in the coupling may generally be regarded as adequate if Chapter 8 Page 9c–9 issue of a general type approval for flexible couplings to be introduced into shipbuilding for the first time, GL reserve the right to call for the execution of special dynamic loading tests appropriate to the design of the coupling in question. 7.24 With regard to casings, flanges and bolts of flexible couplings, the requirements specified in A.4 are to be complied with. 7.25 When flexible couplings are exposed due to special arrangements (e.g couplings in propeller shaft line) to additional axial forces (thrust), their design shall be adequate to transmit these forces additionally to the torque. 7.26 Flexible

couplings for diesel generator sets shall be capable of absorbing impact moments due to electrical short circuits up to a value of 6 times the nominal torque of the plant. 7.3 Flange and clamp-type couplings In the dimensional design of the coupling bodies, flanges and bolts of flange and clamp-type couplings, the requirements specified in A. are to be complied with. 7.4 Testing of couplings Couplings for vessels propulsion plants and couplings for generator sets and transverse thrusters are to be presented to GL for final inspection and, where appropriate, for the performance of functional and tightness tests. d ⋅ n2 < 6 ⋅ 109 [mm/min2] For higher values of d ⋅ n2, couplings in main propulsion plants are to be provided with a circulating lubrication oil system. 7.13 For the dimensional design of the coupling sleeves, flanges and bolts of tooth couplings the formulae given in A. are to be applied 7.2 Flexible couplings 7.21 Flexible couplings shall be type approved for

the loads specified by the manufacturer and for use in main propulsion plants and essential auxiliary machinery. 7.22 Flexible couplings in the main propulsion plant and in power-generating plants shall be so dimensioned that they are able to withstand for a reasonable time operation with one engine cylinder out of service. Additional dynamic loads for vessels with ice class are to be taken into account. In this connection reference is made to E. 7.23 With regard to the routine supervision of coupling types already approved by GL and in order to prove adequate dynamic fatigue strength prior to the C. Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices 1. General 1.1 Scope The requirements defined in C. apply to fixed pitch screw propellers and lateral thrust units. For controllable pitch propellers see Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 6, B and D; for rudder propeller units see Section 14, B. 1.2 Documents for approval 1.21 The general conditions for these documents are

defined in Section 1, E. 1.22 Design drawings of propellers in main propulsion systems having an engine output in excess of 300 kW and in lateral thrust systems of over 500 kW, as well as a general arrangement drawing are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for examination. The drawings are required to contain all the details necessary to carry out an examination in accordance with the following requirements. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–10 Section 9c C Propulsion System I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.3 Materials CG 1.31 Propellers and propeller hubs Cdyn = dynamic factor in accordance with formula (3) [–] Propellers are to be made of sea-water-resistant cast copper alloys or cast steel alloys with a minimum tensile strength of 440 N/mm2, according to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. For the purpose of the following design requirements governing the thickness of the propeller blades, the requisite resistance to seawater

of a cast copper alloy or cast steel alloy is considered to be achieved if the alloy used is capable to withstand a fatigue test under alternating bending stresses comprising 108 load cycles amounting to about 20 % of the minimum tensile strength and carried out in a 3 % NaCl solution, and if it can be proven that the fatigue strength under alternating bending stresses in natural seawater is not less than about 65 % of the values established in 3 % NaCl solution. Sufficient fatigue strength under alternating bending stresses has to be proven by a method recognized by GL. 1.32 CW Description 1 Cw Cu 1 Cu 2 Cu 3 Cu 4 Cast manganese brass Cast manganese nickel brass Cast nickel aluminium bronze Cast manganese aluminium bronze 440 440 590 630 Fe 1 Fe 2 Fe 3 Unalloyed cast steel Low-alloy cast steel Martensitic cast chrome steel 13/1-6 Martensitic cast chrome steel 17/4 Ferritic-austenitic cast steel 24/8 Austenitic cast steel 18/8-11 440 440 600 Fe 4 Novel materials Material

testing The material of propellers, propeller bosses and all other essential components involved in the transmission of torque is to be tested in accordance with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. For fishing vessels having an output below 300 kW Manufacturer Inspection Certificates according to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and Test Procedures, Section 1, H. can be accepted 2. Dimensions and design of propellers 2.1 Symbols and terms Characteristic values Cw Material Components for built-up propellers Fe 5 Where it is proposed to use propeller materials whose serviceability is not attested by a sufficient period of practical experience, GL has to be provided with special proof of the suitability of such materials. 1.34 = characteristic material value for propeller material [–] as shown in Table 9c.2 (corresponds to the minimum tensile strength Rm of the propeller

material where this has been shown to possess sufficient fatigue strength under alternating bending stresses in accordance with 1.31) Table 9c.2 The blade retaining bolts of assembled propellers are to be manufactured from seawater-resistant materials if they are not protected against contact with seawater. 1.33 = size factor in accordance with formula (2) [–] Fe 6 1 C = difference in taper diameter length of taper d = pitch circle diameter of blade or propellerfastening bolts [mm] dk = root diameter of blade or propeller-fastening bolts [mm] D = diameter of propeller [mm] = 2⋅R dm = mean taper diameter [mm] B = developed blade width of cylindrical sections at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R in an expanded view [mm] e = blade rake to aft acc. Fig 9c2 [mm] = 1,0 for engine gear transmissions and electric motor drives = 1,2 for direct drives 500 = conicity of shaft ends [–] = effective area of a shrink fit [mm2] = coefficient for shrunk joints [–] 600 For

the chemical composition of the alloys, see GL Rules II – Materials and Welding. A cA 600 = R ⋅ tan ε ET = thrust stimulating factor in accordance with formula (5) [–] f, f1, f2 = factors in formulae (2), (4) and (7) [–] H = pitch of propeller blade pressure side at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R [mm] Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Hm Section 9c Propulsion System C = mean effective propeller pitch on pressure side for pitch varying with the radius [mm] = Chapter 8 Page 9c–11 z = number of blades [–] α = pitch angle of profile at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R [°] Σ (R ⋅ B ⋅ H) Σ (R ⋅ B) R, B and H are corresponding measures of the various sections. k = coefficient for various profile shapes in accordance with Table 9c.3 [–] Table 9c.3 Values of k for various profile shapes Profile shape 0,35 R 0,6 R Segmental profiles with circular arced back 73 62 44 Segmental profiles with parabolic suction side 77 Blade

profiles as for Wageningen B Series propellers 80 L 66 α 0,35 = arc tan 0,91 ⋅ H D α 0,6 = arc tan 0,53 ⋅ H D = angle included by face generatrix and normal [°] Θ = half-conicity [–] = µo 66 1,27 ⋅ H D ε Values of k 0,25 R α 0,25 = arc tan C 2 = coefficient of static friction [–] = 0,13 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints brass/ bronze to steel 47 = 0,15 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints steel to steel 44 = 0,18 for dry shrunk joints brass/bronze to steel = 0,20 for dry shrunk joints steel to steel = pull-up length when mounting propeller on taper [mm] ψ = skew angle acc. to Fig 9c2 [°] Lmech = pull-up length at t = 35 °C [mm] σ max = ratio of maximum to mean stress at pressure σm side of blades [–] Ltemp = temperature-related portion of pull-up length at t < 35 °C [mm] 2.2 M = torque [Nm] [min-1] n2 = propeller speed Pw = nominal power of driving engine [kW] p = surface pressure in shrink joint between propeller and shaft

[N/mm2] Q = peripheral force at mean taper diameter [N] Rp 0,2 = 0,2 % proof stress [N/mm2] Calculation of blade thickness 2.21 At radii 0,25 R and 0,6 R, the maximum blade thickness of solid propellers shall, at minimum comply with formula (1). t ≥ K0 ⋅ k ⋅ K1 ⋅ CG ⋅ Cdyn K0 = 1+ ReH = yield strength [N/mm ] = tensile strength [N/mm2] S = margin of safety against propeller slipping on cone = 2,8 [–] t = propeller thrust [N] VS = speed of vessel [kn] w = wake fraction [–] W0,35R, W0,6R = section modulus of cylindrical blade section at radii 0,35 R and 0,6 R [mm3] ⎛ ⎞ D Pw ⋅ 105 ⋅ ⎜ 2 ⋅ ⋅ cos α + sin α ⎟ ⎝ Hm ⎠ n 2 ⋅ B ⋅ z ⋅ Cw ⋅ cos2 ε K1 = CG = size factor [–] = maximum blade thickness of developed cylindrical section at radii 0,25 R (t0,25), 0,35 R (t0,35), 0,6 R (t0,6) and 1,0 R (t1,0) [mm] T n2 e ⋅ cos α + H 15000 k as in Table 9c.3 2 Rm (1) = D 1000 12, 2 f1 − (2) 1,1 ≥ CG ≥ 0,85 f1 = 7,2

for solid propellers = 6,2 for separately casted blades of built-up propellers Cdyn = dynamic factor [–] Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9c Chapter 8 Page 9c–12 e C Propulsion System t 1,0 I - Part 1 GL 2007 max. thickness line 1,0 R (+) (-) 0,9 R mid chord line 0,8 R curve of swept area t 0,6 0,7 R 0,6 R B0,6 0,5 R y D 0,4 R t 0,25 rS rD 0,25 R 0,2 R B0,25 trailing edge leading edge Blade-sections according to Wageningen B-series e Fig. 9c2 Blade geometry σ max / σ m − 0,8 ≥ 1, 0 0, 7 Cdyn = for (3) σ max > 1,5 ; otherwise σm Cdyn = 1,0 σmax/σm is generally to be taken from the detailed calculation analogously to the calculation in 2.25 If, in exceptional cases, no such calculation exists, the stress ratio may be calculated approximately according to formula (4). σ max = f2 ⋅ ET + 1 σm (4) 2.22 The blade thicknesses calculated by applying formula (1) are minima for the finish-machined propellers. 2.23 The fillet

radius at the transition from the pressure and suction side of the blades to the propeller boss shall correspond, in the case of three and fourbladed propellers, to about 3,5 % of the propeller diameter. For propellers with a larger number of blades the maximum possible fillet radius shall be aimed at, but the radius shall not in any case be made smaller than 40 % of the blade root thickness. 2.24 A variable fillet radius, ensuring a uniform stress distribution, may be accepted based on a strength calculation case by case. The resulting calculated maximum stress shall not exceed the values, resulting from a standard constant fillet radius design in accordance to 2.23 ET = 4,3 ⋅ 10−9 (5) 2.25 For special designs such as propellers with skew angle ψ ≥ 25°, tip fin propellers, special profiles, etc., special mechanical strength calculations are to be submitted to GL. f2 = 0,4 – 0,6 for single-screw vessels, the lower value applying to stern shapes with a wide propeller tip

clearance and no rudder heel, and the larger value to sterns with small clearance and with rudder heel. Intermediate values are to be selected accordingly. A blade geometry data file and details on the measured wake are to be submitted to GL by data carrier or e-mail: prop@gl-group.com, together with the design documents to enable the check of the blade stress distribution of these special designs. VS ⋅ n 2 ⋅ (1 − w) ⋅ D3 T = 0,2 for twin-screw vessels 2.26 If the propeller is subjected to an essential wear due to special operating conditions, e.g abrasion Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9c I - Part 1 GL 2007 C Propulsion System in tidal flats, a wear addition has to be provided to the thickness determined under 2.21 If the actual thickness in service drops below 50 % at the blade tip or 90 % at other radii of the rule thickness obtained from 2.21, effective countermeasures have to be taken In case of unconventional blade geometries according to 2.25, the design

thickness as shown on the approved drawing shall be used in lieu of the rule thickness according to 221 3. Propeller Mounting 3.1 Cone connection 3.11 Where the cone connection between the shaft and the propeller is fitted with a key, the propeller is to be mounted on the tapered shaft in such a way that approximately 120 % of the mean torque can be transmitted from the shaft to the propeller by the frictional bond. The tapers of propellers which are mounted with a key should not be more than 1 : 10 or less than 1 : 15. 3.12 Where the tapered fit to the shaft is performed by the hydraulic oil technique without the use of a key, the necessary pull-up distance L on the tapered shaft is given by formula (6). Where appropriate, allowance is also to be made for surface smoothing when calculating L L = Lmech + Ltemp (6) Where appropriate allowance is also made for surface smoothing when calculating L, where Lmech is determined according to the formulae of elasticity theory applied to

shrink joints for a specific surface pressure p [N/mm²] at the mean taper diameter determined by applying formula (7) and for a water temperature of 35 °C. p= ( ) Θ 2 ⋅ T 2 + f ⋅ c A 2 ⋅ ce6 ⋅ Q 2 + T 2 ± Θ ⋅ T A⋅f L temp = t dm ⋅ 6 ⋅10−6 ⋅ (35 − t) C For direct drives the safety factor has to be taken as S = 1,0 and the peripheral force Q has to be replaced by QFR according to formula (10) Q FR = 2, 0 ⋅ Q + 1,8 ⋅ Q V − MCR (10) where QFR replaces Q in formula (7). QV-MCR is the maximum value from torsional vibration evaluations, but is not to be taken less than 0,44 times the Q value. The torsional vibration evaluation is to consider the worst relevant operating conditions, e.g such as misfiring (one cylinder with no injection) and cylinder unbalance. 3.13 The von Mises equivalent stress based on the maximum specific pressure p and the tangential stress in the bore of the propeller hub may not exceed 75 % of the 0,2 % proof stress or yield

strength of the propeller material when the propeller is installed and 90 % during mounting and dismounting, respectively. 3.14 The cones of propellers which are mounted on the propeller shaft with the aid of the hydraulic oil technique shall not be more than 1 : 15 and not less than 1 : 25. 3.15 The propeller nut shall be strongly secured to the propeller shaft. 3.2 Blade retaining bolts The blade retaining bolts of built-up propellers have to be dimensioned according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 6, D.3 For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m the dimensioning may follow the GL Rules Part 2 – Inland Navigation Vessels, C – Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec 2, 4.44 3.3 (8) (9) = the temperature at which the propeller is mounted [°C] Ltemp The safety factor has to be taken as S = 2,8 for geared plants. (7) 2 ⎛μ ⎞ f = ⎜ o ⎟ − Θ2 ⎝ S ⎠ Chapter 8 Page 9c–13 applies only to propellers made of brass, bronze and

austenitic steel. Note: "+" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints of tractor propeller "–" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints of push propeller Flange connections The flange connections have to be dimensioned as for controllable pitch propellers according to the GL Rules defined in 1.1 For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m the dimensioning of the flange connections may follow the GL Rules Part 2 – Inland Navigation Vessels, C – Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec 2, 4.62 4. Balancing and testing 4.1 Balancing Monobloc propellers ready for mounting are required to undergo static balancing. Thereby the mass difference between blades of built-up fixed pitch propeller has to be less than 1,5 %. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–14 4.2 Section 9c D Propulsion System Testing 4.21 Fixed pitch propellers are to be presented to GL for final inspection and verification of the dimensions. GL

reserve the right to require non-destructive tests to be conducted to detect surface cracks or casting defects. 4.22 Casted propeller boss caps have to be tested for tightness at the manufacturers workshop, so far they also serve as corrosion protection. GL reserve the right to require a tightness test of the aft propeller boss sealing in assembled condition. 4.23 If the propeller is mounted onto the shaft by a hydraulic shrink fit connection, a blue print test showing at least a 70 % contact area has to be demonstrated to the Surveyor. The blue print pattern shall not show any larger areas without contact, especially not at the forward cone end. The blue print pattern has to be demonstrated using the original components. If alternatively a male / female calibre system is used, a contact area of at least 80 % has to be demonstrated and certified. After ten applications or five years the blue print prove has to be renewed. 5. Lateral thrust units 5.1 General 5.11 Scope The

requirements contained in 5. apply to the lateral thrust unit, the control station and all the transmission elements from the control station to the lateral thrust unit. 5.12 Documents for approval Assembly and sectional drawings for lateral thrust units with an input power of 100 kW and more together with detailed drawings of the gear mechanism and propellers containing all the data necessary for checking are each to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. In case of propellers, this only applies to propulsive power levels above 500 kW. 5.2 Materials Materials are subject, as appropriate, to the provisions of A.2, B2 as well as of 13 concerning the materials and the material testing of propellers. Fishing vessels with L < 24 m are treated in the same way as larger vessels. 5.3 Dimensioning and design The design of the driving mechanisms of lateral thrust units is governed by A. and B, that of the propellers by 1. to 4 I - Part 1 GL 2007 The pipe connections of

hydraulic drive systems are subject to the applicable requirements contained in D.213 and D214 Lateral thrust units shall be capable of being operated independently of other connected systems. Windmilling of the propeller during passages has to be taken into account as an additional load case. Otherwise effective countermeasures have to be introduced to avoid windmilling, e.g a shaft brake In the propeller area the thruster tunnel shall be protected against damages caused by cavitation corrosion, e.g by providing effective measures such as stainless steel plating. For the electrical equipment of lateral thrust units, see Section 11g, B. 5.4 Tests in the manufacturers works D.6 is applicable as appropriate For hydraulic pumps and motors with a drive power of 100 kW or more, the tests are to be conducted in the presence of a GL Surveyor. For lateral thrust units with an input power of less than 100 kW final inspection and function tests may be carried out by the manufacturer, who will

then issue the relevant Inspection Certificate. 5.5 Shipboard trials Testing is to be carried out during sea trials during which the operating times are to be established. D. Steering Gear 1. General 1.1 Scope For the purposes of D. steering gears comprise all the equipment used to operate the rudder from the rudder actuator to the steering station including the transmission elements. The requirements set out in SOLAS Chapter II-1, Regulation 29 and 30 in their most actual version are integral part of these Rules and are to be satisfied as far as an application for fishing vessels is senseful. 1.2 Documents for approval Assembly and general drawings of all steering gears, diagrams of the hydraulic and electrical equipment together with detail drawings of all important loadtransmitting components are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. The drawings and other documents shall contain all the information relating to materials, working pressures, pump delivery

rates, drive motor ratings etc. necessary to enable the documentation to be checked. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9c D Propulsion System Chapter 8 Page 9c–15 2. Materials 3. Design and equipment 2.1 Approved materials 3.1 Number of steering gears 2.11 As a rule, important load-transmitting components of the steering gear shall be made of steel or cast steel complying with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. With the consent of GL, cast iron may be used for certain components. Pressure vessels shall in general be made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly ferritic matrix). For welded structures, the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding are to be observed. 2.12 Casings of journal and guide bearings on vessels with a nozzle rudder and ice class are not to be made of grey cast iron. 2.13 The pipes of hydraulic steering gears are to be made of seamless or

longitudinally welded steel tubes. The use of cold-drawn, unannealed tubes is not permitted. At points where they are exposed to damage, copper pipes for control lines are to be provided with protective shielding and are to be safeguarded against hardening due to vibration by the use of suitable fastenings. 2.14 High-pressure hose assemblies may be used for short pipe connections subject to compliance with Section 9d, if this is necessary due to vibrations or flexibly mounted units. 2.15 The materials used for pressurized components including the seals shall be suitable for the hydraulic oil in use. 2.2 Testing of materials 2.21 The materials of important load-transmitting components of the steering gear as well as of the pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears are to be tested under the supervision of GL in accordance with the Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. For pressurized oil pipes the requirements according to Section 9d are to be

observed For welded pressurized casings, the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding are to be applied. 2.22 In the case of small hand-operated main steering gears and small manually operated auxiliary equipment GL may dispense with testing the materials of individual components such as axiometer gear shafts, etc. Every vessel has to be equipped with at least one main and one auxiliary steering gear. Both steering gears are to be independent of each other and, wherever possible, act separately upon the rudder stock. GL may agree to components being used jointly by the main and auxiliary steering gear. 3.2 Main steering gear 3.21 Main steering gears shall, with the rudder fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting the rudder from 35° port to 35° starboard and vice versa at the vessels speed for which the rudder has been designed in accordance with Section 3. The time required to put the rudder from 35° port to 30° starboard or vice versa shall not

exceed 28 seconds. The maximum pressure occurring during this manoeuvre is referred to as working pressure. Pressure loaded components of the steering gear must be designed for a pressure of at least 1,25 times the working pressure. As a rule the main steering gear shall be poweroperated. 3.22 Manual operation is acceptable for rudder stock diameters up to 120 mm calculated for torsional loads in accordance with Section 3. Not more than 25 turns of the hand-wheel shall be necessary to put the rudder from one hard over position to the other. Taking account of the efficiency of the system, the force required to operate the handwheel shall generally not exceed 200 N. 3.3 Auxiliary steering gear 3.31 Auxiliary steering gears shall, with the rudder fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting the rudder from 15° port to 15° starboard or vice versa within 60 seconds at 50 % of the vessels maximum speed, subject to a minimum of eight knots. Hydraulically operated auxiliary

steering gears are to be fitted with their own piping system independent of that of the main steering gear. The pipe or hose connections of steering gears shall be capable of being shut off directly at the pressurized casings. 3.32 Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear systems is permitted up to a theoretical stock diameter of 230 mm referring to steel with a minimum nominal upper yield stress ReH = 235 N/mm2. 3.4 Power unit 3.41 Where power operated hydraulic main steering gears are equipped with two or more identical power units, no auxiliary steering gear need be installed provided that the following conditions are fulfilled. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–16 Section 9c D Propulsion System 3.411 The power units shall be so designed that requirements 3.21 and 4 are complied with while any one of the power units is out of operation. 3.412 In the event of failure of a single component of the main steering gear including the piping, excluding the rudder

tiller or similar components as well as the cylinders, rotary vanes and casing, means are to be provided for quickly regaining control of one steering system. 3.413 In the event of a loss of hydraulic oil, it shall be possible to isolate the damaged system in such a way that the second control system remains fully serviceable. 3.5 Rudder angle limitation The rudder angle in normal service is to be limited by devices fitted to the steering gear (e.g limit switches) to a rudder angle of 35 ° on both sides. Deviations from this requirement are permitted only with the consent of GL. 3.6 End position limitation For the limitation by means of stoppers of the end positions of tillers and quadrants, see Section 3. In the case of hydraulic steering gears without an end position limitation of the tiller and similar components, an end position limiting device shall be fitted within the rudder actuator. 3.7 Locking equipment Steering gear systems are to be equipped with a locking system

effective in all rudder positions, see Section 3. Where hydraulic plant is fitted with shutoffs directly at the cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking equipment may be dispensed with. For steering gears with cylinder units which may be independently operated these shut-off devices do not have to be fitted directly on the cylinders. 3.8 Overload protection Power-operated steering gear systems are to 3.81 be equipped with overload protection (slip coupling, relief valves) to ensure that the driving torque is limited to the maximum permissible value. The overload protection device shall be secured to prevent later adjustment by unauthorized persons. Means have to be provided for checking the setting while in service. The pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears which also fulfil the function of the locking equipment mentioned in 3.7 are to be fitted with relief valves unless they are so designed that the pressure generated when the elastic-limit torque is applied to

the rudder stock cannot cause rupture, deformation or other damage of the pressurized casing. I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.82 Relief valves have to be provided for protecting any part of the hydraulic system which can be isolated and in which pressure can be generated from the power source or from external forces. The relief valves shall be set to a pressure value equal or higher than the working pressure but lower than 1,25 times working pressure, compare 3.21 The minimum discharge capacity of the relief valve(s) shall not be less than 1,1 times the total capacity of the pumps, which can deliver through it (them). With this setting any higher peak pressure in the system than 1,1 times the setting pressure of the valves has to be prohibited. 3.9 Controls 3.91 Control of the main and auxiliary steering gears shall be exercised from a steering station on the bridge. Controls have to be mutually independent and so designed that the rudder cannot move unintentionally. 3.92 Means shall also be

provided for exercising control from the steering gear compartment. The transmission system has to be independent of that serving the main steering station. 3.93 Suitable equipment is to be installed to provide means of communication between the bridge, all steering stations and the steering gear compartment. 3.94 Failures of single control components (e.g control system for variable displacement pump or flow control valve) which may lead to loss of steering shall cause an audible and visible alarm on the navigating bridge, if loss of steering cannot be prevented by other measures. 3.10 Rudder angle indication 3.101 The rudder position shall be clearly indicated on the bridge and at all steering stations. Where the steering gear is operated electrically or hydraulically, the rudder angle has to be indicated by a device (rudder position indicator) which is actuated either by the rudder stock itself or by parts which are rigidly connected to it. In case of time-dependent control of the

main and auxiliary steering gear, the midship position of the rudder shall be indicated on the bridge by some additional means (signal lamp or similar). In general, this indicator is still to be fitted even if the second control system is a manually operated hydraulic system. See also Sections 11a – 11 l. 3.102 The actual rudder position shall also be indicated at the steering gear itself It is recommended that an additional rudder angle indicator is fitted at the main engine control station. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.11 Section 9c F Propulsion System Piping 3.111 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear systems are to be installed in such a way as to ensure maximum protection while remaining readily accessible. Pipes are to be installed at a sufficient distance from the vessels shell. As far as possible, pipes should not pass through cargo spaces. Connections to other hydraulic systems are not permitted. 3.112 For the design and dimensions of pipes,

valves, fittings, pressure vessels etc., see Section 9d 3.12 Oil level indicators, filters 3.121 Tanks within the hydraulic system are to be equipped with oil level indicators. 3.122 The lowest permissible oil level is to be monitored. Audible and visual alarms shall be given on the navigating bridge and in the machinery space. The alarm on the navigating bridge shall be individual alarm. 3.123 Filters for cleaning the operating fluid are to be located in the piping system. 3.13 Storage tank In power-operated steering gear systems, an additional permanently installed storage tank is to be fitted which has a capacity sufficient to refill at least one of the control systems including the service tank. This storage tank is to be permanently connected by pipes to the control systems so that the latter can be refilled from a position inside the steering gear compartment. 3.14 Arrangement Steering gears are to be installed in a way to be accessible at any time and to be easily

maintainable. 3.15 Electrical equipment For the electrical part of steering gear systems, see Section 11g, A. 4. Power of steering gears The power of the steering gear is governed by the requirements set out in 3.2 and 33 For the determination of the necessary power the frictional losses in the rudder stock bearings and in the steering gear itself are to be considered. 5. Design of transmission components For the design of the transmission components Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.42 applies. Chapter 8 Page 9c–17 6. Tests in the manufacturer’s works For the tests in the manufacturer’s works see Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.5 7. Shipboard trials The operational efficiency of the steering gear is to be proved during the sea trials. For this purpose, the Z manoeuvre corresponding to 3.21 and 331 is to be executed as a minimum requirement. E. Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes 1. Scope The machinery of fishing

vessels strengthened for navigation in ice is designated after the Character of Classification +MC by the additional Notations E, E1, E2, E3 or E4, provided the requirements defined herein and the relevant structural requirements set out in Section 3 are satisfied. The reinforcements necessary for the Class Notation E may also be applied to the machinery alone. 2. Minimum required propulsion power The installed propulsion power has to be equal or greater than the minimum required propulsion power for the corresponding ice class as defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 15. The rated output of the main engines in accordance with Section 9b, A.3 shall be such that they are able to supply in continuous service the propulsion power necessary for the ice class concerned. 3. Necessary reinforcements Depending on the actual ice class, reinforcements have to be provided for – propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts – coupling bolts, shrink joints – propellers –

gears – flexible couplings. The relevant requirements are defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 13, C. F. Torsional Vibrations 1. Scope For the purposes of these requirements, torsional vibration stresses are additional loads due to torsional vibrations. They result from the alternating torque which is superimposed on the main torque. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9c–18 2. Section 9c F Propulsion System Prohibited range of operation 2.1 Operating ranges which, because of the magnitude of the torsional vibration stresses for shaftings and torsional torques for elastic couplings and gears, may only be passed through, are to be indicated as prohibited ranges of operation by red marks on the tachometer or in some other suitable manner at the operating station. In normal operation the speed range λ ≥ 0,8 is to be kept free of prohibited ranges of operation, where λ is the speed ratio actual speed to nominal speed. In specifying

prohibited ranges of operation it is important to ensure that the navigating and manoeuvring functions are not severely restricted. I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.2 Measures necessary to avoid overloading of the propulsion plant under misfiring conditions are to be displayed on instruction plates to be affixed to all engine control stations. 3. Further details The calculations and the permissible torsional stresses/torques, as well as relevant requirements for measurements are defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 16. For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m measurements of torsional vibrations are in general not required. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 Page 9d–1 Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps A. General 1. Scope 1.1 For fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m the GL Rules Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 11 are to

be applied. For fishing vessels with a length 12 m ≤ L < 45 m, the requirements defined in the following have to be applied. 1.2 The requirements of B. to P apply to pipes and piping systems, including valves, fittings and pumps, which are necessary for the operation of the main propulsion plant together with its auxiliaries and equipment. They also apply to piping systems used in the operation of the vessel whose failure could directly or indirectly impair the safety of vessel or catch, and to piping systems which are dealt with in other parts of the Rules. 1.3 The requirements of Q. apply to the storage of liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well as to oil residues. 1.4 For systems and equipment not covered by these Rules, please refer to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 10 and Section 11. 1.5 Ventilation systems are subject to Chapter 21 - Ventilation. 1.6 Gas welding equipment is subject to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3

– Machinery Installations, Chapter 5 – Guidelines for the Design, Equipment and Testing of Gas Welding Installations on Seagoing Ships. 2. Documents for approval 2.1 The following drawings/documents are to be submitted for approval, at least in triplicate: 2.11 Engine room arrangement plan. 2.12 Ventilation system drawings for machinery spaces and cargo holds, stating volumes of air, coaming heights, type of mechanical ventilators as well as arrangement and operating devices of fire/weathertight closures. 2.13 Tank plan including particulars regarding arrangement, medium and volume of tanks as well as information about the maximum height of the overflow level. 2.14 Diagrammatic plans of the following piping systems including all the details necessary for approval (e.g lists of valves, fittings and pipes): – fuel systems (bunkering, transfer and supply systems) – seawater / fresh water cooling systems – lubricating oil systems – starting air, control air and

working air systems – exhaust gas systems – bilge systems – equipment for the treatment and storage of bilge water and fuel oil residues – air, overflow and sounding pipes including details of filling pipe cross sections – sanitary water piping (fresh water, drinking water, seawater & sewage) 2.15 For remotely controlled valves; diagrammatic piping plans and the arrangement of piping and control stands in the vessel, including power units, control stands, pressure vessels and electrical circuit diagrams. 3. Pipe classes For the testing of pipes, selection of joints, welding and heat treatment, pipes are subdivided into three classes as indicated in Table 9d.1 B. Materials and Testing 1. General Materials shall be suitable for the proposed application and comply with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. In case of especially corrosive media, GL may impose special requirements on the materials used. For welds see GL Rules II

– Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding. 2. Materials Components intended to be used in pipe class I and II are to be manufactured by GL approved manufacturers. 2.1 Pipes, valves and fittings of steel Pipes belonging to Classes I and II shall be either seamless drawn or fabricated by a welding procedure approved by GL. In general, carbon and carbon- Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–2 Table 9d.1 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 GL 2007 Classification of pipes into classes Design pressure PR [bar] Design temperature t [°C] Medium/type of pipeline Pipe class Air, gas Non-flammable hydraulic fluid Boiler feedwater, condensate Seawater and fresh water for cooling Brine in refrigerating plant Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, flammable hydraulic fluid Refrigerants Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g drains, venting pipes, overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines manganese steel pipes, valves and fittings

are not to be used for temperatures above 400 °C. However, they may be used for higher temperatures provided that their metallurgical behaviour and their strength property after 100 000 h of operation are in accordance with national or international regulations or standards and if such values are guaranteed by the steel manufacturer. Otherwise, alloy steels in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials are to be used. 2.4 I II III PR > 40 or t > 300 PR ≤ 40 and t ≤ 300 PR ≤ 16 and t ≤ 200 PR > 16 or t > 150 – PR ≤ 16 and t ≤ 150 all PR ≤ 7 and t ≤ 60 – – – – Pipes, valves and fittings of lamellargraphite cast iron (grey cast iron) Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be accepted by GL for Class III. This applies also to the hose connections of fuel and lubricating oil filling lines. The use of grey cast iron is not allowed: – for pipes, valves and fittings for media having

temperatures above 220 °C and for pipelines subject to water hammer, severe stresses or vibrations Pipes of copper and copper alloys shall be of seamless drawn material or fabricated according to a method approved by GL. Copper pipes for Classes I and II must be seamless. – for sea valves and pipes fitted on the vessel sides and for valves fitted on the collision bulkhead – for valves on fuel and oil tanks subject to static head In general, copper and copper alloy pipe lines shall not be used for media having temperatures above the following limits: The use of grey cast iron in cases other than those stated is subject to GL approval. 2.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and copper alloys – copper and aluminium brass 200 °C – copper nickel alloys 300 °C – high-temperature bronze 260 °C 2.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron according to the GL Rules II – Materials and

Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials may be accepted for bilge and ballast pipes within double-bottom tanks and for other purposes approved by GL. In special cases (applications corresponding in principle to classes II and III) and subject to GL special approval, valves and fittings made of ferritic nodular cast iron may be accepted for temperatures up to 350 °C. Nodular ferritic cast iron for pipes, valves and fittings fitted on the vessels side have to comply with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. 2.5 Plastic pipes 2.51 Plastic pipes may be used after type approval 1 by GL. The use of such systems is restricted to pipe class III only. 2.52 Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings made of plastic materials are to be subjected to a continuous GL-approved quality control by the manufacturer. 2.53 Pipe penetrations through watertight bulkheads and decks as well as through fire divisions are to be approved by GL. Dependent on application and

installation location additional flame tests may be required. –––––––––––––– 1 See IMO Resolution A.753 (18): Guidelines for the Application of Plastic Pipes on Ships Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 2.54 Plastic pipes are to be continuously and permanently marked with the following particulars: – manufacturers marking – standard specification number – outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe – year of manufacture 2.55 Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic shall, as a minimum requirement, be marked with the manufacturers marking and the outside diameter of the pipe. Table 9d.2 Steels Pipes Forgings, plates, flanges, Bolts, nuts Cast steel Nodular cast iron Aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials and may in individual cases, with the agreement of GL, be used for

temperatures up to 200 °C. They are not acceptable for use in fire extinguishing lines 2.7 Application of materials For the pipe classes mentioned in A.3 materials shall be applied according to Table 9d.2 Pipe class I II III Steel pipes for high temperatures above 300 °C, Pipes for Steel not subject to any special pipes made of steel with high/ low general quality specification, weldability in temperature toughness at temperaapplications accordance with Rules for Welding tures below – 10 °C, stainless steel pipes for chemicals Steel suitable for the corresponding service and processing conditions, high temperature steel for temperatures above 300 °C, steel with high/low-temperature toughness for temperatures below –10 °C Bolts for general machinery constructions, high-temperature steel for temperaBolts for general machine construction tures above 300 °C, steel with high/low temperature toughness for temperatures below –10 °C High-temperature cast steel for temperatures

above 300 °C, cast steel with high/low temperaCast steel for general applications ture toughness at temperatures below –10 °C, stainless castings for aggressive media Only ferritic grades, elongation A5 at least 15 % Cast iron with lamellar graphite – Copper, copper alloys – Aluminium, aluminium alloys – Plastics – Non ferrous metals (valves, fittings, i ) Castings (valves, fittings, pipes) Aluminium and aluminium alloys Approved materials Material or application Non-metallic materials 2.6 Chapter 8 Page 9d–3 At least GG-20 up to 220 °C, grey cast iron is not permitted for valves – and fittings on ships side, on the collision bulkhead and on fuel and oil tanks For seawater and alkaline water only corrosion resistant copper and copper alloys Only with the agreement of GL up to 200 °C, not permitted in fire extinguishing systems – On special approval (see 2.5) Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–4 Table 9d.3 Type of component

Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 GL 2007 Approved material and types of material Certificates Approved materials Pipes 1, Steel, Pipe elbows, Copper, Fittings Copper alloys, Aluminium Design temperature – Aluminium alloys Plastics Valves 1, Steel, Flanges, Cast steel, Copper alloys Nominal diameter DN I B C > 50 ≤ 50 × – − × − – II > 50 ≤ 50 – – × – – × III All – – × DN > 100 × – – DN ≤ 100 – × – PB × DN > 2500 or DN > 250 × – – PB × DN ≤ 2500 and DN ≤ 250 – × – All – – × PB × DN > 1500 × – – PB × DN ≤ 1500 – × – III All – – × I, II – – × – III – – – × I, II > 225 °C Steel, Cast steel, Type Certificate + A > 300 °C Nodular cast iron Copper, Pipe class ≤ 300 °C I, II Nodular cast iron Steel, Cast steel, Nodular cast iron, – III

Grey cast iron Copper, Copper alloys Aluminium, Aluminium alloys ≤ 225 °C I, II ≤ 200 °C Plastics Acc. to Type Approval Certificate Semi-finished products, According to Table 9d.2 Screws and other components – 1 Casings of valves and pipes fitted on vessel’s side and bottom and bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead are to be included in pipe class II. + Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and Test Procedures, Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations: A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3. Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Testing of materials 3.1 For piping systems belonging to class I and II, tests in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials and under

GL supervision are to be carried out in accordance with Table 9d.3 for: – pipes, bends and fittings – valve bodies and flanges 3.2 Welded joints in pipelines of classes I and II are to be tested in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding. 4. Hydraulic tests on pipes 4.1 Definitions 4.11 Maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar], Formula symbol: pe,zul This is the maximum allowable internal or external working pressure for a component or piping system with regard to the materials used, piping design requirements, the working temperature and undisturbed operation. Table 9d.4 Chapter 8 Page 9d–5 Design pressure for fuel pipes Max. working temperature T ≤ 60 °C T > 60 °C PB ≤ 7 bar 3 bar or max. working pressure, whichever is greater 3 bar or max. working pressure, whichever is greater PB > 7 bar max. working pressure 14 bar or max. working pressure, whichever is greater Max. working pressure 4.2 Pressure test

prior to installation on board 4.21 All Class I and II pipes as well as steam lines, feed water pressure pipes, compressed air and fuel lines having a design pressure PR greater than 3,5 bar together with their integral fittings, connecting pieces, branches and bends, after completion of manufacture but before insulation and coating, if this is provided, shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in the presence of the Surveyor at the following value of pressure: pp = 1,5 ⋅ pc [bar] pc = design pressure 4.12 Nominal pressure, PN [bar] This is the term applied to a selected pressure temperature relation used for the standardization of struc tural components. In general, the numerical value of the nominal pressure for a standardized component made of the material specified in the standard will correspond to the maximum allowable working pressure PB at 20 °C. 4.22 Where for technical reasons it is not possible to carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all sections of

piping before assembly on board, proposals are to be submitted to GL for approval for testing pipe connections on board, particularly in respect of welding seams. 4.13 4.23 Where the hydraulic pressure test of piping is carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in conjunction with the tests required under 4.3 Test pressure, PP [bar], Formula symbol: pp This is the pressure to which components or piping systems are subjected for testing purposes. 4.24 Pressure testing of pipes with less than DN 15 may be omitted at GLs discretion depending on the application. 4.14 4.3 Design pressure, PR [bar], Formula symbol: pc This is the maximum allowable working pressure PB for which a component or piping system is designed with regard to its mechanical characteristics. In general, the design pressure is the maximum allowable working pressure at which the safety equipment will interfere (e.g activation of safety valves, opening of return lines of pumps, operating of overpressure

safety arrangements, opening of relief valves) or at which the pumps will operate against closed valves. The design pressure for fuel pipes shall be chosen according to Table 9d.4 Test after installation on board 4.31 After assembly on board, all pipelines covered by these requirements are to be subjected to a tightness test in the presence of a GL Surveyor. In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leakage under operational conditions. If necessary, special techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests are to be applied. 4.32 Heating coils in tanks and pipe lines for fuels are to be tested to not less than 1,5 PR but in no case less than 4 bar. Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9d Chapter 8 Page 9d–6 4.4 C Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. Pressure testing of valves The following valves are to be subjected in the manufacturers works to a hydraulic pressure test in the

presence of a GL Surveyor: – valves of pipe classes I and II to 1,5 PR – valves on the vessels side to not less than 5 bar Shut-off devices of the above type are to be additionally tested for tightness with the nominal pressure. 5. Structural tests, heat treatment and nondestructive testing Attention shall be given to the workmanship in construction and installation of the piping systems according to the approved data in order to obtain the maximum efficiency in service. For details concerning structural tests and tests following heat treatments, see Table 9d.5 I - Part 1 GL 2007 C. Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines 1. Minimum wall thickness 1.1 The pipe thicknesses stated in Tables 9d.5 to 9d.8 are the assigned minimum thicknesses, unless due to stress analysis greater thicknesses are necessary. Provided that the pipes are effectively protected against corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M and D stated in Table 9d.6 may, with GLs agreement, be reduced by up to 1 mm,

the amount of the reduction is to be in relation to the wall thickness. Minimum wall thickness groups N, M and D of steel pipes and approved locations Ballast lines M D Seawater lines Fuel lines  Lubricating lines M D X D N X X X Steam lines Condensate lines Feedwater lines Drinking lines M Hydraulic lines 1 Seawater discharge lines, see O. X Pipelines are not to be installed. M M X X X M X X X D N D M M M X X N Weather deck M1 X X X  N  N M Accommodation Condensate and feedwater tanks Thermal oil tanks Drinking water tanks X N Fresh water lines Compressed air lines M M X X N Thermal lines M Hydraulic oil tanks Lubricating oil tanks D Fresh cooling water tanks M Fuel and changeover tanks Ballast water tanks Bilge lines Cargo holds Cofferdams / void spaces Piping system Machinery Spaces Location X N X N N N X X X N X N Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d Table 9d.6 Minimum

wall thickness for steel pipes C Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Group N Chapter 8 Page 9d–7 Group M Group D da s da s da s da s [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] 10,2 1,6 from 406,4 6,3 from 21,3 3,2 from 38,0 6,3 from 13,5 1,8 from 660,0 7,1 from 38,0 3,6 from 88,9 7,1 from 20,0 2,0 from 762,0 8,0 from 51,0 4,0 from 114,3 8,0 from 48,3 2,3 from 864,0 8,8 from 76,1 4,5 from 152,4 8,8 from 70,0 2,6 from 914,0 10,0 from 177,8 5,0 from 457,2 8,8 Protective coatings, e.g hot-dip galvanizing, can be recognized as an effective corrosion protection provided that the preservation coating during installation is guaranteed. For steel pipes the wall thickness group corresponding to the location is to be as stated in Table 9d.5 1.2 The minimum wall thicknesses for austenitic stainless steel pipes are given in Table 9d.7 Table 9d.7 Minimum wall thickness for austenitic stainless steel pipes Pipe outside

diameter da [mm] Minimum wall thickness s [mm] up to 17,2 1,0 up to 48,3 1,6 up to 88,9 2,0 up to 168,3 2,3 up to 219,1 2,6 up to 273,0 2,9 up to 406,0 3,6 over 406,0 4,0 Table 9d.8 Minimum wall thickness for copper and copper alloy pipes Pipe outside diameter da [mm] Minimum wall thickness s [mm] Copper Copper alloys 8 – 10 1,0 0,8 12 – 20 1,2 1,0 25 – 44,5 1,5 1,2 50 – 76,1 2,0 1,5 2,5 2,0 – 159 3,0 2,5 193,7 – 267 3,5 3,0 273 4,0 3,5 (470) 4,0 3,5 508 4,5 4,0 88,9 – 108 133 – 457,2 1.3 For the minimum wall thickness of air, sounding and overflow pipes through weather decks, see M., Table 9d17a 1.4 Where the application of mechanical joints results in reduction in pipe wall thickness (bite type rings or other structural elements) this is to be taken into account in determining the minimum wall thickness. 1.5 For the calculation of pipe wall thicknesses see Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations,

Section 11, C. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–8 Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps D D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps 1. General principles 1.2 Welded connections rather than detachable couplings shall be used for pipelines carrying toxic media and inflammable liquefied gases. 1.3 Expansion in piping systems due to heating and shifting of their suspensions caused by deformation of the vessel are to be compensated by bends, compensators and flexible pipe connections. The arrangement of suitable fixed points is to be taken into consideration. 1.4 Where pipes are protected against corrosion by special protective coatings, e.g hot-dip galvanising, rubber lining etc, it is to be ensured that the protective coating will not be damaged during installation 2. Pipe connections 2.1 Types of pipe connections The following pipe connections may be used: – full penetration butt welds with/without

provision to improve the quality of the root – socket welds with suitable fillet weld thickness and in accordance with recognized standards – steel flanges may be used in accordance with the permitted pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant standards mechanical joints (e.g pipe unions, pipe couplings, press fittings) of an approved type For the use of welded pipe connections, see Table 9d.9 Table 9d.9 2.22 Gaskets are to be suitable for the intended media under design pressure and temperature conditions and their dimensions and construction shall be in accordance with recognized standards. 2.23 Steel flanges may be used as shown in Tables 9d.13 and 9d14 in accordance with the permitted pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant standards. 2.24 Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be used in accordance with the relevant standards and within the limits laid down in the approvals. Flanges and brazed or welded collars of copper and copper alloys are

subject to the following requirements: a) welding neck flanges according to standard up to 200 °C or 300 °C applicable to all classes of pipes b) loose flanges with welding collar; as for a) c) plain brazed flanges: for pipe class III up to a nominal pressure of 16 bar and a temperature of 120°C 2.25 Flange connections for pipe classes I and II with temperatures over 300 °C are to be provided with necked-down bolts. 2.3 Pipe class Welded butt-joints with special provisions for root side I, II, III Welded butt-joints without special provisions for root side II, III Outside diameter – The thickness of the sockets is to be in accordance with C.11 at least equal to the thickness of the pipe. – The clearance between the pipes and the socket is to be as small as possible. – The use of welded socket connections in systems of pipe class II may be accepted only under the condition that in the systems no excessive stress, erosion and corrosion are expected. 2.4

Screwed socket connections 2.41 Screwed socket connections with parallel and tapered threads shall comply with requirements of recognized national or international standards. all III II Welded socket connections Welded socket connections may be accepted according to Table 9d.9 Following conditions are to be observed Pipe connections Types of connections Socket weld Flange connections 2.21 Dimensions of flanges and bolting shall comply with recognized standards. 1.1 Piping systems are to be constructed and manufactured on the basis of standards generally used in shipbuilding. – 2.2 I - Part 1 GL 2007 ≤ 60,3 mm 2.42 Screwed socket connections with parallel threads are permitted for pipes in class III with an outside diameter ≤ 60,3 mm as well as for subordinate systems (e.g sanitary and hot water heating systems) They are not permitted for systems for flammable media. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping

Systems, Valves and Pumps 2.43 Screwed socket connections with tapered threads are permitted for the following: – class I, outside diameter not more than 33,7 mm – class II and class III, outside diameter not more than 60,3 mm Screwed socket connections with tapered threads are not permitted for piping systems conveying toxic or flammable media or services where fatigue, severe erosion or crevice corrosion is expected to occur. 2.5 Brazed connections may be used after special approval by GL. 2.6 Mechanical joints 2.61 Type approved mechanical joints 2 may be used as shown in Tables 9d.10 to 9d12 2.62 Mechanical joints in bilge and seawater systems within machinery spaces or spaces of high fire risk, shall be flame resistant. 2.63 Mechanical joints are not to be used in piping sections directly connected to sea openings or tanks containing flammable liquids. 2.64 3.3 Watertight bulkhead penetrations of supply and operating installations, such as piping, scuppers or electric

cables, require to be approved by type test 3 that for a period of 30 minutes leakages will not occur at the penetrations. The pressure assumed is to at least correspond to the pressure head prevailing at the intended points of installation of the penetrations. Penetrations welded into bulkheads watertight are not subject to type testing. 3.4 Piping close to electrical switchboards shall be so installed or protected that a leakage cannot damage the electrical installation. 3.5 Piping systems are to be so arranged that they can be completely emptied, drained and vented. Piping systems in which the accumulation of liquids during operation could cause damage shall be equipped with special drain arrangements. 3.6 Pipe lines laid through ballast tanks, which are coated in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 35, F. are to be either effectively protected against corrosion or they are to be of low susceptibility to corrosion The method of corrosion protection of tanks and

pipes shall be compatible. The use of slip-on joints is not permitted in: – bilge lines inside ballast and fuel tanks – seawater and ballast lines including air and overflow pipes inside cargo holds and fuel tanks – fuel and oil lines including air and overflow pipes inside machinery spaces, cargo holds and ballast tanks – non water filled pressure water spraying systems (dry pipe systems) Slip-on joints inside tanks may be permitted only if the pipes contain the same medium as the tanks. Unrestrained slip on joints may be used only where required for compensation of lateral pipe movement. 3. Chapter 8 Page 9d–9 Layout, marking and installation 3.1 Piping systems shall be adequately identified according to their purpose. Valves are to be permanently and clearly marked 3.2 Pipe penetrations leading through bulkheads/decks and tank walls have to be water and oil tight. Bolts through bulkheads are not permitted Holes for fastening screws shall not be drilled in the

tank walls. 3.7 The wall thickness of pipes between vessels side and first shut-off device is to be in accordance with Table 9d.17 b, column B Pipes are to be connected by welding or flanges 4. Shut-off devices 4.1 Shut-off devices shall comply with a recognized standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to be secured to prevent unintentional loosening of the cover. 4.2 Hand-operated shut-off devices are to be closed by turning in the clockwise direction. 4.3 Valves must be clearly marked to show whether they are in the open or closed position. 4.4 Change-over devices in piping systems in which a possible intermediate position of the device could be dangerous in service shall not be used. 4.5 Valves are to be permanently marked. The marking shall comprise at least the following details: – material of valve body – nominal diameter – nominal pressure –––––––––––––– 3 –––––––––––––– 2 See also "List of Type

Tested Appliances and Equipment". VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 4 – Test Requirements for Sealing Systems of Bulkhead and Deck Penetrations. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–10 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints Pipe Unions Welded and brazed type Compression Couplings Swage type Press type Bite type Flared type Slip-on Joints Grip type Machine grooved type I - Part 1 GL 2007 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 Page 9d–11 Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints (continued) Slip type Table 9d.11 Application of mechanical joints Systems Pipe Unions Flammable fluids (Flash point > 60 °C) Fuel oil + Lubricating oil + Hydraulic oil + Sea water Bilge + Fire main and water spray + Foam + Sprinkler +

Cooling water + Non-essential + Fresh water Cooling water system + Non-essential system + Sanitary / Drain / Scuppers Deck drains (internal) + Sanitary drains + Scuppers and discharge + Sounding / Vent Water tanks / Dry spaces + Oil tanks (F.p > 60 °C) + Miscellaneous Starting-/ control air + Service air (non-essential) + Brine + + CO2 system 1 Abbreviations: + Application is allowed – Application is not allowed Kind of connections Compression couplings 5 Slip-on joints + + + + + + 2, 3 + + + + + + + + + + + + 1 + + + + 1 + + + + + – 4 + + + + + + + + – + + – 2, 3 2, 3 3 3 3 1 2, 3 Footnotes: 1 Inside machinery spaces of category A – only approved fire resistant types 2 Not inside machinery spaces of category A or accommodation spaces. May be accepted in other machinery spaces provided the joints are located in easily visible and accessible positions. 3 Approved fire resistant types 4 Above freeboard deck only 5 If compression couplings include any

components which readily deteriorate in case of fire, they are to be of approved fire resistant type as required for Slip-on joints. Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9d Chapter 8 Page 9d–12 Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps D I - Part 1 GL 2007 Table 9d.12 Application of mechanical joints depending upon the class of piping Types of joints Classes of piping systems I II III + (da ≤ 60,3 mm) + (da ≤ 60,3 mm) + + + + Pipe Unions Welded and brazed type Compression Couplings Swage type Press type – – + Bite type Flared type + (da ≤ 60,3 mm) + (da ≤ 60,3 mm) + Slip-on Joints Machine grooved type + + + Grip type – + + Slip type – + + Abbreviations: + Application is allowed – Application is not allowed Table 9d.13 Use of flange types Pipe class Toxic, corrosive and combustible media, liquefied gases (LG) Type of flange PR [bar] > 10 I ≤ 10 II III – – Steam, thermal oils Temperature [°C] A A, B

> 400 1 A, B, C ≤ 400 A A, B ≤ 250 A, B, C, D, E Type B only for outside diameter da < 150 mm 2 Type E only for t < 150 °C and PR < 16 bar 3 Type F only for water pipes and open-ended lines – Valves on the shell plating 5.1 For the mounting of valves on the shell plating, see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 6, G. 5.2 Valves on the shell plating shall be easily accessible. Seawater inlet and outlet valves have to be capable of being operated from above the floor plates. Cocks on the shell plating shall be so arranged that the handle can only be removed when the cock is closed. A, B, C, E A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, E Other media Temperature [°C] A, B A, B, C – Type of flange 1 > 250 1 5. Type of flange Lubricating oil, fuel oil 2 Type of flange > 400 A ≤ 400 A, B > 250 A, B, C ≤ 250 A, B, C, D, E – A, B, C, D, E, F 3 5.3 Valves with only one flange may be used on the shell plating and on the sea chests only

after special approval. 5.4 On vessels with > 500 GT, in periodically unattended machinery spaces, the controls of sea inlet discharge valves shall be sited so as to allow to reach and operate sea inlet and discharge valves in case of influx of water within 106 minutes after triggering of the bilge alarm. Non return discharge valves need not to be considered. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 6. Section 9d E Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Pumps 6.1 For materials and construction requirements VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 6 – Pumps, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Design, Construction and Testing of Pumps of GL are to be applied. 6.2 For the pumps listed below, a performance test is to be carried out in the manufacturers works under GL supervision: – bilge pumps / bilge ejectors – cooling water pumps (seawater / freshwater) – fire pumps – lubricating oil pumps – fuel oil pumps – brine pumps / refrigerant

pumps 7. Protection of piping systems against overpressure The following piping systems are to be fitted with safety valves to avoid excessive overpressures: – piping systems and valves in which liquids can be enclosed and heated – piping systems which may be exposed to pressures in excess of the design pressure Safety valves shall be capable of discharging the medium at a maximum pressure increase of 10 % of the allowable working pressure. Safety valves are to be fitted on the low pressure side of reducing valves. E. Oil Fuel Systems 1. Bunker lines The bunkering of oil fuels is to be effected by means of permanently installed lines, from the open deck. Bunker stations are to be so arranged that the bunkering can be performed from both sides of the vessel without danger. The bunkering lines are to be fitted with blind flanges on deck. 2. Tank filling and suction lines Chapter 8 Page 9d–13 2.2 Shut-off devices on fuel oil tanks having a capacity of less than 500 l

need not be provided with remote control. 2.3 Filling lines are to extend to the bottom of the tank. Short filling lines directed to the side of the tank may be admissible. Storage tank suction lines may also be used as filling lines. 2.4 Where filling lines are led through the tank top and end below the maximum oil level in the tank, a non-return valve at the tank top is to be arranged. 2.5 The inlet connections of suction lines are to be arranged far enough from the drains in the tank so that water and impurities which have settled out will not enter the suctions. 3. Pipe layout 3.1 Fuel lines may not pass through tanks containing feed water, drinking water or lubricating oil. 3.2 Fuel lines which pass through tanks with other media, are to have an increased wall thickness according to Table 9d.5 3.3 Fuel lines may not be laid directly above or in the vicinity of boilers, turbines or equipment with high surface temperatures (over 220 °C) or in way of other sources of ignition. 3.4

Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise suitably protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air intakes, or other sources of ignition. The number of detachable pipe connections is to be limited. In general, flanged connections according to recognized standards shall be used. 3.41 Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines which lay directly above hot surfaces or other sources of ignition are to be screened and provided with drainage arrangements. 2.1 Filling and suction lines from storage and settling tanks situated above the double bottom and from which in case of their damage fuel oil may leak, are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off devices capable of being closed from a safe position outside the space concerned. 3.42 Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working pressure of more than 0,18 N/mm2 and

within about 3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition and direct sight of line must be screened. Drainage arrangements need not to be provided In the case of deep tanks situated in shaft or pipe tunnel or similar spaces, shut-off devices are to be fitted on the tanks. The control in the event of fire may be effected by means of an additional shut-off device in the pipe outside the tunnel or similar space. If such additional shut-off device is fitted in the machinery space it shall be operated from a position outside this space. 3.43 Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working pressure of less than 0,18 N/mm2 and within about 3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition shall be assessed individually taking into account working pressure, type of coupling and possibility of failure. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–14 Section 9d E Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 GL 2007

Table 9d.14 Types of flange connections Type A Welding neck flange Loose flange with welding neck Type B Slip-on welding flange - fully welded Type C Slip-on welding flange Type D Type E Type F Socket screwed flange - conical threads - Plain flange - welded on both sides - Lap joint flange - on flanged pipe - Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d F Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 3.44 Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working pressure of more than 1,6 N/mm2 need normally to be screened. 3.45 Pipes running below engine room floor need normally not to be screened. 3.5 Shut-off valves in fuel lines in the machinery spaces are to be operable from above the floor plates. 3.6 Glass and plastic components are not permitted in fuel systems. Chapter 8 Page 9d–15 sured that a failure of the automatic back-flushing will not lead to a total loss of filtration. 6.5 Back-flushing intervals

of automatic backflushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing are to be monitored. 6.6 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted with differential pressure monitoring. On engines provided for operation with gas oil only, differential pressure monitoring may be dispensed with. Sight glasses made of glass located in vertical overflow pipes may be permitted. 6.7 Engines for the exclusive operation of emergency generators and emergency fire pumps may be fitted with simplex filters. 3.7 Fuel pumps shall be capable of being isolated from the piping system by shut-off valves. 6.8 Fuel transfer units are to be fitted with a simplex filter on the suction side. 4. 7. Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps 4.1 Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be designed for the operating temperature of the medium pumped. 4.2 A fuel transfer pump is to be provided. Other service pumps may be used as a stand-by pump provided they are suitable for this purpose. 4.3 At least two means of oil

fuel transfer are to be provided for filling the service tanks. 4.4 Where a feed or booster pump is required to supply fuel to main or auxiliary engines, stand-by pumps shall be provided. Where pumps are attached to the engines, stand-by pumps may be dispensed with for auxiliary engines. 5. Plants with more than one main engine For plants with more than one engine, complete spare feed or booster pumps stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by pumps provided that the feed or booster pumps are so arranged that they can be replaced with the means available on board. 6. Purifiers 7.1 Manufacturers of purifiers for cleaning fuel and lubricating oil have to be approved by GL. 7.2 Where a fuel purifier may exceptionally be used to purify lubricating oil the purifier supply and discharge lines are to be fitted with a change-over arrangement which prevents the possibility of fuel and lubricating oils being mixed. Suitable equipment is also to be provided to prevent such mixing

occurring over control and compression lines. 7.3 The sludge tanks of purifiers are to be fitted with a level alarm which ensures that the level in the sludge tank cannot interfere with the operation of the purifier. 8. Service tanks and heavy fuel oils Where service tanks or heavy fuel oil are used, the requirements of Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 11, G. are to be applied as well as the requirements of Q2 Filters 6.1 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery line of the fuel pumps. 6.2 For ships with Class Notation AUT the filter equipment shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 4 – Automation, Section 2. 6.3 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of the engine. 6.4 Uninterrupted supply of filtered fuel has to be ensured during cleaning of the filtering equipment. In case of automatic back-flushing filters it is to be en- F. Lubricating Oil System 1. General requirements 1.1 Lubricating oil

systems are to be so constructed to ensure reliable lubrication over the whole range of speed and during run-down of the engines and to ensure adequate heat transfer. 1.2 Priming pumps Where necessary, priming pumps are to be provided for supplying lubricating oil to the engines. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–16 1.3 Section 9d F Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Emergency lubrication A suitable emergency lubricating oil supply (e.g gravity tank) is to be arranged for machinery which may be damaged in case of interruption of lubricating oil supply. 1.4 Lubricating oil treatment Equipment necessary for adequate treatment of lubricating oil such as purifiers, automatic back-flushing filters, filters and free-jet centrifuges are to be provided. 2. Lubricating oil systems 2.1 Lubricating oil circulating tanks and gravity tanks 2.11 For the capacity and location of these tanks see Q.3 2.12 The suction connections of lubricating oil pumps

are to be located as far as possible from drain pipes. 2.13 Gravity tanks are to be fitted with an overflow pipe which leads to the circulating tank. Arrangements are to be made for observing the flow of excess oil in the overflow pipe. 2.2 filters it is to be ensured that a failure of the automatic back-flushing will not lead to a total loss of filtration. 2.34 Back-flushing intervals of automatic backflushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing are to be monitored. 2.35 Main lubricating oil filters are to be fitted with differential pressure monitoring. On engines provided for operation with gas oil only, differential pressure monitoring may be dispensed with. 2.36 Engines for the exclusive operation of emergency generators and emergency fire pumps may be fitted with simplex filters. 2.37 For protection of the lubricating oil pumps simplex filters may be installed on the suction side of the pumps if they have a minimum mesh size of 100 µ. 2.4 Oil level indicators

Machines with their own oil charge are to be provided with a means of determining the oil level from outside during operation. This requirement also applies to reduction gears, thrust bearings and shaft bearings. 2.5 Purifiers The requirements in E.7 apply as appropriate Filling and suction lines 2.21 Filling and suction lines of lubricating oil tanks with a capacity of 500 l and more located above the double bottom and from which in case of their damage lubricating oil may leak, are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off devices according to E.21 The remote operation of shut-off valves according to E.21 may be dispensed with for valves which are kept closed during normal operation 2.22 Where lubricating oil lines are to be led in the vicinity of hot machinery, steel pipes which shall be in one length and which are protected where necessary are to be used. 2.23 For screening arrangements of lubricating oil pipes E.34 applies as appropriate 2.3 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Filters

2.31 Lubricating oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery line of the lubricating oil pumps. 2.32 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of the engine. 2.33 Uninterrupted supply of filtered lubricating oil has to be ensured under cleaning conditions of the filter equipment. In case of automatic back-flushing 3. Lubricating oil pumps 3.1 Main engines 3.11 Main and independent stand-by pumps are to be arranged for vessels for unrestricted service. Main pumps driven by the main engines are to be so designed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over the whole range of operation. 3.12 On vessels with more than one main engine and with separate lubricating oil systems, complete spare lubricating oil pumps on board may be accepted instead of stand-by pumps, provided that the main lubricating oil pumps are so arranged that they can be replaced with the means available on board. 3.2 Main reduction gearing 3.21

Lubricating oil is to be supplied by a main pump and an independent stand-by pump. 3.22 Where a reduction gear has been approved by GL to have adequate self-lubrication at 75 % of the torque of the propelling engine, a stand-by lubricating oil pump for the reduction gear may be dispensed with up to a power-speed ratio of P / n1 [kW/min-1] ≤ 3,0 n1 = gear input revolution [min-1] Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d G Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 3.23 The requirements under 3.12 are to be applied for multi-propeller plants and plants with more than one engine. 3.3 Auxiliary machinery 3.31 Diesel generators Chapter 8 Page 9d–17 2.11 For vessels with ice class E1 to E4 the sea chest is to be arranged as follows: – In calculating the volume of the sea chest the following value shall be applied as a guide: about 1 m3 for every 750 kW of the vessels engine output including the output of auxiliary engines. Where more than one

diesel generator is available, stand-by pumps are not required. – Where only one diesel generator is available a complete spare pump is to be carried on board. The sea chest shall be of sufficient height to allow ice to accumulate above the inlet pipe. – The free area of the strum holes shall be not less than four times the sectional area of the seawater inlet pipe. G. Seawater Cooling Systems 2.12 As an alternative two smaller sea chests of a design as specified in 2.11 may be arranged 1. Sea suctions, sea chests 2.13 All discharge valves shall be so arranged that the discharge of water at any draught will not be obstructed by ice. 1.1 At least two sea chests are to be provided. Wherever possible, the sea chests are to be arranged as low as possible on either side of the vessel. 1.2 For service in shallow waters, it is recommended that an additional high seawater intake is provided. 1.3 It is to be ensured that the total seawater supply for the engines can be taken

from only one sea chest. 1.4 Each sea chest is to be provided with an effective vent. The following venting arrangements will be approved: – an air pipe of at least 32 mm ID which can be shut off and which extends above the bulkhead deck – adequately dimensioned ventilation slots in the shell plating 1.5 Compressed air connections (or steam if available) are to be provided for cleaning the sea chest gratings. The compressed air lines are to be fitted with shut-off valves fitted directly to the sea chests. Compressed air for blowing through sea chest gratings may exceed 2 bar only if the sea chests are constructed for higher pressures. Alternative solutions have to be agreed with GL. 1.6 Where a sea chest is exclusively arranged as chest cooler the steam or compressed airlines for clearing according to 1.5 may, with GLs agreement, be dispensed with. 2. Special rules for vessels with ice class 2.1 For one of the sea chests specified in 1.1 the sea inlet is to be located as near

as possible to midship and as far aft as possible. The seawater discharge line of the entire engine plant is to be connected to the top of the sea chest. 2.2 Where necessary, a steam connection or a heating coil is to be arranged for de-icing and thawing the sea chests. 2.3 At least one fire pump shall have a suction from the de-iced sea chest. 3. Sea valves 3.1 Sea valves are to be so arranged that they can be operated from above the floor plates. 3.2 Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems are to be fitted with a shut-off valve of non-return type at the shell. 4. Strainer The suction lines of the seawater pumps are to be fitted with strainers. The strainers are to be so arranged that they can be cleaned during service. Alternatively, strainers may be arranged inside seawater cross-over. 5. Seawater cooling pumps 5.1 Diesel engine plants 5.11 Main propulsion plants are to be provided with main and stand-by cooling water pumps. 5.12 The main cooling water pump may be

attached to the propulsion plant. It is to be ensured that the attached pump is of sufficient capacity for the cooling water required by main engines and auxiliary equipment over the whole speed range of the propulsion plant. The drive of the stand-by cooling water pump is to be independent of the main engine. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–18 Section 9d H Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 5.13 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are each to be of sufficient capacity to meet the maximum cooling water requirements of the plant. 5.14 Other suitable seawater pumps may be used as stand-by cooling water pumps. 5.2 Plants with more than one main engine For plants with more than one engine and with separate cooling water systems, complete spare pumps stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by pumps provided that the main seawater cooling pumps are so arranged that they can be replaced with the means available on board. 5.3 Cooling water

supply for auxiliary engines Where a common cooling water pump is provided to serve more than one auxiliary engine, an independent stand-by cooling water pump with the same capacity is to be fitted. Independently operated cooling water pumps of the main engine plant may be used to supply cooling water to auxiliary engines while at sea, provided that the capacity of such pumps is sufficient to meet the additional cooling water requirement. If each auxiliary engine is fitted with an attached cooling water pump, stand-by cooling water pumps need not to be provided. H. Fresh Water Cooling Systems 1. General 1.1 Fresh water cooling systems are to be so arranged that the engines can be sufficiently cooled under all operating conditions. 1.2 Depending on the requirements of the engine plant, the following fresh water cooling systems are allowed: – a single cooling circuit for the entire plant – separate cooling circuits for the main and auxiliary plant – several independent

cooling circuits for the main engine components which need cooling (e.g cylinders and fuel valves) and for the auxiliary engines I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.4 As far as possible, the temperature controls of main and auxiliary engines as well as of different circuits are to be independent of each other. 1.5 Where, in automated engine plants, heat exchangers for fuel or lubricating oil are incorporated in the cylinder cooling water circuit of main engines, the entire cooling water system is to be monitored for fuel and oil leakage. 1.6 Common engine cooling water systems for main and auxiliary plants are to be fitted with shut-off valves to enable repairs to be performed without taking the entire plant out of service. 2. Heat exchangers, coolers 2.1 The construction and equipment of heat exchangers and coolers are subject to the requirements of Section 9e. 2.2 The coolers of cooling water systems, engines and equipment are to be so designed to ensure that the specified cooling water

temperatures can be maintained under all operating conditions. Cooling water temperatures are to be adjusted to meet the requirements of engines and equipment. 2.3 Heat exchangers for auxiliary equipment in the main cooling water circuit are to be provided with by-passes if in the event of a failure of the heat exchanger it is possible by these means to keep the system in operation. 2.4 It is to be ensured that auxiliary machinery can be maintained in operation while repairing the main coolers. If necessary, means are to be provided for changing over to other heat exchangers, machinery or equipment through which a temporary heat transfer can be achieved. 2.5 Shut-off valves are to be provided at the inlet and outlet of all heat exchangers. 2.6 Every heat exchanger and cooler is to be provided with a vent and a drain. 2.7 Keel coolers, box coolers separate cooling circuits for various temperature ranges 2.71 Arrangement and construction drawings of keel and box coolers are to be

submitted for approval. 1.3 The cooling circuits are to be so divided that, should one part of the system fail, operation of the auxiliary systems can be maintained. Change-over arrangements are to be provided for this purpose if necessary. 2.72 Permanent vents for fresh water are to be provided at the top of keel coolers and chest coolers. – 2.73 Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3. Section 9d I Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Expansion tanks 3.1 Expansion tanks are to be arranged at sufficient height for every cooling water circuit. Different cooling circuits may only be connected to a common expansion tank if they do not interfere with each other. Care must be taken here to ensure that damage to or faults in one system cannot affect the other system. 3.2 Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling connections, aeration/de-aeration

devices, water level indicators and drains. 4. Fresh water cooling pumps Chapter 8 Page 9d–19 tional reliability of the engine are to be equipped for manual operation. 6. Preheating of cooling water Means are to be provided for preheating cooling fresh water. Exceptions are to be approved by GL 7. Emergency generating units Internal combustion engines driving emergency generating units are to be fitted with independent cooling systems. Such cooling systems are to be made proof against freezing. 4.1 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are to be provided for each fresh water cooling system. 4.2 Main cooling water pumps may be driven directly by the main or auxiliary engines which they are intended to cool provided that a sufficient supply of cooling water is assured under all operating conditions. I. Compressed Air Lines 1. General 4.3 The drives of stand-by cooling water pumps are to be independent of the main engines. 1.1 Pressure lines connected to air compressors

are to be fitted with non-return valves at the compressor outlet. 4.4 Stand-by cooling water pumps are to have the same capacity as main cooling water pumps. 1.2 M. 4.5 Main engines are to be fitted with at least one main and one stand-by cooling water pump. Where according to the construction of the engines more than one water cooling circuit is necessary, a stand-by pump is to be fitted for each main cooling water pump. 4.6 For fresh cooling water pumps of essential auxiliary engines the requirements for sea water cooling pumps in G.53 may be applied 4.7 A stand-by cooling water pump of a cooling water system may be used as a stand-by pump for another system provided that the necessary pipe connections are arranged. The shut-off valves in these connections are to be secured against unintended operation. 4.8 Equipment providing emergency cooling from another system can be approved if the plant and the system are suitable for this purpose. 4.9 For plants with more than one main

engine the requirements for sea cooling water pumps in G.52 may be applied. 5. Temperature control Cooling water circuits are to be provided with temperature controls in accordance with the requirements. Control devices whose failure may impair the func- For oil and water separators, see Section 9b, 1.3 Starting air lines may not be used as filling lines for air receivers. 1.4 Only type-tested hose assemblies made of metallic materials may be used in starting air lines of diesel engines which are permanently kept under pressure. 1.5 The starting air line to each engine is to be fitted with a non-return valve and a drain. 1.6 Tyfons are to be connected to at least two compressed air receivers. 1.7 A safety valve is to be fitted downstream of each pressure-reducing valve. 1.8 Pressure water tanks and other tanks connected to the compressed air system are to be considered as pressure vessels and shall comply with the requirements in Section 9e for the working pressure of the

compressed air system. 1.9 For compressed air connections for blowing through sea chests refer to G.15 1.10 Requirements for starting engines with compressed air, see Section 9b, H.2 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–20 2. Section 9d K Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Control air systems 2.1 Control air systems for essential consumers are to be provided with the necessary means of air treatment. I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.12 Bilge suctions are normally to be located on both sides of the vessel. For compartments located fore and aft in the vessel, one bilge suction may be considered sufficient provided that it is capable of completely draining the relevant compartment. 2.2 Pressure reducing valves in the control air system of main engines are to be redundant. 1.13 Spaces located forward of the collision bulkhead and aft of the stern tube bulkhead and not connected to the general bilge system are to be drained by other suitable means of adequate

capacity. J. Exhaust Gas Lines 1.14 The required pipe thickness of bilge lines is to be in accordance with Table 9d.5 1. Pipe layout 1.1 Engine exhaust gas pipes are to be installed separately from each other, taking into account the structural fire protection. Other designs are to be submitted for approval The same applies to boiler exhaust gas pipes 1.2 Account is to be taken of thermal expansion when laying out and suspending the lines. 1.3 Where exhaust gas lines discharge near water level, provisions are to be taken to prevent water from entering the engines. 2. Silencers Engine exhaust pipes are to be fitted with effective silencers or other suitable means are to be provided. Silencers are to be provided with an inspection opening. 3. Water drains Exhaust lines and silencers are to be provided with suitable drains of adequate size. 4. Insulation For insulation of exhaust gas lines inside machinery spaces, see Section 8, B.31 5. Engine exhaust gas lines are

additionally subject to Section 9b, G.7 K. Bilge Systems 1. Bilge lines 1.1 Layout of bilge lines 1.11 Bilge lines and bilge suctions are to be so arranged that the bilges can be completely drained even under unfavourable trim conditions. 1.2 Pipes laid through tanks 1.21 Bilge pipes may not be led through tanks for lubricating oil or drinking water. 1.22 Bilge pipes from spaces not accessible during the voyage if running through fuel tanks located above double bottom are to be fitted with a non-return valve directly at the point of entry into the tank. 1.3 Bilge suctions and strums 1.31 Bilge suctions are to be so arranged as not to impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They are to be fitted with easily detachable, corrosionresistant strums. 1.32 Emergency bilge suctions are to be arranged such that they are accessible, with free flow and at a suitable distance from the tank top or the vessels bottom. 1.33 For the size and design of bilge wells see Chapter 1 –

Hull Structures, Section 8, B.53 1.34 Bilge alarms of main- and auxiliary machinery spaces, see Section 9a, E.5 and Section 12 1.4 Bilge valves 1.41 Valves in connecting pipes between the bilge and the seawater and ballast water system, as well as between the bilge connections of different compartments, are to be so arranged that even in the event of faulty operation or intermediate positions of the valves, penetration of seawater through the bilge system will be safely prevented. 1.42 Bilge discharge pipes are to be fitted with shut-off valves and reverse-flow protection at the vessels shell. 1.43 Bilge valves are to be arranged so as to be always accessible irrespective of the ballast and loading condition of the vessel. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.5 Section 9d K Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Reverse-flow protection Chapter 8 Page 9d–21 3. Bilge pumps 1.51 A screw-down non-return valve or a combination of a non-return valve

without positive means of closing and a shut-off valve are recognized as reverse flow protection. 3.1 Capacity of bilge pumps 1.6 Q = minimum capacity [m3/h] dH = calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe [mm] Pipe layout 1.61 To prevent the ingress of ballast and seawater into the vessel through the bilge system two means of reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in the bilge connections. One of such means of protection is to be fitted in each suction line. 1.62 The direct bilge suction and the emergency suction need only have one means of reverse-flow protection as specified in 1.51 Each bilge pump shall be capable of delivering: Q = 5,75 ⋅ 10 −3 ⋅ d H 2 [m3/h] (3) 3.2 The minimum capacity shall be 4/3 of the required fire pump capacity. 3.3 Where centrifugal pumps are used for bilge pumping, they shall be self-priming or priming units are to be provided. 3.4 Use of other pumps for bilge pumping 1.63 Where a direct seawater connection is arranged for

attached bilge pumps to protect them against running dry, the bilge suctions are also to be fitted with two reverse flow protecting devices. Ballast pumps, stand-by seawater cooling 3.41 pumps and general service pumps may also be used as independent bilge pumps provided they are selfpriming and of the required capacity according to formula (3). 2. 3.42 In the event of failure of one of the required bilge pumps, one pump each has to be available for fire fighting and bilge pumping. Calculation of pipe diameters 2.1 The calculated values according to formulae (1) to (2) are to be rounded up to the next higher nominal diameter. 2.2 a) Main and branch bilge lines b) [mm] [mm] Number of bilge pumps (1) Vessels are to be provided with two independent, mechanically driven bilge pumps. One of these pumps may be attached to the main engine. (2) On vessels of less than 100 gross tonnage, one mechanically driven bilge pump is sufficient. The second independent bilge pump may be a

permanently installed manual bilge pump. The engine-driven bilge pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant. Branch bilge pipes d z = 2,15 ⋅ A ⋅ ( B + H ) + 25 dH 3.5 Main bilge pipes d H = 1, 68 ⋅ L ⋅ ( B + H ) + 25 3.43 Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge pumping arrangements provided that there is an independent supply of driving water. = calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe [mm] 4. Bilge pumping for various spaces 4.1 Machinery spaces dz = calculated inside diameter of branch bilge pipe [mm] L = length of vessel between perpendiculars [m] B = moulded breadth of ship [m] On vessels of more than 100 gross tonnage, 4.11 the bilges of every main machinery space shall be capable of being pumped simultaneously as follows: H = depth of ship to the bulkhead deck [m] a) through the bilge suctions connected to the main bilge system A = length of the watertight compartment [m] b) through one direct suction connected to the largest

independent bilge pump c) through an emergency bilge suction connected to the sea cooling water pump of the main propulsion plant or through another suitable emergency bilge system 2.3 Minimum diameter The inside diameter of main and branch bilge pipes is not to be less than 50 mm. For vessels under 24 m length, the diameter may be reduced to 40 mm. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–22 Section 9d L Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 4.12 On vessels with Class Notation K the emergency bilge suction may be dispensed with. 4.13 If the vessels propulsion plant is located in several spaces, a direct suction in accordance with 4.11 b) is to be provided in each watertight compartment in addition to branch bilge suctions in accordance with 411 a) 4.5 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces adjoining the vessels shell are to be connected to the bilge system. Where the aft peak is

adjoining the engine room, it may be drained over a self-closing valve to the engine room bilge. When the direct suctions are in use, it must be possible to pump simultaneously from the main bilge line by means of all the other bilge pumps. The diameter of the direct suction may not be less than that of the main bilge pipe. 4.6 4.14 The diameter of the emergency suction shall be equal to the diameter of the pumps suction line. The emergency bilge suction must be connected to the pump suction line by a reverse-flow protection according to 1.5 All bilge arrangements are to be tested under GLs supervision. This valve is to be provided with a plate with the notice: L. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues 4 1. Oily water separating equipment Emergency bilge valve! To be opened in an emergency only! Emergency bilge valves and cooling water inlet valves shall be capable of being operated from above the floor plates. 4.15 Rooms and decks in

engine rooms are to be provided with drains to the engine room bilge. A drain pipe which passes through a watertight bulkhead is to be fitted with a self-closing valve. 4.2 Holds Holds with bilge gutterways are to be fitted 4.21 with bilge suctions fore and aft. 4.22 Holds in which the tank decks extend to the vessels shell are to be provided with bilge wells of adequate size. On vessels with only one hold, bilge wells of sufficient size are to be provided fore and aft. 4.3 Refrigerated cargo spaces Chain lockers Chain lockers are to be drained by means of appropriate arrangements. 5. Bilge testing Requirements of the flag state shall be ob1.1 served additionally. 1.2 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above shall be fitted with an oily water separator or filtering. 1.3 A sampling device is to be arranged in a vertical section of the discharge line of oily water separating equipment/filtering systems. 1.4 By-pass lines are not permitted for oily-water separating

equipment/filtering systems. 1.5 Recirculating facilities have to be provided to enable the oil filtering equipment to be tested with the overboard discharge closed. 2. Discharge of fuel/oil residues A sludge tank is to be provided. For the fit21 tings and mountings of sludge tanks, see Q. Refrigerated cargo spaces and thawing trays are to be provided with drains which cannot be shut off. Each drain pipe is to be fitted at its discharge end with a trap to prevent the transfer of heat and odours. 2.2 A self-priming pump is to be provided for sludge discharge to reception facilities. The capacity of the pump shall be such that the sludge tank can be emptied in a reasonable time. 4.4 2.3 A separate discharge line is to be provided for discharge of fuel/oil residues to reception facilities. Spaces above fore and aft peaks These spaces shall either be connected to the bilge system or are to be drained by means of hand pumps. Spaces located above the aft peak may be drained to the

engine room bilge, provided the drain line is fitted with a self-closing valve which is to be located at a highly visible and accessible position. The drain lines shall have a diameter of at least 40 mm. –––––––––––––– 4 Oily water separators, filter plants, collecting tanks, discharge lines and a monitoring & control system or an 15 ppm alarm shall comply with the International Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from Ships, 1973, (MARPOL) and the Protocol 1978 as amended. Form F 323 (MP1) is to be submitted for approval. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 M. Section 9d M Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes General The laying of air, overflow and sounding pipes is permitted only in places where the laying of the corresponding piping system is also permitted, see Table 9d.5 1. Air and overflow pipes 1.1 Arrangement All tanks, void spaces, etc. are to be fitted at 1.11

their highest position with air pipes or overflow pipes. Air pipes must normally terminate at the open deck. 1.12 cally. 1.2 Chapter 8 Page 9d–23 Number of air and overflow pipes The number and arrangement of the air pipes 1.21 is to be so performed that the tanks can be aerated and de-aerated without exceeding the tank design pressure by over- or underpressure. 1.22 Tanks which extend from side to side of the vessel shall be fitted with an air/overflow pipe at each side. At the narrow ends of double bottom tanks in the forward and aft parts of the vessel, only one air/ overflow pipe is sufficient. 1.3 Air pipe closing devices Air/overflow pipes terminating above the open deck are to be fitted with approved air pipe heads. Air and overflow pipes are to be laid verti- 1.13 Air and overflow pipes passing through cargo holds are to be protected against damage. 1.14 For the height above deck of air and overflow pipes, see Section 2, Table 2.2 1.15 Air pipes from unheated leakage

oil tanks and lubricating oil tanks may terminate at clearly visible positions in the engine room. Where these tanks form part of the vessels hull, the air pipes are to terminate above the freeboard deck. 1.16 Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and leakage oil tanks which terminate in the engine room are to be provided with funnels and pipes for safe drainage in the event of possible overflow. Table 9d.15 Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes Tank filling systems filling mode The overflow pipes of changeable tanks shall be capable of being separated from the fuel overflow system. 1.19 Where the air and overflow pipes of several tanks situated at the vessels shell lead to a common line, the connections to this line are to be above the freeboard deck, as far as practicable but at least so high above the deepest load waterline that should a leakage occur in one tank due to damage to the hull or listing of the vessel, fuel or water cannot flow into another tank. 1.110 The

air and overflow pipes of lubricating oil and fuel tanks shall be kept separate. 1.111 For the cross-sectional area of air pipes and air/overflow pipes, see Table 9d.15 by pumping LR LÜR 1/3 f per tank – – 1,25 f per tank 1 Explanatory note: LR = air pipe LÜR = air-/overflow pipe f 1 1.17 Air pipes for cofferdams/void spaces with bilge connections are to be extended above the open deck. 1.18 Where fuel service tanks are fitted with change-over overflow pipes, the change-over devices are to be so arranged that the overflow is led to one of the storage tanks. by gravity Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe 1,25 f as the total cross-sectional area is sufficient if it can be proved that the resistance to flow of the air and overflow pipes including the air pipe closing devices at the proposed flow rate cannot cause unacceptable high pressures in the tanks in the event of overflow. To prevent blocking of the air

pipe head openings by their floats during tank discharge the maximum allowable air velocity determined by the manufacturer is to be observed. 1.4 Overflow systems The overflow collecting manifolds of fuel 1.41 tanks are to be led at a sufficient gradient to an overflow tank of sufficient capacity. The overflow tank is to be fitted with a level alarm which operates when the tank is about 1/3 full. 1.42 For the size of the air and overflow pipes, see Table 9d.16 1.43 The use of a fuel storage tank as overflow tank is permissible but requires the installation of a high level alarm and an air pipe with 1,25 times the cross-sectional area of the main bunkering line. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–24 Table 9d.16 Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps M Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes (closed overflow systems) Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes Tank filling and overflow systems 2 ÜR AR Stand-pipe 1/3 f

– – Relief valve 1/3 f 1 min. 1,25 F – 1/3 F at chest min. 1,25 F 1,25 F – Manifold 1/3 F min. 1,25 F – – Overflow tank 1/3 F – – – Overflow chest Explanatory notes: LR ÜR AR f F 1 2 1.5 Remarks LR Filling Overflow system I - Part 1 GL 2007 = = = = = air pipe overflow pipe drainage line cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe cross-sectional area of main filling pipe 1/3 f only for tanks in which an overflow is prevented by structural arrangements. Determined in accordance with 1.4 Determination of the pipe cross-sectional areas For the cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes, see Tables 9d.15 and 9d16 Air and overflow pipes shall have an outside diameter of at least 60,3 mm. 1.6 The minimum wall thickness of air and overflow pipes are to be in accordance with Table 9d.17a and 9d17b, whereby A, B and C are the groups for the minimum wall thickness. 1.7 The pipe materials are to be selected according to B. 2. Sounding pipes

2.1 General cross-sectional area of stand-pipe ≥ 1,25 F cross-sectional area of relief valve ≥ 1,25 F 2.11 Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks, cofferdams and void spaces with bilge connections and for bilges and bilge wells in spaces which are not accessible at all times. 2.14 Sounding pipes which terminate below the deepest load waterline are to be fitted with selfclosing shut-off devices. Such sounding pipes are only permissible in spaces which are accessible at all times. All other sounding pipes are to be extended to the open deck. The sounding pipe openings have to be always accessible and fitted with watertight closures. 2.15 Sounding pipes of tanks are to be provided close to the top of the tank with holes for equalising the pressure. 2.16 In holds, a sounding pipe is to be fitted to each bilge well. 2.17 Where level alarms are arranged in each bilge well of cargo holds, the sounding pipes may be dispensed with. The level alarms are to be independent from each

other and are to be type approved by GL 5. 2.18 Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds are to be laid in protected spaces or they are to be protected against damage. On application, the provision of sounding pipes for bilge wells in permanently accessible spaces may be dispensed with. 2.2 2.12 Where tanks are fitted with remote level indicators which are type approved by GL, the arrangement of sounding pipes can be dispensed with. 2.21 Sounding pipes which terminate below the open deck are to be provided with self-closing devices as well as with self-closing test valves, see also Q.2336 2.13 As far as possible, sounding pipes are to be laid straight and are to extend as near as possible to the bottom. Sounding pipes for fuel and lubricating oil tanks –––––––––––––– 5 National Regulations, where existing, are to be considered. Source: http://www.doksinet Section 9d I - Part 1 GL 2007 N Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps

Chapter 8 Page 9d–25 Table 9d.17a Classification of minimum wall thickness groups Location Piping system or position of open pipe outlets Tanks with same media Air, overflow and sounding pipes Tanks with disparate media Drain lines and scupper pipes Air, sounding and overflow pipes below freeboard deck or bulkhead deck above freeboard without with deck shut-off on shut-off on ships side ships side C – – – Scupper pipes from open deck C A Cargo holds Machinery spaces A A A B – B A Discharge pipes of pumps for sanitary systems – – Outside pipe diameter da [mm] - 82,5 - 114,3 - 139,7 - 177,8 - 457,2 – B A Table 9d.17b Minimum wall thickness of air, overflow, sounding and sanitary pipes 1 below weather deck A Discharge and scupper pipes leading directly overboard 38 88,9 101,6 127 152,4 159 193,7 219,1 244,5 above weather deck Minimum wall thickness [mm] A1 B1 C1 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 4,5 5 5,4 5,9 6,3 7,1 8 8 8,8 10 10 12,5 12,5 12,5

6,3 6,3 7,1 8 8,8 8,8 8,8 8,8 8,8 2.3 Cross-sections of pipes 2.31 Sounding pipes shall have an inside diameter of at least 32 mm. 2.32 The diameters of sounding pipes which pass through refrigerated holds at temperatures below 0 °C are to be increased to an inside diameter of 50 mm. 2.33 The minimum wall thicknesses of sounding pipes are to be in accordance with Tables 9d.17a and 9d.17b N. Drinking Water System 5 1. Drinking water tanks wall thickness groups, see Table 9d.17a 2.22 Sounding pipes shall not be located in the vicinity of oil firing equipment, machine components with high surface temperatures or electrical equipment. 2.23 Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation or service spaces. 2.24 pipes. Sounding pipes are not to be used as filling 1.1 For the design and arrangement of drinking water tanks, see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12. 1.2 On vessels with ice class E1 to E4 and higher drinking water tanks located at the vessels side are to be

provided with means for tank heating to prevent freezing. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9d–26 2. Section 9d O Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Drinking water tank connections 2.1 Filling connections are to be located sufficiently high above deck and are to be fitted with a closing device. 2.11 pipes. Filling connections are not to be fitted to air 2.2 Air/overflow pipes are to be extended above the open deck and are to be protected against the entry of insects by a fine mesh screen. O. Sewage Systems 1. General 1.1 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above and vessels of less than 400 gross tonnage which are certified to carry more than 15 persons and with keel laying on or after 2003-09-27 are to be fitted with the following equipment: – a sewage treatment plant approved according to Resolution MEPC.2(VI), or – a sewage comminuting and disinfecting system (facilities for the temporary storage of sewage when the vessel is less than

3 nautical miles from the nearest land, to be provided), or – a holding tank Air pipe closing devices, see M.13 2.3 Sounding pipes shall terminate sufficiently high above deck. 3. Drinking water pipe lines I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.2 A pipeline for the discharge of sewage to a reception facility is to be arranged. The pipeline is to be provided with a standard discharge connection. 3.1 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be connected to pipe lines carrying other media. 1.3 National requirements are to be observed additionally. 3.2 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be laid through tanks which do not contain drinking water. 2. 3.3 Drinking water supply to tanks which do not contain drinking water (e.g expansion tanks of the fresh water cooling system) is to be made by means of an open funnel or with means of preventing backflow. 4. Pressure water tanks/calorifiers For design, equipment, installation and testing of pressure water tanks and calorifiers, Section 9e is to be

observed. 5. Drinking water pumps 5.1 Separate drinking water pumps are to be provided for drinking water systems. 5.2 The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking water pressure tanks are to be fitted with screw-down non-return valves. 6. Drinking water generation Where the distillate produced by the vessels own evaporator unit is used for the drinking water supply, the treatment of the distillate has to comply with current regulations of national health authorities. Arrangement 2.1 For scuppers and overboard discharges see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 21. 2.2 The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary pipes below freeboard and bulkhead decks are specified in Tables 9d.17a and 9d17b 2.3 For discharge lines located above freeboard deck steel pipes according to Table 9d.6, Group N may be used. 2.4 For sanitary discharge lines located below freeboard deck within a watertight compartment, which terminate in a sewage tank or in a sanitary treatment plant, pipes according to

2.3 may be used 2.5 Sewage tanks and sewage treatment systems 2.51 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes leading to the open deck. For air pipe closing devices see M.13 2.52 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling connection, a rinsing connection and a level alarm. 2.53 The discharge lines of sewage tanks and sewage treatment tanks are to be fitted at the vessel side with screw-down non-return valves. When the valve is not arranged directly at the vessel’s side, the thickness of the pipe is to be according to Table 9d.17b, column B Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 2.54 A second means of reverse-flow protection is to be fitted in the suction or delivery line of the sewage pump from sewage tanks or sewage treatment plants. 2.55 Where at a heeling of the vessel of 5° at port or starboard, the lowest inside opening of the sewage system lies on the summer load line or below, the discharge

line of the sewage collecting tank is to be fitted in addition to the required reverse-flow protection device according to 2.54 with a gate valve directly at the shell plating In this case the reverse-flow protection device needs not to be of screw-down type. 2.56 Bilge pumps may not be used for emptying sewage tanks. Q. Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues 1. General 1.1 Scope The following requirements apply to the storage of liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well as oily residues and to gas bottles for domestic purposes. 1.2 Hose Assemblies and Compensators 1. Hose assemblies and compensators made of non-metallic and metallic materials may be used according to their suitability in fuel-, lubricating oil-, hydraulic oil-, bilge-, ballast-, fresh water cooling-, sea water cooling-, compressed air-, auxiliary steam-, and exhaust gas systems as well as in secondary piping systems. 2. Hoses and compensators used in the

systems mentioned in 1. are to be of approved type 6 3. Hose assemblies and compensators made of non-metallic materials are not permitted in permanently pressurized starting air lines. Furthermore it is not permitted to use hose assemblies and compensators in fuel injection piping systems of combustion engines. 4. Hose assemblies and compensators for the use in fuel-, lubricating oil-, hydraulic oil-, bilge- and sea water systems are to be flame-resistant. 5. Non-metallic hose assemblies and compensators are to be located at visible and accessible positions. 6. Where hose assemblies and compensators are installed in the vicinity of hot components they shall be provided with approved heat-resistant sleeves. 7. Manufacturers of hose assemblies and compensators 7 are to be recognized by GL. –––––––––––––– 6 7 See GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 8 – Test Requirements for

Mechanical Components and Equipment. See GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 – Machinery Installations, Chapter 9 – Guidelines for the Recognition of Manufacturers of Hose Assemblies and Compensators. Definitions Service tanks are settling tanks and daily service tanks which supply consumers directly. 1.3 P. Chapter 8 Page 9d–27 Tank plan A tank plan is to be submitted for approval in triplicate. It should include particulars regarding arrangement, medium and volume of the tanks as well as information about the maximum height of the overflow level. 2. Storage of liquid fuels 2.1 General safety precautions for liquid fuels Tanks and pipes are to be so located and equipped that fuel may not spread either inside the vessel or on deck and may not be ignited by hot surfaces or electrical equipment. The tanks are to be fitted with air and overflow pipes as safeguards against overpressure, see M. 2.2 Distribution, location and capacity of fuel tanks 2.21

Distribution of fuel tanks 2.211 The fuel supply is to be stored in several tanks so that, even in the event of damage to the bottom of one of the tanks, the fuel supply will not be lost entirely. 2.212 Fuel tanks are to be separated by cofferdams from tanks containing lubricating or hydraulic oil as well as from tanks containing drinking water. This does not apply to used lubricating oil which will not be used on board anymore. 2.213 On small vessels the arrangement of cofferdams according to 2212 may, with the approval of GL be dispensed with, provided that the common boundaries between the tanks are arranged in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12, A.52 2.22 Arrangements of fuel tanks 2.221 Fuel tanks may be located above engines, boilers and other equipment with a high surface temperature (above 220 °C) only if adequate spill trays are provided below such tanks and they are protected against heat radiation. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page

9d–28 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Surface temperature of the elements without insulation and lagging shall be considered. 2.222 Fuel tanks shall be an integral part of the vessels structure. If this is not practicable, the tanks shall be located adjacent to an engine room boundary and the tank top of the double bottom. The arrangement of free-standing fuel tanks inside engine rooms is to be avoided. Tank arrangements which do not conform to the preceding rules require the approval of GL. 2.223 Tanks adjacent to refrigerated cargo holds are subject to Section 10, M. 2.224 In case of fuel supply for prime movers of emergency source of electrical power please refer to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 10, B. 2.24 / 225 2.3 Fuel tank fittings and mountings 2.31 For filling and suction lines see E.; for air, overflow and sounding pipes see M. 2.32 Service tanks are to be so arranged that water and residues can deposit despite of

ship movement. Fuel tanks located above the double bottom are to be fitted with water drains with self-closing shut-off valves. 2.33 Tank gauges I - Part 1 GL 2007 – Sounding pipes are either to terminate in locations remote from ignition hazards or they are to be effectively screened to prevent that spillage through the sounding pipes may come into contact with a source of ignition. – The sounding pipes are to be fitted with selfclosing shut-off devices and self-closing test cook. 2.4 Appliances and fittings on fuel tanks 2.41 Appliances, mountings and fittings not forming part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted to tank walls only by means of intermediate supports. To free-standing tanks only components forming part of the tank equipment may be fitted. 2.42 Valves and pipe connections are to be attached to doubler flanges welded to the tank wall. Holes for attachment bolts shall not be drilled in the tank wall. Instead of doubler flanges, thick walled pipe stubs

with flange connections may be welded into the tank walls. 2.5 Hydraulic pressure tests Fuel tanks are to be tested for tightness in accordance with Section 3. Fuels with a flash point of ≤ 60 °C 2.331 The following tank gauges are permitted: 2.6 – sounding pipes – oil-level indicating devices (type approved) For the storage of liquid fuels with a flash point of ≤ 60 °C, see Section 9a, D.12 – oil-level gauges with flat glasses and selfclosing shut-off valves at the connections to the tank and protected against external damage 2.332 For fuel storage tanks the provision of sounding pipes is sufficient The sounding pipes may be dispensed with, if the tanks are fitted with oil-level indicating devices which have been type-tested by GL. 2.333 Fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to be fitted with oil-level indicating devices or oil-level gauges according to 2.331 For vessels under German flag only type approved oil-level gauges are allowed. 2.334 Sight

glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on the side of the tank and cylindrical glass oil gauges are not permitted. 2.335 Sounding pipes of fuel tanks may not terminate in accommodation spaces, nor shall they terminate in spaces where the risk of ignition of spillage from the sounding pipes consists. 2.336 Sounding pipes should terminate outside machinery spaces. Where this is not possible, the following requirements are to be met: – Oil-level gauges are to be provided in addition to the sounding pipes. 3. Storage of Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils 3.1 Tank arrangement For the arrangement of the tanks 2.221 and analogously Section 3 are to be applied 3.2 Tank fittings and mountings 3.21 For filling and suction lines of lubricating oil and hydraulic oil tanks, see F.22 3.22 For tank sounding devices for oil tanks, see 2.331 and 2334 3.23 For the mounting of appliances and fittings on the tanks 2.4 is to be applied 3.3 Capacity and construction of tanks 3.31 Lubricating oil

circulation tanks should be sufficiently dimensioned to ensure that the dwell time is long enough for settling out of air bubbles, residues, etc. With a maximum permissible filling level of about 85 %, the tanks shall be large enough to hold at least the lubricating oil contained in the entire circulation system including the contents of gravity tanks. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps 3.32 Measures, such as the provision of baffles or limber holes consistent with structural strength requirements, particularly relating to the machinery bed plate, are to be provided to ensure that the entire content of the tank remains in circulation. Limber holes should be located as near the bottom of the tank as possible. Suction pipe connections should be placed as far as practicable away from the oil drain pipe so that neither air nor sludge may be sucked in irrespective of the heeling angle of the vessel likely

to be encountered during service. 3.33 Lubricating oil circulating tanks are to be equipped with sufficiently dimensioned vents. 4. Storage of oil residues 4.1 Capacity of sludge tanks The capacity of sludge tanks shall be such that they are able to hold the residues arising from the operation Chapter 8 Page 9d–29 of the vessel having regard to the maximum duration of a voyage. National requirements, if any, are to be observed. Reference is made to MEPC circular 511 4.2 Fittings and mountings of sludge tanks 4.21 For tank sounding devices 2.332 and 2335 are to be applied. 4.22 For air pipes, see M. 5. Storage of gas bottles for domestic purpose 5.1 Storage of gas bottles shall be located on open deck or in well ventilated spaces which only open to open deck. 5.2 Gaseous fuel systems for domestic purposes shall comply with an acceptable standard. National requirement, if any, are to be observed. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL

2007 Section 9e A Boilers and Pressure Vessels Chapter 8 Page 9e–1 Section 9e Boilers and Pressure Vessels A. Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters 3. Documents for approval 1. Scope 3.1 Steam boilers 1.1 Steam boilers For the purpose of these requirements, the term "boiler" includes all closed vessels and piping systems used for – generating steam at a pressure above atmospheric pressure (steam generators) – raising the temperature of water above the boiling point corresponding to atmospheric pressure (hot water generators) necessary for the operation of the vessel or for fish processing. The term "steam generator" also includes any equipment directly connected to the aforementioned pressure vessels or piping systems in which the steam is superheated or cooled, external drums, the circulating lines and the casings of circulating pumps serving forced-circulation boilers. 1.2 Warm water generators For warm water generators with a

permissible discharge temperature of not more than 120 °C and all systems incorporating steam or hot water generators which are heated solely by steam or hot liquids B. applies regarding materials, design calculations and manufacturing principles. For equipment and testing the requirements of 2. - 4 apply 2. Details and drawings are also to be submitted covering the valves and fittings and their arrangement together with a description of the boiler plant specifying the arrangement of the boiler with reference to the vessels longitudinal axis, the essential boiler data and equipment items, e.g steam conditions, heating surfaces, allowable steam output, feed, firing system, safety valves, controllers and limiters. 3.2 General principles 2.1 Steam and hot water generators and thermal oil heaters as defined in 1. are to be manufactured, equipped and tested in accordance with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sections 7a and 7b. Thermal oil heaters For

thermal oil heaters the following documents are to be additionally submitted: – a description of the system stating the discharge and return temperatures, the maximum allowable film temperature, the total volume of the system and the physical and chemical characteristics of the thermal oil – drawings of the heaters, the expansion and other pressure vessels and the drainage and storage tanks – circuit diagrams of the electrical control system, respectively monitoring and supervision – a functional diagram with information about the safety devices and valves provided (for information) Thermal oil heaters The following requirements apply also to thermal oil heaters in which organic liquids (thermal oils) are heated by oil fired burners, exhaust gases or electricity to temperatures below their initial boiling point at atmospheric pressure. 1.3 Drawings of all boiler parts subject to pressure, such as drums, headers, tubes, manholes and inspection covers, etc., are to be

submitted to GL in triplicate These drawings shall contain all the data necessary for strength calculations and design assessment, such as working pressures, superheated steam temperatures, materials to be used and full details of welds including filler materials. If specially requested, mathematical proof of the maximum film temperature in accordance with DIN 4754 is to be submitted. 4. Testing after installation on board Following installation on board, a check is carried out on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the equipment and on the arrangement and setting of safety appliances. Operating tests are to be performed wherever necessary. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 9e–2 Section 9e B. Pressure Vessels 1. Scope C Boilers and Pressure Vessels The following requirements apply to pressure vessels (gauge or vacuum pressure) for the operation of the main propulsion plant and its auxiliary machinery. They also apply to pressure vessels and equipment necessary

for the operation of the fishing vessel and for fish processing if these are subjected to internal or external pressure in service. 2. General principles All pressure vessels mentioned under 1. are to be manufactured, equipped and tested in accordance with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 8. 3. Documents for approval For all pressure vessels necessary for the operation of the fishing vessel and for fish processing for which drawing approval is required according to 2., drawings containing all the data necessary for their safety assessment are to be submitted in triplicate. The following details, in particular, are to be specified: – intended use, substances to be contained in the pressure vessel – working pressures and temperatures; if necessary, secondary loads, volume of individual spaces – materials to be used, welding details, heat treatment – design details of the pressurized parts 4. Testing after installation on board

Following installation on board, a check is to be carried out on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the equipment and on the arrangement and setting of safety appliances. Operating tests are to be performed wherever necessary. I - Part 1 GL 2007 C. Oil Firing Equipment 1. General 1.1 Oil firing equipment for steam boilers or thermal oil heaters is subject to the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 9, B. 1.2 Where oil burners are to be used additionally for burning waste oil and oil sludge, the necessary measures are to be agreed with GL Head Office in each case. 1.3 The oil burners of warm water generators, oil-fired heaters and small heating appliances which are located in the engine room or in spaces containing equipment important to the operation of the machinery space are subject to the requirements of the Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 9, C. 2. Documents for approval A sectional drawing of each type of

burner together with a description of its mode of operation and also circuit diagrams and equipment lists of the electrical control system are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. 3. Exemption Burners manufactured and tested in accordance with EN 267 or other internationally recognized regulations may be accepted. In general, examination of drawings of these burners may be dispensed with, if proof is furnished of a prototype or equivalent test having been carried out. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 A Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 Page 10–1 Section 10 Refrigeration Installations A. General 4. Documents for approval 1. Scope 4.1 Cargo refrigeration installations 1.1 Class Notation RIC For refrigerating installations which are built under the supervision and in accordance with the GL Rules, each of the following documents is to be submitted to GL in triplicate in due time: The complete requirements of this Section

apply to refrigeration installations intended for use on board of fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC, compare GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2, C.25 1.2 For these refrigerating installations the following requirements have to be considered: 2. C. D. F. J.1 M.15 Refrigerants Refrigerating Machinery Spaces Pressure Vessels and Apparatus Safety Equipment Escape from refrigerated or air-cooler spaces, etc. b) A calculation of the cooling load as evidence of the adequate capacity of the installation. c) A general arrangement plan of the refrigerating installation with details of the ventilation of the refrigerating machinery spaces. d) Drawings of the compressors, such as longitudinal and transverse sections, and a workshop drawing of the crankshaft or rotors. e) Performance data of the compressors. f) Drawings of all vessels and equipment under refrigerant pressure, e.g condensers, evaporators, oil separators, receivers as well as brine/RSW

coolers together with details of the materials used. g) Diagrams showing the layout of refrigerant, brine / CO2, RSW and cooling water pipelines with details of the wall thickness and materials. h) Drawings showing the arrangement and equipment of the refrigerated spaces with details of air ventilation including airducts. i) Drawings showing the type and design of the defrosting system. j) Drawings showing the type and execution of the insulation used for the refrigerated spaces and tanks, with details of the insulation of hatches, doors, covers for scuppers and bilges, thermal bridges and refrigerant and brine piping. k) Drawings of the bilge pumping and drainage facilities for refrigerated spaces and tanks. l) Drawings and descriptions of electrical temperature-monitoring systems. m) Description of automatic control systems. Definitions Within the scope of this Section refrigerating installations on board fishing vessels are: – cargo refrigerating installations for

the refrigeration of insulated cargo holds – cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigeration of insulated brine/seawater tanks (RSW) – quick-freezing installations for fish and other catch The provisions assume that the refrigerating installations are permanently installed and belong to the vessel. 3. A description of the refrigerating installations on Form 139-2006 to provide the information necessary for the Classification of refrigerating installations. These forms are available from GL Safety requirements The safety requirements of this Section also apply to fishing vessel cargo refrigerating installations for which Class Notation RIC is not requested as well as for refrigerating installations used for cooling of provisions and air conditioning. – – – – – a) Classification and survey of refrigeration installations 3.1 For the Classification and Characters of Classification of refrigeration installations see GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and

Surveys, Section 2. 3.2 For surveys of refrigeration installations see GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 3. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–2 5. Section 10 B Refrigeration Installations Testing of materials and components I - Part 1 GL 2007 3. Number of refrigerating units 5.1 The selecting and testing of materials is subject to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapters 1 – 4. 3.1 At least two complete refrigerating units including compressors, condensers, receivers (if applicable) and prime mover are to be provided. 5.2 Components under refrigerant pressure are required to undergo material testing as a matter of principle. Specific requirements are stated individually within this Section. 3.2 Where several compressors operate in a closed circuit with one condenser and, where installed, one brine cooling evaporator, this also counts as one refrigerating unit. 5.3 Material tests are to be

performed on the crankshafts of reciprocating compressors and the rotors of screw compressors with a calculated journal diameter of more than 50 mm. Works Certificates are sufficient in case of journal diameters ≤ 50 mm. 3.3 Where only two refrigerating units are installed, each compressor shall be capable of working with each condenser and, where applicable, with each brine cooling evaporator. 5.4 GL reserve the right to extend material testing to other important plant components. 3.4 In case of vessels with Class Notation K and with refrigerated spaces less than 400 m3, consideration will be given to the installation of only one condensing unit. 4. B. Installation, Design and Rating 1. Design principles 1.1 Refrigeration systems shall be so designed, constructed, tested and installed as to take account of the safety of the system and also emission of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) or any other ozone-depleting substances from the refrigerant held in quantities or concentrations

which are hazardous to human health or to the environment and shall be also to the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of registration. 1.2 Refrigeration systems shall be adequately protected against vibration, shock, expansion, shrinkage, etc. and shall be provided with an automatic safety control device to prevent a dangerous rise in temperature and pressure. 2. Electrical power supply At least two generating sets have to be available for supplying power to refrigerating installations. The capacity of the generators is to be such that, in addition to other requirements: – when all generators are in operation the total power requirements of the refrigerating installation can be satisfied, the "total power requirements" being the installed electrical load of the refrigerating installation – in the event of the failure or shutdown of any one generator, all refrigerating machinery, with the exception of the stand-by sets can be operated at full load. For

vessels with Class Notation K this requirement may be dispensed with. Refrigerating capacity 4.1 The refrigerating capacity of the installation is to be rated in such a way that the required temperature(s) in holds or tanks can be maintained when any of the refrigerating units are out of operation. Fully loaded condition is to be assumed. The required temperature is the temperature on which the refrigerating capacity calculation is based and which is certified in the Refrigerating Installation Certificate. 4.2 Where additional plants, such as quick freezers, icemakers, etc. are connected to the refrigerating installation, the reserve refrigerating unit may be taken into account when the conditions are most unfavourable. 5. Factors affecting plant rating 5.1 The calculation of the required refrigerating capacity is to be based on a seawater temperature of at least 32 °C and an ambient air temperature of at least 40 °C with 55 % relative humidity unless other values are agreed with

GL in consideration of special operation. 5.2 The calculation shall likewise be based on the area enveloping the refrigerated spaces/tanks on the inside of the insulation, where such spaces are adjacent to non-cooled spaces, cooled spaces at higher temperatures, the ambient air or seawater. 6. Automation, instrumentation and alarms 6.1 Automated refrigerating installations are to be so equipped that they can also be operated with manual control. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 B Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 Page 10–3 6.2 Input units and actuating devices are to be type-tested. alarm shall be generated for the cases defined in Table 10.1 6.3 Measures shall be taken to prevent freezing of refrigerated seawater. 7. 6.4 Defrosting arrangements for air coolers are to be controlled by a defrosting program. 6.5 Fault alarms An alarm system is to be installed which actuates an alarm at a position which is constantly manned. An Table 10.1

Refrigerating installations differing in design from those which have already been proved suitable in service on board fishing vessels are subject to special GL approval. For such installations, GL may impose special requirements as to the extent of the documentation to be submitted for approval and the scope of the testing, see also GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2, D.354 Instrumentation and alarms Item Automatic stop Lubricating oil Driving motors Display Pressure 1 Running Pressure 1 Discharge line: - pressure Compressor - temperature Temperature 1 Pressure 1 Suction line: - pressure - temperature Temperature 1 Intermediate stage (if fitted) Pressure 1 Circulation pumps Running Available pumps Running Secondary circuit Brine/CO2 cooler – inlet/outlet Temperature 1 Brine/CO2 Pressure line Pressure 1 Header tank Level 1 Cooling water pumps Running Available cooling water pump Running Condenser Cooling water – inlet Temperature 1 Cooling water – outlet

Temperature 1 Refrigerating Lock-in alarm machinery space Refrigerant leakage Refrigerated spaces Alarm Activated Low Stop High High/low Low High High Stop Start High (outlet) Low Low Stop Start -High Reaction Automatic stop Automatic stop Automatic stop (high) Automatic stop Automatic stop For auto start Manually activated Concentration in refrigerating machinery space, pump rooms, production areas Concentration in refrigerated spaces Detection system Temperature measuring Temperature Left/right hand cooler delivery Temperature air/return air Automatic stop of reLeakage NH3 = 50 ppm frigerating machinery CO2 = 5000 ppm if NH3 > 500 ppm Leakage CO2 = 10000 ppm Failure High Lock-in alarm Manually activated Ventilation fan (full/half speed) Defrost Plant of novel design Stop/running Time duration 1 these devices are to be provided at or in the proximity to the refrigeration machinery High Failure Disabled Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–4 Section 10

C. Refrigerants 1. Classification C Refrigeration Installations Table 10.2 Approved refrigerants, Group 1 Incombustible refrigerants without significant hazard to human health, e.g: R22 Chlorodifluormethane R134a Tetrafluorethane CHCIF2 CH2F-CF3 R404A R125/143a/134a(44/52/4%) R407A R32/125/134a(20/40/40%) Refrigerant High-pressure side (HP) Low-pressure side (LP) R22 R134a 22,5 13,9 17,0 10,6 R404A R407A 25,0 25,2 19,7 19,8 R407B R407C 26,5 23,9 20,9 18,8 R410A R507 33,6 25,6 26,4 20,2 R717 (NH3) R744 (CO2) 24,0 17,5 1 1 1 R407B R32/125/134a(10/70/20%) R407C R32/125/134a(23/25/52%) R410A R32/125(50/50%) R507 R125/143a(50/50%) R744 Carbon Dioxide CO2 Approved refrigerants, Group 2 Toxic or caustic refrigerants and those which, when mixed with air, have a lower explosion limit of at least 3,5 % by volume. R717 Ammonia NH3 NH3 may generally be used as refrigerant with indirect systems only. In case of quick freezing installations and in cooling

coils fitted in brine / RSW tanks these refrigerants may be directly expanded. In addition, the regulations imposed by the competent authorities of the country of registration are to be observed. 1.3 Refrigerants which are not approved, Group 3 Refrigerants which, when mixed with air, have a lower explosion limit of less than 3,5 % by volume, e.g ethane, ethylene 2. Design pressure to be determined by the plant designer taking into account the proposed operating pressure and the maximum pressure at rest condition. Where the maximum design pressure at rest conditions is maintained by the fitting of a supplementary refrigeration unit, condensing the vapour in a holding vessel, supporting calculation require to be provided to show that this can be undertaken with a local ambient temperature of 45 °C. The holding vessel is to be thermally insulated to prevent the operation of the relief devices within a 24 hour period after de-energising the supplementary refrigeration unit at an

ambient temperature of 45 °C and an initial pressure equal to the starting pressure of the refrigerating unit. With these refrigerants the danger of asphyxiation is, however, to be borne in mind. 1.2 Allowable working pressures for refrigerants Working pressures PB [bar] Refrigerants used in refrigeration systems shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of registration. Methylchloride or CFCs whose ozonedepleting potential is higher than 5 % of CFC-11 shall not be used as refrigerants. Refrigerants are classified as follows: 1.1 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Working pressures 2.2 Within the meaning of these Rules, the lowpressure side of the plant includes all parts exposed to the evaporation pressure of the refrigerant. However, these parts are also subject to the design pressure PR for the high-pressure side if, e.g for hot gas defrosting, a switch-over of the system can subject them to high pressure. Medium-pressure vessels of two-stage plants form part of the

high pressure side. 3. Storage of reserve supplies of refrigerants 3.1 Reserve supplies of refrigerants may be stored only in steel bottles approved for this purpose by the competent authorities of the country of registration. 3.2 The filling level of these bottles shall be suitable for tropical conditions, unless operating range of the fishing vessel is restricted to cold climate zones. 2.1 For the common refrigerants, the allowable working pressures PB (design pressures PR) are laid down in Table 10.2 3.3 Bottles containing refrigerant are to be securely anchored in an upright position and protected against overheating. For other refrigerants, the design pressures PR are determined by the pressure at the bubble point at a temperature of 55 °C on the high pressure side and at a temperature of 45 °C on the low pressure side. 3.4 Bottles containing refrigerant may be stored only in well ventilated spaces specially prepared for this purpose or in refrigerating machinery spaces.

Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 D Refrigeration Installations 3.5 On fishing vessels where, with due regard for the provisions of D., there is no refrigerating machinery space and the refrigerating machinery is installed in the main or auxiliary engine room, GL may permit exceptions to 3.4 in the case of refrigerants belonging to Group 1. In this case storage bottles up to a maximum of 20 % of the total refrigerant charge for immediate replenishing of the system may be kept in the main or auxiliary engine room. D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces 1. Definition Refrigerating machinery spaces are spaces separated by bulkheads from other service spaces and housing refrigerating machinery and associated equipment. 2. Installation of refrigerating machinery 2.1 Any space containing refrigerating machinery including condensers and gas tanks utilizing toxic refrigerants shall be separated from any adjacent space by gastight bulkheads. 2.2 When the

containment according to 2.1 is not practicable, due to the size of the vessel, the refrigerating system may be installed in the machinery space provided that the quantity of refrigerant used will not cause danger to persons in the machinery space, should all the gas escape and provided that an alarm is fitted to give warning of dangerous concentration of gas should any leakage occur in the compartment. This arrangement may be considered for a total refrigerant charge of less than 25 kg. 2.3 Refrigerating machinery is to be installed in such a way that sufficient space is left for operation, servicing and repair. 3. Equipment and accessories 3.1 Refrigeration systems using ammonia in charges exceeding 25 kg are to be installed in refrigerating machinery spaces separated by gas tight divisions from other ship spaces and service rooms. 3.2 Regardless of the type of refrigerant used, the doors of refrigerating machinery spaces shall not give access to living quarters or corridors in the

accommodation area. The doors must open outwards and be self-closing. 3.3 Where refrigeration systems operate with ammonia spaces accommodating the refrigerating machinery are to be equipped as follows: a) Spaces shall be provided with at least two access doors as far as possible from each other. The doors are to open outwards and be of selfclosing type. Chapter 8 Page 10–5 b) Equipment for producing water screens is to be fitted above the access doors to refrigerating machinery spaces. Provision shall be made for actuating this equipment from outside the refrigerating machinery space. The actuating device shall not be located in the immediate vicinity of the entrances. Where water sprinklers are additionally mounted in the refrigerating machinery spaces themselves, these are to be permanently installed and shall be capable of being actuated from outside. The spray nozzles of sprinkler systems are to be suitably distributed in the refrigerating machinery space. Due attention is

to be paid to electrical machinery and equipment. The spray nozzles shall be capable of covering as large an area as possible with fine water droplets. c) The electrical consumers in the refrigerating machinery spaces shall be capable of being switched off, independently of the forced ventilation system, by a central switch located outside the room. 3.4 Provision shall be made for the bilge pumping or drainage of refrigerating machinery spaces. Where installations are operated with ammonia, the refrigerating machinery spaces shall be provided with drainage devices leading to a place where refrigerant presents no danger to the vessel or to the persons on board. 4. Leak detection and alarm 4.1 Refrigerant leak detectors need to be fitted in case of NH3 and/or CO2 in any area where leakage may occur, e.g refrigerating machinery spaces, fish processing area, valve stations, refrigerating cargo holds. Welded pipelines passing through passageways or access ducts are not considered

possible leakage areas. 4.2 Leak detection systems are to be type tested. Set points for alarms shall be adjusted as given in Table 10.1 4.3 Leak detectors are to activate audible and visual alarms located both inside and outside the affected space. The alarm is to be linked to the general machinery alarm system and is to trip an alarm on the bridge as well as in the engine control room. 5. Ventilation 5.1 Refrigerating machinery spaces shall have a suitably arranged, mechanical ventilation system. The ventilation system shall be activated either manually or automatically by the detector system. Where Group 1 refrigerants are used, at least the exhaust air shall be conveyed into the open air separately from the Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–6 Section 10 E Refrigeration Installations ducts serving other spaces. The air intake duct shall not be connected to the ventilation system serving the accommodation. 5.2 Where ammonia is used, the ventilation system shall

not be connected to systems serving other spaces of the vessel. 5.3 The rating of mechanical fans is subject to the following criteria: a) Refrigerating machinery spaces where Group 1 refrigerants are used are to be equipped with mechanical means of ventilation enabling the air to be changed at least 30 times/hour. b) Where the refrigerant used is ammonia, the minimum flow rate of the mechanical fans serving the refrigerating machinery spaces is to be calculated by applying the formula: V(punkt) = 60 ⋅ G⅔ [m3/h] V(punkt) = flow rate [m3/h] G = weight of the refrigerant charge [kg] In any case, the number of air changes per hour may not be less than 40. Where installations operated on ammonia are equipped with an effective water sprinkler system arranged in the refrigerating machinery space, the minimum flow rate of the fans specified above may be reduced by 20 %. 5.4 Where the refrigerant used is CO2, the minimum flow rate of the mechanical fans shall be designed for 30 air

changes/hour. 5.5 Fans serving refrigerating machinery spaces shall also be capable of being switched on and off from outside the space in question. The switches are to be clearly marked. I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.2 Other compressor drives, like diesel engines, turbines, etc. shall comply with Section 9b and the relevant Sections of Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations. 1.3 Air-cooled compressors are to be designed for an air temperature of at least 45 °C. 1.4 Seawater-cooled compressors are to be designed for a minimum inlet temperature of 32 °C. The cooling water spaces of compressors are to be protected against excessive overpressure by safety valves or rupture safety devices, unless provided with a free outlet. 2. Design and construction of refrigerant compressors For the design and construction of refrigerant compressors, see GL Rules defined in Chapter 10 – Refrigerating Installations, Section 1, E. 3. Material testing Refrigerant compressors and compressor parts are to be

subjected to material testing in accordance with the GL Rules defined in A.5 4. Equipment 4.1 Compressors are to be equipped with devices such as pressure relief valves, rupture discs, etc. which, if the maximum allowable working pressure is exceeded, will equalize the pressures on the discharge and suction sides. Semi-hermetic compressors in automatic installations may be exempted from this requirement, provided that they are protected by overpressure safety switches and can be operated with permanently open shutoff valves in such a way that the safety valves fitted to the installation remain effective. 4.2 Pressure gauges and thermometers are to be fitted in accordance with J.21 and J22 5.6 Exhaust air ducts of fans serving refrigerating machinery spaces are to be gastight inside the vessel. 4.3 A manufacturers plate with the following information is to be fixed to each refrigerant compressor: The exhaust air has to be conveyed in such a way as to prevent leakage of gas into

other vessels spaces. – manufacturer – year of construction – refrigerant maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar] E. Refrigerant Compressors – 1. General 5. 1.1 Where the compressors are electrically driven, the motors and other items of electrical plant shall comply with the Sections 11a – 11 l. Testing After completion, refrigerant compressors are to be subjected to a trial run without refrigerant at the manufacturers works and to the pressure and tightness tests specified in K. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 F Refrigeration Installations F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus 1. Pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure 1.1 General Pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure shall comply with the GL Rules in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 8. 1.2 Safety devices 1.31 Pressure vessels and apparatus which contain liquid refrigerant and which can be shut off are to be fitted

with a safety valve, see J.1 1.32 Where more than one pressure vessel are provided with one common safety valve, any closing device fitted between the pressure vessels is to be equipped as to secure in the open position. A warning sign with the following wording is to be fitted in the vicinity of each closing device: "Valve is to be secured in open position and may be closed for repairs only". 1.33 Filters and dryers need not be fitted with safety valves. 1.4 Pressure and tightness tests After completion, pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure are to be subjected to the pressure and tightness tests specified in K. 2. Brine tanks 2.1 General 2.11 The term "brine" as a cooling medium means a solution of industrial salts. The use of other media with a low freezing point requires the special approval of GL. 2.12 In this context, brine tanks do not include brine cooling evaporators. The latter shall comply with the requirements for pressure

vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pressure, as set out in 1. 2.13 2.15 Brine tanks which can be shut off shall be protected against excessive pressure rises due to the thermal expansion of the brine by the provision of safety valves or by mechanism for interlocking the shutoff devices in the open position. 2.2 Testing Brine tanks are to be subjected in the manufacturers works to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests specified in K. Material tests and pneumatic tightness tests may in general be dispensed with. Material testing The materials of components under refrigerant pressure must be tested in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 8, B. 1.3 Chapter 8 Page 10–7 Brine tanks shall not be galvanized internally. 2.14 Brine systems have to be equipped with air pipes which cannot be closed off and with brine compensating tanks. 3. Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) 3.1 Each RSW tank is to be provided with appropriate

venting and sounding arrangements. The arrangements to assess the liquid levels in the tanks may be permanently installed or be a temporary arrangement. 3.2 Where a RSW tank is intended to carry dry fish in bulk, the following arrangements are to be provided: – the tank is to be provided with a bilge well and a permanent connection to the bilge system, unless the tanks are provided with independent bilge systems – arrangements are to be made for blanking off sea water piping 4. Air coolers 4.1 General 4.11 Air coolers for direct evaporation 1 count as apparatus under refrigerant pressure and are therefore subject to the requirements in 1. Notwithstanding this, safety devices are required only for flooded evaporators. 4.12 Air coolers operated by indirect evaporation, insofar as brine is used as the cooling medium, shall not be galvanized internally. 4.13 Air coolers are to be provided with drip trays and adequate drains. 4.14 Air coolers are to be provided with defrosting

equipment according to M.2 4.15 Air coolers shall be made of corrosion resistant material or be externally protected against corrosion by galvanizing. –––––––––––––– 1 Refrigerating installations with direct evaporation are those where the refrigerant evaporator is located in the refrigerated space itself. In such plants no brine or similar cooling medium is used. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–8 Section 10 G Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 4.16 Where finned-tube or multi-plate type air coolers are used, the distance between the fins or plates shall be not less than 10 mm, at least on the air inlet side. In this context, the air inlet side is taken to mean ¼ of the length of the cooler measured in direction of air flow. tions, Section 11, U. Approved hose assemblies and bellows expansion joints are to be used only. 4.17 Depending on the type of air circulation system employed, the air coolers are to be subdivided

by shut offs in such a way that, even after breakdown of one air cooler section, the cooling of the refrigerated space can be maintained. 1.18 Pipe sections of CO2 piping systems which can be isolated are to be protected by a pressure relief valve. At least one pressure relief valve is to be fitted at the CO2 piping system which ensures safe blow-off of CO2-vapour directly to a safe location above deck. This requirement need however, not be applied in case of very small spaces. 1.2 4.2 1.21 Materials for refrigerant pipes are to be tested in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 11, B. Material testing Materials for air coolers using direct evaporation are to be subjected to the tests specified in the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials, Section 1, F. and Section 2, D. In the case of air coolers for indirect evaporation, the testing of materials may be

dispensed with if the cooling medium employed is brine. G. Pipes, Valves and Fittings 1. Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings 1.1 General 1.17 Shut-off valves are to be provided to allow the replacement of hose assemblies without loss of refrigerant. Material testing 1.22 Refrigerant valves and fittings are subject to material testing if their housings are made of cast steel or nodular graphite cast iron and the product of the maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar] multiplied by the nominal diameter DN [mm] is > 2500. Valves and fittings with nominal diameter DN ≤ 50 are exempted from this requirement. 1.23 Where the housings of valves and fittings are made of grey iron, GL reserve the right to check the quality of the material. EN-GJL-200 grade material is to be used as a minimum. 1.24 Where the housings of valves and fittings are manufactured by die-forging or are made of copper alloys, material testing is not required. 1.11 Refrigerant pipes, valves and

fittings are to be designed in accordance with Section 9d. 1.3 Where ammonia is employed for refrigerant, copper, bronze, brass and other copper alloys are not to be used. 1.31 Refrigerant valves and fittings are to be subjected in the manufacturer’s works to the pressure and tightness tests specified in K. 1.12 Refrigerant pipes shall be insulated in accordance with L.1 Steel pipes shall be galvanized externally, unless other adequate corrosion protection has been demonstrated to GL. 1.32 Automatic control valves can be exempted from this requirement where sensitive internal components may be damaged by the pressure testing. Where the design permits, the housings are to be tested without internal components in these cases. 1.13 At points where pipes are supported or pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with steel members of the vessels structure has to be avoided. Pressure and tightness test 1.33 After installation, refrigerant pipes are to be subjected to the

tightness test specified in K.213 1.14 Where necessary, refrigerant pipes between compressors and condensers are to be protected against being inadvertently touched. 2. Brine pipes, valves and fittings 2.1 General 1.15 Automatic control valves are to be arranged or fitted with by-passes so that the installation can be operated by hand. 2.11 Brine pipes, valves and fittings have to comply with the requirements set out in Section 9d. They are not to be galvanized internally, but shall be protected against corrosion externally. 1.16 Flexible refrigerant hoses of non-metallic materials shall comply with the requirements of the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installa- 2.12 In general thick-walled pipes in accordance with Section 9d, group M are to be used. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 J Refrigeration Installations 2.13 At points where brine pipes are supported or pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with steel members

of the vessels structure has to be avoided. 2.2 Testing After being installed but prior to the application of the insulation, brine piping systems are to be subjected to the hydraulic pressure tests specified in K. Material tests may generally be dispensed with. H. Fans and Pumps 1. Fans After being installed, the fans are to be tested in accordance with Q.15 Provision shall be made for replacing fan impellers and fan motors even when the refrigerated holds are fully loaded. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K this requirement may be dispensed with. 2. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by pump may be dispensed with. 2.2 Evidence of the quality of the materials used is to be supplied in respect of all parts subject to refrigerant pressure. Where housings are made of grey cast iron, EN-GJL-200 grade material is to be used as a minimum requirement. 2.3 Refrigerant circulating pumps are to be subjected in the manufacturers works to a performance test in

presence of a GL Surveyor and to the pressure and tightness tests specified in K. Brine pumps 3.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by pump may be dispensed with. 3.2 Brine pumps are to be subjected in the manufacturers works to a performance test in presence of a GL Surveyor and to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests specified in K. A pneumatic tightness test is not required. 4. I. Cooling Water Supply 1. General Pipes, valves and fittings have to comply with Section 9d. 2. Reserve cooling water supply Where the reserve cooling water supply system of the refrigerating installation is connected to the cooling water system of the main propulsion plant, the standby cooling water pump specified in H.4 may be dispensed with provided that the stand-by cooling water pump of the main propulsion plant is capable of the adequate supply of cooling water to the

refrigerating installation without adversely affecting the operation of the main propulsion plant. 3. Suction lines Each cooling water pump has to be equipped with its own suction line and shall be able to draw from at least two sea chests. Seawater filters are to be fitted and so arranged that they can be cleaned without interrupting the cooling water supply. Refrigerant circulating pumps 2.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by. 3. Chapter 8 Page 10–9 Cooling water pumps The requirements set out in 3. are applicable in analogous manner Regarding the stand-by pumps see I2 4. Dock operation By suitable connection of the cooling water lines to ballast water tanks or by hose connections to the deckwashing line or fire main, measures shall be taken to ensure that, where necessary, the refrigerating installation can also be operated while the vessel is docked. This requirement is not applicable for fishing vessels

with Class Notation K. 5. Cooling water pipes in cargo holds Where cooling water pipes have to be laid through cargo holds or refrigerated cargo holds to the refrigerating machinery spaces, they are to be installed in pipe tunnels. In exceptional cases, cooling water pipes may be installed above deck or in the double bottom tank. 6. Testing After being installed, cooling water pipes, valves and fittings are to be subjected to a pressure test specified in K. J. Safety and Monitoring Equipment 1. Safety equipment 1.1 General 1.11 Provisions are to be made to ensure that the compressor switches off automatically if the limits are exceeded, see Table 10.1 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–10 Section 10 L Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.12 Pressure vessels and apparatus which can be isolated and which contain liquefied refrigerants have to be equipped with a safety valve, see also F.13 K. Pressure and Tightness Tests 1. General 1.13

Provision has to be made for the safe blowoff of refrigerants directly into the open air. 1.1 All pressure and tightness tests are to be performed in presence of a GL Surveyor. They are to be carried out initially during supervision of construction at the manufacturer’s works or on board of the vessel as specified in the relevant parts of this Section. 1.2 Safety valves and rupture discs 1.21 Safety valves exposed to refrigerant pressure are subject to the requirements set out in G.1 The provisions of G.2 are applicable in analogous manner to safety valves under brine pressure. 1.22 Safety valves are to be set to the maximum allowable working pressure and secured to prevent the setting being altered inadvertently. 1.23 Where a rupture disk is fitted upstream of a safety valve, the space between the rupture disc and the safety valve is to be monitored by an alarm pressure gauge or an equivalent device. A screen is to be fitted downstream the rupture disc to ensure the function of

the safety valve. The bursting pressure of the rupture disc shall not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure. A margin of 10 % is permitted. 2. Monitoring equipment An overview of the monitoring equipment is contained in Table 10.1 2.1 Pressure gauges The suction and discharge pipes of refrigerant compressors, intermediate stage pressure vessels and pressurized brine pipes are to be fitted with pressure gauges. Refrigerant pressure gauges are required to have pressure and temperature scales for the refrigerant concerned. The maximum allowable working pressure is to be indicated by a red mark. 1.2 As a rule, pneumatic tightness tests are to be performed after the hydraulic pressure tests. 1.3 Exceptionally, GL may, on application, waive the hydraulic pressure test provided that a pneumatic pressure test is performed at a test pressure approved by GL. In addition regulations for accident prevention of national authorities are to be observed. 1.4 In refrigerating installations

which have already been charged with refrigerant, pneumatic pressure tests may be performed only with nitrogen or carbon dioxide if Group 1 refrigerants are used or only with nitrogen if the refrigerant is ammonia. The use of other gases requires the agreement of GL. 2. Test pressures 2.1 Components under refrigerant pressure 2.11 The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 × the maximum allowable working pressure PB according to Table 10.2 2.12 Where the low-pressure side of the installation can be subjected by operational switching to the pressure of the high pressure side, e.g for defrosting with hot gas, the vessels and equipment involved are to be designed and tested at the pressures prescribed for the high pressure side. 2.13 The pneumatic tightness test pressure is to be equal to the maximum allowable working pressure PB. 2.2 2.2 Thermometers Components under cooling water or brine pressure. Brine delivery and return pipes, condenser cooling water inlet and outlet pipes

and pressure and suction pipes of compressors are to be equipped with thermometers. The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 × the maximum allowable working pressure PB, but not less than 4 bar. For the number and disposition of thermometers in refrigerated cargo holds see N. L. Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, Pipes, Valves and Fittings 2.3 1. Cold insulation Liquid level indicators Direct indicators such as sight glasses for liquid refrigerants are to be fitted with shut off valves. The use of tubular glasses is not permitted. 1.1 Pressure vessels, apparatus, pipes, valves and fittings whose operating temperatures may drop below the ambient temperatures are to be provided with cold insulation. Components of plants which are accom- Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 M Refrigeration Installations modated in specially insulated refrigerating machinery spaces are exempted from this requirement. 1.2 Refrigerant and brine pipes which

traverse uncooled spaces are to be insulated with special care and are to be installed so that they are protected from damage. 1.3 Air-, sounding-, thermometer- and drain pipes in refrigerated and air-cooler spaces are to be adequately insulated. 1.4 Before being insulated, the items concerned are to be protected against corrosion. 1.5 Cold insulation is to be designed as to prevent the formation of condensation water on its surface at a maximum relative humidity of 90 %. 1.6 The insulation is to be free from discontinuities and its final layer shall be given a vapourtight coating. 1.7 Insulation is to be protected at points where there is a danger of damage. 2. Heat insulation 2.1 To avoid premature refrigerant condensation, hot gas defrosting pipes are to be insulated over their entire length. 2.2 If insulation is provided to prevent accidental touching see also G.114 2.3 Components requiring insulation are to be protected against corrosion. Chapter 8 Page 10–11 1.4 The clear

openings of access trunkways and companion hatches leading to cargo or air-cooler spaces shall not be less than 600 × 600 mm. Hinged hatch covers are to be protected against closing accidentally and shall be capable of being reopened by hand from inside. 1.5 Refrigerated or air-cooler spaces are to be equipped with an escape leading out to the open deck. For this purpose, each space is to be provided with at least one door which can also be opened from inside. In addition an alarm for operation from within the space shall be connected to the bridge or permanently manned machinery control centre (MCC) to prevent persons being trapped. 1.6 The supporting structures of refrigerated spaces and inspection passageways are to be designed to withstand the load expected by the cargo. 1.7 Refrigerated spaces are to be provided with drains and/or bilge pumping facilities. In this connection see Section 9d, K 1.8 For scuppers in the bulkhead deck, see Section 2. 1.9 Circulating fans and

air-coolers installed in refrigerated or air-cooler spaces have to be accessible at all times. It shall be possible to change fan impellers and drive motors even when the cargo spaces are fully loaded, see also H.1 If spaces are served by two or more fans having a capacity that the minimum required temperature can be maintained under most unfavourable conditions with anyone fan out of action, this requirement need not be applied. 2. M. Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces 1. Equipment 1.1 The external boundary walls of refrigerated spaces are to be watertight and made of steel. If the use of other materials is envisaged, the agreement of GL is required. 1.2 Manholes in the double bottom or in oil tank tops are to be surrounded with an oiltight coaming 100 mm in height. 1.3 Brine or refrigerant pipe penetrations through watertight bulkheads and decks shall be of approved design. The pipes may not come into direct contact with bulkheads, vessels structure or other metal

structural members. The fire resistance of the bulkheads and decks shall not be impaired. Defrosting 2.1 Means are to be provided for defrosting aircoolers. Efficient defrosting is to be ensured even when refrigerated compartments are loaded to their maximum. 2.2 Drip trays and drains are to be protected from freezing by adequate heating arrangements. 2.3 Means are to be provided to protect air coolers from overheating. 3. Insulation 3.1 The inside surfaces of refrigerated spaces are to be adequately insulated. Thermal bridges are to be avoided. Structural members of the vessel which may act as thermal bridges, e.g decks, partitions and pillars, are to be fully insulated over a length of at least 1 m into the refrigerated space. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–12 Section 10 N Refrigeration Installations 3.2 Divisions, bulkheads and decks separating refrigerated spaces at the same temperature need not be insulated. However, the requirement in 31 is to be

complied with. Cladding is to be fitted to protect the cargo. 3.3 Insulation materials shall be odourless and non-hygroscopic as possible. Combined with their cladding material, it shall be not readily ignitable. 3.4 If timber is used in refrigerated cargo spaces, this is to be impregnated with, if possible, odourless media to prevent rotting and fire. I - Part 1 GL 2007 N. Temperature Monitoring Equipment for Refrigerated Spaces 1. General 1.1 Suitably distributed and easily accessible thermometers are to be placed in each refrigerated space. At least one thermometer each is required before and after each air-cooler 1.2 Based on spaces of normal geometry and on the useful volume shown, the following number of thermometers is to be fitted as a minimum: 3.5 Insulation is to be permanently secured. Where insulation in the form of slabs is used, the edges of the slabs are to abut tightly against each other. – for spaces up to approximately 300 m3: 2 thermometers – 3.6 The

insulation at manhole covers, bilge suctions and wells shall be removable. for spaces up to approximately 800 m3: 3 thermometers – for spaces over 800 m3: 4 thermometers 3.7 For the insulation of piping in refrigerated spaces see L. 3.8 The edges of insulated hatches and hatch covers, doors, bilge covers, etc. are to be protected against damage. 3.9 At hatches and for about 500 mm beyond, the deck insulation in lower holds is to be provided with a special protective covering. The same applies also to shaft tunnels. 3.10 Unless suitable deck material or aluminium gratings are provided as top covering, the insulation of the decks of refrigerated spaces is to be protected by battens measuring at least 50 mm by 50 mm in cross section. The battens may take the form of removable gratings. 3.11 The insulation of the bulkheads of refrigerated spaces and of air ducts is to be suitably protected against damage. This protection is to be so designed that the cooling air is able to circulate

freely. 3.12 Refrigerated spaces should not lie adjacent to fuel or lubricating oil tanks. Where this cannot be avoided, a sufficiently wide gap is to be left between the vertical surfaces of such tanks and the insulation. This gap is to be provided with a drain leading to the bilge and with a vent pipe leading to the open air. The back of the insulation is to be protected against the penetration of moisture, e.g by metal cladding 3.13 The requirements set out in 3.12 apply in analogous manner to the tops of lubricating oil and fuel tanks. In the case of welded tank tops, the specified isolating gap may be dispensed with, provided that the top is covered with a well established oilproof coating without joints and of sufficient thickness. In determining the number of thermometers required, each individual refrigerated space is to be considered separately, even where several spaces are served by a single air-cooler and the tween decks are not insulated. 1.3 In case of RSW-tanks two

thermometers shall be installed as a minimum. 2. Electrical temperature monitoring equipment 2.1 Where temperatures are not monitored locally, electrical devices are to be fitted which comply both with the following requirements and with Sections 11a – 11 l. 2.2 In design and degree of protection, all appliances and other system components shall be compatible with the mechanical and climatic conditions attaching to their particular operating environments. If mobile temperature sensors are provided for refrigerated holds they are then to be fitted with connecting leads of sufficient length and the sensors are to be protected against mechanical damage. 2.3 Means are to be provided to enable temperature measuring of cargo holds in case of failure of the temperature monitoring system. The number of measuring points (sensors) in refrigerated spaces depends on the configuration and size of each space. The requirements set out in 11 and 12 are to be complied with as a minimum. 2.4 The

measuring range of the system has to cover the entire anticipated temperature range plus an additional ± 5 K. Temperatures above and below the measuring range shall not have any harmful effect on the systems. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 10 Q Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 Page 10–13 2.5 For the accuracy of the temperature measurements and reading the following values are to be applied: 2. Protective equipment 2.1 Breathing apparatus – maximum total error: 0,5 K – scale calibration for analogous measurements: 2,5 mm/K – exceptions subject to GL approval Where any refrigerant harmful to persons is used in the refrigerating system, at least two sets of breathing apparatus shall be provided, one of which shall be placed in a position not likely to become inaccessible in the event of leakage of refrigerant. Breathing apparatus provided as part of the vessel’s fire-fighting equipment may be considered as meeting all part of this

provision provided its location meets both purposes. Where self-contained breathing apparatus are used, spare cylinders shall be provided. 2.6 Wires and their installation has to comply with Sections 11a – 11 l. Waterproof distribution and junction boxes shall be used. 2.7 Each temperature measuring system has to be provided with its own power supply. The power supply system shall be duplicated 2.8 Where temperature measuring systems are supplied by their own power sources or via converters from the vessel’s supply system provision shall be made for easy switching to a stand-by power source. 2.2 The provision of gas masks, respirators, protective clothing, etc. is also subject to national accident prevention regulations 2.3 Operating and emergency advice Adequate guidance for the safe operation and emergency procedures of the refrigeration system shall be provided by suitable notices displayed on board of the vessel. 2.9 Instruments and appliances shall be marked with their

type and number. 2.10 The system and its individual components are to be subjected to a test in the manufacturers works under the supervision of GL. Q. Shipboard Testing 1. Operational tests The refrigerating installation is to be subjected to the following tests. O. Quick Freezing Installations 1. For pressurized parts of quick freezing installations, such as plate elements or freezing coils, the requirements in F. shall be complied with 2. Spaces for quick freezing installations shall be in line with the requirements set out in D.3, D4 and D.21 P. Spare Parts and Protective Equipment 1. Spare parts 1.1 The extent of spare parts to be carried on board is indicated in Section 13. In the case of recording instruments, the supply of spare parts is to be agreed with GL. 1.2 For fishing vessels with Class Notation K the availability of spare parts for refrigerating installations should be specially considered and decided upon by the owner. 1.1 All compressors, pumps, fans,

etc. are to be operated individually and simultaneously in all anticipated speed ranges. The operation of the compressors has to be demonstrated at different evaporating temperatures. During the test, the compressors are to be connected to the condensers and evaporators in all combinations possible in service. 1.2 In case of automatic refrigerating installations the proper working of the automatic and manual modes of operation are to be demonstrated. 1.3 The condensers are to be operated with the main cooling water pump and with the stand-by pump. The operation of the cooling water supply when the fishing vessel is in dock, is to be demonstrated in accordance with I.4 1.4 Brine pumps are to be tested. 1.5 It is to be demonstrated that the specified air changes and a uniform air distribution in cargo holds are achieved. 1.6 The efficient working of the defrosting system is to be demonstrated. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 10–14 2. Section 10 Q Refrigeration

Installations Refrigeration test 2.1 A refrigeration test (balance test) is to be performed to demonstrate to GL the degree of thermal insulation of the refrigerated spaces/tanks and that the available refrigerating capacity of the installation complies with the requirements set out in B.3 and B.5 The required proof of performance is deemed to have been supplied if the evaluation of the test by GL shows that the heat transfer coefficient, on which the calculation is based, has not been exceeded. 2.2 The temperature in the refrigerating holds/tanks is to be lowered to the level corresponding to the refrigerated space/tank temperature specified for the installation. For this purpose, the temperature difference between the ambient air and the refrigerated spaces/tanks shall not be less than 15 K. Where the test is performed during cold season the test conditions will be given special consideration by GL. I - Part 1 GL 2007 2.72 Ambient conditions and adjacent spaces The temperatures

of the ambient air and of the water are to be measured as are also the temperatures of other vessels spaces adjoining the refrigerated holds/ tanks. 2.73 Compressors Pressure and temperature of the refrigerant on the suction and pressure sides, speed of the compressors and the power consumption of the drive motors are to be measured. In case of semi-hermetic motor compressors, measurement of the speed may be dispensed with. 2.74 Condensers Outlet temperatures of the refrigerant are to be measured. 2.75 Brine 2.3 Before commencement of the balance test the agreed refrigerated hold/tank temperature is to be kept constant for at least 10 hours in order to achieve a uniform cooling of all parts. At the end of this cooling period, the refrigerating machinery must be in steady operating condition. The temperature of the brine before and after the brine coolers, the pressure at the brine pump outlets and the power consumption of the brine pumps are to be measured. 2.4 The temperature

measurements for the balance test are to be performed for a period of at least six hours. During this time the outside temperature shall be constant as possible. Periods of strong solar radiation are to be avoided. The power consumption of the fan motors is to be measured. 2.5 During the balance test all machinery and equipment in use is to be maintained in a steady operating condition and to be operated manually. 2.6 The number of compressors needed to achieve the condition of balance is to be fixed so as to achieve continuous operation. If the capacity of even a single compressor is too high, the plant has to be operated intermittently while recording the "on" time. The switching off of individual cylinders or rows of cylinder is not allowed. 2.7 Measurements The following measurements are to be carried out: 2.71 Refrigerated spaces/tanks The temperatures in refrigerated spaces/tanks and at the air-coolers are to be measured. In addition, the temperature curve is to

be plotted by means of a temperature recorder. 2.76 2.77 Circulating fans for the refrigerated spaces Measuring intervals During the balance time recordings are to be made hourly, otherwise every two hours. The ambient temperatures outside the refrigerated holds/tanks, which are required for the evaluation, shall be measured every hour over a period of 4 to 6 hours prior to the balancing time, depending on the insulation. 2.8 Reports After the balance test, the following documents are to be submitted to GL Head Office: 2.81 A diagrammatic drawing of the vessel and the refrigerated holds/tanks showing the temperature measuring points. 2.82 A test report including all the measured data and copies of the recorded temperatures as well as those from the thermograph. 2.83 The vessels draught, for and aft. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11a B General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 Page 11a–1 Section 11a General

Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations A. General 1. Scope 1.1 The requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l apply to electrical equipment of decked fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 12,0 m. For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m reduced requirements may be defined in different parts of the following Sections. For other types of ships engaged in the fishery business, like fish processing vessels, whale factory ships or fish transport and flotilla mother ships as well as for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, the electrical installations have to follow the requirements of Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations. 3. 3.1 Where the requirements for electrical equipment and facilities are not laid down in these Rules, decision shall be made, wherever necessary, regarding the use of other regulations and standards. These include eg IEC publications, especially all IEC 60092 publications. 3.2 If necessary, besides of the GLs Construction Rules for

fishing vessels national regulations are to be observed as well. 4. 1.4 For DC or AC main installations with a voltage not exceeding 50 volts and/or a power not exceeding 5 kW, the requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l are not wholly applicable. Such installations may be given special consideration by GL Head Office. 2. Application 2.1 International Torremolinos Convention Fishing vessels of flag states which have already ratified the Torremolinos International Convention for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, see Section 1, A.33, have to follow directly the requirements defined therein 2.2 European Communities Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m flying the flag of a state of the European Community or vessels fishing in the waters of the European Community have to follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Convention according to 2.1 overruled by the Commission Directives defined in Section 1, A.33 A copy of the consolidated text can be delivered by GL. Design

Electrical installations shall be designed so that: – the maintaining of normal operational and habitable conditions provided on board will be ensured without recourse to the emergency source of electrical power – the operation of the equipment required for safety will be ensured under various emergency conditions – the safety of crew and vessel from electrical hazards will be ensured 1.2 Versions deviating from the Construction Rules may be approved if they have been tested for suitability and accepted as equivalent by GL. 1.3 GL reserve the right to specify additional requirements to the Construction Rules where these are related to new systems or installations or where they are necessary because of new knowledge or operating experience. References to other rules and regulations B. Definitions 1. Power supply installations The power supply installations comprise all installations for the generating, conversion, storage and distribution of electrical energy. 2.

Essential equipment Essential equipment is required to ensure continuity of the following functions (compare also Section 9a, H.): – the propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and safety of the vessel – the safety of the crew – type-specific equipment on vessels with special Class Notations, e.g Certified Fishing Gear CFG – the maintaining of perfect condition of the cargo, e.g on vessels with cargo refrigerating installations with Class Notation RIC Essential equipment is subdivided into: Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11a–2 – – 3. Section 11a B General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations primary essential equipment is that required to be operative at all times to maintain the manoeuvrability of the vessel as regards propulsion and steering and that required directly for the primary duty of the fishing vessel. secondary essential equipment is that required for the safety of the vessel and the crew and such equipment

which can briefly be taken out of service without propulsion, steering of the vessel and equipment needed for the primary duty of the fishing vessel being unacceptably impaired. Non-essential equipment Non-essential equipment is that which temporary disconnection does not impair propulsion and steerabiliy of the vessel and does not endanger the safety of crew, cargo, vessel and machinery. 4. Emergency consumers Emergency consumers are mandatory consumers which, after breakdown of the main energy supply, shall be fed by the emergency energy supply. 5. Electric network An electric network comprises all equipment/ installations connected together at the same rated voltage. 5.1 Isolated electric network This term refers to a system in which a conductor or the neutral is not connected to the vessels hull in normal operation. If it is earthed via measuring or protective devices with a very high impedance, the system is likewise deemed to be isolated. 5.2 Electric network with earthed

neutral This is a system in which the neutral is connected to the vessels hull in normal operation. 6. Safety voltage 8.1 Wet operating spaces Wet operating spaces are spaces in which facilities may be exposed to moisture, e.g main engine rooms 8.2 Dry operating spaces Dry operating spaces are spaces in which no moisture normally occurs, e.g engine control rooms 8.3 Locked electrical spaces Locked electrical spaces are spaces which are provided with lockable doors and are intended solely for the installation of electrical equipment such as switchgear, transformers, etc. They have to be constructed as dry spaces. 9. Systems Systems contain all equipment necessary for monitoring, control and safety including the input and output devices. Systems cover defined functions including behaviour under varying operating conditions, cycles and running. 10. Protection devices Protective devices detect actual values, activate alarms in the event of limit-value infringement and prevent

machinery and equipment being endangered. They automatically initiate curative measures or calls for appropriate ones. 11. Safety devices Safety devices detect critical limit-value infringements and prevent any immediate danger to persons, vessel or machinery. 12. Safety systems Safety systems are a combination of several safety devices and/or protection devices into one functional unit. Safety voltage is a protection provision and consists of a circuit with rated voltage not exceeding 50 V AC, operated unearthed and isolated safely from supply circuits exceeding 50 V. 13. 7. 14. Low-voltage systems I - Part 1 GL 2007 Alarms An alarm gives optical and acoustical warning of abnormal operating conditions. Power electronics Low-voltage systems are systems operating with rated voltages of more than 50 V up to 1000 V inclusive and with rated frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or directcurrent systems where the maximum instantaneous value of the voltage under rated operating

conditions does not exceed 1500 V. Power electronics are all equipment and arrangements for generation, transformation, switching and control of electrical power by the use of semiconductor components. 8. All equipment which directly affect the flow of electrical energy; consist of the functional wired semiconductor elements together with their protection and cooling devices, the semiconductor transformers or inductors and the switchgear in the main circuits. Machinery spaces Machinery spaces are spaces in which machines and equipment are installed and which are accessible only to authorized persons, e.g engine rooms 15. Equipment of power electronics Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 16. Section 11a D General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Dead ship condition "Dead ship" condition means that the complete machinery plant including the main source of electrical power are out of operation and auxiliary energy as

compressed air, starting current from batteries, etc. are not available for the restoration of the main power supply, for the restart of the auxiliaries and for the start-up of the propulsion plant. It is however assumed that the equipment for start-up of the emergency diesel-generator is ready for use. 17. Main switchboard Main switchboard is a switchboard directly supplied by the main source of electrical power and intended to distribute electrical energy to the vessels main and auxiliary systems. 18. Periodically unattended machinery spaces Periodically unattended machinery spaces means those spaces containing main propulsion and associated machinery and all sources of main electrical supply which are not at all times manned under all operating conditions including manoeuvring. 19. Normal operational and habitable conditions These mean conditions under which the vessel as a whole, its machinery services, means of main and auxiliary propulsion, steering gear and associated

equipment, aids to safe navigation and to limit the risks of fire and flooding, internal and external means of communicating and signalling, means of escape and winches for rescue boats are in proper working order and the minimum comfortable conditions of habitability are satisfactory. Chapter 8 Page 11a–3 – short-circuit calculation where total generator output > 500 kVA – internal communication systems – alarm systems – main and emergency lighting arrangement – navigation lights – propulsion control system – steering gear power and control systems 1.1 The drawings of switchgear and control systems are to be accompanied by parts lists indicating the manufacturers and characteristics of the electrical components, circuit diagrams together with descriptions, where these constitute a necessary aid to understanding. The drawings and documents shall make it clear that the requirements set out in this Chapter have been complied with. 1.2 Any non-standard

symbols used are to be explained in a key. 1.3 All documents are to be indicated with the hull number and the name of the shipyard. 1.4 All documentation shall be submitted in English or German language. 1.5 GL reserve the right to demand additional documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an assessment of the installation. C. Documents for Approval 1. Newbuildings The drawings and documents listed in the following are to be submitted to GL Head Office in triplicate for examination at a sufficiently early date to ensure that they are approved and available to the Surveyor at the beginning of the manufacture or installation of the electrical equipment. 2. Modifications and extensions Major modifications to the electrical installations of vessels under construction or in service are subject to approval. The relevant documents are to be submitted in ample time prior to the execution of the work. The following drawings are to be submitted: – Form F141 (Details of the

type and scope of the electrical systems) – electrical one line diagram – electrical main switchboard and panel boards – electric load analysis – electrical power and lighting systems – emergency electrical systems D. Fishing Vessels Documentation When the vessel is commissioned or following major modifications and extensions of the electrical equipment, at least the documents subject to approval, specified in C. and showing the final arrangement of the electrical equipment, are to be supplied on board. The documents are to be marked with the name or the yard number of the vessel, the name of the yard and the date of preparation of the documents. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11a–4 Section 11a E General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept deviations from Table 11a.1 E. Ambient Conditions 1. Environmental effects 2. 1.1 The selection, layout and

arrangement of all shipboard machinery, equipment and appliances shall be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation under the ambient conditions defined in Section 1, C. Therefore the manufacturer/supplier shall be informed by the user about the expected environmental conditions. Vibrations 2.1 Electrical machinery and appliances are normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, construction and installation must in every case take account of these stresses The faultless long-term service of individual components shall not be impaired by vibration stresses. 1.2 Products are classified according to their applications into the environmental categories as stated in Table 11a.1 In type approval Certificates will be referred to the respective category. 2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibrations shall follow the GL Rules defined in Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 1, E.2 Environmental Conditions Open Deck Area Vibrations A 0 °C to + 45 °C to 100 %

0,7 g For general applications, except category B, C, D, F, G, H. B 0 °C to + 45 °C to 100 % 4g For application at a higher level of vibration strain. C 0 °C to + 55 °C to 100 % 0,7 g For application at a higher degree of heat. D 0 °C to + 55 °C to 100 % 4g For application at a higher degree of heat and a higher level of vibrations strain. E 0 °C to + 40 °C to 80 % 0,7 g For use in air-conditioned areas. With GL’s special consent only. relative Humidity Vibrations Comments relative Humidity Temperature Closed Area Temperature Environmental Category Table 11a.1 Environmental conditions/ environmental categories F – 25 °C to + 45 °C to 100 % 0,7 g For application when additional influences of salt mist and temporary inundation are to be expected. G – 25 °C to + 45 °C to 100 % 2,3 g For use on masts, with the additional influence of salt mist. H In accordance with manufacturer’s specifications The provisions contained in the

Certificates shall be observed. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11a G General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations F. Operating Conditions 10 1. Voltage and frequency variations 5 U n / U [%] 1.1 All electrical equipment shall be so designed that it works faultlessly during the voltage and frequency variations occurring in the normal operation. The variations indicated in Table 11a.2 are to be used as a basis. Frequency Voltage General Storage batteries and static converters 1 Parameter Voltage Variations Continuous see 1.2 1.2 If in direct-current systems supplied by storage batteries and static converters the permissible limits are exceeded, the faultless function of all electrical devices shall be ensured. 1.3 Any larger voltage variations likely because of the different conditions in distribution systems supplied by storage batteries and static converters are to be taken into account. Measures are to be taken to

stabilize the input voltage of specific systems, e.g electronic equipment, which cannot operate satisfactorily within the stated limits. 2. 0,1 ± 10 % (5 s) ±5% + 6 % - 10 % ± 20 % (1,5 s) – Mains quality 2.1 In systems without substantial static converter load and supplied by synchronous generators, the total voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 %. 2.2 In systems fed by static converters and systems in which the static converter load predominates, for single harmonics in permanence the limit values indicated in Fig. 11a1 apply The total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 8 % G. Power Supply Systems 1. Low-voltage systems The following systems are permitted in principle, for restrictions see 2.: 1.1 For direct current and single-phase alternating current: – 2 wires, with one wire liable to be earthed – single wire with hull return – 2 wires insulated from the vessels hull 1 0,2 Transient ± 20 % 1 2 0,5 Table 11a.2 Voltage and frequency

variations Source of power Chapter 8 Page 11a–5 1 3 5 7 10 15 25 n 100 Fig. 11a1 Limit values for the single harmonics in the supply voltage. Uv is the RMS value of the v-th order harmonic voltage 1.2 For three-phase current (alternating current): – 4 wires with neutral earthed, but without hull return – 3 wires with neutral earthed, with hull return – 3 wires insulated from the vessels hull 2. Hull return conduction/system earthing 2.1 Systems with hull return are to be installed only with special acceptance of GL Head Office. The hull return system of distribution shall not be used for power, heating or lighting in vessels for "unrestricted service". 2.2 of: This requirement does not preclude the use – impressed current cathodic protective systems – limited and locally earthed system, such as starter systems for internal combustion engines or – insulation level monitoring devices provided the circulation current does not exceed 30 mA

under the most unfavourable conditions 2.3 The connection of the return conductor to the hull shall be made somewhere easy to check and not in compartments with isolated bulkheads, e.g cold rooms. 3. Systems with earthed neutral If the selectivity is required in view of the shut-off of earth faults and additional current-limiting devices are mounted between the generator neutral point and the vessels hull, this shall not impair the selective shut-off of faulty circuits. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11a–6 Section 11a J General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 Systems with non-earthed neutral J. Protection and Protective Measures 4.1 In non-earthed systems, the generator neutral points shall not be connected together. 1. Protection against foreign bodies and water 4.2 The insulation resistance of a distribution system without earthing of the system is to be monitored and displayed. The protection of electrical

appliances against foreign bodies and water must be appropriate to the particular place of installation. The minimum degrees of protection are set out in Table 11a4 H. When the machines, appliances and control panels do not have these types of protection, adequate protection shall be carried out during installation. The degree of protection of the appliance as installed shall also be ensured during operation. 4. Voltages and Frequencies The use of standardized voltages and frequencies is recommended. The maximum permitted rated main voltages shall be as shown in Table 11a.3 Table 11a.3 Maximum permitted rated mains voltages Voltage Electrical installations 500 V For power equipment not removable during service, emergency power supply, heating and galley consumers and permanently installed control circuits. 250 V For lighting equipment, sockets for general use, portable appliances with double insulation and/ or protective isolating transformers, machine control, monitoring and

safety equipment 50 V For portable appliances for working in confined spaces, in wet rooms, on the open deck, in stores, engine rooms and other service spaces if equipment without double insulation and/or safety isolating transformers is used. For carrying out the types of protection, see IEC Publication 60529. 2. Protection against electric shock 2.1 Protection against direct contact Protection against direct contact comprises all the measures taken to protect persons against the dangers arising from contact with the live parts of electrical facilities. Live parts are conductors and conductive parts of facilities which in normal operating condition are under voltage. 2.11 Electrical facilities have to be so designed that, when they are used properly, persons cannot touch or come dangerously close to live parts. For exceptions see 2.12 2.12 In locked electrical service spaces, protection against direct contact is already maintained by the mode of installation. Insulated

handrails are to be fitted near live parts. 2.2 I. Materials and Insulation 1. Electrical machines, cables and devices shall be resistant to air containing moisture and salt, seawater and oil vapours. They shall not be hygroscopic and shall be flame retardant and self-extinguishing. The insulation of windings need not be flame-retardant. Electrical facilities must be made in such a way that persons are protected against dangerous contact voltages in the event of an insulation failure. For this purpose, the construction of the facilities shall incorporate one of the following protective measures: – protective earthing, see 2.3, or – protection by extra-low voltage (max. rated voltage AC 50 V and DC 120 V; in certain cases the voltage shall be lower in accordance with IEC publication 60364-4-41), or – protection by electrical separation for supplying one consuming device only (voltage not exceeding 250 V), or – protection by double insulation, or – In case where

special precautions against electric shock will be necessary, the additional usage of residual current protective devices 30 mA (not for essential equipment). Units of standard industrial type may be used in areas not liable to be affected by salty sea air. 2. The evidence of flame-retardation shall be according to IEC Publication 60092-101 or other equivalent standards, e.g IEC publication 60695-1110 or UL94 Cables shall correspond to IEC publication 60332-1 3. Materials with a high tracking resistance are to be used as supports for life parts. Protection against indirect contact Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11a J General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 Page 11a–7 Table 11a.4 Minimum degrees of protection against foreign bodies and water (in conformity with publication IEC 60529) Equipment Generators, motors, transformers 1 Switchgear, electronic equipment and recording devices 1 Location Locked dry

electrical service rooms Dry spaces, service rooms dry control rooms, accommodation Wheelhouse, radio room, control stations Wet spaces (e.g machinery spaces, bow thruster room, ventilation ducts (internal), pantries, provision rooms, store rooms Machinery spaces below floor (bilge), separator and pump rooms, refrigerated rooms, galleys, laundries, bathrooms and shower rooms Pipe tunnels, ventilation trunks (to open deck), cargo holds Open decks Communication equipment, display and input units, signalling equipment, switches, power sockets, junction boxes and control elements 1 Heating appliances heaters and cooking equipment Lighting fittings IP 00 IP 00 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44 2 IP 22 IP 22 IP 44 IP 44 IP 55 2, 3 IP 44 3 IP 34 3 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 2 IP 55 IP 55 IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 55 Notes 1 2 3 2.3 For the degree of protection for the equipment of watertight doors,

see Section 2, B.2 – Motors and associated control and monitoring equipment : IP X7 – Door position indicators : IP X8 – Door-closure warning devices : IP X6 For the degrees of protection for measuring chamber of smoke detectors : IP 42 For the degrees of protection for bathrooms and shower rooms, see Section 11i, C.2 Protective earthing Touchable conductive parts of equipment which are normally not live, but which are liable under fault conditions to become live part, are to be earthed. Where such earthing is not effective by fastening or mounting, protective earthing conductors are to be used. For the earthing of cable shielding, armouring and braids see Section 11j, D.8 2.4 Protective earthing conductors The following points are to be noted with regard to the use of earthing conductors: 2.41 An additional cable or an additional wire with a green/yellow coded core shall be provided as an earthing conductor, or the connection cable shall contain a green/yellow coded core.

Cable braids and armouring shall not be used as earthing conductors 2.42 A conductor normally carrying current shall not be used simultaneously as an earthing conductor, nor may it be connected with the latter to the vessels hull. The green/yellow coded core shall not be used as a current-carrying conductor. 2.43 The cross-section of the earthing conductor shall at least conform to the values indicated in Table 11a.5 2.44 Machines and devices which are insulated mounted are to be earthed by flexible cables, wires or stranded copper straps. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11a–8 Section 11a L General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Table 11a.5 Cross-sections for earthing conductors Crosssection of outer conductor [mm2] Minimum cross-section of earthing conductor in insulated cables separately laid [mm2] [mm2] equal to cross-section of outer equal to conductor cross-section but not less of outer than 1,5 for conductor stranded and 4 for

solid earth conductor 0,5 to 4 >4 to 16 > 16 to 35 >35 to < 120 ≥ 120 equal to cross-section of outer equal to conductor half the cross-section 16 of outer conductor equal to but not less half the than 4 cross-section of outer conductor 70 flexible cables and wires [mm2] equal to cross-section of outer conductor 70 2.45 The connection of the earthing conductor to the vessels hull shall be located at a point where it can easily be checked. Connections of earthing conductors shall be protected against corrosion. 2.46 Insulated mounted structures and aluminium structures have to be connected to the vessels hull by special conductors at several points. The connections shall have a high electrical conductivity and shall be corrosion-resistant. The minimum cross-section is 50 mm2 per conductor. 3. 3.2 The IEC publications 60533 and 60945 for the bridge and deck zone are to be observed. 3.3 The requirements for electrical and electronic equipment subject for mandatory

type approval regarding immunity and emissions of electromagnetic influence can be taken from GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 – Test Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and Systems. 3.4 Electrical and electronic equipment on board ships, required neither by Classification Rules nor by international conventions, liable to cause electromagnetic disturbance shall be of a type which fulfils the test requirements of the GL Rules VI - Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 - Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 - Test Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and Systems, Section 3, B.21 and B22 4. equal to cross-section of outer conductor but not less than 16 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 3.1 Electrical and electronic equipment shall not be impaired in their function by electromagnetic energy. General measures are to extend with equal importance

over: – decoupling of the transmission path between source of interference and equipment prone to interference – reduction of the causes of interference sources – reduction of the susceptibility to interference I - Part 1 GL 2007 Lightning protection Lightning protection shall be implemented in accordance to IEC publication 60092-401. K. Explosion Protection Where a potential explosion risk exists in or near any space, all electrical equipment and fittings installed in those spaces should be either explosion-proof or intrinsically safe to the satisfaction of the competent Authority. Furthermore the requirements in Chapter 3 – Electrical Installation, Section 1, K.3 have to be observed L. Spare Parts 1. In order to be able to restore machinery operation and manoeuvring capability of the vessel in the event of damage at sea spare parts for the main propulsion plant and the essential equipment shall be available aboard of each vessel together with the necessary

tools. 2. The amount of spare parts for unrestricted service and for Class Notations M, K and W have to be agreed with GL. 3. The amount of spare parts shall be documented and a corresponding list shall be carried aboard. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11b C Installation of Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 Page 11b–1 Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment A. General 1. Equipment location 1.1 Electrical equipment is to be so placed or protected as to minimize the probability of mechanical injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapours, steam or dripping liquids. Skylights and ventilators are to be so arranged as to avoid the probability of flooding the apparatus the emergency switchboard shall be located above the uppermost continuous deck and may not adjoin the boundary surfaces of the machinery space or of those spaces containing the main power source, the associated transformers, if any, or the main switchboard. C. Storage

Batteries 1. Location 1.2 In spaces where flammable mixtures are liable to collect and in any compartment assigned principally to the containment of an accumulator battery, no electrical equipment should be installed unless GL is satisfied that it is: Storage batteries shall be installed in such a way that persons cannot be endangered and equipment cannot be damaged by exhausted gases or leaked-out electrolytes. – essential for operational purposes – of a type which will not ignite the mixture concerned – appropriate to the space concerned – appropriately certified for safe usage in the dusts, vapours or gases likely to be encountered 1.1 Storage batteries shall be so installed as to ensure accessibility for changing of cells, inspection, testing, topping-up and cleaning. Storage batteries shall not be installed in the accommodation area or in cargo holds. An exception may be granted for gastight cells, such as those used in emergency lamps, where charging does not

result in the development of harmful gases. 2. Protection from bilge water All generators and motors are to be so arranged that they cannot be damaged by bilge water and, if necessary, a watertight coaming is to be provided to form a well around the base of such equipment with provision for removing water from the well. B. Generators, Electrical Sources 1. Main generators The main generators are to be installed in the main engine room or in a separate auxiliary engine room. Generators shall not be installed forward of the collision bulkhead below the bulkhead deck. 2. Emergency generators, emergency sources The emergency source of electrical power is to be located outside the machinery spaces and is to be so arranged as to ensure its functioning in the event of fire or other causes of failure of the main electrical installations. As far as practicable, the room containing the emergency source of power, the associated transformers, if any, the transitional source of emergency

power and 1.2 Storage batteries shall not be installed in positions where they are exposed to excessively high or low temperatures, water spray or other factors liable to impair their serviceability or shorten their service life. The minimum degree of protection required is IP 12. 1.3 When installing storage batteries, attention is to be paid to the capacity of the associated chargers. The charging power is to be calculated as the product of the maximum charger current and the rated voltage of the storage battery. Depending on the operating mode, application and duty of the storage battery to be charged, and on the mode of the charging (charger characteristic), and by agreement with GL, the calculation of the charging capacity need not be based on the maximum current. For the typical automatic IU- charging the calculation is stated under 3. 1.4 Storage batteries shall be prevented from sliding. The constraints shall not hinder ventilation 2. Battery-room equipment 2.1 Only

explosion-protected lamps, switches, fan motors and space-heating appliances shall be in- Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11b–2 Section 11b C Installation of Electrical Equipment stalled in battery rooms. The following minimum requirements shall be observed: – explosion group II C – temperature class T 1 Other electrical equipment is permitted only with the special approval of GL. I - Part 1 GL 2007 I = charging current [A] K = battery capacity [Ah] The gassing voltage shall not be exceeded. If several battery sets would be used, the sum of charging power has to be calculated. The room free air volume shall be calculated depending on battery size as follows: 2.2 Where leakage is possible, the inner walls of battery-rooms, boxes and cupboards, and all supports, troughs, containers and racks, shall be protected against the injurious effects of the electrolyte. V = 2,5 ⋅ Q Q = f ⋅ 0,25 ⋅ I ⋅ n V = room free air volume [m3] Q = air quantity

[m3/h] n = number of battery- cells in series connection All battery-installations, except for gastight batteries, in rooms, cabinets and containers shall be constructed and ventilated in such a way as to prevent the accumulation of ignitable gas mixtures. Gastight NiCd-, NiMH- or Li-batteries need not be ventilated. f = 0,03 for lead batteries with solid electrolyte f = 0,11 for batteries with fluid electrolyte 3.2 Where the room volume or the ventilation is not sufficient, enclosed battery cabinets or containers with natural ventilation into suitable rooms or areas shall be used. 3. Ventilation of spaces containing batteries 3.1 General requirements Batteries installed in switchboards with charging power up to 0,2 kW Lead batteries with a charging power up to 0,2 kW may be installed in switchboards without separation to switchgear and without any additional ventilation, if: a) the batteries are valve regulated (VRLA), provided with solid electrolyte b) the battery

cases are not closed completely (IP 2X is suitable) c) the charger is regulated automatically by an IU controller with a maximum continuous charging voltage of 2,3 V/cell and rated power of the charger is limited to 0,2 kW 3.3 Ventilated spaces with battery charging power up to 2 kW Batteries may be installed in ventilated cabinets and containers arranged in ventilated spaces (except rooms mentioned in 1.1) The unenclosed installation (IP 12) in well ventilated positions in machinery spaces is permitted. Otherwise batteries shall be installed in ventilated battery cabinets or containers. If several battery sets would be installed in one room, the sum of air quantity shall be calculated. The air ducts for natural ventilation shall have a crosssection as follows, assuming an air speed of 0,5 m/s: A = 5,6 ⋅ Q A = cross-section [cm2] The required minimum cross-sections of ventilation ducts are shown in Table 11b.1 Small air ducts and dimensions of air inlet and outlet openings

shall be calculated based on lower air speed. Table 11b.1 Cross-section of ventilation ducts Calculation based on battery charging power (automatic IU- charging) Battery charging power [W] The charging power for automatic IU-charging shall be calculated as follows: P = U⋅ I I = 8 ⋅ K/100 for Pb- batteries I = 16 ⋅ K/100 for NiCd- batteries P = charging power [W] U = rated battery voltage [V] Cross-section [cm2] Lead battery Lead battery solid fluid electrolyte electrolyte NickelCadmium battery VRLA < 500 500 < 1000 1000 < 1500 1500 < 2000 2000 < 3000 > 3000 40 60 80 80 80 60 80 120 160 240 80 120 180 240 forcedventilation forced ventilation Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.4 Section 11b D Installation of Electrical Equipment Ventilated rooms with battery charging power more than 2 kW Batteries exceeding charging power of 2 kW shall be installed in closed cabinets, containers or battery rooms forced ventilated to open deck

area. Lead batteries up to 3 kW may be ventilated by natural means Battery rooms shall be arranged according to 2. 3.5 Ventilation requirements Ventilation inlet and outlet openings shall be so arranged to ensure that fresh air flows over the surface of the storage battery. The air inlet openings shall be arranged below and air outlet openings shall be arranged above. If batteries are installed in several floors, the free distance between them shall be at least 50 mm. Devices which obstruct the free passage of air, e.g fire dampers and safety screens, shall not be mounted in the ventilation inlet and outlet ducts of battery rooms. If necessary, weather tight closures shall be carried out otherwise. Air ducts for natural ventilation shall lead to the open deck directly. Openings shall be at least 0,9 m above the cupboard/ boxes. The inclination of air ducts shall not exceed 45° from vertical. 3.6 Forced ventilation If natural ventilation is not sufficient or required cross-sections

of ducts according to Table 11b.1 are too big, forced ventilation shall be provided. Chapter 8 Page 11b–3 conditions as required for the installation of the emergency generator, see B.2 5. Batteries for starting of internal combustion engines 5.1 Batteries for starting of internal combustion engines shall be installed near the engine. 5.2 H.3 For the rating of the batteries, see Section 9b, 6. Caution labels The doors or the covers of battery rooms, cupboards or boxes shall be fitted with caution labels prohibiting the exposure of open flames and smoking in, or close to, these spaces. 7. Recording of the type, location and maintenance cycle of batteries 7.1 Where batteries are fitted for use for essential and emergency services a schedule of such batteries is to be compiled and maintained. The schedule, which is to be approved by GL, is to include at least the following information regarding the battery(ies): – type and manufacturers type designation – voltage and

ampere-hour rating – location – equipment and/or system(s) served – maintenance/replacement cycle dates The air quantity Q shall be calculated according to 3.3 – date(s) of last maintenance and/or replacement The air speed shall not exceed 4 m/s. – Where storage batteries are charged automatically, with automatic start of the fan at the beginning of the charging, arrangements shall be made for the ventilation to continue for at least 1 h after completion of charging. for replacement batteries in storage, the date of manufacture and shelf life 1 7.2 Procedures are to be put in place to ensure that where batteries are replaced that they are of an equivalent performance type. Wherever possible, forced ventilation exhaust fans shall be used. The fan motors shall be either certified safe type with a degree of protection IIC T1 and resistant to electrolyte or, preferably, located outside of the endangered area. Fans are to be of non-sparking construction. The

ventilation systems shall be independent of the ventilation systems serving other rooms. Air ducts for forced ventilation shall be resistant to electrolyte and shall lead to the open deck. 4. Emergency power supply The location in which storage batteries for the emergency power supply are installed shall fulfil the same D. Power Transformers 1. Transformers shall be installed at readily accessible and adequately ventilated rooms. 2. Open transformers with IP 00 degree of protection may be installed in dry and locked electrical service rooms. –––––––––––––– 1 Shelf life is the duration of storage under specified conditions at the end of which a battery retains the ability to give a specified performance. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11b–4 Section 11b F Installation of Electrical Equipment 3. The location of transformers for the main electrical power supply shall fulfil the same conditions as those applying to the installation of

the main generator, see B.1 4. The location of transformers for the emergency power supply shall fulfil the same condition as those applying to the installation of the emergency source of electrical power, see B.2 E. Electronics 1. Power electronic equipment and central units for information processing shall be installed in readily accessible and adequately ventilated spaces. 2. The heat generated in the unit shall be removed in a suitable manner. Where electronic equipment is installed in engine rooms or other spaces with enhanced danger of pollution and corrosion, air filters shall be provided if necessary. 1.2 If installed on the floor above the bilge, the main switchboard must be completely sealed from below. Pipework with flanges or fittings and air ducts are to be run in such a way that the switchgear is not endangered in the event of leaks. 1.3 The control passage in front of the main switchboard shall be wide enough to afford an adequate view for the operation of the board.

A sufficiently wide passageway is to be provided behind the free-standing panels where these have to be accessible from behind for operation and maintenance. 1.4 The floor in front of main switchboards with an operating voltage of more than 50 V has to be provided with insulating gratings or mats and where necessary behind. The insulation shall be done by a suitable insulating mat (e.g according to IEC publication 61111) 2. F. Switchboard 1. Main switchboards 1.1 Normally main switchboards shall be installed relative to the main generators in such a way that the normal electricity supply can only be impaired if a fire or other damage occur in the same room. Installation in a separate control room is permissible I - Part 1 GL 2007 Emergency switchboards The emergency switchboard shall be installed close to the emergency generator and/or the emergency battery, though not in the same room of the emergency battery for reasons of explosion protection. The place of installation shall

satisfy the same conditions as apply to the installation of the emergency generator, see B.2 The installation of the emergency switchboard is subject to the same conditions as in 1.2, 13 and 14 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11c B Power Supply Installations Chapter 8 Page 11c–1 Section 11c Power Supply Installations A. Electrical Power Demand 1. A power balance of the electrical equipment has to be submitted to proof the sufficient ratings of units for the generating, storage and transformation of electrical energy. 1.1 The power demand has to be determined for the following operating conditions: 1.4 The arrangement of the vessels main source of electrical power shall be such that the services referred to in Section 11a, A.4 can be maintained in all seas and under all navigating and manoeuvring conditions, even when the vessel is stopped. 1.5 Where transformers constitute an essential part of the supply system required herein, the system shall be so

arranged as to ensure continuity of the supply. – navigation at sea – fishing 1.6 – emergency power supply The fishing vessel machinery installations shall be so designed, that they can be brought to operation from "dead ship" condition as defined in Section 11a, B.16 1.2 Extreme environmental conditions, e.g arctic or tropical conditions, appropriate to the vessels area of operation are also to be taken into account. 2. In the case of fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC for classified refrigeration installations according to Section 10 account is also to be taken of the power required for refrigeration systems and preservation of the catch. 2. Rating and control of generator sets 2.1 Supply voltage Vessels service generator sets are to have voltage regulation characteristics so that the vessels supply voltage may be maintained within ± 3 %. 2.2 B. Main Electrical Power Supply 1. Design 1.1 Where electrical power constitutes the only means of

maintaining auxiliary services essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel, a main source of electrical power shall be provided which shall include at least two generating sets, one of which may be driven by the main engine (shaft generator). GL Head Office may accept other arrangements having equivalent electrical capability 1.3 However, in fishing vessels with the Class Notation K, in the event of any one of the generating sets being stopped, it shall only be necessary to ensure the functioning of services essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel. One of the required generating sets may consist of a generator in combination with a battery of sufficient capacity. Steady short circuit current 2.21 With a terminal short circuit on three phases of a generator, the steady short circuit current shall not be less than three times or greater than six times the rated current. The alternator and its exciter shall be capable of withstanding

the steady short circuit current for two seconds without damage. 2.22 Exemptions from these requirements may be allowed where it is demonstrated in particular instances that provision has been made for short circuits in the vessels mains to be selectively disconnected at lower steady short circuit currents. 2.3 1.2 The power of these sets shall be such as to ensure the functioning of the services referred to in Section 11a, A.4 and in case of Class Notation RIC, including the power required in preservation of the catch, in event of any one of these generating sets being stopped. Dead ship condition Voltage drop The apparent power of three-phase alternators shall be such that no admissible voltage drops occur in the vessel’s mains due to normal starting currents. Starting of the motor with the highest starting current may on no account cause a voltage drop capable of stalling consumers already in service. 2.4 Parallel operation In general when the vessels service installation is

such that two or more generators are to be operated in parallel, the load on any generator is not to differ more than plus or minus 15 % of its rated Kilowatt load from its proportionate share, based on the generator Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11c–2 Section 11c C Power Supply Installations I - Part 1 GL 2007 ratings, of the combined load for any steady-state condition in the combined load between 20 % and 100 % of the sum of the rated loads of all generators. C. Emergency Electrical Power Supply 1. Serving time 2.5 A self contained emergency source of electrical power is to be provided capable of serving the consumers defined under 3. on all vessels for 18 hours, on fishing vessels with Class Notation K for 3 hours. Prime movers The regulators of the driving machines of 3-phase and single phase alternator groups have to permit an adjustment to obtain, at normal frequency, a regulation of the load of the driving machines between – 5 % and + 5 % of the

total load. 3. Shaft driven generator systems 3.1 On vessels with remote control from the wheelhouse it is necessary to ensure that when manoeuvres, preventing the continued operation of the shaft driven generator plant are initiated, the supply to consumers and controls essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and steering is automatically restored as quick as possible. 3.2 Approval may be given for the use of standby sets which are started up by remote control from the bridge and are able to assume the supply automatically. 4. Availability of the main electrical source 4.1 In vessels for unrestricted service and provided with periodically unattended machinery space the main source of electrical power shall be supplied as follows: 2. Class Notation K On fishing vessels with Class Notation K and with electrical main source backed up by a battery, the emergency consumers may be supplied by this system. The capacity of the battery shall be capable of serving the main and emergency

consumers for the required time. 3. Consumers The emergency source of electrical power shall be capable, having regard to starting current and transitory nature of certain loads, of serving simultaneously the following consumers: 3.1 The VHF radio station and if applicable: – MF radio – ship earth station – MF/HF radio 4.11 Where the electrical power can normally be supplied by one generator, there shall be provided suitable load shedding arrangements to ensure the integrity of supplies to services required for propulsion and steering. To cover the case of loss of the generator in operation, there shall be adequate provisions for automatic starting and connecting to the main switchboard of a stand-by generator of sufficient capacity to permit propulsion and steering and with automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries including, where necessary, sequential operations. 3.2 Internal communication equipment, fire detecting systems and signals which may be required

in an emergency. Means may be approved in the wheelhouse for remote (manual) starting and connection of the stand-by generator to the main switchboard as well as means of repeated remote starting of essential auxiliaries. 4.12 If the electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generating set simultaneously, there shall, be provisions, e.g by load shedding, to ensure that in case of loss of one of these generating sets, the remaining ones are kept in operation without overload to permit propulsion and steering. 4.2 Where required to be duplicated, other auxiliary machinery essential to propulsion shall be fitted with automatic change-over devices allowing transfer to a stand-by machine. An alarm shall be given on automatic change-over. Stand-by circuits are to be provided to enable sets of the same type to operate alternatively. 3.3 The navigation lights if solely electrical. 3.4 The following emergency lights: a) of lifeboat/liferaft launching stations and over the

side of the vessel b) in all alleyways, stairways and exits c) in spaces containing machinery or the emergency source of power d) in control stations and wheelhouse e) in fish handling and fish processing spaces 3.5 any. The operation of the emergency fire pump, if 4. Type of source The emergency source of electrical power may be either a generator or an accumulator battery. 4.1 Where the emergency source of electrical power is a generator, it shall be provided with an independent fuel supply and with an automatic starting and switch-over system. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11c D Power Supply Installations Unless a second independent means of starting the emergency generator is provided, the single source of stored energy shall be protected to preclude its complete depletion by the automatic starting system. 4.2 Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery it shall be capable of carrying the emergency load

without recharging whilst maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the discharge period within plus or minus 12 % of its nominal voltage. In the event of failure of the main power supply this accumulator battery shall be automatically connected to the emergency switchboard and shall immediately supply at least those services specified in 3.1 to 34 The emergency switchboard shall be provided with an auxiliary switch allowing the battery to be connected manually in case of failure of the automatic connection system. 4.3 An indication of inadmissible battery discharge (emergency source of electrical power) shall be provided at the main switchboard or in the machinery control room. Chapter 8 Page 11c–3 5. The emergency source of electrical power and automatic starting equipment shall be so constructed and arranged as to enable adequate testing to be carried out by the crew while the vessel is in operating condition. 6. The emergency source of electrical power may be used for

starting up the main propulsion plant from the dead ship condition provided that its capacity is sufficient to supply the emergency services at the same time. 7. Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation under all circumstances, the emergency generator may be used exceptionally and for short periods to supply non-emergency circuits. D. Operation of Emergency Generator in Port The emergency generator may be used during lay time in the harbour for the main power supply considering the requirements of Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 3, D. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11d A Installation Protection and Power Distribution Chapter 8 Page 11d–1 Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution A. General 3. Switchgear 1. Generator protection 3.1 General 1.1 Generators shall be protected against short circuits and overloads. 1.2 Generators of

less than 50 kVA not arranged for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. All generators of 50 kVA or above are to be protected by a circuit breaker providing long-time overcurrent protection not exceeding 15 % above either full-load rating on continuous-rated machines or the overload rating of special-rated machines. The shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the tripping of the vessel service generator circuit breaker. 1.3 Alternating-current generator circuit breakers are to be provided with short-time delay short-circuit trips. The time delay should be up to about 500 milliseconds 1.4 Direct-current generator circuit breakers are to be provided with short-circuit trips set below the maximum generator short-circuit current with a time delay up to about 200 milliseconds. This trip is to be set at the lowest value of current which will coordinate with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers supplied by the generator. 1.5 Selective tripping is to be provided between

generator and feeder protective devices to ensure the proper coordination indicated in 1.3 and 14 In circuits supplying essential services, selective tripping is also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit protective devices and each protective device associated with essential services is to have an interrupting rating not less than the maximum short-circuit current possible at the point of installation. 1.6 Direct-current generators arranged for parallel operation are to be provided with reverse-current circuit breaker trips, see C.2 1.7 Generator protection devices are subject to mandatory type approvals. 2. Reverse-power protection Alternating-current generators arranged for parallel operation are to be provided with reverse-power relay. 3.11 Each non-earthed conductor shall be switched and protected against short circuit and overload. 3.12 When tripped due to overcurrent, generator circuit breakers have to be ready for immediate reconnection. The use of thermal

bi-metallic release for generators used to supply essential consumers is not permitted. 3.13 Generator circuit breakers shall be provided with a reclosing inhibitor which prevents automatic reclosure after tripping due to a short circuit. 3.2 Single operation The following devices are to be provided: – A three pole circuit breaker with time-delayed overcurrent trip and short-time delayed short circuit trip. For alternators with output ratings of less than 50 kVA fuses and on-load switches are also permitted. – Any alternator contactors are to have tripping time (up to about 500 ms) and are to be designed to carry at least twice the rated alternator current. 3.3 Parallel operation The following devices are to be provided: – a three-pole circuit breaker with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time delay short circuit trip, and – short-time-delay undervoltage protection and, with an output per unit of 50 kVA and over, delayed reverse power tripping 4. Sychronizing

equipment – If an automatic synchronizer is fitted, provision shall also be made for manual synchronization, and – protection against parallel connection in opposite phase, e.g a synchronizer interlock for generators with an output per unit of 50 kVA and above has to be provided. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11d–2 B. Section 11d G Installation Protection and Power Distribution Emergency Three-Phase Generators Emergency generators supply the emergency switchboards and the connected emergency consumers. 1. Protective equipment and switchgear Generator protection shall consist of at least: – short circuit protection – overload protection – under voltage protection However it is permissible for the overload protection not to disconnect the generator automatically but instead to trigger an optical and acoustical warning signal at the emergency switchboard and at the main switchboard. 2. 2. Overcurrent protection may be dispensed with in

transformers with a rated current of less than 2 A on the secondary side. E. Storage batteries are to be provided with overload and short circuit protection nearby where they are installed. Exceptions are made for batteries for preheating and starting of internal combustion engines, but their cabling shall be made short circuit proof. F. C. Direct Current Generators 1. Single operation The following devices are to be provided: 2. A power circuit breaker operating simultaneously on all non-earthed poles, with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, or a fuse in each non-earthed pole and a quick-break on-load switch of sufficient make/break capacity for the simultaneous disconnection of all non-earthed poles. For generators with an output of 50 kVA and above circuit breakers are to be provided in every case. Parallel operation The following devices are to be provided: – – D. Power Electronics 1. Power electronics facilities are to be protected

against overload and short circuit. 2. Inverters intended for supply of emergency consumers from the emergency battery shall be designed for continuous operation. G. – Storage Batteries Overload shedding If the emergency generator is overloaded, consumers temporarily supplied from the emergency switchboard, which are not emergency consumers, shall be automatically disconnected so as to safeguard the supply to the emergency circuits. – I - Part 1 GL 2007 A power circuit breaker with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, a reverse current trip and short-time-delay undervoltage protection. Polarity-reversing facilities. Transformers 1. Transformers shall be protected against short circuits on the primary side and against overloads on the secondary side. Shore Connection 1. The shore connection box shall be linked to the power supply system by permanently laid cables. 2. A device for connection of a protective conductor or a potential equalizer

has to provided, if required. 3. Switching-on of the shore supply shall only be possible if the switches of the main generators have been shut-off. Short-term parallel operation of the vessels mains and the shore mains for load transfer is permissible. 4. The shore connection shall be switchable and it shall be protected against short circuit and overload. The shore connection box shall be provided at least with short circuit protection. 5. A voltage indicator shall be provided in the main switchboard. 6. Facilities shall be provided to compare the polarity (in the case of direct current) and the phase sequence (in the case of three-phase alternating current) of the shore connection with those of the vessels mains. 7. The following details shall be indicated on a plate fitted to the shore connection box: – voltage system – rated voltage – frequency, in case of AC Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11d I Installation Protection and Power Distribution

Chapter 8 Page 11d–3 H. Consumer Protective Equipment 1.2 1. General 1.21 All final supply circuits shall have all-pole insulation. The return conductors are to be connected in the associated distribution switchboard to an insulated busbar, which is connected to the hull. 1.1 Protective equipment shall be so selected and co-ordinated with the generator protection that in the event of a short circuit the selectivity is safeguarded. If necessary the evidence is to be proved. Supply systems with hull return 1.22 The connections to the hull shall have at least the same cross-section as the supply cable. 1.2 Every non-earthed conductor in a distribution circuit shall be protected against overload and short circuit. Bare wires shall not be used. Casings or their mounting bolts shall not be used as return conductors or to make their connection. 1.3 Where the three phase system is isolated from the hull the overcurrent protection can be realised in only 2 conductors, if the

disconnection of all phases is safeguarded. 1.3 Up to 3 distribution switchboards may be supplied by a common supply cable. 2. Final supply circuits 2.1 Circuit breakers and motor protection switches For a final circuit supplying one consumer with its own overload protection, it is permissible to provide short-circuit protection only at the input point. In this case, fuses two ratings higher than those permissible for rated operation of the consumer may be used for continuous duty. In the case of short-time and intermittent operation, the rated current of the fuses shall not be greater than 160 % of the rated current of the consumer. The associated switches are to be selected in accordance with the fuse current ratings. 2.2 Where circuit breakers are used, the shortcircuit cutout may be adjusted to a maximum of 15 times the rated current of the consumer, though not higher than the anticipated minimum value of the initial short-circuit alternating current in the circuit concerned.

For steering gear equipment circuits, see Section 11g, A 2.3 Circuit breakers and motor protection switches with insufficient switching capacity shall be fitted with back-up fuses specified by the manufacturer. Automatic circuit breakers without a selectively graded breaking delay may not be connected in series in a single line. 2.4 Final supply circuits for lighting shall not be fused above 16 A. Regarding the number of lighting fixtures connected to a circuit see I.4 I. Power Distribution 1. Electrical supply systems 1.1 Regarding permissible supply systems see Section 11a, G. 2. Essential supply cables 2.1 Essential systems shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard, the emergency switchboard or the transitional emergency power supply, as the Rules require. 2.2 Essential consumers performing the same function, e.g main and standby lubricating oil pumps, are to be supplied by separate cables direct from the main switchboard or from two independent subdistribution

panels. 3. Emergency supply cables 3.1 The emergency switchboard is to be supplied in normal operation from the main switchboard by an inter-connector feeder which is to be protected at the main switchboard against overload and short circuit. The arrangement at the emergency switchboard shall be such that the inter-connector feeder is disconnected automatically at the emergency switchboard upon failure of the main power supply and is to provide for automatic connection of the emergency supply in the event of such failure. 3.2 When the system is arranged for feedback operation, the inter-connector feeder shall also be protected at the emergency switchboard at least against short circuit. 4. Supply to lighting installations 4.1 Main lighting installations are to be supplied from the main switchboard, emergency lighting from the emergency switchboard. 4.2 Final sub-circuits for lighting shall not be fitted with fuses rated higher than 16 A. The number of lighting points (lamps)

connected to one sub-circuit shall not exceed: – 10 lamps for voltages up to 55 V – 14 lamps for voltages over 55 V – 24 lamps for voltages over 125 V Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11d–4 Section 11d I Installation Protection and Power Distribution 4.3 In the important rooms listed below, the lighting has to be supplied by at least two different circuits: – main engine rooms and other important service spaces and control stations – fish handling and processing deck – passageways and stairways leading to the boat deck 4.4 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall be connected to separate circuits. When calculating the permissible connected load, one socket is equivalent to two lighting points. 5. Navigation and signalling lights 5.1 Navigation and signal lights panels shall be supplied from the main- and emergency electrical power source. 5.2 The masthead, the side and stern lights are each to be supplied by separate lines, each line being

protected by a fuse or automatic circuit breaker. 5.3 The navigation lights panel is to be provided with a device for each masthead, side and stern light which indicates or gives a warning if the corresponding light fails. 6. Control-, monitoring- and vessels safety systems The supply of control-, monitoring- and vessels safety systems shall comply with the following requirements (see additionally Section 11h): 6.1 These systems shall be supplied by their own circuits. Provision shall be made for the selective disconnection of the separate circuits in case of a short circuit. I - Part 1 GL 2007 6.2 A common distribution network with back-up batteries may be used to supply systems which are required to remain operative even if the main source of electrical power fails. Such a network shall have one of two supply units comprising either: 6.21 a power supply unit with a capacity sufficient for all the connected consumers together with a charger which, acting in buffer operation with

the back-up battery, is capable of supplying continuously all the connected consumers and maintain the battery in the charged condition, or 6.22 two chargers, which meet the conditions stated in 6.21 6.3 With regard to residual ripple, the supply facilities specified in 6.21 and 622 shall be designed to ensure trouble-free operation of the connected systems even when the battery is temporarily disconnected. 6.4 One of the power supply units or chargers shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard. 6.5 Failure of the power supply units and chargers shall be signalled visually and audibly. 6.6 Battery chargers with a charging capacity of P ≥ 2 kW shall be tested at the makers works in the presence of a GL Surveyor. 7. Emergency shut down Oil burner equipment, fuel pumps, boiler fans, separators, machinery space ventilators shall be provided with an individual emergency switch located at a central position outside the machinery space unless other means are available for

rapidly interrupting the fuel and air supply outside the room in which the equipment is installed. The consumers may be arranged in groups, provided that redundant consumers are allocated to at least two electrically independent groups. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11e B Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8 Page 11e–1 Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies A. General 1. These Rules apply to low-voltage switchgear with operating voltages up to 1000V AC or 1500V DC. 2. Electrical installations are to be protected against damage due to overload and short circuit. 3. The thermal- and electro-dynamic stresses due to overcurrents shall not cause damage to parts of the installation during the response time of protective devices or during the total operating time of switches. 4. Overcurrent protective devices are to be selected on the basis of following criteria: – overload current – short circuit – reclosing capability 5. Regarding design, construction

and testing of low-voltage switchgear assemblies attention is drawn to IEC Publication 60092-302. 6. For further notes see Section 11d. B. Construction 1. General 1.1 All devices, instruments and operating devices shall be permanently identified by name plates. Wherever possible, clear text shall be used. Fuse current ratings are to be stated The setpoints of adjustable protective devices are to be marked The rated operating parameters of all measuring instruments shall be marked in red either on the scales or on plates fixed nearby. 1.5 All components including their connections have to be accessible for the purposes of maintenance, repair and replacement. 1.6 Large doors in switchboards shall be fitted with arresting devices. 1.7 Electrical components mounted in the doors of switchboards, e.g switchgear, measuring devices and fuses for voltages over 50 V, shall be safeguarded against accidental contact. Such doors are to be earthed. 1.8 Where fuses are fitted above switchgear

or bare connecting wires or leads, measures are to be taken to ensure that falling parts (e.g fuse cartridges) cannot come into contact with live components. 1.9 Operating devices and fuses shall be safely accessible. 1.10 For circuit breakers and load-switches, the minimum distances above the arc chutes specified by the manufacturers are to be maintained. 1.11 Knife-type fuses for supply-circuits are only permitted if they can be safely withdrawn and inserted. 2. Main switchboards 2.1 Observation of the measuring and indicating devices and operation of the switchgear shall be possible from the front side of the switchboard with the doors closed. 2.2 Main switchboards are to be designed with regard to the connection of generators and outgoing circuits in such a way that, as far as possible, important equipment remains operative in the event of damage to one section of the switchboard. 1.2 All screwed joints and connections shall be secured against self-acting loosening. 2.3

Measuring and monitoring devices for generators 1.3 All conductors shall be secured jig-proof and are to be kept away from sharp edges. Conductors leading to equipment mounted in doors are to be laid tension-free. 2.31 Where circuit breakers are used, the following is required: – 1 green indicator lamp (power circuit breaker connected) 1.4 Main and emergency switchboards shall be fitted with insulation hand rails or handles. – 1 red indicator lamp (power circuit breaker tripped) Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11e–2 Section 11e D Switchgear Assemblies 2.32 The following is required for each threephase alternator: – 1 voltmeter, which can, if necessary, be switched to the other alternators – 1 ammeter, switchable to all phases – 1 active power meter for alternators of 50 kVA and over – 1 frequency meter, which can, if necessary, be switched to the other alternators 2.33 The following is required for each direct current generator: – 1

voltmeter – 1 ammeter 2.4 Switchgear and fuses for equipment 2.41 Each supply line run from the main switchboard shall be provided with a circuit breaker with overcurrent and short-circuit protection, or with a fuse for each non-earthed conductor and an all-pole switch, or with a contactor with control switch. Where fuses and switches are used, the sequence bus-bar-fuseswitch is to be used. 2.42 For steering gear, see also Section 11g, A. 2.5 Measuring instruments The main switchboard and the main distribution panel have to be fitted with ammeters for major consumers, unless these are already mounted on the consumers themselves. It is permissible for one ammeter to be switched-over to a number of circuits. 3. Emergency switchboard I - Part 1 GL 2007 The protective devices are to be co-ordinated with each other in such a way that, in event of a fault, the faulty circuit is disconnected and the power supply to essential consumers is maintained. 1.2 Switchgear has to conform

to IEC publications, or to another standard approved by GL. 2. Circuit breakers Circuit breakers are to be capable of opening circuits carrying maximum rated current at rated potential and are to be capable of interrupting short circuits within their rating. Circuit breakers are to be trip free and thermal units are to be calibrated for an ambient temperature in accordance with Section 11a, E. 3. Load switches 3.1 The current rating of load switches shall be at least equal to that of the fuse protecting the circuit and they shall have a making/breaking capacity in accordance with AC-22 A or DC-22 A (IEC publication 60947-3). 3.2 Where fuses and switches are employed, the sequence bus bar-fuse-switch is to be used generally. 4. Fuses 4.1 Fuse links shall have an enclosed fusion space. They shall be made of ceramic or other material recognized by GL as equivalent. 4.2 Fuses may be used for overload protection only up to a rating of 315 A. Exceptions to this Rule are subject to

approval by GL. The requirements for main switchboards apply in analogous to emergency switchboards. 4. Distribution panels Distribution panels are to be equipped with the necessary devices for the protection of the connected circuits and for the supply of consumers (see Section 11d). 5. Motor starters The starting of motors in a greater number should not take place simultaneously, if that is necessary to avoid a too great voltage drop or too high current flow. C. Selection of Switchgear 1. General 1.1 All electrical equipment has to be protected against damage due to overloads and short circuits. D. Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment 1. General Protective devices shall be co-ordinated with each other in such a way that, in the event of a fault, the defective circuit is disconnected and the power supply to essential equipment is maintained. 2. Short-circuit protection equipment 2.1 The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of a switching device shall not be

less than the maximum current to be broken in the event of a short circuit at the place where the protective device is fitted. 2.2 The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm of a circuit breaker shall not be less than the maximum instantaneous asymmetric short-circuit current at the place where it is fitted. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11e E Switchgear Assemblies 2.3 The peak short circuit strength of a switching unit and its components shall correspond to the maximum short-circuit current which can arise at the place where it is fitted. 2.4 Circuit breakers whose making/breaking capacities are less than the anticipated maximum short-circuit currents are to be protected by back-up fuses of sufficient breaking capacity. 3. Selective arrangement The short-circuit protection of essential equipment has to be selective and shall ensure that only the switching device nearest to the fault initiates disconnection of the defective circuit. For this purpose:

– the tripping time of protective devices connected in series has to be carefully coordinated – the switching devices being capable of carrying the short-circuit current during the total break time of the device plus the time lag required for selectivity – Exceptions may be permitted in the case of circuits feeding redundant plants or nonessential equipment if selectivity relative to the generator switch is maintained. Chapter 8 Page 11e–3 6. 6.1 Motors with a power rating of more than 1 kW shall be individually protected against overloads and short-circuit. For steering gear motors see Section 11g, A. The protective devices shall be compatible with the mode of operation of the motors and have to provide reliable protection against thermal overload. 6.2 The switchgear of motors, whose simultaneous restarting on restoration of the supply voltage might endanger operation, shall be provided with undervoltage protection which causes disconnection of the circuit if the

voltage drops or fails and which prevents automatic reconnection. The undervoltage protection shall operate reliably in the event of the voltage dropping to between 70 % and 35 % of the rated voltage. 6.3 Where necessary, the start-up of motors which are required to restart automatically following restoration of the voltage is to be staggered in such a way that the starting currents do not overload the vessels mains. 7. 4. Overcurrent protection devices The current-time characteristics of overcurrent protection devices shall be compatible with the system components to be protected, and with the requirements of selectivity. 5. Allocation of short-circuit and overcurrent protection devices 5.1 Short circuit protection is required for every non-earthed conductor. 5.2 Overcurrent protection is required for at least one conductor in insulated direct current and singlephase alternating current circuits. Overcurrent protection is required for at least two phases in insulated,

load-balanced three-phase circuits. 5.3 Overcurrent protection is required for each non-earthed conductor in earthed systems. The continuity of earthed conductors shall not be interrupted by short-circuit or overcurrent protection devices, except in the case of multipole disconnection devices which simultaneously interrupt all the conductors, whether earthed or not. 5.4 Determined for the overcurrent protection of the entire circuit (switchgear, switchboard wiring, supply cables and equipment) according to regulations is the rated current In of the connected equipment or in the case of grouped supply cables the evaluated total rated current. Motor protection Measuring and signalling circuits Indicator lamps with working voltages exceeding 24 V shall be fused separately from control circuit if they are not connected via short-circuit-proof transformers. 8. Monitoring of insulation resistance Each non-earthed primary or secondary system serving power, heating or lighting

installations shall be fitted with an equipment which monitors the insulation resistance relative to the vessels hull and gives a visual and audible alarm if the insulation resistance value is abnormally low, see also Section 11k, D.310 Insulation monitoring devices may be dispensed with in the case of secondary systems such as control circuits. The audible alarm signal may be dispensed with on fishing vessels with Class Notation K. E. Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring 1. Bus bars 1.1 Materials Bus bars must be made of copper or copper-sheathed aluminium. 1.2 Temperature The temperature rise of bus bars may not exceed 45 K under the most unfavourable conditions and shall not have any harmful effect on adjacent components. Source: http://www.doksinet Section 11e F Chapter 8 Page 11e–4 1.3 Switchgear Assemblies Bus bar carriers I - Part 1 GL 2007 2. Bus bars are to be mounted and insulated in such a way that they withstand the stresses caused by short circuit currents and

standing alternating voltages in accordance with G.233 Switchboard wiring 2.1 Instrument and control wiring is to be of the stranded type and is to have heat resisting and flame retarding insulation. The minimum clearances specified in Table 11e.1 shall be maintained between bus bars and other voltage carrying or earthed components. 2.2 The nominal cross-section of the conductors shall be sufficient for the rated current of the connected facility and are selected in accordance with Table 11e.2 Table 11e.1 Clearance and creepage distances Rated service voltage Minimum clearance Minimum creepage distance [V] (AC/DC) [mm] [mm] 10 15 20 25 12 20 25 35 ≤ > 125 ≤ > 250 ≤ > 125 250 690 690 F. Measuring Instruments Characteristics 1. Measuring instruments have to be insensitive to vibrations or mounted so as to be protected from their effects. Instruments used for the primary machines shall not have an error greater than ± 1,5 % in relation to full scale value.

Table 11e.2 Current rating of wires in switchgear Nominal cross-section of conductor - total cross-section in the case of conductors connected in parallel Bunched, exposed or in conduits One power circuit Several power circuits together with its together associated measuring and control wires Wires run singly, at least one conductor diameter apart Circuits of all kinds [mm2] Current [A] Current [A] Current [A] 1 1,5 2,5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 9 12 16 20 26 36 48 66 82 104 130 157 186 12 15 20 27 35 48 65 86 107 133 164 198 231 15 19 25 34 42 58 78 102 125 157 194 231 272 Note The current ratings shown apply to conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T on the conductor of 70°C and an ambient temperature of 45°C. For conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T deviating from 70°C, the current rating is to be determined by applying the correction factor F. T 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C 75 °C 80 °C 85 °C F 0,77 0,89 1,00

1,10 1,18 1,26 Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11e G Switchgear Assemblies 2. The upper limit of the graduation of each voltmeter shall not be less than 120 % of the normal voltage of the circuit. The graduation must include a red mark corresponding to the normal voltage. 3. The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter or wattmeter shall not be less than 130 % of the normal value in the circuit where it is inserted. The graduation must be provided with a red mark corresponding to the normal value at full load. The ammeter for direct current generators and the wattmeters of alternators able to work in parallel must be capable of showing the return current or the return power respectively. G. Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear 1. Type-approvals The following devices and components are subject to mandatory type approval: Chapter 8 Page 11e–5 2.33 High-voltage test The test voltage specified in Tables 11e.3 and 11e4 is to be applied between

the conductors, and between the conductors and the switchboard frame. The duration of the test is one minute in each case. Measuring instruments and other auxiliary apparatus may be disconnected during test – Test voltage for main circuits For main circuits the test has to be carried out with the values according to Table 11e.3 – Test voltage for auxiliary circuits For auxiliary circuits the test has to be carried out with the values according to Table 11e.4 – Test voltage for type-approved switchgear For the verification of dielectric property of type approved switchgear the test voltage for routine tests may be reduced to 85% of the values according to Table 11e.3 and 11e4 2.34 Insulation resistance measurement – circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect switches and fuses for direct connection to the main busbars and to non-fused, multi-terminal busbars of main-, emergency- and control switchboards The voltage test is to be followed by measurement of the

resistance of insulation. The insulation resistance measurement is to be performed at a DC voltage of at least 500 V. – generator protection devices Table 11e.3 Test voltage for main circuits – standardized switchgear in series manufacture 2. Tests in manufacturers works 2.1 All switchboards are to be tested in the manufacturers works. 2.2 The following are subject to testing in the presence of a GL Surveyor: – main switchboards – emergency switchboards – switchboards for electrical propulsion plants GL reserve the right to stipulate a factory test for other switchboards. 2.3 Scope of tests 2.31 Visual inspection Devices and components shall be checked in compliance with the approved drawings. The components and materials used shall conform to the Rules. 2.32 Function test During the tests the function shall be demonstrated on the equipment under test in accordance with the approved drawings, as far as is feasible. Rated insulation voltage Ui DC and AC

[V] Ui ≤ Test voltage (AC) (rms) [V] 60 1000 60 < Ui ≤ 300 300 < Ui ≤ 690 2000 690 < Ui ≤ 800 800 < Ui ≤ 1000 3000 1000 < Ui ≤ 1500 1 3500 2500 3500 1 Only for DC voltage Table 11e.4 Test voltage for auxiliary circuits Rated insulation voltage Ui DC and AC Test voltage (AC) (rms) [V] [V] Ui ≤ 12 250 12 < Ui ≤ 60 500 Ui > 60 2 Ui + 1000, but at least 1500 Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11f C Power Electronics Chapter 8 Page 11f–1 Section 11f Power Electronics – For power electronics in electrical propulsion plants the GL Rules Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations apply. feed all essential equipment which may be in simultaneous operation with the propulsion plant at full power – start the biggest consumer without exceeding the maximum permissible voltage and frequency variations B. To maintain the required availability, bypass switching may be resorted

to. A. General Construction 1. The rules set out in Section 11e are to be observed, wherever applicable. 2. Each power-electronics system shall be provided with separate means for disconnection from the mains. In the case of consumers up to a nominal current of 315 A the combination fuse-contactor may be used. In all other cases a circuit breaker shall be provided on the mains side 3. Equipment shall be readily accessible for purposes of measurement and repair. Devices such as simulator circuits, test sockets, indicating lights, etc. are to be provided for functional supervision and fault location. 4. Control- and alarm electronics shall be galvanically separated from power circuits. 5. External pulse cables are to be laid twisted in pairs and screened, and kept as short as possible. C. Rating and Design 1. Mains reactions of power electronics facilities shall be taken into consideration in the planning of the overall installation, see Section 11a, F. and J 2. Rectifier systems

have to guarantee secure operation even under the maximum permissible voltage and frequency fluctuations, see Section 11a, F. In the event of unacceptably large frequency and/or voltage variations in the supply voltage, the system has to shut-off or remain in a safe operating condition. 3. For the supply of mains, number and rating of electronic facilities is to be so scaled that in the event of failure of any one power-electronics facility the remainder of the installation is sufficient to: 4. The semiconductor rectifiers and the associated fuses shall be so selected that their load current is at least 10 % less than the limit current determined in accordance with the coolant temperature, the load and the mode of operation. 5. The permissible periodic peak blocking voltage of the individual component shall be greater by a factor of at least 1,8 than the peak value of the undistorted supply voltage. This value may be reduced for static converter circuits with separate power supplies.

6. Electrical charges in power electronic modules shall drop to a voltage of less than 50 V in a period of less than 5 s after disconnection from the mains supply. Should longer periods be required for discharge, a warning label is to be affixed to the appliance. 7. If the replacement of plug-in printed circuit boards while the unit is in operation can cause the destruction of components or the uncontrolled behaviour of drives, a caution label shall be notifying to this effect. 8. The absence of external control signals, e.g due to a circuit break, shall not cause a dangerous situation. 9. Control-circuit supplies are to be safeguarded against unintended disconnection, if this could endanger or damage the plant. 10. It is necessary to ensure that, as far as possible, faults do not cause damage in the rest of the system, or in other static converters. 10.1 Special attention shall be paid to the following points: – mutual interference of static converters connected to the same busbar

system Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11f–2 – Section 11f G Power Electronics calculation of commutating impedances reacting to voltage distortion and reacting to other consumers I - Part 1 GL 2007 F. Protection Equipment 1. Power electronic equipment shall be protected against exceeding of their current and voltage limits. For protective devices, it must be ensured that upon actuating – the selection of the ratio between the subtransient reactance of the system and the commutating reactance of the static converter – consideration of reactions from rectifier installations on the commutation of DC machines – the output will be reduced or defective part systems will be selectively disconnected – consideration of voltage drops in the fishing vessels mains due to inverter operation – drives will be stopped under control – the energy stored in components and in the load circuit cannot have a damaging effect, when switching off. –

influence by harmonics and high-frequency interference – influence on the vessels mains by energy feeding back 10.2 Where filter circuits and capacitors are used for reactive current compensation, attention is to be paid to the following: – reaction on the mean and peak value of the system voltage in case of frequency fluctuations – inadmissible effects on the voltage regulation of generators D. Cooling 1. Natural cooling is preferred. 2. The safety in operation shall be proved for liquid cooling and forced cooling. 3. An impairment of cooling shall not result in unacceptable overtemperatures, an overtemperature alarm shall be provided. E. 2. In equipment with a current rating of more than 100 A, each bridge arm or parallel-connected valve shall have a special semiconductor fuse. Exceptions are quenching circuits in self-regulating systems and converters operated with a load-independent current. For all other equipment, fuses on the input/output side may also be

used. 3. Special semiconductor fuses shall be monitored. After tripping the equipment has to be switched off, if this is necessary for the prevention of damage. Activating of a safety device shall trigger an alarm. 4. Equipment without fuses is permissible if a short circuit will not lead to the destruction of the semiconductor components. G. Tests 1. General Power electronics assemblies shall be individually tested at the makers works. A Works Test Report shall be rendered on the tests carried out. Essential equipment from 50 kW/kVA upwards shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. Control and Monitoring 1. Control, adjustment and monitoring shall ensure that the permissible operating values of the facilities are not exceeded. 2. The power supply to all control circuits shall be monitored for voltage failure. 3. For the monitoring of individual modules and assemblies of essential equipment, components shall be provided which, in the event of a fault, facilitate its

recognition. 4. The control shall be so engineered that the installation is protected from damage during the switching-on and switching-off sequence, dedication alterations and faulty operation. 2. Extent of routine tests 2.1 Voltage test Prior to the start of the functional tests a high-voltage test shall be carried out. The RMS value of the alternating test voltage is: U = 2 Un + 1000 V, duration 1 minute but at least 2000 V, where Un is the maximum nominal voltage between any two points on the power electronics device. For this purpose, switchgear in power circuits shall be bridged, and the input and output terminals of the power electronics devices and the electrodes of the rectifiers shall be electrically connected with each other. The test voltage shall be applied between the input/output terminals or between the electrodes and: Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11f G Power Electronics Chapter 8 Page 11f–3 – the cabinet 2.3 – the mains

connection side, if the power electronics device is electrically isolated from the mains The function shall be demonstrated as far as possible. 2.2 Test of insulation resistance Following the voltage test, the insulation resistance shall be measured at the same connections as for the voltage test. The measurement shall be performed at a voltage of at least 500 V DC. 2.4 Function test Testing of protection and monitoring devices The response thresholds and the coordinated operation of the protective and monitoring devices shall be demonstrated. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11g A Power Equipment Chapter 8 Page 11g–1 Section 11g Power Equipment A. Steering Gear 3. 1. General 3.1 If the steering gear is hydraulically operated, the rated output of the steering gear motors is to be determined at the maximum load of the pump against the maximum pressure produced by the steering gear (adjusting of safety valves),

under consideration of the efficiency of the pump. 1.1 Two, with regard to their construction as far as possible independent, steering gear systems are required as follows: Rating of electrical machines – 1 main and 1 auxiliary steering gear or – 1 main steering gear with two or more identical power units or 3.2 The following requirements apply to the modes of operation: – 2 main steering gear systems 3.21 mand: 1.2 The electrical systems of the main and auxiliary steering gear shall be so arranged that as far as reasonable and practicable a failure in one of them will not render the other one inoperative. This also applies when the main steering gear comprises two or more identical power units and therefore an auxiliary steering gear need not be fitted. 1.3 For increased vibration loads in the steering gear compartment see Section 11a, E.2 2. Power supply 2.1 The power supply to steering gears is also required to comply with the provisions of Section 11d, I. 2.2 For

every steering gear power unit a separate power supply circuit from the main switchboard is to be incorporated. However, one of these circuits may be supplied through the emergency switchboard, if provided and if the emergency generator capacity is adequate to supply the steering gear in addition to the emergency consumers for a period of at least 10 minutes. Steering gear with intermittent power de- – S6 – 25 % for converters and motors of electrohydraulic drives – S3 – 40 % for motors of electromechanical steering gears The ratio of pull-out torque to rated torque is to be at least 1,6 in all cases. 3.22 – 4. Steering gear with constant power demand: S1 – 100 % continuous service Switchgear Each steering gear motor must have its own separate switchgear. 5. Protective equipment 5.1 The circuits and motors of steering gears shall be protected against short circuit only. 2.3 After an electrical power failure, the steering gear power units shall restart

automatically when the power is restored. 5.2 Where fuses are provided, their current ratings are to be of two steps higher than the rated current of the motor or circuit control circuit; however, in the case of intermittent service motors, the fuse rating is not to exceed 160 % of the rated motor current. 2.4 The motors for the power units shall be capable of being started or stopped individually or together from the steering gear compartment and at the wheelhouse, by electrically and mechanically separate switches. 5.3 Protection against excess current, if provided, shall be for not less than twice the full load current of the motor or circuit so protected and shall be arranged to permit the passage of the appropriate starting currents. The supply for the remote start and for the remote control of the power units shall come from the starter box in the steering compartment to which the remote control belongs and shall be able to be de-energized from there. 6. Steering gear

control systems 6.1 Vessels with electrical operated steering gear controls shall have two independent steering gear Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11g–2 Section 11g D Power Equipment control systems. Separated cables and wires are to be provided for these control systems. 6.2 It must be possible to control the main and auxiliary steering gear from the wheelhouse. 6.3 For the steering control positions on the open deck, e.g bridge wings, there should be provision to isolate these control positions completely from the wheelhouse control circuits. 7. Alarms and indicators The following equipment is required for monitoring in the wheelhouse: 7.1 A green indicator light each indicating that the motors of the power units are in operation is to be provided. I - Part 1 GL 2007 B. Lateral Thrust Propellers 1. Power supply The power supply has to be run direct from the main switchboard. 2. Rating of electrical machines The equipment is to be designed in accordance

with the operating conditions of the vessel. Drives used only for lateral thrust shall be designed at least for short-term duty S2 – 30 minutes at all speeds. 3. Protective equipment The equipment is to be protected in such a way that in the event of an overload an optical and acoustical alarm is to be given in the wheelhouse. 4. Controls, monitors and indicators 7.2 A red indicator light indicating failure of the steering gear, e.g in the event of failure of the main power supply or remote steering control is to be provided. For lateral thrusters the following indicators are to be provided: – an indicator light showing that the system is activated 7.3 A yellow indicator light indicating overload of the electric motor and/or loss of anyone of the supply phases in case of a three phase system is to be provided. – a yellow indicator light signalling an overload – depending on the type of equipment, displays showing the power steps and the desired direction of motion of

the vessel 7.4 A system giving an audible warning of the occurrence of the faults mentioned in 7.2 and 73 in the wheelhouse is to be provided. The audible alarm is to be cancellable. The stopping of an audible alarm is not to prevent the alarming of a fault in the other steering gear drive units in operation. 8. Rudder angle indicator See Section 11h, C. 9. Tests 9.1 Electrical machinery, switchgear cabinets and control systems for steering gears are to be tested and certified at the manufacturer’s works in the presence of a GL Surveyor. 9.2 The works tests comprise: – examination for conformity with the drawings approved by GL – inspection of the components used, construction and wiring – functional testing – insulation measurements and voltage tests in accordance with requirements for switchboards, see Section 11e, G. C. Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main Propulsion System 1. Facilities shall be provided for the system control from the wheelhouse and

from the engine room. 2. The failure of any control system shall be signalled visually and audibly in the wheelhouse. D. Auxiliary Machinery and Systems 1. Fire pumps The power supply to the fire pump motors, with regard both to the assignment of power source and to routing of power lines, is to be so arranged that as far as possible a fire in any fire zone does not render all the fire pumps unserviceable. 2. Fans, fuel pumps, separators The power ventilation of accommodation spaces, service spaces, cargo spaces, control spaces and machinery spaces and fuel oil pumps and separators shall be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11g H Power Equipment position outside the spaces concerned. This position should not be cut off in the event of a fire in such spaces. E. Deck Machinery, Winches 1. General 1.1 Motors and switchgear located on deck shall be protected against temporary flooding (IP 56

enclosure), see also Section 11a, J. 1.2 Levers and handwheels for the control of winches and lifting equipment has to return automatically to the zero position when released. Exceptions may be allowed in the case of fishing net winches and special purpose drives. The control consoles are to be equipped with push buttons for emergency stops. 1.3 Brakes shall apply automatically if the electrical power supply fails. 2. Anchor windlasses, fishnet winches 2.1 Motors are to be rated for short-term operation of 30 minutes (S2 – 30 min) unless the type of service for which the vessel is intended requires more stringent demand. In addition, the motors for anchor windlasses shall be able to deliver twice the rated torque for 2 minutes without dangerous overheating. 2.2 At vessels with stern fishing system, compare Section 6, periodically overloads of the drives of the fishnet winches are to be considered and should be able to deliver 1,6 the rated torque for 2 minutes without overheating.

2.3 To prevent excessive overload of motors and, as far as possible, gears, electrical overload protection is to be provided in an appropriate manner. Chapter 8 Page 11g–3 F. Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters 1. Space heating 1.1 Only watertight heaters may be used in washrooms, bathrooms, other damp rooms and machinery spaces (IP 44 class enclosure). 1.2 Where heaters are installed inside the bulkhead lining, a tray made of incombustible material is to be fitted behind the heater to prevent the accumulation of heat behind the lining. 1.3 In the case of ceiling-mounted heaters, it is essential to ensure that the heat is radiated downwards. An insulation layer of incombustible material is to be fitted above the heater. The heating elements are to be protected against accidental touch. 2. Oil and water heaters Oil and water heaters are subject to the provisions of Section 9e. G. Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers 1. Plug and socket connections for

power circuits are to be fused. 2. The specified class of protection against touch and water shall be ensured for the entire appliance with the plug inserted and for the socket even when the plug is withdrawn. The socket is to be fitted in accordance with its specified position for use. H. Refrigeration Installations for Preservation of the Catch All refrigeration installations for preservation of the catch on fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC have to comply with Section 10. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11h B Control, Monitoring and Vessels Safety Systems Chapter 8 Page 11h–1 Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessels Safety Systems A. General 1. Systems Control, monitoring and alarm systems generally consist of electrical facilities and devices which are referred to in the following as "systems". The term includes the control, monitoring and measuring systems necessary to the operation of the

machinery and the safety of the vessel. 2. Programmable electronic circuits and computers Where programmable electronic circuits or computers are used Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 10 is to be observed. 2.1 Safety systems, alarm systems and control systems shall be made in general functionally and physically independent of each other. 2.2 Where it is appropriate to the application, systems shall as far as possible be self-monitoring. Failure of the supply has to be indicated. It shall be possible to check the operation of the indicator lights. B. Machinery Control and Monitoring Installation 1. Safety devices 1.1 The design of safety devices shall be as simple as possible and has to be reliable and inevitable in operation. Proven safety devices which are not depending on a power source are to be preferred 1.2 The suitability and function of safety devices shall be demonstrated in the given application. 1.3 Safety devices shall be designed so that potential

faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life, vessel or machinery. These faults and also the tripping of safety devices shall be signalled by an alarm. 1.4 For preference, safety devices shall be designed in conventional technology (hard wired). Alternative technical solutions shall be agreed with GL 1.5 The adjustment facilities for safety devices shall be designed so that the last setting can be detected. 1.6 Where auxiliary energy is needed for the function of safety devices, this has to be monitored and a failure has to be alarmed. 1.7 Security equipment like short circuit monitoring of generators as well as overspeed monitoring of diesel engines shall run independently from automatic power control system, to ensure that the equipment can continue operating manually in case of a breakdown. 1.8 Safety devices are subject to mandatory type approval. 2. Safety system 2.1 A safety system is to be provided so that serious

malfunctioning machinery or boiler operations, which present an immediate danger, shall initiate the automatic shutdown of that part of the plant and an alarm shall be given. Shutdown of the propulsion system shall not be automatically activated except in cases which could lead to serious damage, complete breakdowns, or explosion. 2.2 Where arrangements for overriding the shutdown of the main propelling machinery are fitted, these shall be such as to preclude inadvertent activation. Visual means shall be provided to show whether or not it has been activated. 2.3 Advance alarms shall be given before automatic shutdown. 2.4 The monitoring circuits of safety systems shall be electrically isolated from those of the alarm system (separate sensors) and have to be decoupled to prevent reciprocal effects in the event of faults. In exceptional cases and with special approval, safety systems may share monitoring circuits with the alarm system provided that indicators with a separate power supply

additional to those of the alarm system are mounted in the wheelhouse and in the engine room to signal the need for a shutdown (instead of automatic shutdown) or slow down. 2.5 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type approval. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11h–2 3. Section 11h C Control, Monitoring and Vessels Safety Systems Alarm systems 3.1 A machinery alarm system is required to give a visual and audible warning of any unacceptable deviations of the operating parameters requiring attention. The alarms shall be perceptible throughout the whole machinery space, on vessels equipped for operation with unattended machinery space also in the wheelhouse and living quarters of the engineers or the crew responsible for the machinery. In vessels with the Class Notation K an alarm system to be capable of sounding and indicating visually each separate alarm function in the wheelhouse only, may be permitted. 3.2 Indication is to be provided that the system is

operative. 3.3 Visual signals are to be individually displayed. The meaning of each signal has to be made clear by inscription or symbol. Where a fault is indicated, the visual indication is to remain visible until the fault has been eliminated. Means shall be provided to distinguish an alarm which has been acknowledged to one which has not been acknowledged, e.g steady/flashing signal, light/dark signal, etc. 3.4 Provision shall be made for acknowledging audible alarms. The acknowledgement of any alarm shall not inhibit another alarm. I - Part 1 GL 2007 C. Vessel Control Systems 1. Remote control of the main engine Where the remote control of the main engine from the wheelhouse is envisaged, the requirements according to Section 12 shall be observed. 2. Engine telegraph systems Two separate means of communication between the wheelhouse and the machinery space control platform shall be provided. One of the means shall be an engine room telegraph. Vessels with remote control

system from the bridge are to be equipped according to Section 12. 3. Indicators on the bridge and on bridge wings 3.1 All instruments and indicators important to the control of the vessel shall be legible at all times. 3.2 All indicators and illuminations for instruments shall be provided with dimmers either individually or in groups. 4. Rudder angle indicator The position of the rudder, if power operated, shall be indicated in the wheelhouse. The rudder angle indication for power operated steering gear is to be independent of the steering gear control system 5. Indicators for speed and direction of rotation 3.5 Alarm systems shall generally be designed on the closed-circuit principle or the monitored opencircuit principle, as appropriate. Indicators showing the speed and direction of rotation of the propeller shafts are to be installed in the wheelhouse. See also Section 9b, I and 12, E Short-term faults which are self-correcting without intervention are to be indicated by

memory signals. The audible alarm needs not go into the self-hold mode. 6. Variable pitch propellers indicators Where variable-pitch propellers are used, indicators are to be installed in the wheelhouse showing the pitch of the propeller blades and speed of the rotation of the propeller shafts. See also Section 9b, I and 12, E 3.6 Exceptions may be admitted for small installations confined to individual auxiliary machines or on fishing vessels with Class Notation K. 7. Voice communication and signalling systems 3.7 The alarm system is to be supplied by a network with battery back-up. 7.1 Important voice communication 3.8 The amount of the alarm points is to be determined in accordance with Section 9b, J. 7.11 The following voice communications are required: a) 3.9 For machinery alarm systems for vessels with periodically unattended machinery space reference is made to Section 12, D. Bridge-radio room (if any) Required is a two-way voice link between the bridge and the

operator’s position in the radio room. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 b) Section 11h D Control, Monitoring and Vessels Safety Systems Bridge-engine room Required is a two-way voice link between the bridge and the engine room from which the main propulsion plant can be controlled. 7.12 Communication links, if electrical, provided for in 7.11 a) and 711 b) are to be independent of the vessels mains, unless they are backed-up by battery. 7.2 Additional intercommunication system on vessels for unrestricted service A two-way intercommunication is to be provided between the bridge and the engineers accommodation rooms. This system may consist of portable or permanently installed equipment and shall be capable of operation even if the main power supply fails. 2.2 A sufficient number of alarm facilities is to be provided to ensure that all persons on board can be alerted without fail. Additional flashing lights may be used where necessary (with high ambient

noise). See also IMO Resolution A.830(19)/1995 2.3 The general emergency alarm shall be powered from the vessels main supply and the emergency source of electrical power. 2.4 A loudspeaker system may be accepted as alarm facility. 3. Vessels Safety Systems 1. Engineers alarms On vessels for unrestricted service an engineers alarm shall be provided to be operated from the engine control room or at the manoeuvring platform as appropriate and shall be clearly audible in the engineers’ accommodation. The system is to be supplied by the emergency source of electrical power. 2. General alarm 2.1 Vessels for unrestricted service are to be provided with an alarm system enabling the crew to be alerted or called to the boat stations in case of danger. It shall be possible to initiate the alarm from the wheelhouse. Fire extinguishing For the general design, construction and detection of Fire Extinguishing Systems, see Section 8. 4. D. Chapter 8 Page 11h–3 Fire detection system

Section 7 requires a fire detection system only for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m. According to Section 11a, electrical installations for such vessels are defined in Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations. Fishing vessels with Class Notation TORRE-EC and a length L ≥ 24 m have to meet the requirements of the Torremolinos Convention, Chapter V. 5. Fire detection and alarm systems for unattended machinery spaces 5.1 Unattended machinery spaces shall be provided with an approved automatic fire detection and alarm system. 5.2 with The design and arrangement are to comply Section 12, D. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11i C Lighting and Socket-Outlets Chapter 8 Page 11i–1 Section 11i Lighting and Socket-Outlets A. Construction and Extent 1. There is to be a lighting system supplied by the main source of electrical power and illuminating all parts of the vessel normally accessible to the crew and an emergency

lighting system supplied by the emergency source of electrical power, if any. 2. Lights in machinery spaces, other important service and control stations, fish handling and processing decks, passage ways and stairways leading to the boat deck are to be so arranged that the failure of any one branch circuit will not leave these spaces in darkness, see Section 11d, I.4 2.2 All lighting fixtures shall be so mounted that combustible parts are not ignited by the generated heat, and they themselves are not exposed to damage. The minimum distances indicated on the lighting fixtures shall be respected. Where no minimum distances are specified, the minimum distances in the direction of radiation indicated in Table 11i.1 shall be applied for lighting fixtures in accordance with IEC publication 60598-1 Luminaires, Part 1 - General Requirements and Tests. Table 11i.1 Minimum distances for the mounting of lighting fixtures Rated power 3. Lights on open decks which are to be in use while the

vessel is under way are to be located in such a way that they do not interfere with navigation. If necessary, they are to be fitted with shields. B. Lighting Installations 1. Design and construction of the lighting installation 1.1 A sufficient number of lighting fixtures shall be provided to achieve a good level of illumination. 1.2 The arrangement of the main- and emergency lighting systems (sources of electrical power, associated transformer) shall be such that a fire or other incident does not cause the failure of both systems. 1.3 Following a failure of the main power supply, the emergency lighting system shall cut in automatically. Local switches may be provided only where the ability to switch off the emergency lighting is required. 2. Mounting of lighting fixtures 2.1 Within arms reach of showers and bathtubs up to 1,2 m from the shower head and/or 0,6 m from the tubrim vertical surface and up to a height of 2,25 m, lighting fixtures shall only be installed if their

degree of protection is at least IP 55. Switches shall not be installed within arms reach. [W] Minimum distance [m] up to and incl. 100 over 100 up to and incl. 300 over 300 up to and incl. 500 0,5 0,8 1,0 C. Socket-Outlets 1. General 1.1 The supply for socket-outlets in the accommodation, day rooms and service rooms (250 V) are to be run from lighting distribution panels. The maximum fuse rating for a circuit is 16 A 1.2 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall be connected to separate circuits. When calculating the permissible connected load, one socket is equivalent to two lighting points. 1.3 For the sockets of distribution systems with different voltage and/or frequencies, noninterchangeable plugs and socket outlets shall be used. 1.4 Plug-in connections shall not be installed below the floor in engine rooms or boiler rooms. 1.5 Socket outlets for power circuits over 16 A AC or 10 A DC shall be interlocked in such a way that the plug can be neither inserted nor

withdrawn when the socket contacts are live. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11i–2 2. Section 11i C Lighting and Socket-Outlets Shower rooms and bathing rooms 2.1 In locations containing a bath or shower the electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with IEC publication 60364-7-701. 2.2 The minimum degree of protection against foreign bodies and water shall be appropriate to Table 11i.2 I - Part 1 GL 2007 Table 11i.2 Minimum degree of protection against foreign bodies and water 0 1 Degree of protection of the installed electrical equipment IP X7 IP 55 2 IP 34 Zone Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11j B Cable Network Chapter 8 Page 11j–1 Section 11j Cable Network A. Choice of Cables and Wires 1. General instructions Cables and wires shall conform to the requirements stated in Section 11k, E. 2. Rated voltage The rated voltage of a cable shall be not less than the operating voltage of the relevant circuit. In

insulated distribution systems, the outer conductor voltage of the system shall be deemed to be the rated voltage of the cable between a conductor and the vessels hull. 3. Temperatures At places where higher ambient temperatures are expected, cables shall be used whose permissible temperature is at least 10 K above the maximum anticipated ambient temperature. A correction of the permissible current rating shall be made in accordance with Table 12.1 of the GL Rules, Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 12, B. cables or wires of sufficient flexibility and installed with compensating bends. 5.2 Mobile equipment shall in every case be supplied via heavy, flame-retardant and oil-resistant rubber-sheathed flexible cables. For rated voltages above 50 V, the movable connecting cables or wires of equipment without double insulation shall also include an earth conductor. B. Determination of Conductor CrossSections 1. General 1.1 Cables are to be rated according to the expected

service load based on the connected load and type of duty of the consumers supplied. 1.2 If all the connected consumers in a part of the system are certain not to be in operation simultaneously, a diversity factor may be used for determining the cross-section of the group supply lines. Cables on diesel engines, turbines, boilers, etc., where there is danger of excessive heating, shall be so routed that they are protected against inadmissible external heating stress, or cables are to be used which are approved for the maximum arising ambient temperature. 1.3 For cables and wiring in switchboards and distribution equipment see Section 11e, E.2 4. 2.1 The conductor cross-sections indicated in Table 11j.1 are the minimum cross-sections for external cabling respective for internal wiring, eg of switchgear and consoles. Mechanical protection 4.1 Cables installed in locations liable to damage during normal operation of the vessel, e.g engine rooms, fish handling rooms, open deck are to

be provided with braided metallic armour or otherwise be suitably protected from mechanical injury. For further requirements see D. 4.2 Except for final sub-circuits of room lighting and space heating systems, as a rule cables of stranded core are to be used. 4.3 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible. 5. Mobility 5.1 Machines or equipment mounted on rubber or spring vibration absorbers are to be connected via 2. Minimum cross-sectional areas and their current-carrying capacity 2.2 The maximum current-carrying capacity of conductor cross-sections for external cabling shall be taken from GL Rules, Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 12, B.42 2.3 In accommodation and day rooms, flexible cables with a conductor cross-section of not less than 0,75 mm2 (AWG 18) may also be used for the connection of movable equipment with a current consumption of up to 6 A. 2.4 I.12 For vessels hull return, see Section 11d, 2.5 J.24

For earthing conductors, see Section 11a, Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11j–2 Section 11j C Cable Network I - Part 1 GL 2007 Table 11j.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas Nominal cross-section Type of installation external wiring internal wiring international AWG international AWG Power, heating and lighting systems 1,0 mm2 17 1,0 mm2 17 Control circuits for power plants 1,0 mm2 17 1,0 mm2 17 0,75 mm2 18 0,5 mm2 20 0,5 mm2 20 0,1 mm2 28 0,2 mm2 24 0,1 mm2 28 0,2 mm2 24 0,1 mm2 28 Control circuits in general, safety systems in accordance with Section 11h Telecommunications equipment in general, automation equipment Telephone and bell installations, not relevant for the safety of the ship or crew call installations Data bus and data cables AWG = American Wire Gauge 3. Voltage drop 3.1 The section of the cables shall be calculated not only according to the admissible intensity, but also to the voltage drop allowable. Under normal

service conditions the voltage drop between the busbars and the most unfavourable point in the system concerned may not generally exceed 6 %, or 10 % in battery-powered circuits of 50 V and less. For navigation lights the voltage drop may not exceed 5 %. 3.2 Where short-term peak loads occur due, e.g to the starting of machines, it is essential to ensure that the voltage drop in the cable does not cause faults in the system. C. 2. 2.1 Cables shall be protected against short circuit and overcurrent. 2.2 Rating and setting of the protection devices shall be in compliance with the requirements in Section 11d. 2.3 Cables protected against overcurrent at the consumers side require only short-circuit protection at the supply side. For steering gear, see Section 11g, A 2.4 Exciter cables for DC motors and DC generators operating in parallel shall not be fused. Exciter cables for individually connected DC generators and synchronous three-phase alternators shall be fused only if there are

special reasons for it, e.g where the cables are passing through various compartments of the vessel. Protection and Installation of Circuits 3. 1. Cables overload protection Mechanical protection All cables liable to damage, such as in locations in way of cargo ports, hatches, tank tops, open decks subject to seas and where passing through decks, are to be protected by substantial metal shields, structural shapes, pipe or other equivalent means. All such coverings are to be of sufficient strength to provide effective protection to the cables and if metallic are to be electrically continuous and grounded to the metal hull. Horizontal pipes or the equivalent used for cable protection are to be provided with drainage holes and where they are carried out through decks or bulkheads, arrangements are to be made to ensure the integrity of the water or gas tightness of the structure. Separation of circuits 3.1 A separate cable shall normally be provided for each circuit having its own

overcurrent and short circuit protection. Deviating from this requirement the following may be combined in a common cable: – a main circuit and its control circuits which have their tapping off after the main switch – various control circuits laid separately from the main circuits – various main circuits and their control circuits belonging to a common system, e.g for several drives of an air-conditioning system, if all the cores of the cable can be centrally disconnected from the supply Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11j D Cable Network Chapter 8 Page 11j–3 3.2 Separate cables shall be provided for safety voltage circuits. In any case the radius shall not be smaller than 6 times the outside diameter of the cable. 3.3 Separate cables shall be provided for intrinsically safe circuits. 1.3 Heat sources such as boilers, hot pipes, etc. shall be bypassed so that the cables are not subjected to additional heating. If this is not possible, the

cables are to be shielded from thermal radiation. 4. Cable laying for circuits 4.1 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems, multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible. 4.2 Should it be necessary to lay single-core cables for the carriage of more than 10 A in singlephase or three-phase AC circuits, the special requirements of Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 12, D.7 shall be fulfilled 4.3 In three-phase systems without hull return, three-core cables shall be used for three-phase connections; four-core cables are required for circuits with loaded neutral point. 4.4 In three-phase systems with hull return the asymmetry of the currents in the three conductors of three-core cables shall not exceed 20 A (see Section 11d, I.) 4.5 In DC systems without hull return multi-core cables shall be provided in all cases of smaller crosssections. Where single-core cables are used for large crosssections, the outgoing- and return-cables are to be laid as close as possible

to each other over their entire length to avoid magnetic stray fields. 4.6 The generator cables, all cables run from the main or emergency switchboard or an auxiliary switchboard, and all interconnecting cables for essential equipment, shall be laid as far as possible uninterrupted in length to the distribution panels or to the equipment. 4.7 The cables of intrinsically safe circuits shall be laid at a distance of at least 50 mm separated from the cables of non-intrinsically safe circuits. The laying of intrinsically safe circuits together with non-intrinsically safe circuits in a pipe is not permitted. Cables of intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked. D. Installation 1. Routing of cables 1.1 The routes of cables shall be such that cables are laid as straight as possible and are not exposed to mechanical damage. 1.2 For bends, the minimum internal radius of curvature permitted by the maker has to be observed. 1.4 Cables are to be installed in such a manner that stresses on

the cables are not transmitted to the conductors. They are not to be fastened directly to the shell plating. 1.5 Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but they are not to be imbedded in structural heat insulation. They are to pass through such insulation at right angles and are to be protected by a continuous pipe with a stuffing tube at one end. For deck penetrations stuffing tubes are to be at the upper end of the pipe and for bulkhead penetrations they are to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead. 1.6 Cables may be installed behind panelling, provided all connections are accessible and the location of concealed connection boxes is indicated. Dome fixtures are to be installed so that they are vented or they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such a manner as to protect the insulated wiring leading to the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive temperature. 1.7 Cables for supply of essential equipment and emergency consumers, e.g lighting and essential

communications and signalling systems shall, wherever possible, bypass galleys, laundries, Category A engine rooms and their casings and areas with a high fire risk and laundries, fish handling and fish processing spaces and other spaces where there is a high moisture content. 1.8 Cables which feed the fire pumps and the emergency switchboard shall be of a fire-resistant type where they pass through high fire risk areas. 1.9 Where practicable, all such cables (1.7; 18) should be run in such manner as to preclude their being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space. 1.10 Cables installed in refrigerating compartments shall be suitable for low temperatures and high humidity. 1.11 Cables in hazardous areas zone 0 and 1 shall be armoured or screened, or run inside a metal tube. 2. Fasting of cables and wires 2.1 Cables are to be supported in cable trays or hangers. The distance between the supports in cable Source:

http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11j–4 Section 11j D Cable Network racks and the fastenings used are to be selected with due regard for the type and number of cables and the possibility of vibration. Cables grouped in a single support are to be limited to two banks except for turnouts. Cables running transversely to the underside of beams are to be supported in cable racks or the equivalent. 2.2 Except for flexible cords for the connection of mobile consumers and for cables laid in pipes, conduits, trunking or special casings, all cables and wires shall be fixed by metal clips or bindings treated against corrosion or by fastenings made of some other flame-resistant material. 2.3 Plastic fastenings shall have been approved by GL. 2.4 Suitable materials are to be placed together when fastening cables to aluminium walls, e.g cadmium-plated or galvanized steel screws and galvanized clips may be used I - Part 1 GL 2007 by metal bulkheads or decks from aerials, aerial downleads,

the radio room, direction finder or other radio-navigation or receiving equipment. The metal sheaths and shields are to be effectively earthed. 5.2 Single-core cables are not permitted in the radio room. 5.3 Cables liable to carry interference pulses because of the nature of the equipment connected to them, e.g echo sounders, are to be shielded, for example, by thick-walled iron conduits in addition to the cable shield. 6. All electric cables and lines, machines, apparatus and accessories shall be laid or installed at a sufficient distance from the magnetic compass or have to be shielded so as to prevent any undue interference with the compass (deviation < 0,5 degree). 7. 3. 3.2 The penetration shall not impair the mechanical strength of the bulkhead. 3.3 Additionally, each stuffing tube, transit device or pourable material is to be of a character so as not to damage the cable physically or through chemical action or through heat build-up. 3.4 Cables passing through decks are to

be protected from damage by protection pipes or casings up to a height of at least 300 mm. 3.5 Deck and bulkhead penetration systems must be approved by GL. Measures to limit the propagation of fire along cable and wire bundles All cables shall be so installed that the original flameretardant properties of the individual cables are not impaired. 5. Earthing of cables and accessories Deck and bulkhead penetrations 3.1 Where cables pass through watertight, firetight or gastight bulkheads or decks, the penetrations are to be made through the use of approved stuffing tubes, transit devices or pourable materials which will maintain the watertight, fire-tight or gastight integrity of the bulkheads or decks. 4. Magnetic compass zone Cables in the vicinity of radio and radionavigation equipment 5.1 Except where laid in metal conduits or ducts, cables and wires with metal sheaths or metal braiding are to be used above the uppermost metal deck and in positions where the cables and wires

are not separated 7.1 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields in power installations shall be electrically connected to the vessels hull at each end; single-core cables shall be earthed at one end only. For cables and wires for electronic equipment, the manufacturers recommendations shall be observed, earthing at one end only is recommended. 7.2 Electrical continuity of all metallic cable coverings shall also be maintained inside of cable junction and connection boxes. 7.3 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields shall be earthed, preferably by the use of standard cable gland fittings designed for that purpose, or by suitable equivalent clips or joints. 7.4 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields shall in no case be deemed to constitute earthing conductors for the protective earthing of the connected electrical equipment. 8. Cable joints and branches 8.1 Cables shall be extended only with the approval of GL. The used material shall have been type tested by GL and

shall maintain the flame-retardant and, where required, the fire-resistant properties of the cables. 8.2 Junction and distribution boxes shall be accessible and marked for identification. 8.3 Cables for safety extra-low voltage shall not pass a junction or distribution box together with cables for higher voltage systems. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11j D Cable Network 8.4 The terminals for different types of systems, especially such of differently operating voltages, shall be separated. 9. Measures for limitation of the propagation of fire along cable and wire bundles 9.1 All cables shall be so installed that the original flame-retardant properties of the individual cables are not impaired. This requirement can be considered to be fulfilled if: – the bundled cables are individually flameretardant and have been successfully passed the bundle fire test in accordance with IEC publication 60332-3 category A/F Chapter 8 Page 11j–5 – suitable

measures have been taken during the installation, e.g by providing of fire stops or application of flameproof coatings 9.2 For cable bundles consisting of cables which have not been subjected to a bundle fire test, the precautions shall be taken to limit the fire propagation in accordance with Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 12, D. 10. Application of fire-resistant cables Cables for services required to be operable under fire conditions including those for their power supplies are to be of a fire-resistant type, complying with Section 11k, E. where they pass through high fire risk areas, fire zones or decks, other than those which they serve. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 Page 11k–1 Section 11k Electrical Equipment A. Electrical Machinery 1. General Two-part bearings are to be fitted with thermometers indicating, wherever possible, the temperature of the lower

bearing shell. 1.1 Except as regards the particular points mentioned in the following, the generators and motors are to be constructed and installed according to recommendations of IEC Publication 60034 and the requirements of Section 11a, H. 3.2 Antifriction bearings For generators and motors intended for electrical propulsion special requirements are to be observed, see Section 11a, A. 4.1 In conjunction with the specified protective devices, machines shall be able to withstand the dynamic and thermal stresses likely to result from a short circuit. 1.2 The permissible limits of temperature rise, particularly for windings, sliprings and commutators for motors under continuous running and for generators, are given in Table 11k.1 with regard to 45 °C conventional ambient temperature 4.2 Where insulating materials are laminated, the maximum temperature permitted for each individual insulating material shall not be exceeded, see Table 11k.1 1.3 The permissible temperature rise

limits for motors supplying an intermittent service will be specially considered by GL Head Office. 4.3 All windings have to be effectively protected against the effects of oil vapours and air laden with moisture or salt. 2. Ventilation and cooling 5. 2.1 Draught ventilation The class of enclosure of terminal boxes shall correspond to that of the machine, but shall in any case not be less than IP 44, see Section 11a, J. Antifriction bearings should be of the preloaded type. 4. Windings Terminal boxes The air supply to draught-ventilated machines shall be free of moisture, oil vapours and dust as far as possible. 6. Where re-coolers are used in the air circuit, they shall be designed and mounted in such a way that condensation or water leaking from the re-cooling system is kept away from the machine windings. Dual-tube coolers are to be used where appropriate. Electric machines operating in networks containing semiconductor converters shall be designed for the expected

harmonics of the system. A sufficient reserve shall be considered for the temperature rise, compared with a sinusoidal load. 2.2 Surface cooling Surface cooled machines on exposed decks may have external fans only if they are fully protected against icing. 3. Bearings and bearing lubrications 3.1 Plain bearings Provision shall be made for checking the bearing lubrication. Even in the case of the inclined positions specified in Section 11a, E. no oil shall flow out and penetrate into the machine. In the case of bearings with force lubrication, failure of the oil supply and the occurrence of excessive bearing temperatures shall trigger an alarm. 7. Operation in network with semiconductor converters Testing of electrical machinery 7.1 Machines supplying an essential service together with their gear are to be submitted to tests to verify that the requirements defined herein are complied with. For this purpose and without prejudice to tests and inspections deemed necessary during

construction and after completion, a Certificate of the builder has to give the machine specifications and the results of the required tests. 7.2 The machines listed in the following are subject to testing in the manufacturers works in the presence of a GL Surveyor: – generators with outputs of 50 kW or kVA or over Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11k–2 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment – motors of 50 kW or over for steering gear drives, anchor windlasses, for fishing winches and refrigeration equipment for vessels with Class Notation RIC – all other drive motors for essential auxiliary machines rated at 100 kW or over. 7.3 Heat test 7.31 Heat run until the final temperature corresponding to the required mode of operation is reached, I - Part 1 GL 2007 followed by determination of the temperature rise. The results shall be within the limits given in Table 11k.1 7.32 Machines with separate cooling fans and/or air filters are to be tested together with

this equipment. 7.33 Heat runs on machines of identical construction which occurred not more than 3 years previously can be recognized. Table 11k.1 Permitted temperature-rises of air cooled machines at an ambient temperature of 45°C (difference values in K) No. Machinery component Insulation class Method of measurement 3 A E B F1 H1 R 55 70 75 100 120 1 AC windings of machines 2 Commutator windings R 55 70 75 100 120 3 Field windings of AC and DC machines with DC excitation, other than those specified under 4 R 55 70 75 100 120 4 a) Field windings of synchronous machines with cylindrical rotors having DC excitation winding, embedded in slots except synchronous induction motors R – – 85 105 125 b) Stationary field windings of DC machines having more than on layer R 55 70 75 100 120 c) Low-resistance field windings of AC and DC machines and compensation windings of DC machines having more than one layer R Th 55 70 75 95 115

d) Single-layer field windings of AC and DC machines with exposed bare or varnished metal surfaces and single-layer compensation windings of DC machines R Th 60 75 85 105 125 Th 55 70 75 95 115 5 Permanently short-circuited, insulated windings 6 Permanently short-circuited, uninsulated windings 7 Iron cores and other parts not in contact with windings 8 Iron cores and other parts in contact with windings Th 55 70 75 95 115 9 Commutators and slip rings, open or enclosed Th 55 65 75 85 105 The temperature rises of these parts shall in no case reach such values that there is a risk of injury to any insulation or other material on adjacent parts or to the item itself 10 Plain bearings measured in the lower bearing shell or in the oil sump after shutdown 45 11 Roller bearings measured in the lubrication nipple bore or near the outer bearing seat 45 Roller bearings with special grease 12 1 2 3 Surface temperature 75 Reference 35 2 These values

may need correction in the case of high-voltage AC windings. Higher temperature rises may be expected on electrical machines with insulation material for high temperatures. Where parts of such machinery may be accidentally touched and there is a risk of burns (>80°C), GL reserve the right to request means of protection such as a handrail to prevent accidental contacts. R = resistance method, Th = thermometer method. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 Page 11k–3 – For generators the voltage and for motors the speed shall be checked as a function of the load. for motors with one nominal speed, at 1,2 times the no-load speed – for variable-speed motors, at 1,2 times the maximum no-load speed 7.5 – for motors with series characteristics, at 1,2 times the maximum speed shown on the rating plate, but at least at 1,5 times the rated speed 7.4 Load characteristic Overload test The overload test shall be

performed: – for generators for 1,5 times to rated current for two minutes – for standard motors at 1,6 times the rated torque for 15 seconds. Motors may not depart substantially from their rated speed during the test – – 7.6 Proof is required that windlass motors are capable of delivering twice the rated torque for two minutes and motors for travel winches 1,6 the rated torque for two minutes. Earlier overload test on motors of identical construction can be recognized. The overspeed test may be dispensed with in the case of squirrel-cage machines. 7.8 7.81 The following requirements have to be considered: a) Short-circuit test 7.61 On all synchronous generators, the steady short circuit current shall be determined with the exciter unit in operation. 7.62 A short-circuit withstand test may be demanded: – to determine the reactances – if there is any concern regarding mechanical and electrical strength; synchronous generators which have undergone a

short-circuit withstand test shall be thoroughly examined after the test for any damage 7.7 Overspeed test The test voltage shall be a practically sinusoidal AC voltage at system frequency. The maximum anticipated no-load voltage or the maximum system voltage is to be used as reference in determining the test voltage. b) for generators with their own drive, at 1,2 times the rated speed – for generators coupled to the main propulsion plant and not arranged in the main shafting, at 1,25 times the rated speed – for shaft generators arranged in the main shafting and whose construction makes testing impracticable, proof by computation of mechanical strength is required Any repetition of the voltage test which may be necessary shall be performed at only 80 % of the nominal test voltage specified in Table 11k.2 7.82 In the case of machines supplied by inverters or operated in series with other machines, the maximum anticipated no-voltage is to be used as reference in determining

the test voltage. 7.9 Determination of insulation resistance (test) The insulation resistance measurement shall be carried out, if possible with the machine at operating temperature, on completion of the tests and with the application of a DC voltage of at least 500 V. The minimum insulation resistance shall be: As proof of mechanical strength, a two-minute overspeed test shall be carried out as follows: – The test voltage shall be as shown in Table 11k.2 It shall be applied for 1 minute for each single test. The voltage test shall be carried out between the windings and the machine housing, the machine housing being connected to the windings not involved in the test. This test shall be performed only on new, fully assembled machines fitted with all their working parts. Steering gear motors are to be tested in accordance with the provisions of Section 11g, A.3 With a three-phase short circuit between terminals, the steady short-circuit current shall not be less than three times

the rated current, and shall not be greater than six times the rated current. The generator and its exciter unit shall be capable of withstanding the steady short-circuit current for a period of two seconds without suffering damage. Winding test 3 ⋅ rated voltage [V] [MΩ] rated output [kVA] + 1000 but not less than 1 MΩ. In the case of machines supplied by inverters or operated in series with other machines, the maximum anticipated no-load voltage or the maximum system voltage is to be taken as the rated voltage. 7.10 Test of degree of protection See Section 11a, J. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11k–4 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 GL 2007 Table 11k.2 Test voltages for the winding test Machine or machinery component 1 Insulated windings of rotating machines of output less than 1 kW (kVA), and of rated voltages less than 100 V with the exception of those in items 4 to 8 2 U + 500 V 2 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size less

than 10000 kW (kVA), with the exception of those in item 1 and items 4 to 8 2 U + 1000 V, with a minimum of 1500 V 3 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size 10000 kW (kVA) or more with the exception of those in items 4 to 8 rated voltage up to 11000 V 4 Separately excited field windings of DC machines 5 Field windings of synchronous generators, synchronous motors and rotary phase converters: 6 7 8 2 U + 1000 V 1000 V + twice the maximum excitation voltage but not less than 1500 V a) rated field voltage up to 500 V 10 times rated field voltage, with a minimum of 1500 V b) over 500 V 4000 V + twice rated field voltage When a machine is intended to be started with the field winding short-circuited or connected across a resistance of value less than ten times the resistance of the winding 10 times the rated field voltage, minimum 1500 V, maximum 3500 V When the machine is intended to be started either with the field winding connected across a resistance of value

equal to, or more than, ten times the resistance of the winding, or with the field windings on open-circuit with or without a field dividing switch 1000 V + twice the maximum value of the rms voltage, which can occur under the specified starting conditions, between the terminals of the field winding, or in the case of a sectionalized field winding between the terminals of any section, with a minimum of 1500 V Secondary (usually rotor) windings of induction motors or synchronous induction motors if not permanently shortcircuited (e.g if intended for rheostatic starting) a) for non-reversing motors or motors reversible from standstill only 1000 V + twice the open-circuit standstill voltage as measured between slip rings or secondary terminals with rated voltage applied to the primary windings b) for motors to be reversed or braked by reversing the primary supply while the motor is running 1000 V + four times the open-circuit secondary voltage as defined in item 6a) Exciters

(exception below) as for the windings to which they are connected Exception 1: Exciters of synchronous motors (including synchronous induction motors) if connected to earth or disconnected from the field windings during starting twice rated exciter voltage + 1000 V, with a minimum of 1500 V Exception 2: Separately excited field windings of exciters 1 Test voltage (rms) dependent on rated voltage U of the subject winding No. Assembled group of machines and apparatus as under item 4 A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above should be avoided if possible, but if a test on an assembled group of several pieces of new machines, each one of which has previously passed its high-voltage test, is made, the test voltage to be applied to such assembled group shall be 80 % of the lowest test voltage appropriate for any part of the group. 1 Where a number of windings belonging to one or more machines are connected together, the test voltage is dictated by the maximum voltage to earth

which can occur. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11k B Electrical Equipment B. Transformers and Reactance Coils 1. General The tests mentioned under 3.2 till 35 shall be performed at approximately operating temperature The scope of the tests is defined in 3.2 to 36: Transformers and reactance coils shall conform to IEC publication 60076, Power Transformers or an equivalent standard. 1.1 Coolant Only dry type transformers may be used on board of the vessel. 1.2 Windings All transformers are to have separate windings for primary and secondary coils, except for starting and ignition transformers which may be of the autotransformer type. 2. Rating 2.1 Voltage variation during loading Chapter 8 Page 11k–5 3.2 The test shall be performed to determine the temperature rise, which shall not exceed the maximum permissible values shown in Table 11k.3 Temperature-rise tests on transformers of identical construction and carried out not more than 3

years previously may be recognized. The referenced temperature rise shall be 10 % below the values shown in Table 11k.3 3.3 The duration of the test shall be This requirement does not apply to short-circuit-proof transformers. Temperature rise The limit temperature rise of windings may not exceed the values shown in Table11k.3 Parts of casings with surface temperatures exceeding 80 °C are to be protected against accidental contact. Table 11k.3 Permissible temperature rise of transformer- and reactance coil windings with an ambient temperature of 45 °C Insulation class A E B F H Temperature rise [K] 55 70 75 95 120 2.3 120 s ⋅ 3.4 3.1 General 3.5 The works test reports shall be presented on request. Winding test The test voltage shown in Table 11k.4 shall be applied between the winding parts to be tested and all other windings, which are to be connected to the core and the frame during the test. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute. Table 11k.4

Test voltage for transformers and reactance coil windings Maximum operating voltage [V] Alternating withstand voltage [V] 50 250 600 1000 1000 1500 2500 3000 3.6 Transformers shall be tested in the manufacturers works. Transformers rated with 100 kVA and above shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. A works test report covering the tests carried out shall be prepared. Short-circuit test On request, the short-circuit proof property in accordance with 2.3 shall be verified Transformers in conjunction with their protective devices shall be able to withstand the effect to external short circuits without damage. Tests test frequency rated frequency but not less than 15 s. Short-circuit resistance 3. Induced overvoltage test The windings shall be tested at twice the rated voltage and at increased frequency to verify that the insulation between turns is sufficient and satisfactory. Under resistive load, the voltage variation between no load and full-load shall not

exceed 5 %. 2.2 Heat test Determination of insulation resistance The measurement of insulation resistance shall be carried out at the end of the test sequence with a DC voltage of at least 500 V. The insulation resistance shall be at least: – 5 MΩ between primary and secondary winding – 2 MΩ for the remaining insulation Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11k–6 Section 11k D Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 GL 2007 C. Storage Batteries and Chargers D. Switchgear and Protection Device 1. General 1. General These requirements apply to permanently 1.1 installed storage batteries and their chargers for supplying power systems and automation equipment, for use as emergency source of electrical power and for starting internal combustion engines. 1.2 Rating of batteries Batteries are to be so rated that they can supply the consumers for the required period, in accordance with the energy balance, when charged to 80 % of their rated capacity. 2. Storage

batteries Lead-acid storage batteries with dilute sul2.1 phuric acid as electrolyte and steel batteries with nickel-cadmium cells and dilute potassium hydroxide as electrolyte are generally permitted. 2.2 Other types of storage batteries of nonstandard design, such as silver/zinc batteries may be allowed if their suitability for shipboard use has been demonstrated. 2.3 The cells of batteries of accumulators shall be grouped in cases or on platforms fitted with handles to facilitate handling; the total weight of a set may not exceed 100 kg. Each case or platform shall be fitted with a name plate including information concerning the designation of the type, the name of the maker and the nominal capacity at a particular discharge rate (for preference that which corresponds to the particular application, discharge in 5, 10 or 20 hours). The boxes of cells shall not be manufactured from a material sensitive to shocks such as glass, nor from celluloid, nor any other material easily

inflammable. They shall be carried out in such a way as to prevent any spillage of the electrolyte by reason of an inclination of 40 ° from the vertical. 3. Chargers Chargers are to be so rated that discharged 3.1 storage batteries can be charged to 80 % of their rated capacity within at least 15 hours without exceeding the maximum permissible charging currents. If consumers are simultaneously supplied during charging, the maximum charging voltage may not exceed 20 % of the rated voltage. The power requirements of the consumers are to be taken into account when selecting the charger. Switchgear and protective devices have to 1.1 comply with the relevant IEC Publications and shall be suitable for the application concerned. 1.2 11a, I. For materials and insulation, see Section 1.3 For equipment and components subject to mandatory type-approval, see Section 11e, G. 2. Low-Voltage switchgear 2.1 Circuit breakers 2.11 Drives Power-driven power circuit breakers shall be equipped

with an additional emergency drive operated by hand. 2.12 Making and breaking capacity The making and breaking capacity is to be in accordance with IEC Publication 60947-2. Other standards may be recognized. 3. Protection devices 3.1 General Protective and tripping devices are installed together with circuit breakers and other appliances in switchboards and consoles. 3.2 Short-circuit protection Short-circuit protection devices shall be independent of energy supplied from circuits other than that to be protected. In the event of a short circuit, provision is to be made for the total loss of the supply voltage. Short-circuit protection devices for generators shall be delayed for selective disconnection. 3.3 Overcurrent protection The operation of overcurrent relays shall not be effected by the ambient temperature. Bimetal devices are to be compensated and, for motor protection, are to be fitted with a re-closing inhibitor. Overcurrent relays for motor protection shall be

adjustable. 3.4 Undervoltage protection Undervoltage trips shall cause the power 3.41 circuit breaker to break if the voltage drops to 70 % 35 % of the rated value. Undervoltage trips for generator circuit breakers shall be delayable by up to 500 ms Source: http://www.doksinet Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 Page 11k–7 3.42 Short-circuit trips shall be delayed where the selective disconnection of short circuits is necessary. The reset ratio is also to be determined by reference to the conditions after disconnection of a short circuit and should be as far as possible approximate to unity. Cables manufactured and tested to standards other than those specified above will be accepted provided they are in accordance with an acceptable and relevant international or national standard. I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.5 Section 11k E Shunt trips 2. Conductor material and structure Shunt trips shall ensure the disconnection of the circuit- breakers even if the voltage drops to 85 % of the

rated voltage. 2.1 Electrolytic copper with a resistivity not exceeding 17,241 Ohm mm2/km at 20°C shall be used as the material for the conductors of cables and wires. 3.6 2.2 If the insulation consists of natural or synthetic rubber vulcanized with sulphur, the individual conductor wires shall be tinned. Electronic protection devices Electronic protection devices shall remain operative at their maximum permissible load at an ambient temperature of 55 °C. 3.7 Reverse power protection 2.3 The conductors of movable wires shall be finely stranded. The reverse power protection device shall respond to the active power regardless of the power factor and may operate only in the event of power return. The conductors of permanently laid cables and wires shall be made of stranded copper conductors (class 2) or flexible stranded copper conductors (class 5). 3.8 Solid conductors up to 4 mm2 in cross-section are permitted for final circuits of room lighting and space heating systems in

the accommodation. Phase failure protection Protection devices for detection of a single-phase failure in three-phase circuits have to operate instantaneously. Bimetallic relays with differential release do not constitute phase failure protection devices in the opinion of these Rules. 3.9 Check synchronizers Check synchronizers for protection of alternators against parallel connection at an unacceptable phase angle may allow connection only up to an angular deviation of 45° (electrical) and up to a frequency difference of 1 Hz. 3.10 Insulation monitoring equipment Insulation monitoring devices shall continuously display the insulation resistance for the distribution system and have to trigger an alarm should the insulation resistance of the system fall below 50 Ohms per Volt of mains voltage. The measuring current may not exceed 30 mA in the event of a dead short circuit to earth. E. Cables and Insulated Wires 1.1 Cables and wires shall be flame-retardant and

self-extinguishing. 3. Materials and wall thickness of insulating covers The materials used for insulation shall be of standardized types for which the maximum permissible temperatures at the conductors during undisturbed operation are specified. 4. Protective coverings, sheaths and braids 4.1 Single-core cables shall have a suitable separating layer of filler material or foil over the core insulation. 4.2 Multi-core cables shall have a common core covering made of filler material or shall have a wrapping and sheath. 4.3 Only materials of a standardized type shall be used for non-metallic sheaths. In all cases the thermal stability of the compounds used shall correspond to that of the insulating material. 4.4 Braids shall be made of corrosion-resistant material such as copper or copper alloy or of material treated to prevent corrosion, e.g galvanized steel For cable bundles, see Section 11j, D.9 1.2 Cables manufactured in accordance with the relevant recommendations of IEC

publications 60092350, 60092-351, 60092-352, 60092-353, 60092-354, 60092-359, 60092-373, 60092-374, 60092-375 and 60092-376 will be accepted by GL provided that they are tested to its satisfaction. 4.5 Outer metallic wire braids shall have a coating of protective paint, which have to be lead-free and flame-retardant. The paint shall be of sufficiently low viscosity when applied to enable it to penetrate readily into the wire braid. When dry, it shall not flake off when the cable is bent around a mandrel with a diameter of 15 times that of the cable. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11k–8 5. Section 11k G Electrical Equipment Identification Each cable shall be marked for type and for 5.1 name of the manufacturer. 5.2 The cores of multi-core cables and wires shall have a permanent marking. In multi-core cables and wires where the cores are arranged in a number of concentric layers, two adjacent cores in each layer shall be coloured differently from each other and

from all other cores, unless the individual cores are otherwise unambiguously identified, e.g by printed numbers 5.3 Protective earth conductors green/yellow colour coding. 6. shall have Approvals Cables and wires are subject to mandatory 6.1 type approval by GL. 6.2 Proof is required by the manufacturer by issue of workshop test reports stating that the continuous production is made in conformity to relevant standards and is verified by individual and sample tests for each production length of cables. These reports shall record any deviations from the standards. 6.3 The application of cables and wires without type-test is subject to an agreement with GL in every case. Individual and sample tests performed at the manufacturers works on each lengths delivered are required for these cables, see 7.3 7. Tests Type tests shall be carried out in accordance 7.1 with the relevant standards in the manufacturers works and in the presence of a staff member of the Head Office. The scope of

the tests shall be agreed with GL. 7.2 If not specified in the standards, the following tests shall be performed as an additional requirement: Ozone tests on cable sheaths whose basic material consists of natural or synthetic rubber. Test conditions shall be: Ozone concentration: 250 - 300 ppm Temperature: (25 ± 2) °C Duration: 24 h The test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC publication 60811-2-1. Other equivalent test methods may be agreed with GL. The test is passed satisfactory if no cracks will be discovered visible to the naked eye. I - Part 1 GL 2007 7.3 Individual tests on non-type-tested cables and wires shall be performed in the manufacturers works in the presence of a GL Surveyor. The scope of the tests shall be agreed with GL in advance. The following tests shall be carried out at least: – conductor resistance – dielectric strength – insulation resistance – dimensions and construction of samples – mechanical strength characteristics

of samples F. Installation Material 1. General 1.1 The installation material shall conform to IEC publications. Other standards may be recognized by GL. 1.2 It is necessary to ensure that terminals are suitable for the connection of stranded conductors. Exceptions are permitted for systems with solid conductors (e.g lighting, socket-outlets and heating appliances in the accommodation area) The method of connection shall be compatible with the terminals used. 1.3 For materials, see Section 11a, I. 2. Plug-and-socket connections 2.1 Depending on their application, the design of plug-and-socket connections shall conform to the following regulations: a) in the accommodation area, day rooms and service rooms (up to 16 A, 250 V AC) – IEC publication 60083 or 60320 b) power circuits (up to 250 A, 690 V AC) – IEC publication 60309-1 and 60309-2 c) electronic switchgear - IEC publications, e.g 60130 and 60603 G. Lighting Fittings 1. General Luminaries, floodlights and

searchlights shall conform to IEC publications 60598 and 60092-306. Other standards may be recognized by GL The requirements stated in F.1 shall be observed Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 2. Section 11k H Electrical Equipment Design 2.1 The surface temperature of easily touchable parts of lighting fixtures shall not exceed 60°C. 2.2 High-power lights with higher surface temperatures shall be protected against unintentional contact by additional means. 2.3 The terminals and spaces for the connection of cables shall not reach a higher temperature as permissible for the insulation of the wires or cables used, see also Section 11j, A.3 The temperature rise in the terminal box shall not exceed 40 K. 2.4 All metal parts of a lighting fixture shall be bounded together. 2.5 Wiring inside lighting fixtures shall have a minimum cross-section of 0,75 mm2. A cross-section of at least 1,5 mm2 shall be used for through wiring. Heat-resistant wires shall be used for internal

wiring. 2.6 Each lighting fixture shall be durably marked with the following details: – maximum permitted lamp wattage – minimum mounting distance H. Electrical Heating Equipment 1. General Electrical heating equipment and boilers shall 1.1 conform to IEC publications, e.g 60335, with particular attention to IEC publication 60092-307 In addition the general assignments in F.1 have to be observed 1.2 The connections of power supply cables shall be so arranged that temperatures higher than permitted for the terminals and supply cables do not arise. 1.3 Controls in operation such as switch knobs and handles shall not attain temperatures higher than: Chapter 8 Page 11k–9 – 55 °C for metal parts or – 65 °C for parts made of porcelain, glass, moulded plastics or wood A temperature of 5 °C higher is permissible for parts operated by finger tipping only. 1.4 Only heating elements with shrouding or ceramic-embedded heating coils shall be used. Infrared radiators are

permitted 2. Design 2.1 Space heaters The casing or enclosure of each heater shall 2.11 be so designed that no objects can be placed on it, and the air can circulate freely around the heating elements. 2.12 Electrical space heaters shall be so designed that, based at an ambient temperature of 20 °C, the temperature of the casing or enclosure and of the air flow from the heater does not exceed 95 °C under defined test conditions. 2.13 To prevent unacceptable temperature rises due to heat accumulation, each heater shall be fitted with a safety temperature limiter. Automatic reconnection is not permitted The safety temperature limiter may be dispensed with for watertight heaters in spaces without a substantial fire risk, e.g in bathrooms and washing rooms 2.14 The operating switches have to disconnect all live conductors. The switch positions shall be clearly marked at the switches. 3. Oil and water calorifiers Continuous-flow electric calorifiers and water accumulators are to be

equipped with two mutually independent temperature protection devices, one of which shall be a permanently set safety temperature limiter while the other may take the form of a thermostatic controller. Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 11l C Tests Chapter 8 Page 11l–1 Section 11l Tests A. General 1. The following Rules apply to the testing of electrical and electronic installations, equipment and components. 2. Within the framework of their general quality assurance programme, manufacturers shall ensure that the products they manufacture conform to the specified requirements. Records shall be made, containing quality assurance measures and tests and shall be handed over to GL on request. 3. For certain installations, equipment and components, testing is required in the presence of a GL Surveyor according to these Rules, see C., D and E C. Tests in the Manufacturers Works 1. Tests in the presence of a GL Surveyor 1.1

The tests shall be carried out on the basis of the Rules for Construction and the approved documents. They shall be performed in accordance with a recognized standard. 1.2 Machines, appliances and installations subject to testing in accordance with 2. are to be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor unless the preconditions for ones own responsibility tests by the manufacturer are fulfilled, see 3. The tests and items for testing specified below constitute minimum requirements. 2. Machines, appliances and installations subject to testing GL reserve the right to demand that tests also be performed on other items, either on board or in the manufacturers works. 2.1 Electrical machines 4. For appliances of a new type or for equipment which is being used for the first time on vessels with GL Class, additional tests and trials are to be agreed between the manufacturer and GL, if the circumstances this require. 5. It is the aim of the tests to verify conformity with the requirements

covered by the Rules for Construction, and to prove the suitability of equipment for its particular application. 6. Tests are divided into: – examinations of the technical documentation, see B. – tests in the manufacturers works, see C. – tests on board, see D. – tests for type approvals, see E. B. Examinations of Technical Documentation For scope of tests see Section 11k, A. 2.2 Transformers For scope of tests see Section 11k, B. 2.3 Power electronics For scope of tests see Section 11f, G. 2.4 Switchboards For scope of tests see Section 11e, G. and check list form F 217. – Main switchboards – Emergency switchboards – Switchboards for electrical propulsion plants – Starters for motors in accordance with 2.1 2.5 Electrical propulsion plant 1. The list of documents subject to approval is specified in Section 11a, C. For scope of tests, see Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 13. 2. The documents which have been examined and

approved by GL Head Office shall be presented to the GL Surveyor on request. 2.6 Computer System See Section 11h, A.2 Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 11l–2 3. Section 11l D Tests Ones own responsibility tests made by the manufacturers 3.1 A part of the products under 2.1, 23 and 24 may be tested on the manufacturers own responsibility if the following preconditions are fulfilled: – A Quality Management System recognized by GL is available. – GL has carried out type tests of the products. – The ones own responsibility tests have been agreed with GL. 3.2 Reference is made to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 – Machinery Installations, Chapter 8 – Guidelines for the Inspection of Mechanical and Electrotechnical Products. I - Part 1 GL 2007 – construction of watertight and fireproof bulkhead and deck penetrations – insulation resistance measurement 3. Tests during dock trials 3.1 General Proofs are required of

the satisfactory condition and proper operation of the main and emergency power supply systems, the steering gear and the aids of manoeuvring, as well as of all the other installations specified in the Rules for Construction. Unless already required in the Rules for Construction, the tests to be performed shall be agreed with the GL Surveyor in accordance with the specific characteristics of the subject equipment. 3.2 D. Tests on Board 1. General The tests are divided into: – tests during construction/installation – tests during dock trials – tests during sea trials 2. Tests during construction Generators A test run of the generator sets and as far as possible of the shaft generators shall be conducted under normal operating conditions, and shall be reported on form F 218. 3.3 Storage batteries The following shall be tested: – installation of storage batteries – ventilation of battery rooms and boxes, and cross-sections of ventilation ducts –

storage-battery charging equipment 2.1 During the period of construction of the vessel, the installations shall be checked for conformity with the documents approved by GL and with the Rules for Construction. – the required caution labels and information plates 2.2 Test Certificates for tests which have already been performed shall be presented to the Surveyor on request. The following items shall be tested under observance of forms F 217 and F 218: – accessibility for operation and maintenance 2.3 – protection against the ingress of water and oil from ducts and pipes in the vicinity of the switchboards, and sufficient ventilation – equipment of main and emergency switchboards with insulated handrails, gratings and insulating floor coverings – correct settings and operation of protection devices and interlocks – independent manual operation of generating sets from common external voltage and automation systems (manual operation means local start/stop and

speed setting as well as voltage control, protection devices and synchronizing from switchboard) Protective measures shall be checked: – protection against foreign bodies and water – protection against electric shock, such as protective earthing, protective separation or other measures as listed in Section 11a. 2.4 Testing of the cable network Inspection and testing of cable installation and cable routing with regard to: – acceptability of cable routing with regard to: - separation of cable routes - fire safety - the reliable supply of emergency consumers – selection and fastening of cables 3.4 Switchgear GL reserve the right to demand the proof of selective arrangement of the vessels supply system. Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 3.5 Section 11l E Tests Power electronics Chapter 8 Page 11l–3 E. Type Approvals The following items shall be tested: – ventilation of the place of installation – function of the equipment and

protection devices 3.6 Power plants The following items shall be tested: – – Motor drives together with the driven machines, which shall, wherever possible, be subjected to the most severe anticipated operating conditions. This test shall include a check of the settings of the motors short-circuit and overcurrent protection devices. emergency remote stops (compare also Section 11d, I.7) of equipment such as: 3.7 2. Type tests shall be carried out in the presence of a staff member of the Head Office either in the manufacturers works or, by agreement, in suitable institutions. 3. Type tests are carried out according to GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals and standards defined therein. - fuel pumps 4. Type tested installations, apparatuses and assemblies shall be used within the scope of valid Construction Rules only. The suitability for the subject application shall be ensured closed loop controls,

open loop controls and all electric safety devices. 5. - engine room fans – 1. The installations, equipment and assemblies mentioned in 5. are subject to mandatory type approval Control, monitoring and vessels safety systems Installations, apparatuses and assemblies subject to type testing For these systems operational tests shall be performed. 5.1 Generator protection devices, see Section 11d, A. and Section 11e, G 3.8 5.2 Electrical propulsion plants Regarding scope of tests see Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 13. 4. Tests during the sea trial 4.1 Rating of the main- and emergency electrical power supplies During the sea trial it shall be proved that the main and emergency electrical power supplies are adequately rated and conform to Section 11c and all control and monitoring devices are functioning according to their assignments. – circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect switches and fuses for direct connection to the main busbars and to

non-fused, multi-terminal busbars of main, emergency and control switchboards – generator protection devices – standardized switchgear in series manufacture 5.3 Steering gear and lateral thrust propeller system, see Section 11g, A. and B 5.4 4.2 Operating reliability during navigation 4.21 Tests shall be carried out to determine whether all the machines, equipment, etc. constituting the electrical installation operate satisfactorily at all revolutions of the main engine, particularly during engine and steering gear manoeuvres. 4.22 Tests shall be carried out on the restoration of the main and emergency electrical power supplies following a black-out during navigation. Switchgear, see Section 11e, G. Machinery control system, see Section 11h, B. – safety devices – safety system 5.5 Vessel’s control and safety system, see Section 11h, C. and D – 5.6 fire detection and alarm system Cables and accessories, see Section 11k, E. Source: http://www.doksinet

Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 12 C Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 Page 12–1 Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation A. General 1. Alarm systems and remote control Fishing vessels having machinery plants built, equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the requirements of this Section may be assigned the Class Notation RC – Remote Control. This is only possible for vessels with L < 45 m. For control and monitoring compare also Section 11h. 2. Full automation Fishing vessels having machinery plants built, equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the requirements of the GL Rules in Chapter 4 – Automation may be assigned the Class Notation AUT Automation. This is only possible for vessels with L ≥ 24 m. B. Documents for Approval The following documents are to be submitted for approval in German or English language, in triplicate and in good time so that they can be approved and made available to the GL

Surveyor at the start of manufacture respectively at the installation of the systems. 1. Newbuildings 1.1 For each of the systems described in the following: submitted for the main propulsion plant and also for other equipment where necessary. 1.5 GL reserve the right to demand for other documents where those submitted are not adequate to provide an evaluation of the system. 2. Modifications and additions Major modifications which may affect the automation system on a vessel which is under construction or at sea are subject to approval. Documents are to be submitted in time before conversion C. Extent, Design and Construction of the Equipment 1. Extent of automation The extent of automation of the propulsion plant together with the auxiliary equipment necessary for operation and the safety of the vessel is to be sufficient for an unattended engine room operation during normal sea service and normal manoeuvring. The supervision of the machinery plant is done from the

navigating bridge. 2. Automatic restart or manual start possibility from the bridge after a blackout is to be arranged for all components which are necessary for restoring of propulsion. Exemptions may be granted for multi unit installations where stop of one unit does not cause loss of propulsion. – general plan – wiring diagrams – power supply plan 3. – description of functional relationships – general arrangement Each important automatic and/or remote controlled system shall also be capable of being operated manually. – functional description 1.2 The list of measuring points is to be submitted for the monitoring system. 1.3 List of indications located on the navigating bridge for the supervision of the machinery. 1.4 Safety programmes giving details of limit values which result in shutdown or reduction are to be Manual operation Where auxiliary machinery is started up automatically or by remote control, means shall be provided to secure them against

remote controlled or automatic startup, e.g during repairs 4. Pneumatic and hydraulic systems Pneumatic and hydraulic systems for supplying nonredundant units or more than one consumer have to be redundant in design. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 12–2 Section 12 D Special Requirements for Automation D. Monitoring Equipment 1. Machinery alarm system 1.1 The machinery alarm system shall provide an optical and an audible signal of unacceptable deviations from operating figures. 1.2 The alarms shall be presented on the navigating bridge. 1.3 Collective alarms are allowed for stand-alone systems except main propulsion machinery. I - Part 1 GL 2007 1.14 Alarm systems shall be designed on the closed-circuit or the monitored open-circuit principle. Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted. 1.15 The alarm system is to be supplied from the main power source with battery backup for at least 15 minutes. The failure of the supply from the main power source is to

be alarmed. 1.16 The automatic suppression of alarm signals is to be monitored for correct function or shall be of redundant type. The individual alarms shall be recognisable at the concerned system. 1.17 The failure of the machinery alarm system shall be alarmed. 1.4 Alarm delays shall be kept within time limits to prevent any risk to the monitored system in the event of exceeding the limit value. 1.18 Machinery alarm systems are subject to mandatory type approval. 2. 1.5 Optical signals shall be individually indicated at a central position. The meaning of the individual indications has to be clearly identifiable by text or symbols. 1.6 If a fault is indicated, the optical signal shall remain visible until the fault has been eliminated. 1.7 It shall be possible to distinguish between an optical signal which has been acknowledged and one that has not been acknowledged. Fire detection and alarm systems for machinery spaces 2.1 An automatic fire detection and alarm system with

means of testing is to be provided which indicates the initial stage of fire in machinery spaces. The fire detection system has to be based on a selfmonitoring principle. Only ionisation or smoke detectors are permitted 2.2 The fire alarm shall be given visually and audibly on the navigation bridge, in the machinery spaces, and in the accommodation. 1.8 It shall be possible to acknowledge audible signals. The alarm shall be clearly distinguishable from other alarms. 1.9 The acknowledgement of an alarm shall not inhibit an alarm which has been generated by new causes. 2.3 Location and number of the detectors shall be such as to provide ample cover for all the endangered areas. 1.10 Acknowledgement of optical alarms shall only be possible where the fault has been indicated as an individual signal and a sufficient overview of the concerned process is been given. 2.4 The fire detection system is to be fed automatically from an emergency source of power if the main source of power

fails. 1.11 Alarms have to be discernible under all operating conditions. Where this cannot be guaranteed, for example due to the noise level, additional optical signals, e.g flashing lights must be installed 1.12 Transient faults which are self-correcting without intervention shall be memorized and indicated by optical signals which shall only disappear when the alarm has been acknowledged. 1.13 Where an alarm has not been acknowledged within a preset time, an alarm shall be released in the accommodation and mess areas of the engineer officers. 2.5 Fire detection and alarm systems are subject to mandatory type approval. 3. Safety system 3.1 A safety system which is for all important parameters independent of the alarm system, is to be provided. 3.2 When abnormal operating conditions are reached or serious malfunction occur which cannot be dealt with in time by the crew members responsible for the machinery, the safety system has to safeguard machinery against critical conditions

(automatic shutdown). Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 12 E Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 Page 12–3 3.3 Where safety systems are provided with overriding arrangements, these shall be safeguarded against accidental operation. The actuation of overriding arrangements is to be indicated to the desired course of the vessel. Commands entered into the remote control system from the bridge shall be recognizable at all control stations. 3.4 The monitored open-circuit principle is to be applied to safety systems. Alternatively, the closed circuit principle may be applied where it is demanded by the provisions of national regulations (e.g boiler and oil-fired systems). 2. Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted. 3.5 The suitability and function of safety systems shall be demonstrated in the given application. 3.6 Safety systems shall be so designed that potential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a broken wire shall not

create a hazard to human life, vessel or machinery. 3.7 Faults and also the tripping of the safety system shall be signalled by an alarm. 3.8 Where faults which affect the operation of the safety system cannot be identified, appropriate test facilities shall be provided which shall be actuated periodically. 3.9 The adjustment facilities for safety systems shall be so designed that the last setting can be detected. 3.10 Safety systems shall be designed preferably using conventional technology (hard wired). Alternative technical solutions shall be agreed with GL 3.11 On failure of the vessels main power supply, the power supply to a safety system has to be guaranteed as long as the supervised machinery is in operation. 3.12 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type approval. 4. Call systems for crew members responsible for the machinery The officer of the watch on the bridge shall be able to call the crew members. This equipment may take the form of a two-way intercommunication

system. The system may consist of portable or permanently installed equipment and shall be capable of operation even if the main power supply fails. E. Remote Control from the Navigating Bridge 1. Type of remote control Single lever control is to be preferred for remote control systems. Lever movement shall be in accordance Control positions It shall be ensured that control is only possible from one control station at any time. 3. Transfer of control positions Transfer of command from one control station to another shall only be possible when the respective control levers are in the same position and when a signal to accept the transfer is given from the selected control station. A display at each control station shall indicate which control station is in operation. Change-over of control within the bridge area is not required where the control levers at the control stations are mechanically or electrically connected together and with the control unit of the remote control

system so that they automatically adopt the same position. 4. Equipment on the bridge The following equipment is to be provided on the bridge: 4.1 An indicator showing which control position is in use. 4.2 Emergency shut-down: Should the remote control fail, it must be possible to shut-down the main engine from the navigating bridge using a system independent of the remote control system and its power supply. Alternatively, where the installation is fitted with clutch couplings, means can be provided for disengaging the shaft from the bridge. The emergency shut-down systems are to be backedup by sufficient storage of control power and shall work on the open-circuit principle, if electrical. Measures are to be taken to ensure that the emergency shut-down system cannot be operated inadvertently. 4.3 For direct propulsion (fixed propeller): An indicator showing the rotation speed and direction of rotation of the propeller shaft. 4.4 For controllable pitch propellers: An indicator

showing the rotation speed of the propeller shaft and the pitch of the blades. 4.5 gears: For installations equipped with reversing Indicator showing the speed and direction of rotation of the propeller shaft and the rpm of the main engine. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 12–4 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation 4.6 For installations equipped with clutch couplings: An arrangement is to be provided for remote-controlled engagement/disengagement of the couplings. The engaged/disengaged position is to be indicated. 4.7 Additional necessary indications for the supervision of the machinery plant may be decided case by case. 5. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding 1. Valves in the vessels shell plating which are open during operation of the engines have to be accessible and capable of operation from a safe height above the floor plates. 2. Engine room bilges and drain wells are to be large enough to accommodate normal drainage without tripping a level

alarm during the unattended period. Shaft-driven generators On vessels with shaft-driven generators, the remote control from the bridge shall be so designed that, with the shaft-driven generators in operation, manoeuvres can be performed without disturbing the main electrical power supply system (e.g by the use of constant speed equipment with controllable pitch propellers or by arranging for the power supply system to be automatically transferred to an independent diesel generator). F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing 1. Fire protection 1.1 Fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel engines are to be shielded or installed in such a way that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected in a suitable drain tank. 1.2 Where tanks with flammable liquids are replenished automatically or remote-controlled, means are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage. 2. G. I - Part 1 GL 2007 Fire extinguishing 3. In each machinery space bilge at least 2 high

level sensors are to be provided. In vessels with the Class Notation K (Coastal Service) one level sensor may be accepted. H. Miscellaneous 1. Auxiliary boilers and thermal oil plants The automatic controls of auxiliary boilers or thermal oil plants shall be capable of maintaining the desired values within the permissible limits of all possible load variations, independent of the kind of heating. Should the permissible operating values be exceeded, individual alarm shall be given and the safety system has to act automatically. The intervention of the safety system is to be monitored. 2. Tests After installation on board all automatic and remote controls are to be tested during trials at the shipyard and sea trials to the satisfaction of GL. I. Alarm and Recording Points 2.1 A fixed fire extinguishing system according to Section 8 is to be provided in the machinery spaces. The following Tables 12.1 – 123 summarize the monitored parameters and define the limits for an alarm

2.2 One main fire pump is to be provided with a remote start arrangement from the navigating bridge. For special installations, like two stroke engines or the use of heavy fuels reference is made to GL Rules in Chapter 4 – Automation, Section 8. Source: http://www.doksinet Section 12 Table 12.1 Alarms for propulsion machinery – Main engines, gear and shafting I Special Requirements for Automation Monitored parameters: L = low limit H = high limit Limit I - Part 1 GL 2007 Chapter 8 Page 12–5 Comments Main engine Engine overspeed H Stop by safety system Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet L Stop by safety system Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet H Differential pressure across lubricating oil pressure filter H Fault in automatic lubricating oil filter Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet L Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes Differential pressure across fuel oil filters H Fault in automatic fuel oil filter Fuel level in closed stand pipe

L Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine L Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder outlet H Oil contamination of engine cooling water H Sea cooling water pressure L Secondary fresh cooling water pressure L Secondary fresh cooling water temperature H Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet L Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet L+H Does not apply when automatic gas venting Where cooling water is used for heat exchangers with fuel or thermal oil Or "water in charge air duct" instead of low limit Start air pressure L Control air pressure L Exhaust gas temperature H Oil mist concentration in crankcase H Approved alternative methods may be used Lubricating oil temperature H 1500 kW and above Lubricating oil pressure inlet L Gear Shafting Temperature of stern tube bearing aft H For shaft diameter < 400 mm sensor may be located in the vicinity of the aft bearing. Temperature of line shaft bearings H

1500 kW and above Thrust block lubricating oil temperature or thrust block temperature H Controllable pitch propeller system, if applicable Hydraulic oil pressure L May be displayed on bridge jointly with "Failure of remote control system". Hydraulic oil level in gravity tank or backing pump pressure L Stop by safety system L If failure results in loss of manoeuvrability Couplings Control power of couplings Source: http://www.doksinet Table 12.2 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1 GL 2007 Alarms for propulsion machinery – Auxiliary machinery, tanks and miscellaneous items Monitored parameters: L = low limit H = high limit Diesel generators Engine overspeed Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine inlet Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder outlet Oil

mist concentration in crankcase Voltage Frequency Tripping of non-essential consumers Limit Chapter 8 Page 12–6 H L H L Comments Stop by safety system Stop by safety system L H H L+H L Applies only to propulsion plants with nonelectrically driven essential auxiliaries. Failure of main source of electrical power Purifying installations Temperature of medium for separation L+H Unintentional discharge of bowl/loss of water seal/ water in medium to be separated or equivalent If local individual indication is provided, one common alarm is sufficient in the central alarm panel. Steering gear Failure of steering gear Phase failure/overload Failure of control system Tank levels Fuel service tanks Expansion tanks Sludge, leak oil and fuel oil overflow tanks Gravity oil tanks for stern tube Main engine lubricating oil sump trunks/tanks Steering gear hydraulic oil tank L L H L L L All tanks with automatic or remote controlled filling are to be provided with additionally high level

alarms Fire detection system Fire alarm Fault Miscellaneous Failure of remote control system Failure of alarm systems Failure of safety systems Tripping of safety system Automatic change-over of auxiliary machinery Level of machinery space bilges/drain wells Fault in fire extinguishing system Release of automatic fire extinguishing system H At least 2 sensors and detecting loops per machinery space Source: http://www.doksinet Section 12 Table 12.3 Alarms for propulsion machinery of 750 kW and above – Auxiliary steam boilers and thermal oil plants I Special Requirements for Automation Monitored parameters: L = low limit H = high limit Limit I - Part 1 GL 2007 Comments Steam boilers Tripping of safety system Steam pressure L+H Water level L+H Failure of circulating pump H Salinity of condensate H Oily contamination of condensate H Thermal oil systems Tripping of safety system Flow of thermal oil Temperature of thermal oil Level in expansion tank L H L+H

Chapter 8 Page 12–7 At heater outlet Source: http://www.doksinet Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 13 B Spare Parts Chapter 8 Page 13–1 Section 13 Spare Parts A. General 1. 1. In order to be able to restore engine operation and manoeuvring capacity to the vessel in the event of damage at sea, spare parts for the main drive and the essential equipment as defined herein and in the basic Rules are to be carried on board every fishing vessel, together with the necessary tools. These requirements are considered to be complied with if the range of spare parts corresponds to the following Tables allowing for the extent of the installed systems and components in question at the time of commissioning. 2. Depending on the design and arrangement of the engine plant, the intended service and operation of the fishing vessel, and also the manufacturer’s recommendations, a different volume of spare parts may be agreed between the owner/operator and GL. Where

the volume of spare parts is based on special arrangements between the vessel owner and GL, technical documentation is to be provided. A list of the relevant spare parts is to be carried on board. 3. In case of propulsion systems and operationally essential machinery which are not included in the following Tables, the requisite range of spare parts is to be established in each individual case between shipyard, vessel owner and GL. 4. Spare parts shall be properly stored and protected against vibration, humidity and damages. Heavy spare parts should be kept near the point of installation and means to remove them have to be provided. B. Volume of Spare Parts The scope of spare parts has to be in accordance with the following Tables and is classified according to different ranges of service: A = unlimited range of service and M B = all other ranges of service Main internal combustion engines For internal combustion engines see Section 9b. The volume of spare parts is defined in

Table 13.1 2. Auxiliary internal combustion engines The range of spare parts required for auxiliary internal combustion engines for essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. is to be specified in accordance with Table 13.2 Note Where an additional unit is provided for the same purpose no spare parts are required. 3. Gears, thrust bearings For gears and thrust bearings see Section 9c. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.3 4. Starting equipment and air compressors For starting equipment air compressors see Section 9b. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.4 5. Spare parts for pumps For pumps see Section 9d. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.5 6. Spare parts for hydraulic systems For hydraulic systems see especially Section 5 (windlass, mooring winches, etc.), Section 6 (winches, power blocks, stern gallows, etc.), The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.6 7. Spare parts for refrigerating installations For refrigerating

systems see especially Section 10. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.7 8. Other spare parts Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. are defined in Table 13.8 9. Spare parts for electrical installations For the spare parts of electrical installations see Section 11a, L. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 13–2 Table 13.1 Section 13 B Spare Parts I - Part 1 GL 2007 Spare parts for main internal combustion engines 1, 4, 5 Main bearings Connecting rod bearings Range of spare parts A B Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts 1 – Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts, for one cylinder 1 set – Trunk piston type: Piston pin complete with bush/bearing shells and securing rings for one cylinder 1 set – Cylinder liner Cylinder liner, complete, with joint

rings and gaskets 1 – Cylinder cover Cylinder cover with full equipment and ready for installation, including gaskets 1 – Cylinder cover bolts and nuts, for one cylinder ½ set – Exhaust valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one cylinder 1 set 1 set Inlet valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one cylinder 1 set 1 set Starting air valve, with full equipment and ready for installation 1 1 Overpressure control valve, complete 1 1 1 set ¼ set Valves Fuel injection valves of each type, ready for installation, for one engine 2 Hydraulic valve drive High-pressure pipe/hose of each type 1 – Piston: Trunk piston type Piston of each type, ready for fitting, with piston rings, gudgeon pin, connecting rod, bolts and nuts 1 – Piston rings Piston rings for one cylinder 1 set – Cylinder lubricator Complete lubricator, largest type, with drive 1 – Fuel injection pumps Fuel injection pump complete or,

when replacement of individual components at sea is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc. 1 – Fuel injection pipes High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings 1 – Exhaust-gas turbocharger: rotor complete with bearings, nozzle rings and attached lube oil pump 1 set – Inlet and exhaust valves of each type for one cylinder 1 set – Charge air system 3 Gaskets and packings Special gaskets and packings of each type for cylinder covers and cylinder liners, for one cylinder – 1 set Exhaust gas system (engine related) Compensator of each type 1 – 1 In the case of multi-engine installations, the minimum required spares are only necessary for one engine. 2 a) Engines with one or two fuel-injection valve per cylinder: one set of fuel valves, complete b) Engines with more than two fuel injection valves per cylinder: two valves complete per cylinder plus a corresponding number of valve

parts (excluding the valve bodies) which make it possible to form a complete spare set by re-using the operational parts of the dismantled valves. 3 Spare parts for exhaust-gas turbocharger and auxiliary blower may be omitted if emergency operation of the main engine after failure is demonstrably possible. The requisite blanking and blocking arrangements for the emergency operation of the main engine are to be available on board. 4 The necessary tools and equipment for fitting the required spare parts have to be available on board. 5 Spare parts are to be replaced immediately as soon as they are "used up" Source: http://www.doksinet I - Part 1 GL 2007 Section 13 Table 13.2 Spare parts for auxiliary internal combustion engines driving electric generators for essential equipment B Spare Parts Chapter 8 Page 13–3 A Range of spare parts Main bearings Valves Bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with shims, bolts and nuts 1

Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 2 sets Inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 1 set Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings 1 Overpressure control valve, complete 1 Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine ½ set Connecting rod bearings Bottom end bearings or shells of each type, complete with all fittings 1 Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder Fuel injection pumps Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual components at sea is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc. 1 Fuel injection pipes High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings 1 Gaskets and packings Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and cylinder liners for one cylinder Piston

pin with bushing for one cylinder 1 1 set 1 set Notes 1. Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than required, no spares are required for the auxiliary engines. 2. Where several internal combustion engines of the same type are installed for generator drive spare parts are required for one engine only. 3. No spares are required for the engine driving emergency generator sets Table 13.3 Spare parts for gears and thrust bearings in propulsion plants Range of spare parts A B Wearing parts of main-engine driven pump supplying lubricating oil to gears or one complete lubricating oil pump if no stand-by pump is available 1 set Thrust pads for ahead side of thrust bearings 1 set 1 set A B Piston rings of each type and size fitted for one piston 1 set 1 set Suction and delivery valves complete of each size fitted in one unit ½ set ½ set A B Table 13.4 1 – Spare parts for air compressors Range of spare parts Note Spare parts for

refrigerant compressors have to be specially agreed. Table 13.5 Spare parts for pumps Range of spare parts Piston pumps Valve with seats springs each size fitted 1 set 1 set Piston rings each type and size for one piston 1 set 1 set Bearing of each type and size 1 1 Centrifugal pumps Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1 Gear and screw type pumps Bearings of each type and size 1 1 Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1 Note Where, for a system served by a pump, a stand-by pump of sufficient capacity is available, the spare parts may be dispensed. Source: http://www.doksinet Chapter 8 Page 13–4 Table 13.6 Section 13 B Spare Parts I - Part 1 GL 2007 Spare parts for hydraulic systems Range of spare parts A B Pressure hoses and flexible pipes, at least one of each size 20 % 20 % Seals, gaskets 1 set 1 set Note For seals, this requirement is applicable only to the extent that these parts can be changed with the means available on board. Where

the hydraulic system comprises two mutually independent sub-systems, spare parts need to be supplied for one subsystem only. Table 13.7 Spare parts for refrigerating installations Range of spare parts A Compressor piston with piston rod and crank bearing of each type, ready for fitting 1 Set of piston rings of each type for one piston 1 Set of suction and delivery valves of each type for one cylinder 1 Shaft seal of each type ready for fitting 1 Expansion valve of each type for the refrigerant circuit 1 Suction and delivery valve stem of each type, with cone and seat, for the main shutoff valves of the compressors 1 Pressure switch of each type for suction and pressure lines 1 Pressure gauge of each type 1 Thermometers for the refrigerating machinery and the refrigerated spaces/tanks including at least two of each type 5% Set of V-belts of each length, for one compressor 1 Oil sight glass of each type with gaskets 1 Fan impeller of each type 1 Complete set

of all rupture discs 1 Detector for tracing leaks in the refrigerant system 1 Sensors for electrical remotely-operated thermometers, including at least one of each type 5% Note According to the size of the refrigerating installation, a sufficient number of suitable packing, jointing and sealing materials; a few length of the most commonly used pipes, screw couplings, flanges nuts and bolts and a device for topping up refrigerant charge are to be carried on board. Table 13.8 Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and also for essential equipment Range of spare parts Safety valve or one valve cone and spring of each type for pressure vessels Hoses and compensators Testing device for fuel injection valves A B 1 1 20 % 20 % 1 1